JP2022030731A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing the decline in the interest of a game due to the development efficiency by the complexity of game control.SOLUTION: In a game machine including lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a special benefit to a player on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition, and game control means capable of executing a special game state on the basis of a lottery result by the lottery means and outputting information on the game state including the execution of the lottery means and the execution of the special game state to the outside of the game machine, the game control means includes signal output means capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the game machine. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special game state can be executed, signal output means can output a special game state signal that is output when the execution of the special game state starts, and the signal output means can output the special game state signal only for a predetermined first output period when a predetermined condition is satisfied even though the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special game state cannot be executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed when a game medium wins a prize in the starting winning opening, and the game value is given to the player based on the result of the lottery (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

JP-A-2017-221509

The gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a function of outputting a signal indicating game information to the outside in order to manage the status of each gaming machine installed in the hall, but the types of signals increase. As the control becomes more complicated, the development efficiency decreases, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest of gaming.

It is possible to execute a lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming control means capable of outputting gaming state information including execution of a special gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine.
The game control means includes a signal output means capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the game machine.
The signal output means is
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special gaming state can be executed, the output is output when the execution of the special gaming state starts, and the output is stopped when the execution of the special gaming state ends. It is possible to output a signal during a special game state during a variable period,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is determined that the special gaming state cannot be executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied, the signal during the special gaming state can be output for the predetermined first output period. ,
The first output period is a period shorter than the variable period in which the signal during the special gaming state is output when the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special gaming state can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by a fixed period set in advance.

In the above configuration, after winning the special lottery, the output of the external output signal (signal during the special gaming state) is continued until the special gaming state ends (variable period), but even when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A signal during the special gaming state is output for a predetermined first output period (fixed time). This makes it possible to notify the outside of the gaming machine of the establishment of a predetermined condition without increasing the number of signal lines for outputting signals (see FIG. 425, paragraphs [3911] to [3931], etc.).

According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems and suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit in a game board at the substantially center in the front-rear direction in a game area. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in the ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation / display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation and display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a base display process. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) to calculate the base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base display data generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the base calculation process. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a figure which shows the structure which concerns on the storage area among the internal structure of the main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in the ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of the error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. It is a block diagram which shows the peripheral structure of the peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a figure which shows the transformation example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control composition of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from behind with the door closed. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting part. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control composition of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variable pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect performed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. This is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of the final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is just an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 3 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is just an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 5 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is just an example. This is an example of a notice production table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of the notice production table. This is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. (A) is an example of the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of the effect limit table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new start prize production restriction table. This is an example of the processing table 1. This is an example of the processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the performance display processing of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the notification priority of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the initialization process at the time of RAM abnormality of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting display process of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. be. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 199 (B) is another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows. It is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 1. FIG. 202 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command of another example 1, and FIG. 202 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 1. FIG. 202 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on return destination command of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows the transmission order of the command of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state transition of the setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RAM abnormality time processing outside the game area of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the use area of another example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 2. FIG. 220 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 2, and FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command of the alternative example 2. FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power-off of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting display process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a normal game of another example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 4. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 4. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st picture is emitted and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture is emitted and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the pattern viewed in a plane view is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the pattern viewed in a plane view is displayed by a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection between a serial-parallel conversion circuit and an LED. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board of a main control MPU and peripheral parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of a port in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the timing of data output and acquisition by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a flowchart of the initialization process of another example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of another example 5 of FIG. 274. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of another example 5. It is a figure explaining an example of the winning information transmitted from the main control board to a sphere information control board. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which defines the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening. It is a figure which shows the example when the number of prize balls is included in the prize information, (A) is totaling the number of prizes for each general prize opening, (B) totals the general prizes and totals the number of prizes. This is the case. It is a figure which shows the example which stored the winning information in the order of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the game information transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board, (A) is an example of a prize-winning information, (B) is an example of a main control recognition information. It is a figure which shows another example of the game information which is transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a figure explaining the communication between a main control board and a ball information control board at the time of starting a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the case where there is no response from a ball information control board to the notification from a main control board in communication between a main control board and a ball information control board. It is a figure which shows another example when there is no response from a sphere information control board in response to a notification from a main control board in communication between a main control board and a sphere information control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area included in the input information storage area, (A) shows an input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), (B) shows a prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the switch input process which acquires the information detected by the sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the big prize opening opening processing. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a big winning opening. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a second start opening. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a probability variation area (V-AT area). It is a figure explaining the outline of a bit transfer procedure. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the kind of a bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the process which uses the bit transfer instruction "RBT". It is a figure which shows an example of the program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 296) of the process which uses the bit transfer instruction "RBT". It is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process is made into a subroutine, (A) is a process of the caller of the index creation process, and (B) is a subroutine-like index creation process. It is a figure explaining an example of a table structure. It is a figure explaining the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is the figure explaining the case of reading a single data from a reference table. It is a figure which explains the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is the figure which explains the case where data is continuously read from a reference table. It is a figure explaining the bit transfer instruction for the data larger than 1 byte, (A) is the figure which shows the table to be referred, and (B) is the figure which explains the procedure. It is a figure explaining the application example of a bit transfer instruction, (A) is a figure explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the corresponding range, (B) is the program code which shows the fluctuation pattern table, (C) is (B). It is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about the corresponding variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure for selecting a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the program which selects a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map which shows the structure of the storage area of the main control board of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the program implementation example of the processing address table which stores the address of processing (subroutine). It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the index which identifies the process stored in the address stored in the process address table. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of executing an INVD instruction. It is a figure explaining the procedure of specifying the process to be called by an INVD instruction. It is a figure which shows the program example of the port read processing (PORT_RD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the data setting process (DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the command storage process (COM_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the variation information number search process (TI_SRH). It is a figure which shows the program example of the fraudulent notification setting processing (ILG_OUTSET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the data search process (HLA_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). It is a figure excerpted from a part of the program which calls a process by an INVS instruction, (A) is a program excerpted a part which calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, (B) is a program example of a solenoid drive process (1). Part) and (C) show a program example (part) of the motor drive processing. It is a figure explaining the procedure of an INVI instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of PSW, (A) is the structure of PSW, (B) is the description of each structure. It is a figure which shows the program example explaining the arrangement of the process called by an INVI instruction, (A) shows the program example of the area to read-out the process, and (B) shows the program example of the substance of the process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process using various process call instructions. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing. This is an example of the program code for processing when the game is stopped in timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the area about a program / data in the ROM area of the main control board of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). It is a figure which shows an example of the mounting diagram of the main control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram of the configuration for performing SPI communication to the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), (C). ) Is a prescaler register (SPECPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPICPSA3). It is a time chart which shows the state from the initialization of the gaming machine of this embodiment to the start of SPI communication. It is a figure explaining the structure of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) at the time of SPI common output of this embodiment. It is a circuit diagram centering on the structure for receiving a signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the switch input process which acquires the information detected by the sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the switch input process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 342. This is an example of the program code of the setting data (setting data at the time of SPI input; SPI_SWRX_B) at the time of starting the reception of the input signal by the SPI communication of the present embodiment. This is an example of the program code of the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) for initializing the communication circuit of the SPI communication of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the SPI switch input information data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the area which stores the level data and edge data of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 348. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level edge data creation processing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the level edge data creation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 350. It is a time chart which shows the process from the start of the switch input process of this embodiment to the completion of the transmission of data by SPI communication in chronological order. It is a time chart which shows the process from the completion of data transmission by SPI communication to the start of a switch input process by the next timer interrupt in the switch input process of this embodiment in chronological order. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game enable time processing executed by the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the game enable time processing of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 354. It is a figure which shows an example of the circuit diagram excerpting the configuration until the signal output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) is input to the main control MPU in the gaming machine of this embodiment. .. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch relation control processing of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data structure of the history area creation data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the history area creation data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the area (data area) which stores the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the history monitoring switch data creation processing of this embodiment. This is an example of the program code of the history monitoring switch data creation process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 361. It is a figure explaining the flow of creating the history monitoring switch data of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch history command transmission determination data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch history command transmission determination data corresponding to the input edge data of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch history command transmission determination processing of this embodiment. This is an example of the program code of the switch history command transmission determination process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 367. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the internal function register of the main control MPU of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the history area creation data of a random number clock error stored in the internal function register of the main control MPU of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example which applies the switch history command transmission judgment data of this embodiment to an internal function register (random number clock error). It is a figure explaining the data structure of the switch passage command data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch passage command data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the switch address data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the switch passage command data of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the switch passage command transmission processing of this embodiment. This is an example of the program code of the switch passage command transmission process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 376. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the safe switch abnormality determination processing of this embodiment. It is an example of the program code of the safe switch abnormality determination processing of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 378. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the connection form of the connection line which supplies electric power to various boards which control the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example for executing the setting function of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the start confirmation process at the time of power-on of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the RAM clear determination process of this embodiment. It is an example of the program code of the RAM clear determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 384. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the setting value confirmation processing of this embodiment. It is an example of the program code of the set value confirmation process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 386. This is an example of the program code corresponding to the definition of the storage area related to the power failure flag of the present embodiment. This is an example of a program code corresponding to the definition of the setting value related to the setting of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the setting operation determination processing of this embodiment. It is an example of the program code of the setting operation determination process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 390. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination processing of this embodiment. When the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board of the present embodiment, the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected, and an illegal act of executing the setting confirmation operation is performed. It is a timing chart explaining control. When the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board of the present embodiment, the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected, and an illegal act of executing the setting change operation is performed. It is a timing chart explaining control. Control when the wiring connected to the main control board of this embodiment is disconnected, but the power supply is not cut off, the wiring is reconnected, and the setting change operation is executed when the power is turned on again to restart the game. It is a timing chart to explain. It is a timing chart explaining the control when the wiring connected to the main control board is disconnected and reconnected while a weak error occurs in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the control which shifts to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the control when the power is turned on by executing the 1st operation of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining an example of control when the game machine of this embodiment executes a second operation and power is turned on. It is a figure which shows an example of the command transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition at the time of transition to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition at the end of the time saving state in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game board of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the counting ball opening arranged in the game board 5 of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of an example of the counting ball opening unit arranged in the modification of the game board of the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement path of a game ball when the counting entrance unit of the modification of this embodiment is a ball entry permission state, (A) is a sectional perspective view, (B) is a sectional view. It is a figure which shows the movement path of a game ball when the counting entrance unit of the modification of this embodiment is in a state where the entry is not permitted, (A) is a sectional perspective view, (B) is a sectional view. It is a timing chart which shows the change of the time saving transition count in the modification of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart when the 2nd start winning opening functions as a counting entry opening in the modification of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the state transition determination process for determining whether or not the gaming machine of this embodiment shifts to another gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the state transition process of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the work area which stores the state transition data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition data of this embodiment. It is a timing chart explaining the control which shifts to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the value stored in the storage area provided by the main control RAM of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation of the RAM clear switch in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the storage area which is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit first interval transition setting data set at the time of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state when a special lottery is won in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the big prize opening closing setting data which is set when the big winning opening is closed in the big hit gaming state of the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a sample module for initial setting based on the large winning opening closing setting data in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the program example of the data initialization processing (DAT_SET_CLR) of this embodiment. This is a sample module in which the initial setting is performed by the conventional procedure based on the large winning opening closing setting data in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the value set in the setting state management area and the setting state management area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the initialization setting data at the time of the initialization of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the output timing of the external output signal which is related to the time saving state by the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of this embodiment. This is a modification of the time chart showing the output timing of the external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine having the door frame 3, the game board 5, and the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 has an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a square outer shape in front view and penetrating back and forth, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door into the game area of the game board 5, and a dish unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the right side surface of the front view of the main body frame base. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio display. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the bonus ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal displays 1600, 3114, and 244, the bonus ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the bonus ratio (for example, 10%) has few big hit games and few prize balls during the big hit, so it can be said that the condition is not good. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the bonus ratio, the numerical value of the bonus ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and if it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not change, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the bonus ratio by changing the mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the bonus ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red. When the ratio is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the removed parts from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 can be pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 look less gambling, and the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. You can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of an opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be viewed from the back surface side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is formed flat, or the back cover 980 is formed thinly to form the accessory. The ratio display 1317 may be easily seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out from the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole in which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate (print, engraving, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320. It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Peripheral control units 1500, a relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, a power supply board in a power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or a payout control board unit 950 may be provided. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are directed to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on the above, and the game ball that is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and is paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 201 in the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. A normal taxiway that guides the released game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3 and a game ball released from the full tank discharge port is guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank ball receiving port 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board unit 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a into which the gaming ball is driven, and the gaming ball launched from the ball launching device 680 is placed on the upper part of the gaming area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is partitioned, and the rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one channel through which the game ball is distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a predetermined position in the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage table unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, and the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view in the back box 3010 and for discharging the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view along the clockwise circumferential direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

A launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting a game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007). For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and outputs a signal when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls are not detected, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of one LED for displaying the game status and two LEDs based on the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the second special lottery result after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly prepared. In addition, a part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be configured by a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main LCD display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view and a right fixing piece protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and move the lock mechanism 3020 downward. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006 that can accept a game ball at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Three of the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1111. The second big winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first big winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path in which the game ball is distributed. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is mounted on the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and has a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It is equipped with a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the start port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first prize opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is substantially the same size as the first prize opening 2005 and opens forward. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 to illuminate and decorate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is open upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 is open forward with a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. As a result, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts due to unauthorized insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is open to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from the rear and closes the first prize-winning mouth 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and The first major winning opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state by rotating it so as to move downward.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first big prize opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly above the lower side. It will be in a positioned state. That is, the door member 2112 of the first prize-winning door is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first prize-winning door 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize-winning door 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize-winning door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize-winning door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a precision liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and an input / output device (I). / O device) main control I / O port 1314, main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and main control. It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551 The first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball accepted in the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b as the second major winning opening 2006. Detection signals from the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launching ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol storage of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first starting port sensor 2104, the second starting port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening. The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 2104 and the second starting port sensor 2551 are used. And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It has.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, an arithmetic circuit 13121, and a reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data necessary for executing the program.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of a clock cycle (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol in a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for winning a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information (game information) related to the game, various commands related to the payout of the game ball, and the like to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the processing address table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input / output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates an internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from an input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, a clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with by using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is due to an invalid program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on a program for the calculation result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a product of 32 bits by multiplying two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits), and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. It functions as a conversion circuit to output.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads out the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at predetermined timings, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits by dividing the dividend of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by the divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits). It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisors and divisions) into quotients and remainders by a function and outputs them.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a division number of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a division of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the dividend by the divisor to obtain the quotient. The division result register A131218 stores the remainder, and the division result register B131219 stores the remainder. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the value stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the read value may be erased and the register may be cleared. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may not be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be capable of overwriting the value even if the value is already stored (without clearing the stored value).

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the division input. The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and the division executed by the CPU 13111 in the program is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable amount of time is required. This is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. Further, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is mounted) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has a channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, a channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and a bonus ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. Has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the error detection code in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling the transmission of data. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data at high speed to the outside of the main control board 1310.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted and received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, in the left-right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or the inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 is not free, so that the transmission data register 3142 has no space. It may be determined that the data has not been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment susceptible to noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and if it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is commanded. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in the communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (data transmission rate of 19200 bps with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (data transmission rate of 1200 bps with the payout control board 951). good. Further, the communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 has a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio display 1317. Is returned to normal, so there is no need to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status, and for example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating that SnTC transmission is completed, 0 indicates that transmission is in progress, and 1 indicates that transmission is completed. Bit 6: In the SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), and is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written in the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of pacing synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that controls feed, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, a blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 to indicate that the payout blade is difficult to rotate), and the number "3" is displayed. If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is set to, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control boards 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. Entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this firing reference pulse. It is provided with a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 551 based on the firing reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the emission reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the firing reference pulse inputs the driving current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When it is done, it outputs to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 mounted on the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 2ch stereo signal, or a 2.1ch surround signal) as sound information is connected to a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side and a bass speaker 921 of the main body frame 4. By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from this peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 60. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. And set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal is input to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. The peripheral control unit V-blank signal to be described later is executed. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220, etc. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence or absence of the operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the speaker in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to the speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate which light emission data from the first light emission data is to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received in the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays as described above, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. Peripheral control ROM of peripheral control unit 1511 for screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side. A decorative board 233 (effect device) and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 62 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus the V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Make a backup by copying to one area and the second backup area.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative substrate 3053 on the game board side and the decorative substrate 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is described as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and the main liquid crystal. An image ROM for storing various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The drawing control of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is performed. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, its control data (display command) and the corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, various screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data are previously transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Further, the VDP outputs an executing signal to the display control MPU to that effect when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU. do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer holds the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a position where they are arranged on the screen and a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing sprites"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

It should be noted that the sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right when viewed from the front thereof. And a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting that one direction. In the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, when the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522 which is open in the frame of 2500 through the guide path 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is released backward from any of the above. When the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guide portion 2531. The ball is likely to be accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the first large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing its flow direction in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. It is released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first big winning opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the discharge passage 2543b that is branched near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a in the lower right distribution space 2543, and the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start opening door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front and the second start opening. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is made as to whether the "normal hit" is "first normal hit", "second normal hit", or "third normal hit" in the normal lottery. Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004 so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, the front view By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period for each of the 5 times in which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", and "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the variation display of the normal symbol is started and then the normal symbol is displayed. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. It should be noted that during the execution of the time reduction control, which will be described later, the control for shortening the normal fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the normal random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 is stored, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol can be started. Until then, the start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range in the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result is drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The first special lottery result is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the first special lottery result after the first special symbol is variablely displayed). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted in the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) rather than the jackpot (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (whether or not it is a probabilistic big hit) and whether or not to execute a time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit). K) and the period during which the time reduction control is executed (time reduction frequency: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) are also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. The lottery of the second special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, the second special lottery result that is drawn by receiving the game ball in the second starting port 2004 includes "missing", "2R big hit", "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", and so on. There are "7R big hit", "8R big hit", and "16R big hit", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the big hit judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the big hit game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probable variable jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of changes of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , Eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result after the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are able to accept the game ball, by having the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 accept the game ball, many games are played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted, or the first major winning opening 2005 is predetermined. If either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / closed pattern in which the game ball is opened and then closed so that the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second major winning opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to put the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the result of the special lottery is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be a substantial special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first major winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or if a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in the second major winning opening 2006, the game balls are satisfied. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) A device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed for a period of (~ 0.6 seconds). For example, as a result of the special lottery, an "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first major winning opening 2005, or the second major winning opening is accepted. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern of closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. An opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005). The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened to allow the game ball to be accepted, and it is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then it is accepted. Until (during the interval), the next round (2R) that opens the second lower prize opening 2006b to allow the game ball to be accepted is started, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the loss of the game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned large hits, whether or not the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, in the non-time reduction state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time reduction control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time reduction state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot that does not execute the probability improvement control after the jackpot game, the time reduction control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit in the time saving state (the state where the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game by the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result in the low probability non-time saving state (the state where both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also called the normal state). In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game in the state where the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are executed in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are the first. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the second special lottery result is suggested). When a new game ball is received in the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is not put on hold and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are designed so that the second special random number is preferentially digested. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above-mentioned eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol row is started, and then it is stopped and displayed in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired at the time of starting winning. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). It should be noted that the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board in the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag set when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( Eliminate (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) (step S30), and proceed to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the bonus ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the bonus ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined to be normal first, in the order of 2, N, to the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, it is useful for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of fired balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.). The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. When the data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio 13136 can be deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be deleted at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by the operation of the staff at the game hall. , It is possible to prevent concealment of an abnormal state of the accessory ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine that has been modified to have a high or low bonus ratio.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set and interrupts are permitted. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on command includes a power-on state buffer command and a special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command that notifies the game state when the power is restored after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the process from turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the normal lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, the process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be reliably completed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the work for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the power supply is turned off on the main board side.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, a detection signal from various sensors that detect a game ball that has entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and a prize ball control process. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process are determined. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is lit according to the symbol variation display pattern, the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is output. When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S40 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the design is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the area for calculating the bonus ratio of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to the area 13128. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame status display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball ejection process, the number of prize balls ejected is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the gaming state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The bonus ball ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the bonus ball ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program is used. Creates a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the probability fluctuation state is subsequently performed, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state is performed. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" means a state in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery "). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the prize ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) to call the prize ratio. The bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

Regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. .. Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back surface side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource is not consumed by the division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game, and the load on the CPU can be reduced.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (combination ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but they are displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. You may only calculate the value. Further, the bonus ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated bonus ratio may be displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S81) and the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not the fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during the fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, and normal symbol display information output. Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game such as signals, time saving and medium information output information, start opening winning information output signals are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by the timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 is the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the bonus ratio or the continuous bonus ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, if the calculated bonus ratio is within (or out of) a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the bonus ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by the number of winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by the number of consecutive winning balls divided by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area every time the bonus ratio and / or the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

When the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted in the calculation of the bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio is divided. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit operations, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the acquired spheres stored in 32 bits for operation. It is good to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the bonus ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the bonus ratio may be set to 99, and if the calculation result of the bonus ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas are abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value and updated (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When three or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio display 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, when the normal power off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of the gaming machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. Contains an area for storing data 13136. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated and the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. good. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the character ratio calculation area (the character ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the character), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game, is used. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, in the bonus ratio calculation area, a program for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read / written to / from the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed separately, and the labor of the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. The backup area may be one or more. A check code for detecting an error in data is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code can be set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the power cutoff process on the main control side (Fig.). It may be set in steps S50 to S54) of 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area every time the value in the main area is updated (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process (step of FIG. 24) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is read out in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be standardized even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are used as the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated bonus / continuous bonus ratio data is read out in the bonus ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process when displaying the bonus ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in an operating accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open in the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive bonus balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt process. Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 249497295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of winning balls, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of big hits of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the bonus ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. When the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to make a round of the ring buffer and write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. As for the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination are obtained. The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. , Others The number of winning openings, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls of special electric accessory, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of big hits of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer makes a round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the starting opening, and the number of balls acquired for the other winning openings are each a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, number of other winning balls, number of continuous winning balls, total number of winning balls, number of normal electric bonus winning balls, number of special electric bonus winning balls, number of starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls for bonuses, number of other winning balls, number of winning balls for continuous bonuses, total number of winning balls, bonus ratio, ratio of continuous bonuses, number of balls for regular electric bonuses, number of balls for special electric bonuses, starting point The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning openings won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 can be stored in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize other than the accessory (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired for the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting opening 2004 in which the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The number of balls acquired at the starting port is the number of prize balls acquired by winning a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002). The number of winning balls in other winning openings is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize in a winning opening (general winning opening 2001) that is not a bonus (does not operate) and does not trigger a lottery of special symbols. The number of balls acquired for the normal electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired for the starting opening, the number of balls acquired for the other winning openings, the number of balls acquired for the continuous accessory, and the total number of acquired balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of acquired balls for bonuses> Total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit a signal for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit control signals indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the configuration of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds the data for 16 bits, and sends the data as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the data of the detailed settings.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decode table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects the data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output a current signal for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. By controlling the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 by the driver 3179, which 7-segment LED (digit) is displayed is determined.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 0010000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty from 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ××××B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000XX. By inputting the data set to XXB, the NO DECODER setting that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31A shows the main control board box 1320 of mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 in a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 and constitutes the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging the parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 or the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a horizontally long orientation, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in a direction in which the lengths of the connectors are aligned with the accessory ratio indicator 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted on the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at a position where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached to positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31C, the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but the circuit other than the main control MPU 1311 is used. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the direction of the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal affixed to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may have an unstable signal due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 as close as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13191). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no inappropriate modification has been made, as shown by the dotted line. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

32 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 32 (C) is a diagram showing the mounting example shown in FIG. 32 (B). It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), ground patterns 13192 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13191 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13196 without a signal pattern is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13191. A ground pattern 13197 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13196.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13193 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13196 (that is, the signal line 13193 and the signal line 13191 are arranged. Arranged so as not to intersect). Further, the signal line 13194 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer by the through hole 13195. Also in this case, the signal line 13194 is arranged avoiding the prohibited area 13196 (that is, so that the signal line 13194 and the signal line 13191 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 0010000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio, and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence / absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial settings are made in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a switching button is displayed every time the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected. It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decode table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decode table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, that is, an initial state, a data input completed state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation instruction displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all-lighting instruction turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side, and lights all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display is also turned off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, "display" includes any state of all lighting of the 7-segment LED, lighting of some segments, and all extinguishing.

A display example in each of the above-mentioned states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 36B, this predetermined display may display "-" in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED lighting state (lighting according to the input data) is set. Specifically, the accessory ratio display state is set, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another type of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display the display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This bonus ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the bonus ratio display.

FIG. 36 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the figure, and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the normal bonus display in order to show that the bonus ratio display is not possible.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned on. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is restored.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and a liquid crystal display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, it is advisable to alternately display the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value.

The display mode of the numerical value of the bonus ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the bonus ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, it may be displayed in a different display mode (display color) depending on the display content (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio, latest data display, medium-term data display, etc.).

Also, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of prize ball data is short and the value of the bonus ratio may not have converged, so it is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The medium-term data display is a bonus ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is a bonus ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used in the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game is continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the bonus ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time may be performed. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided at the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 is determined. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect foul balls, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor to obtain the number of out balls (number of launch balls). It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the above-mentioned methods. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. Further, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls / the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation from the design value of the ball ejection performance during operation on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 has information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting port 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc. The number of prizes won in the large prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prizes, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and the bonus for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered by 2. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37 (B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the prize ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the prize ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data display). (Fig. 37 (C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to y6, which means the prize ratio (cumulative), and the prize ratio to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is changed to the last two digits. The display (medium-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37 (D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine and confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

In addition, since the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the data of the accurate number of prize balls is retained. , You can calculate the exact prize ratio.

In addition, since the data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, the data 13136 for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio is not accidentally deleted by the operation of the staff of the game hall. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. Further, since the playground cannot intentionally erase the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a bonus ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value exclusively will be described, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a lottery is performed by a random number and a special symbol variation display game is executed. .. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holdings is large). Or, there is a fluctuation pattern over a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when certain conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. It is better to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio display but a base display. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, "area update process for calculating accessory ratio" in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as "area update process for base calculation", and "calculation / display process for accessory ratio" in step S89 is "base". It will be explained by replacing it with "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". "Data for calculating / displaying accessory ratio 13136" will be replaced with "Data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, from the time when the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). You may include up to the required number of seconds) in the special prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Not used, the other accessory (starting port 2004) can be switched depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress) whether or not the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for the calculation of the base value. It will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted in the in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the dividend in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out the winning ball by the winning signal.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, even if the game balls are won in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the holding is the upper limit and the winning in the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, or the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, it is out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. You can judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out-balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of winning balls becomes the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or fraudulent act of detecting the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls during the special prize and the number of out balls. , The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Furthermore, if an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, if the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value should not be calculated. May be good. When expressing the base value as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

A predetermined number to be multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated to the 1st place in parts per 100, and less than a decimal number is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated in parts per 100 to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of a fraction of two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for other processing even if it waits without performing processing. May be done. For example, a random number for determining a big hit may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock cycle (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock cycle) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the result of the game are updated one or more times.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of the 7-segment LED, the main control MPU 1311 inputs the display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digit for displaying the numerical value in D15 to D8 in the "data n setting", and the display content is specified in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

When displaying the base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, self-deprecating comments may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. at each stage. If the base value exceeds the standard value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification failure on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the state of the base can be notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the main board, and the load on the main board can be increased. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not executed, and when the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls, for each predetermined number of out balls) as in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, etc.) described later. good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is high or low with respect to a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse having a base value of 30% or more and less than 40% is a pulse of 30 milliseconds). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, it may be determined whether to notify the player of the base according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed based on the calculated base value. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

Further, during the special symbol variation display game, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%). Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in different ways depending on whether the base value rises above a predetermined threshold value or falls.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and is used for base calculation. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. do not have. On the other hand, when the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol fluctuation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be satisfied are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value may be long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for operating the hall is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

Also, if the fired game ball has not won a prize in the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal display. A notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (a notice effect with a high expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change of the base value, or a change of the base value) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the fired game balls win in the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average number of winnings in the past), the base value will increase. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The effect of the variable display game may be changed to an effect with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・ Figure 41: Prize ball number calculation → Prize ball number update → Base value calculation → Payout command transmission ・ Figure 42: Prize ball number calculation → Prize ball number update → Payout command transmission → Base value calculation ・ Figure 43: Prize ball number calculation → Send payout command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Confirm receipt of the command → Update the number of prize balls → Calculate the base value ・ Figure 45: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 are described later in addition to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the position shown in the figure, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -Execute the display process (step S89).

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are performed after the output data setting process (step S90). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

Since the timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830, the base calculation area update process ( The order with step S81) and base ratio calculation / display processing (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received (step S81). Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits the payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed in the base calculation area update process (step S81). The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, there is a possibility that the number of prize balls during the special prize cannot be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the gaming state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning a prize to the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification by the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined whether or not the prize ball is a special prize at each stage. By doing so, even if it takes a long time from winning the prize to the prize opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these opportunities, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known for the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the prize ball number to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening where the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, a payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 39 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 46 and Fig. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 48 and Fig. 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step number is assigned to the same portion as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 39), and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. If the game state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is a prize equivalent to 10 or more prizes per minute, considering the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening and the starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball number buffer in step S813 is subtracted. May be good.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, a sound, or the like. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal plate 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state, and the game is restarted. Therefore, even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a decrease in the power supply voltage, the power failure detection signal is output, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 in the same state, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are fired in the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win a prize in the general winning opening or the starting opening, so that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode is a quiet mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower light intensity than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality activated in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it was determined in step S985 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls at the general winning opening or the starting opening, the out balls are won at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). For example.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 40), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), the determination result of comparing the prize ball number and the threshold value Th1 is recorded in the flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is set by the flag. May be determined whether or not is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Remain (leave the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer in the prize ball number buffer), store the other parts in the memory (add the threshold value Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the process to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used for the calculation of the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed, so the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value of the number of prize balls of the big hits or less). Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311 or by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 is an error (or indefinite), so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0 or when the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, and the same number or more prize balls as the number of fired balls (out balls) are obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the present state, it is not necessary to store the numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for a winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is set, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later in FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, during a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) do not win a prize in the general winning openings 2001, the starting openings 2002, and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, the abnormality of winning in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball). The load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins a prize at the starting port to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.), The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing at which the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting port, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the winning opening is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value will not be updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should increase (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in the interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach the predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, it can be selected by the operation button 220C at the start of the game. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the starting opening is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out when the prize is won at the starting port, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, even if a prize is won in the starting opening or the general winning opening at the time of a specific error, if it is treated as no prize and the prize ball is not paid out, the number of prize balls is not counted and the base value depending on the prize. Will not be updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is configured with 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not it is equal to or higher than the threshold value Th2 of.

If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify the abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that pursues fun.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is eliminated, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold value Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold value Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 is the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIG. 39, FIG. 46, FIG. 47, FIG. 48, which are executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process are standardized even for gaming machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the case where the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls by the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 429497295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base in FIG. 52 (B) described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52B, the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the winning ball number buffer, the specific winning ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time) (for example, for every 6000 prize balls). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. When the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer may be moved.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the base value using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. It should be noted that a capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, January, etc.). good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined display on all digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state has the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36 (B)), but may be a different mode and may be a mode that can be distinguished from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the lapse of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. By doing so, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in the island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a gaming machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the base value is calculated by the payout control board 951, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even if the mode is changed to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the gaming ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output by the so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, and the gaming machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (functional display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the light amount of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, the player who intends to play the game on the vacant table can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win at the start opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are fired, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn to revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the light amount before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode or increase the light amount in the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is lowered or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. good. For example, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an operation button that changes the appearance of the effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and power supply to the gaming machine) during the energy saving mode. When the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence / absence of the base value is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the light intensity of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display on which the base value is displayed, the light amount of the lamp etc. that reduces the power consumption during the energy saving mode is reduced before the display on which the base value is displayed. It may be turned on or off, and in this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the effect of greatly reducing the power consumption is obtained. Further, the display on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set to a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. A display for displaying the base value may be configured with a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. Sometimes you may want to display a self-deprecating comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out opening, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 54 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 55 and Fig. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006, in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out opening, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of the out balls. Further, by providing the out port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out port 1111, it is possible to sufficiently secure a place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body), and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and a prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out port and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the number of out balls buffer and the number of winning balls buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated in one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the winning ball number with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the processing related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processing, the processing for paying out the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. It should be noted that steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or every predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (out ball number buffer value + winning ball number buffer value) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of out balls is calculated by adding the number of winning balls to the number of balls passing through the out port, so that the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 57: Calculates the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 58: Calculates the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out-balls A pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, predetermined Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each out ball number is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. By notifying the player of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display device or display device to notify the abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded off, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, whether it is an abnormal value or a normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify the abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an example of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally goes up and down. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value every predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history each time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated as needed.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to to determine whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease in the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the base reduction, the effect table for which the base reduction is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is obtained by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the production of the special symbol variation display game by the random number selected by the winning of the starting port (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the effect so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (hit 1) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is wrong and the base value is rising or does not change. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probable change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is increasing or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 and the selected effect is selected. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for the change in the base value) at the time or descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's feeling of tension is maintained and fatigue is accumulated. If a game ball wins a prize at the start opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and a special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won at the start opening, so it is better to have the player pay close attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. be. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady state, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, there is a higher possibility that the base value will decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win a prize at the starting port and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69A is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69B is a display example of the special reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed on the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display the continuation recognizable. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping with the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the tendency of the base value to move up and down.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. It may be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is easily won during the big hit. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, you can shoot a game ball at the same place as the so-called normal hit and aim for the big prize opening 2005, or you can increase the strength of the launch to the maximum, aiming for the big prize opening 2006 by so-called right hit. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a starting port and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball at the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the big prize opening 2006 that is open. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed gaming ball is open. If you do not win the big prize opening 2006, you will win the general winning opening 2001. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the open large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting opening and the general winning opening when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, paid for the number of 100 out balls). In order to show the ratio of the number of prize balls issued), the number of balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning the big winning opening). When counted in (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 70 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value every time the timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 71 and Fig. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of prize balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning ball number) is acquired (step S820). Then, a value obtained by subtracting the number of specific winning balls from the number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 46), it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and a prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is a prize ball, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). It should be noted that steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls flowing into the game area, which is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total out-ball number and the threshold Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of prize balls is divided by the total number of out balls to calculate the base value (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 causes an error, so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then. The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening, the deviation from the actual base value may occur. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, a case has been described in which a pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit has a general winning opening 2001 downstream of the big winning opening 2006, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by a normal hit during a big hit. The pachinko machine can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a starting port or a general winning opening is arranged downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are arranged, which normally do not accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins a prize in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). By doing so, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time from the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 to the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, from the time when the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). You may include up to the required number of seconds) in the special prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is confirmed until it is opened (opening), the second starting port 2004 The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending). When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. By doing so, it is possible to exclude all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 from the calculation of the base value, not only during the time saving.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened time, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 of FIG. 39 or the like.

By doing so, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed in a state where neither the big hit nor the time is shortened (so-called normal state), and to play the game by right-handed during the big hit or the time is shortened. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a general winning opening 2001, and a second starting opening 2004, which win a prize when hitting to the right, are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The rate of winning balls to each winning opening differs depending on the placement and the placement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason mentioned above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value when right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than when left-handed). , When the player hits right under normal conditions, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in a pachinko machine that is judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hole determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting port that acts on the base when hitting left Make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then, adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit the left with a gaming machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handed hit is not different from what the hole expected, the hole makes a mistake and makes adjustments to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win at the time of left-handed hit. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to such malicious intent of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that hits right during a short time, the second starting port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second starting port 2004 are at the time of right hitting. It is located in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, if a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port). The number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots after passing through (or before and after) the gate portion 2003 may not be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that the base value is not reflected in the calculation result. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hall may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the external terminal board 784 may output that the hall computer installed in the amusement park is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the player hits right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value for confirming the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under a condition different from the condition for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to retain accurate prize ball number data and calculate an accurate bonus ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or the employee of the amusement shop disconnects the connector of the power line for backup supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 You may turn off the power of.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only the data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value is used. And delete all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With this configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by a staff member of the game hall, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and it is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is high. ..

[9-10. Calculation of the base considering the winning abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than during the opening of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the derivation of the jackpot in the special symbol variation display game, or the start opening 2004 due to the derivation of the winning in the normal symbol variation display game. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is not possible or a large number of winnings are detected in a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and calculate the base accurately. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, the big winning openings 2005, 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base, and the winning is won. There is no need to consider anomalies.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle, similarly to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation has already been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, even if the game balls are won in the starting openings 2002 and 2004, but the holding is the upper limit and the winning in the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. Further, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning prize determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize is detected in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special prize (when the condition device is operating) caused by the derivation of the big hit in the special symbol fluctuation display game. If a prize is detected in the starting port 2004 even though the game is not open due to the fact that a hit is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, and if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined to be a winning abnormality. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so that the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls before winning a prize. The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may be transmitted from the main control board 1310, or a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 from the payout control unit 952. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out-balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of winning balls becomes the total number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the embodiment described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize to a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game ball is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the hand or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total prize ball number ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or fraudulent act of detecting the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is no prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out-balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out-balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the like. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball that is affected by the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out the prize ball for this winning abnormality should be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which the winning ball is not paid out, the winning ball should not be counted as a total out ball and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for prize-winning abnormalities in which prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls may be counted as total out-balls, and the prize-winning balls to be paid out may also be counted as the total number of prize-balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls are not counted as the total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball jam, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting opening to compensate for the ball to be ejected so that the player does not lose it. In that case, a prize ball will be paid out for the prize at the starting port. Winning to this starting port is detected as a winning abnormality, but the winning ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to judge that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002, 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are played at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005, 2006). It is advisable to judge the winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning is smaller in the winning openings for determining the winning abnormality than in the winning openings for which the winning abnormality is not determined (the starting opening is 3 prize balls, and the large winning opening is 15 prize balls). Therefore, although the winning abnormality is determined at the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of defense against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out-ball and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out ball that causes the winning ball can be matched.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific implementation example to the pachinko machine will be described.

First, the general winning opening 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult to win multiple gaming balls at the same time, the general winning openings are the large winning openings 2005, 2006 and the starting openings 2002, which are electric accessories that open and close while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than 3 in total. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball ejection compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening). This is because the decorative member (appearance) is different from that of 2005, 2006, starting port 2002, 2004). Further, when the number of prize balls for one ball of the general prize opening is small, there is an effect that the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another general winning opening.

In addition, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 with a large number of prize balls do not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001 and starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a small number of winning balls) win. An abnormality may be determined. Since the number of prize balls for one prize is large in the large prize opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change in the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 where it is easy to obtain a game ball), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the starting openings 2002 and 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the starting openings 2002 and 2004 (general winning opening 2001, large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may determine the winning abnormality. Since the number of winning balls for one winning opening is smaller than that for the large winning opening, the player can be compensated for the ball while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine to the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another starting opening 2004.

Further, in the large winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening in which the employee of the hall can easily operate the opening / closing member determines the winning abnormality. Instead, the opening / closing member of the winning opening may be determined so that the opening / closing member cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening is difficult for the employee of the hall to operate the opening / closing member. For example, a hall employee can easily operate a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which an opening / closing member tilts at an oblique position in a closed state and the opening / closing member picks up a game ball. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is blocked by a flat plate-shaped member, and when the flat plate-shaped member retracts to the back, the entrance to the winning opening is opened. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employees of the hall to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the winning ball number abnormality (for example, output of a security signal to an external terminal board, warning display on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). The lighting and blinking of the decorative lamp, the output of voice and sound effects, the output of warning sounds, etc.), but the notification of winning abnormalities should be slower than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the time for anomaly notification is short, the characters for notifying an abnormality are small, the lamp does not light during anomaly notification, and the abnormality notification sound is smaller (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound for other abnormalities. ).

Further, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if the winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the setting is first set without extending the predetermined time. It is advisable to end the notification at a predetermined time or change the mode of notification. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall is not disturbed and the work efficiency can be improved. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the maintenance work of the gaming machine is not disturbed and the work is being performed correctly and continuously. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the notification by sound (or reduce the volume) while the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning openings, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected other than when the predetermined conditions are satisfied (during special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined ones are specified. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is satisfied (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out balls when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as an adjustment (maintenance) thereof. This allows an accurate base value to be calculated and displayed.

Up to this point, the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detection of winning abnormalities (when not detected) have been described, but the game balls judged to be winning abnormalities are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine. Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls for which a winning abnormality is determined are not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for calculating the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, the winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, the winning abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the winning abnormality may be notified. Notification may be performed.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation process that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the calculation circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division by the program. The base calculation process described so far did not take advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to obtain the number of out balls. Is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined time intervals, the predetermined process must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division process by the program, the time-consuming process is included in the timer interrupt process. That is, it was difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the divisor and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the division and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. Since the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects the winning ball, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraudulent activity, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the launch ball sensor 1020. To count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, in the same manner as in step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 or the speaker 921. And sound output commands. Further, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the number of acquired prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but it is not necessary to calculate the base value. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, one minute having a longer cycle than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out ball number buffer value to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a prize equivalent to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during a special prize (for example, the number of prize balls at a general prize opening or a starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality activated in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95). Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and the parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and executes a base display process for generating a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an output data setting process (step S90) and a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be acquired or the number of acquired prize balls is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out ball number buffer value to the total out ball number (step S9705), and the out ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the gaming state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there is a prize ball, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there is no prize ball, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be used.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls at the general winning opening or the starting opening) can be obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1 may be compared, or the determination may be made based on the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is timed up, the prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize ball abnormality notification is stopped (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input value (divided, divided) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is written at the timing when the division result can be read from 13121. Specifically, the writing timing of the input value (division, division) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt processing, before the random number update processing (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. It is better before the control process (steps S86, S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not the process of calculating the base value is executed depending on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be given when the game medium specified for each prize opening provided in the game area wins is one, three. In the case of three types of five and five, the maximum number of five prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult to judge by the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether it is according to the set ball ejection rate).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to a prize with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used for calculating the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. If it is displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change, so processing that does not contribute to the change in the display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum is described, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls of the intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used in the calculation of the base value, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum, which is appropriate. The base value can be shown.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls of three types has been described, the pattern of the number of prize balls of other types such as five types and seven types is not limited to the three types.

Furthermore, if the winning of the number of prize balls of a specific type (1 of the above-mentioned minimum value, 3 of the intermediate value, 5 of the maximum value, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning will be awarded. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used to calculate the base value. For example, if the winning to the winning opening that grants five prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning to the winning opening is detected, the winning is until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouths or other winning mouths to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the game state, the winning openings and other winning openings are not used for the calculation of the base value retroactively.

In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transitions to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winning prizes up to to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, is it according to the set ball ejection rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state where the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value? This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

It should be noted that the prize balls that are the maximum (or the minimum, the middle) for one prize ball when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state do not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the main control MPU 1311 uses the winning in the calculation of the base value. .. Then, for the prizes that are determined not to be used for the calculation of the base value, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value may not be updated, or the calculation process of the base value may not be executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base is calculated. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) in FIG.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94), and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 1 (step S97), the base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and the base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether the prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined prize from the calculation of the base value, the process is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the process is executed accurately, especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. can.

That is, even if the maximum prize is given to the player among multiple prizes having different degrees of advantage, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed unchanged by the grant of the prize. The prize. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged at least until the game state in which the maximum prize is given is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is a main body frame. It is provided in 4. Either one of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021, the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. The total with the number is taken as the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count results of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count results of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of a predetermined value or more occurs. Further, when a difference of a predetermined time or more occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable configuration, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later (provisional section display and fixed section display). (See FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are arranged in a single row in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. .. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down to the right side of the front view and are aligned in one row. The frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls aligned in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of a game board are flowed down by two rows and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball rolling in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out openings 1111, the general winning openings 2001, the starting openings 2002 and 2004, and the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and are aligned in two rows. Each of the two frame-side ejection ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each row.

Although the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the positions shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be unitized together with the ball flow path 960 and configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It should be provided on the lower side.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of the 3060A and the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and in particular, shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects an illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects winning in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (position of a star in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and is partially overlapped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player operates the discharge ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number, and the base value is lowered. Therefore, the gaming store may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine whose maintenance work is performed based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls released in the normal state increases, and the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual, and can obtain many balls. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such an illegal payout of a ball. It is preferable to provide a magnetic detection sensor 1030 in a place other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected within a range sufficient to cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided in the upper part of the out opening 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes an discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening. Sensor 2554, second lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), receives the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030, and inputs it to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals and buffered. It is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage-). When the level becomes higher than 0.1V), the disconnection of the connection line to the switch or the short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E Is output, and a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and an abnormality in the power supply is detected, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit for the input is OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch is turned off, the processing load can be reduced, and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be output. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to 8, each sensor can output a signal at a level of OFF.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). A signal from a sensor used for calculating the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prize balls) and a signal from a sensor not used for calculating the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.) are input to the interface circuit 1331. .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in a sensor unrelated to the base calculation, the base calculation is not executed and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93 (A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93 (B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to each other. An example of being connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95 (A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93 (A), the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and incorporated into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 does not intersect with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Not only the output line from the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A but also the output lines from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104 and the like and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected to the connector 13101. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided under the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component surface side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). It is connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is the timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. Further, the reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311. In the data line to and from the base indicator 1317, the level changes frequently. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the front surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that should not occur, the normal power off processing is not executed and the game is reset, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot ends, or the variable display is displayed. The game ends in the middle, or the hold of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 has a high height, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and parts such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and parts such as a short IC are mounted (tall parts cannot be arranged). The height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and the area where a high-height component can be mounted is shown by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted (preferably the same height as the board surface), and the like. It is advisable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the board of.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto behavior of attaching illegal parts (circuits) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the convenience of maintenance, the display content is based at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. The display 1317 may be arranged. For example, if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (confirming the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317. Therefore, the player may be asked to explain the display contents of the base display 1317, in order to prevent such complications. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out balls at the maximum, but since it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, a complaint about the ball ejection rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same for the above-mentioned accessory ratio display 1317, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

As shown in the figure, since the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, it is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (A), an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of a light emitting diode (LED) will be described, but the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 may be composed of a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates a switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs a power supply voltage (+ 12V) input to the VCS terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data from the Q1 to Q8 terminals to the driver circuit 1334, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the signal input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltage of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) inputs the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of the CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is displayed. Driven.

Further, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken in by the latch 3 (1333) are used by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of the CS2, and the segment data (when lit is LOW). ) Is output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is an anode common type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is lit are VCS (+ 12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and the data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 by different signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 can be displayed. It is output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process, and are output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modification of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to the programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but they are the same. It is advisable to use control data common to the two codes so that the common signal is not transmitted at the timing, and to control so that the transmission timing of the common signal does not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400 and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be separated or configured by one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation / display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are each. It is advisable to call the subroutine at the timing specified by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed within one timer interrupt process, the subroutine is called by a different timer interrupt process.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display unit 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, the display unit (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is connected. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the internal display (base display 1317) of the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. It is a circuit diagram of an example. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 3 (1333) is used as segment data (when lit is LOW) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the circuit scale can be reduced by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of the two-layer board, the area around which the wiring pattern is routed cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than the three-layer or more multi-layer board. Therefore, it is important to reduce the number of parts to reduce the size.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, the dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates the timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) receives common data corresponding to the digits specified by D1 to D4 (during drive). Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. It outputs and lights the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting the CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data in the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2 and 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-mentioned process, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is time-divisioned and output, and the common common data is used to function with the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example). , It is possible to easily mount the components on the main control board 1310, which cannot be used (adopting a multilayer board or arranging components in close proximity to each other).

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are output during the period when the common data is output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and is erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erased data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. Become longer. This prolongs the lighting time of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in one cycle and raises the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the lighting of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED emits light with low brightness, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission luminance of the first LED is higher than the emission luminance of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display unit 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the provisional section display and the confirmed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) intervals. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value A can be understood as 0% or 100%.

In the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and displayed (for example, the cycle is 0.6 seconds). Then, it repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, "bb." Is lit up in the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the base value in the previous section is displayed in the last two digits (below the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed as a percentage of two digits. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value B can be understood as 0% or 100%.

In the first section, since the previous section is a test section, the base value is not measured. Therefore, in the fixed section display, "bb." Is blinked in the first two digits and "---" is blinked in the last two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on is set as a test section, and the base value is not calculated. This is because, in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls to be ejected may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is undefined. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits, "---" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." Is displayed in the first two digits in the confirmed section display. , "---" Is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the entire number of digits of the base display 1317 is blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. In the test section as well, the base value may be calculated and the calculated base value may not be displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value may be undefined.

Here, the first power-on means the first power-on after the completion of 1 of the pachinko machine, or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is a state. Further, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the first power-on time.

Further, all LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

If an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next section Switch to and measure the base value anew. The number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and may be any other number as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 pachinko machines, which are the daily operating hours (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. You may adopt 50,000 or 100,000 which are sharp numbers.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section may be set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, if the setting of the switch is changed, the work area for base calculation (base calculation area 13128) of RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the calculation of the base value is restarted from the beginning of the current section. good. Since pachinko machines are often in operation immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section which is a unit for calculating the base value, and is based on the operation set by the setting means at the time of the first power-on. The length of one section is set.

As an example of displaying the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured as the fixed section display, the base value of a plurality of fixed sections (for example, the section before 1 to 3 sections) is switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → the fixed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → can be displayed by operating the display changeover switch provided separately. The fixed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, in each fixed section, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not "bb." But "b1", "b2", "b3" so that the displayed section can be seen. It is better to display differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding one or a plurality of sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. In addition, the display contents are displayed on a part of the base display 1317 so that the display contents can be distinguished, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. 0 to 9 can be displayed as numbers, and letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as the numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

FIGS. 101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( (Other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality (step S20) in which the power failure flag is not set. , There is a RAM abnormality in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match (step S22) and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack area) is used. Included) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. do. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff of the game hall, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine modified to a state where the base value is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 has an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed, and a peripheral control board. The power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and the execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36), and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the process when the power is turned off on the main board side. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off. Can be retained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in the modification described later, it is calculated in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing of the RAM 1312 (step). S58), wait until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, a total number of out balls, a low probability / non-time saving out ball number, and a low probability / non-time saving prize ball number.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating a section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control the display content that differs depending on the section. The interval counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled as a value from 0 to 255 so as not to be larger than 255, and the section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the measurement unit of the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with the operation of one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area of the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-mentioned embodiment (the number of out balls in the special prize). It is different from the total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low probability / non-time saving out ball number is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out balls for calculating the base value (the number of out balls in the game state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low probability / non-time saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the gaming state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out ball number and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving prize ball number may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the number of bytes is the same. It is better to do it.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is only an example, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated and the base value is calculated (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it may be executed in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting processing (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor has detected magnetism, the vibration detection sensor has detected vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves), the base value is accurate. Judges that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies a game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (for example, a prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) is determined. A failure that is not directly related to the calculation of the door or base (out of supply, full tank error, etc.) may be determined as not an error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, or the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a detection signal of the sensor, it is out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. When an out ball is detected by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid out prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 sends a payout command to the payout control board 951 and receives a report of the completion of payout from the payout control board 951. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the process related to the out ball. On the other hand, if the out spheres are detected, the detected out spheres are added to the total number of out spheres stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. It has become. Therefore, if the interval counter value is 0, it can be determined that the interval is a test interval. If it is a test section, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and the player can win many prize balls, but the opening and ending time of the big hit game is included. You may. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, from the time when the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). You may include up to the required number of seconds) in the special prize. The so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become during the time reduction (during electric support), is not included in the special prize, and is in the game state as in the normal state (low probability / non-time reduction state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be distinguished which base display is used.

Even if the latent game state has a high probability, it is a game state that does not make the player recognize that it is a high probability state, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that the game is in a latent game state (that is, with a high probability). That is, when the employee of the hall cares for the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the out opening in the open frame state, the player can know the playing state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state.

On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business form of the hall. .. By excluding the latent game state and calculating the base value, such a problem can be avoided. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. ..

When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load of the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) are calculated based on the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls regardless of the playing state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can be switched depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress) whether or not the winning ball number and the winning ball number are used for the calculation of the base value. It will be.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used for the calculation of the base value. By doing so, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the gaming state is in the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of out balls detected in the base calculation area 13128 is detected in the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. The number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than during the special prize is detected for each execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and indicates the timing for calculating the base value (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if the prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for the calculation of the base. The number of prize balls awarded is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number is set to the low probability / non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the storage area of the base value A of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether or not the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is the test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is terminated and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the interval counter value is not 0 and it is not in the test interval, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the process for ending the section and starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2, so that even if 1 is added to the interval counter when the interval counter value is 2. The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the cycle of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 in FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to have a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and display switching have the same cycle, the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than 6000) becomes difficult to understand. This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the process for calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22) is used. If the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it is preferable to set the value to a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if the check code is 2 bytes, A55AH (1010010101011010B)). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to configure it with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality.

In this way, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value is set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( It can be displayed (in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for the base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is displayed at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

In addition, when the base value of the prize balls is calculated and displayed using the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing of calculation and display as the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out Is different. That is, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out due to an abnormality in the payout device (out of supply, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout number count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) Even if it becomes a stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the above-mentioned base calculation process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected by the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. By doing so, even if the timing of switching the above-mentioned section (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section before and after the calculation is performed as the base value. , Can display accurate base values in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the process of steps S8042 to S8045 is executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Executes the processes of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

When it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the section is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). Since the base value has not been measured in the past confirmed section in the test section or the first section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base display 1317 is controlled to light without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display content on the base display 1317 is switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the present in the provisional section is present. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. In the modified example shown in FIG. 108, it is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that the check process (steps S8012 and S8013) of the work for base calculation is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012), but conversely, the base calculation area is determined. After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and executing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Since the subsequent processes (steps S8014 to) are the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), so that an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly and an abnormality can be detected. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, the abnormality determination method of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for the calculation of the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "feature ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is the "base calculation area 13128". It is stored in (replaced) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
FIGS. 101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
FIG. 106 and FIG. 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, using FIGS. 101 and 106, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at the time of turning on the power will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is set in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data of.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N may be determined, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal first may be duplicated in the main area to recover the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(A case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, using FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off at the time of turning on the power (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power cutoff process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, using FIGS. 106 and 108, a process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described.

Assuming that the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIG. 108 and 106).

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the checksum instead of the checksum, the timing of setting and determining the checksum may be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Further, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used together as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball won a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state returned. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the opening opening 2004 which is being opened.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning of the starting port 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to any of the winning prizes in the starting port 2004 shown in the figure.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. The second winning ball is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

In the above, the time when the time saving state ends has been described, but the same applies to the time when the probability change by ST ends.

In addition to the above-mentioned time saving state ending, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit of a special symbol fluctuation display game occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and further, the game ball wins the opening opening 2004 (electric tulip).

Also in this case, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins a prize in the opening opening 2004 (electric tulip). .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be calculated accurately due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the machine is out. Do not use spheres for base calculations.

Also in this case, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won prizes during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of the reduced working hours, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state is not the target of the look-ahead effect, and is in the normal state. The second prize that has been won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state may not be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in the processing outside the game control area (for example, the base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area among the internal configurations of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows in detail the configuration relating to the storage area.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU as storage areas for storing data. The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU exclusively temporarily stores data at the time of program execution by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating the state of the calculation result, the execution state of the program, data input / output to / from the CPU 13111, etc.). In the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and an intermediate value in the random number value update operation are temporarily stored. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, the values input to the port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, the values in the process of creating the edge information of the signal input from the switch and the detection result of the edge information) are temporarily used. Store in.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the hold storage area at the time of winning a prize at the start opening, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember in. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the start opening is acquired and a look-ahead determination (decision of winning at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the disturbance temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is performed. The look-ahead determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the hold storage area may be read (again) into any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the look-ahead determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is configured by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and is provided separately from the memory space designated by the address, and is specified by the name of each storage area (for example, Area0) included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C.

Auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and a group is formed for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). It is configured and can be accessed from the processor core 13141 for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group with one CHANGE command. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0 and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Therefore, even if a plurality of sets are set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits as a set of Area0 and Area1) can be used. Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without causing an extra capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of another storage area, and cannot be divided into a storage area of 1 byte and used. In this way, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided, the storage area is used properly according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, the address can be specified in one (or a set of combined) storage areas. Therefore, the number of instruction arguments can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches a group of storage areas accessible to the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible to the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. In the switching register 13144, for example, data for identifying the selected auxiliary storage area 13145 (for example, 2-bit data for switching the four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the error flag is set, the switching command will be executed again), and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs in which the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 that has not been selected changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag indicating the state of the operation result (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sine flag, etc.).

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible by the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address where the program is being executed, and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the program is executed from the head address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE instruction before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108. Switch to group 1. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

Further, by the LD instruction, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312, and the stack pointer value is saved. After that, by the LD instruction, the address yyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer, and the stack area is changed.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and then the caller's timer interrupt process is performed by the RET instruction. return. In general, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for returning the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, the instruction has a different role. By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE command after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE command.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

It should be noted that the interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permission state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be performed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above-mentioned example, the saving of the switching register 13144 is executed by the timer interrupt processing of the caller, and the switching of the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the switching of the stack area are executed by the base calculation processing of the callee. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves out of the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the caller will be described with reference to FIG. 112.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed by an interrupt between the DI instruction and the EI instruction without interrupting the process during that period by the interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller to the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

After that, the program is executed from the head address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To save. After that, by the LD instruction, the address yyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 is written to the stack pointer, and the stack area is changed.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE command, and the game is played by the POP command. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by returning the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

As described above, the interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state where interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permission state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be performed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example of switching between the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described. Further, the check process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 may also switch the auxiliary storage area 13145. In this case, at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction. Further, the initialization process (steps S10 to 22 in FIG. 21), the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and the power cutoff process (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21). , The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 23, FIG. 75, FIG. 80, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 may be used properly in each processing.

Further, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debugging (for example) The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between the processing executed in the inspection function) area (area, base calculation area, etc.) (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used properly inside and outside the game control area. May be good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main process and the timer interrupt process, but the timer interrupt process is started because the main control side main process being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt process is started. The value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 at the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). The value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 may be returned to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (bytes) storage areas, if one unit (bytes or words) is saved in the stack area, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing is incorrect between saving data to the stack area and recovering data from the stack area, different data will be read from the stack area, and subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area. The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and rewrite data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes). be. Therefore, in addition to the instruction to collectively store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area is used. , An instruction to collectively restore a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area may be provided and executed.

In this way, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the data is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, the original auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched to, so that the data is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the generated data in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area).

Further, the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering from the RAM 1312.

Also, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the stack area is switched to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, the original stack area is switched to, so that the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when shifting to the processing outside the game control area, and the saved value is saved when moving to the processing in the game control area for switching. Since the register 13144 is restored, the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area is not updated in the process outside the game control area, and the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. As for the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the above-mentioned arrangement on the memory in FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 also shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with the stack area.

The ROM 1313 contains a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation / display code 13135, and a base calculation / display data 13136. Contains the area to store. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1, such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) for storing a program used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136, is allocated.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) having a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. It is desirable that the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more because the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. By doing so, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, it is sufficient that the game control area and other areas are clearly distinguished. In this way, by clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas, the debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data, which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. ) And the base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and defects (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation / display code 13135 become game control. Avoid the risk of impact.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, in the base calculation area, a program for calculating the base value, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read / written to / from the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the base calculation / display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. This can be done separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and can be read / written from the game control area 13126. Further, in the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which the data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which the data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is used exclusively for temporarily saving the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113B is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the base is stored. The backup area may be one or more. A check code for detecting an error in data is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display process, or is the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set for the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

If it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step in FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation / display processing, the value in the main area may be duplicated in the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display processing. When at least a part of the main area is updated, only the entire main area or the area of the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records gaming history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among a plurality of effects that match the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined effects on the main liquid crystal display. Display on device 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to display a specific effect (for example, two specific effects out of three types of super reach) among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the gaming state is the starting point. As a result, how many times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared), along with the progress of the game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Display on.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol variation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428th rotation at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol variation display game was a probable change jackpot. Is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared by the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not from the extent to which a specific effect appears (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the production is visually displayed. Also, since the game ball is not fired when the player is checking the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared is displayed, the player will display each effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game console, and the operation of the game console may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with high expectation for a big hit) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the variation number and the information of the appearance of the effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the information on the number of fluctuations and the appearance of the effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears, instead of all the effects that have appeared, is added and displayed. You just have to do the processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, the error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees in the hall. In the form of this notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 115 (A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to cause an error. Is notified, an alarm sound is output, and an error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal plate 784. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, the code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED in the right of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a connector disconnection), a serious failure requiring parts replacement, and a fraudulent act.

The pachinko machine 1 in which an error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate the machine. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and the suspension of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal board 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that "the number of winnings in the general winning opening", "the number of winnings in the large winning opening", "the number of passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuation". Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it will be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. It may interfere with the business of the company and eventually make the hall difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning to the general winning opening", "winning to the big winning opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuates" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data will be displayed. A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal board 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1, and the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it became possible to confirm the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of general winning openings, number of large winning openings, number of gate passages, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded, so how long is it? You can see how many events have occurred in. For example, it can be seen that the number of winnings in the general winning opening was 50 per minute.

If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used for searching for the cause of error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur in a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), the error information may be output and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in any game state, it is advisable to output error information and notify when there are more than a predetermined number of prizes in a predetermined time. Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the big hit game, and output error information to notify when a predetermined number or more of the big winning openings are won in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. As for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 120, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG. 60.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time in the format shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be DRAM, but it is preferable to record in SRAM, which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power, in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit routine process, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped in the middle and some of the effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no such thing, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared among a plurality of models of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the amount of recorded game history data has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and each time the peripheral control unit 1511 is used. Processing can be reduced.

Further, when the capacity of the recorded game history memory has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the oldest game history may be deleted, and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. Since it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed by not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, other processes (effect control, lamp) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 are performed. Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple peripheral control unit steady processing because there is not enough processing time) can be executed using the free processing time. Alternatively, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes because it is not necessary to execute each time may be executed.

Immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

In the game history recording condition setting table, among the commands received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the type of the command recorded as the game history, that is, the event recorded as the game history is registered.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, when the start port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command detect the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, respectively, and the peripheral control units 1511 are the special symbols 1 and 2, respectively. The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the time of power-on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability / time saving, low probability / non-time saving, high probability / time saving, and high probability / non-time saving. You can count the number of fluctuations. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is higher than usual. The time reduction is the time from when the above-mentioned second start door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) to a higher probability than when it is not, or when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate. The frequency with which the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is higher than that in the non-time saving state, such as being shortened. Along with this, there is a high probability that an effect with a short time in one special symbol variation display game will be selected.

The big winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the big winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the big winning opening 2005 and the big winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening.

The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) will win only the specified number of game balls or less by the end of the round at the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) are rounded by winning more than the specified number of game balls in the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. When is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when each large winning opening is closed (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the status of winning in one round for each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the major winning openings 2005 and 2006 by detecting the specified number of winning balls (for example, 10) specified in one round and the large winning openings. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the big winning opening when the game is closed, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even at the time of such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is operated or the accessory continuous operation device is operated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of big hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total of multiple opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol and can count the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if a special symbol or a normal symbol is not drawn even if a prize is won in the starting port or the gate is passed (such as when there is no overflow or memory), the main control board 1310 wins the starting port 1 in the peripheral control unit 1511. The hour command, the start port 2 winning command, and the general gate passage command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are each sent as a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins in each general winning opening 2001, and the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. The general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above-mentioned example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with four general winning openings 2001. Therefore, there are four types of general winning opening winning commands, from the general winning opening 1 winning command to the general winning opening 4 winning command. The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recorded in a memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in a memory in order of event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time when the event occurred is recorded in the particle size up to the minute, but it may be recorded up to the second.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started in a low probability and non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall started business at 15:30, the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started hitting after a while (for example, after lighting a cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game is based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is based on a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (loss, normal per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method for the hall to refer to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 that outputs information recorded in a memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the game history recorded in the memory is output from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by the history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless communication (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted when a normal game is being performed after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (command not defined in) may be used as a history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, a history reference command may be transmitted even if the command is transmitted during a normal game, on condition that an event that cannot (or is unlikely to occur) occurs. For example, when 50 pieces are won in the starting opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back surface side (a place invisible to the player) of the pachinko machine 1 to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also transmits the effect display drive board 4450 and control commands and various information (various data) via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. A liquid crystal display that controls the drawing of the peripheral control unit 1511 that interacts with the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and also controls the sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that controls the execution operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and light emission modes of various LEDs, etc. are specified. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special production flags) Described as a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for management, etc., and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power to the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM"), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its content.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with power by a backup power supply 1513 different from the backup power supply supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which the power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and may have a power supply capacity capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124 (A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which the area for storing the game history is configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area where power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. Area) The data in 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124 (B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area in which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and a game history storage area in which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data of the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are physically separated from each other.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which the power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In either form of FIGS. 124 (A) and 124 (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time even after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initially initialized. It may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When the power is turned on, or when the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the game machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e is restarted, so that no reset is applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board side motor drive data for transmitting to drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. The door-side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is frame-decorated drive. Transmission from the serial I / O port for the amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is driven by frame decoration from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 220. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, when the starting port 1 is won, (1) the fact that the starting port 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting port 1 is won, and (3) the event that occurred before the starting port 1 is won. As described above, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This means that the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the start port has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the start port is won, and in a special case (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed at the time of investigating). This is because if all the information stored inside when winning a prize at the starting port is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of output of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is recorded in the pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. It was output to the outside of 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 could be confirmed in special cases.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below are intended to modify a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event (command type) and the event occurrence date and time are recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events generated in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the modified example 1.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command to trigger a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. It should be noted that the column of information that can be counted and the column of change of state that can be acquired are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command for which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the record that counts the number of events by updating the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis. To add.

For example, the power-on command, the change start state command, the jackpot OP command, the jackpot operation end transition destination command, and the error display command are commands issued by the state change, and are power-on, special symbol change display start, respectively. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the start of the big hit state, the end of the big hit state, and the occurrence of the error state.

In addition, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than or equal to the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than or equal to the specified winning number) can count the number of rounds completed with the specified number of winning or less. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds completed in excess of the specified number of winnings (that is, by over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations in the normal symbol. The command to pass through the gate can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modification 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. Includes the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as counting events, the starting opening 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 variation number, the special symbol 2 variation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The number of general winning openings 3 winning, the number of large winning openings 1 winning, the number of large winning openings 2 winning, the number of passing through the gate, and the number of normal symbol changes are recorded. The number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes is sufficient for the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, the data that is not derived so frequently and the cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, the data may not be stored in the new record created, or 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the relevant period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as a game history, the count value of the counting event is set as the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low probability / non-time saving state, the game history information in which 50 winning numbers to the starting port 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the modified example 1. In 1, the game history is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed with the low probability and non-time saving state, the number of winnings of 50 is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the counting value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, the recording of the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c is continuously executed in the current state, and the cumulative number of counting events does not have to be stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d from the peripheral control RAM 1511c when the state changes. Further, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, a ring buffer may be configured in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced every time. can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of the process and reduce the process of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the modification 1, the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1 is characterized in that more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is internally recorded.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. That is, if fraud is performed in a state where a new record cannot be created in the game history storage area (the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As described above, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area. As long as the game state does not change, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the information of the current state (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded). If the result of comparison with is satisfied with a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, which launches a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability / short-time state or a big hit game state, the transition from the high-probability / short-time state to the big hit game state. However, if the game transitions to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot game state ends, even if the state is switched, it is usually right-handed, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot gaming state and the subsequent high-probability / time-saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is one, and if a difference of two or more occurs, an error may be notified. This is because when the hand is released from the launch handle, the launch force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function predicts the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because it is in a high probability and time saving state), so an unfamiliar player can use it. There is a possibility of detecting an error when hitting unexpectedly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but may only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-mentioned modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the modification 2 is composed of the history of state events and the cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of the state event includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurs. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. To. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the second modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the occurrence date and time of the event are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-mentioned counting event corresponds to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-mentioned modification 2, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded in the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded by using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG. 125.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the modification example 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of the modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Further, the game history of the modification 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they are further subdivided. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the third modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the above-mentioned counting events is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The recorded values may be added and stored in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded, so that the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is recorded. You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

As described above, with respect to the modified examples 1 to 3, when the condition of temporarily recording in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when an event occurs by the game history recording process and writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. The data in the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here, I would like to briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the hall has fixed business hours, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether or not a player is playing an illegal game during a time when many players are present, such as a time immediately after the store opens or a time in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of pachinko players will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before the store closes, the pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time will be initialized for the next day's business, and the probability is low. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of pachinko players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines with a high probability and a short time, so it is possible to know whether the latest game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately for. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, the clerk only needs to cause a change of state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to erase the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform a ram clear operation. As mentioned above, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event without deleting all the game history by the ram clear operation, before the latest event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred so far (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the information that the starting opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening that is not related to the lottery is once recorded in the work area, so that a special symbol ( Even if the symbol that starts to change by winning a prize in the start opening and the lottery result of the winning is shown by the stop mode of this symbol), the game is played while the game ball is launched in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. That is, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed in the wake of a winning lottery, but a process that may be executed at any time while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in the case of a low probability and non-time saving state, the game ball is fired to the starting port 2002 so that the game ball wins, like a so-called left-handed hit or a choppy hit. In such a case, the starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no (or very few) prizes in the general winning opening 2001, but there are many game balls in the starting port 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting port 2002 (or very few). ) However, if a large number of game balls have won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error is detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, but may only output the security signal from the external terminal board 784 and may not notify the player. By doing so, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if you record for each game (1 fluctuation), you cannot record many games (long time), so you can keep more game records. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, for example, a setting function for changing the operating ratio of a condition device as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of a pachinko machine with a setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting unit as viewed from the back surface side in an open state. FIG. 131. Is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from the back surface side in a closed door state, and FIG. 132 is a view showing a setting portion of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The confirmed setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is for changing to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining a short-circuited or open state of contacts by turning the key to a setting position. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. It should be noted that the setting key 971 may not be provided and may be shared with another switch. In this case, by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started. You may end the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by pressing and holding.

Further, the setting change mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode.

By doing so, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation by the closing of the setting change switch 972.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is incremented by 1, and when the setting value = 6 is operated and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value = 1. The setting value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value is not limited to 6 steps, but may be a smaller step (for example, 2 steps) or a larger step (for example, 8 steps).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in 3 steps, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), turning it to the left is an operation to start the setting change mode, and turning it to the right is the setting to be set. It is an operation to select a value (turning it to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variable jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be configured as a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured as a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Further, the set value selected may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, and the ball rental button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of winning of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the gaming performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough to provide it.

Further, the setting change operation may be possible only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch. The set value can be confirmed by the operation (long press) of 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the setting key 971). .. The setting display 974 may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up and the set value is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the display of the error type may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the display of the set value may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to the power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power supply switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is performed. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be configured not as an independent board but also as a part of a payout control board 951, a power supply board, or a main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971 and hinders the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). It is possible to make the operation of the board 970 difficult and suppress fraudulent acts in which the player changes the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change difficulty means composed of the members provided facing the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, it is advisable to cover the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). Provide a body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation). Further, a second cover body for covering various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the start of the setting change mode due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts in which an unauthorized player changes the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated at the time of changing the setting are arranged in the vicinity. By doing so, the operability when activating the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is installed in a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so that they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visually obfuscating means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

FIG. 132 (B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 is used. The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modification as well, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974, as in the above-mentioned example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board placement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided on the game board 5 instead of the main body frame 4, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit from behind, and FIG. 136 is a perspective view of FIG. 135. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used in combination, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. Normally, the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (the straight line section) are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, although four digits are used for displaying the base value, only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit) may be used for displaying the set value, and "-" may be displayed. In the digits not used in the display of the set value, other numbers, characters, and symbols may be displayed instead of "-" as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. Further, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the set value is blinked while being selected, and the confirmed set value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be lit and displayed. Further, in the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and the numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation, so that the base value is displayed although the base value is calculated. Will not be done. After that, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are also used, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display content is displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By standardizing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation / display outside the game control area. When executed by the code 13135, the processes inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the processing of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, it is included in the category of the invention described in the present specification. In this way, by displaying a plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the confirmation of the setting change mode and the setting value, it is possible to prevent erroneous operation and erroneous recognition of the setting value at the time of setting change.

Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode and confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change and a misidentification of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 on the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970, or a front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the back side box body may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted from the side in the direction in which the substrate is stretched, the main control board box 1320 has the setting board 970 in the stretching direction of the front side box (or cover) and the back side box of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in (the insertion direction of the key 975) to separate.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and the like The operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but may be another member. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is installed in a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, so that they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switch on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visually obfuscating means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). .. In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, the process related to the setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is a point where the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initialization process (step), as compared with the initialization process described above in FIG. The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and the output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, prize ball) The data of) is left, the other data is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and the checksum in step S48. Compare (verify) with the stored checksum (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( (Other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality (step S20) that has not been performed, a RAM abnormality (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an abnormality (step S24) of the work for base calculation. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base is calculated. Area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence / absence of a process (steps S50, S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 138 shows a setting board 970 connected to a payout control board 951 (or integrally configured with a payout control board 951). 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is integrally configured with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (A) are linked will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311, not the payout control unit 952, receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol or the normal symbol hold storage). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when the procedure or status of setting change is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting. This is because it interferes with the change work.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch-disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected set value, and the set value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped within a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear process after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). , The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the above-mentioned process, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 may be transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency), or a power supply voltage. However, a signal having an intermediate potential that is neither a ground voltage nor a ground voltage may be output. This is a main control from the payout control unit 952 of a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 by a signal that cannot occur due to a short circuit of the terminal in order to prevent an illegal act of short-circuiting the terminal of the setting key 971 and activating the setting change mode. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139 (A) will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. The detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change when the setting change start command is received from the payout control unit 952. The RAM clear process before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol or the normal symbol hold storage). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in the procedure (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or performs a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when the procedure or status of setting change is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting. This is because it interferes with the change work.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during a normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying special symbols are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch-disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the firing of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the firing of the game ball during the firing stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the setting value can be selected from 1 to 6, the setting value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the setting value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, every time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973 is determined. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are satisfied (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is confirmed. Functions as a means for generating an allowable state.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected set value and confirms that the set value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as a setting value (for example, 8), or may display the confirmed setting value blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

It should be noted that the notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is captured from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped within a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear process after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame opening switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads out the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

If the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode in the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning on the power again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection, or from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value = 0 when the setting value is not selected).

To change the set value, it is advisable to record the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 or the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. Furthermore, the history of changes in the recorded setting values can be output. For example, the history of changes in the recorded set values may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section currently measuring the base value is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate the base value that does not mix different gaming performance, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value by changing the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval in which the base value is measured. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is possible to design the base value so that the base value does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Further, if both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. In the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, considering the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be operated by mistake, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the intention of the operator. Further, in the setting change mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM clear is desired, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator wants at least RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to activate the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing in the above-mentioned procedures (3) and (15), the data of the gaming state is maintained, but the reserved storage of the special symbol may be erased. Since the set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device, the determination result of the random number of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbol and have a new lottery performed.

On the other hand, the lottery of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball wins the starting opening, but the lottery result is judged at the start of the variable display game, so the conditions after changing the set value are used. The random number value stored on hold may be determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clear in the above-mentioned procedures (3) and (15), the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear processing in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game status data (probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) is deleted. There is no need to maintain it without it.

[12-2. Production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for controlling a special symbol and a special electric accessory. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to simply as the major winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively referred to simply as a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, the start winning is triggered (establishment of the starting condition), and each start memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied is a big hit. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and if the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is normal. Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. It is read and performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a starting opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control are performed. End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the process when the power is turned off on the main control side.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol changing process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed when the big hit game state is not generated. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the reserved ball number designation command as the command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a big hit acquired at the time of winning a prize at the start opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, the high-order byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower-level command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the buffer for the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variable time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched for in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched for in the process of step S546, and acquires the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires a fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state and the like. It is a data table in which table information for referring to a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). It is determined whether or not the jackpot is won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fluctuation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU 1311 does not generate a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 generates a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the random number 1 for the variation pattern (steps S360, S372, S378) and the random number 2 for the variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern.

[12-3. Explanation of the production of a pachinko machine with a setting function]
Hereinafter, the effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out for the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in a non-probability state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, Setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having a setting as high as possible, the motivation for the game is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a variation pattern with a random number for one variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process of step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 shall execute the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is the current gaming state (whether it is a time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning a big hit). Select the variation pattern table according to (whether it is done or not). When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for a variation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the variation pattern and the distribution of each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table, A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out of order, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, a random number for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for the variation pattern and each variation pattern in the selected variation pattern table are distributed. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table based on.

FIG. 144 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 144 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that identifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that identifies the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern stores the distribution in which the corresponding variation pattern is selected for each setting. The distribution random number column for determining the variation pattern of the variation pattern table (that is, the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is displayed when reach occurs. And for each of the times when reach does not occur, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect executed after the temporary display of the special lottery result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) will be described. First, the effects performed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is subsequently removed. A definite display indicating that the above is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the variation of the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed after the SP reach 1 is executed, the temporary display is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The setting suggestion effect is executed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In this way, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is performed in the fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion effect to occur and maintain a sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect occurs due to the deviation fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is out of order, the player's disappointment due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and eventually the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fluctuation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although the Gase effect suggesting the execution is executed, the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which the rate of selection is high when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the rate of selection is low when the result of the special lottery is out of order. That is, the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Hereinafter, the effects performed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are executed at the same time. You may.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols are changed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative symbol is in the reach state in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a changing state.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. In the SP reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the latter half of SP reach 1 is produced. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24-29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half production, the voice of the main character such as "still more!" Is output from various speakers, and the main On the liquid crystal display device 1600, the effect of playing a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is executed again. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in a detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner as if it is shaking with a small width.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a definite display indicating that the special lottery result was deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the definite display, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbol is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion gaze effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect in which one main character discovers two enemy characters and chases the enemy character but cannot catch them is executed. As in the distribution of the deviation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is equal or approximately uniform in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the deviation pattern 24 distribution to the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect will be generated frequently when the SP reach 1 is developed, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be reduced.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The production to be performed is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, an effect is executed in which all three players play goo in a rock-paper-scissors game with three players. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is defined so as to be distributed only in the low setting (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is achieved. If it occurs, the player may stop the game at an early stage, so that the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern 25 itself does not have to exist.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play a choki and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is defined to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect that all three players put out a par and become a friend is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is defined so as to be distributed only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is confirmed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, an effect is executed in which all three players put out different hands and become enthusiastic. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is defined to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is confirmed.

For example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player can be interested in the effect by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot ratio is higher in the order of 2 (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are set in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of prizes won in the game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the odd number setting, but the probability variation rate is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained in one consecutive villa from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the even number setting, but the probability variation rate is high, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from one consecutive villa is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball ejection tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball ejection tendency. Therefore, an odd-numbered setting confirmation effect or an even-numbered setting confirmation effect may occur. The player's interest in the production will increase. Further, the even-numbered setting may have a feature that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is higher than that of the odd-numbered setting, but the jackpot with a small number of rounds is easily selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effect until the setting suggestion effect starts is the same, but the content of the setting suggestion effect is different (the result in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people is different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people is used only in the out-of-range fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion production has started when the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people starts, and the feeling of exhilaration is further enhanced.

It should be noted that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which an effect of determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which an effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even at a low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect of the deviation variation pattern 25 is achieved. Is not a production that confirms the high setting, but a production that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, the variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the possibility of the high setting is high as described above is executed may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the maximum setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (normal time and fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern 34 other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is fixed is determined. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of fluctuation patterns in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortened fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than that of other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative pattern is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all the decorations without developing into a reach state. It is a fluctuation that the symbol stops. In the normal variation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped all at once.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is out of order. The description of the provisional display and the final display is the same as the above description, and is therefore omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

Further, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed (for example, the other variation pattern). It is desirable that it is 10% or less of the minimum distribution of. Further, it is desirable that the execution time of the provisional display and the confirmed display is the same in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is such that the player can recognize (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, when the shortened variation is executed, the player assumes a variation time such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the expected variation time is used. You can recognize that they are different, and you can enjoy the production where the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when the shortening fluctuation is out of reach, the player loses the expectation that the shortening fluctuation is executed and is interested in the shortening fluctuation. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortened variation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortened variation that is selected only when the player is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, but only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production so as not to overlook the highest setting final production.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is fixed and the shortened variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the maximum setting, the setting is fixed and the shortened variation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of other deviation fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before the temporary display of the special lottery result]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are defined to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, an effect in which the maximum setting is fixed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

The deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are different from the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30 and the like, and the setting suggestion effect is started before the provisional display (specifically, at the same time as the start of the variation). As a result, the player can get an uplifting feeling waiting for the notification of the big hit lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and by extension, the player. Can feel superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production where big hit winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is defined so as to be distributed only in the high setting (settings 4, 5, 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the special movie 2 is generated, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is out of order, and by extension, the high setting. A feeling of exhilaration can be obtained by confirming.

Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and after the special movie 2 is generated. If the special lottery result is out of order, it will be easier for the hall to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion effect in a time-saving state]
Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern selected in the game state and the time saving state will be described. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the reduced working hours state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 2 at the time of non-reach deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and per unit time. The number of game balls to be paid out will increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the more the distribution of the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time, so that the number of game balls paid out by the big hit per unit time in each setting can be made equal. can. Further, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation pattern 3 having a long fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including the shortened fluctuation. Therefore, the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern suggesting a high setting. Can be done.

Similarly, even when there is a reach, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 11 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 having a short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning the big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, when the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the number of game balls to be fired before winning the jackpot increases. For example, if the lower the setting, the larger the distribution of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, the player who stops firing the game ball during fluctuations, respectively. It is possible to equalize the number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. The predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, is executed.

It is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the sense of expectation and eventually plays the game early if the high setting suggestion effect and the highest setting suggestion effect are not executed even though the player plays only a short game time. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, which may cause the player to lose the sense of expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting a group of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for any group consisting of one or more settings may be executed. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only settings 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150A shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 150 (B), in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased is different between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying a set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the port of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. Then, if the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be launched toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won in the winning opening, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or the serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. As a method of setting the authentication code, for example, the authentication code is set by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a short circuit of a pattern, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example,). A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting a signal different from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

In this way, by changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model), it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent unauthorized replacement of the setting board 970.

FIG. 150 (C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding the prize ball acquired by the player, such as the jackpot probability in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines need to design and produce both pachinko machines that do not have a setting function and pachinko machines that have a setting function. Efficient design and production of pachinko machines are required.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 having no setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To. Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting board 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, a pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy board 979, but the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970, even if it is not composed of the printed circuit board.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. It is good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 971A. A small door that can be moved so as to close the hole 971A is provided in the main control board box 1320 so that it can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside, thereby providing a setting function. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with a pachinko machine that does not have a pachinko machine and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

The dummy board 979, which will be described later, may also be set with an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and it is not necessary to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above can be summarized as follows.

(1) There is a setting change switch 972, and there is a setting confirmation switch 973. In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the key 975 is inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed), and the pachinko machine. Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the set value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320, which is different from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150.

FIG. 151 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. As described above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating the 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by a small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1321. By inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating the small door 1321, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed and set. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the door 1323 is in the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the door 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the door 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the hinge 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the hinge 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. The small door 1321 can be opened around the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151 (C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes an initialization process by executing a main control program. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determination (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, the setting value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during the game, and cheating is possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting change mode is entered during business hours.

Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and end of the setting change mode, the security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. It may be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the setting value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is composed of a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-mentioned process, after the setting change mode is completed, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), the power failure flag is not set, and the check is performed. If the sums do not match, the predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the gaming state (for example, the probability change state, The data of the time saving state, the hold storage of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if the operation for terminating the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further, the setting change operation is detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are found in step S30. ), The other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (Step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff. The thumb and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, and the data backed up in the work area is not erased in step S24. Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag abnormality (step S20) that is not set, a RAM abnormality (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an abnormality (step S24) of the work for base calculation. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack). (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

In the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 are different from those shown in the figure. You may clear the entire RAM area including. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a work error for base calculation, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the work area for base calculation and the stack area for base calculation cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence / absence of a process (steps S50, S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed by the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156), but the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process. You may do it. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value due to an inadvertent operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the setting confirmation operation unit), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current setting value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display 974 is generated, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 974. It is good to do it. In this case as well, it is advisable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clearing process, and executes the RAM clearing process after the predetermined condition is satisfied (the end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to memorize the execution of the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by the operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the RAMs of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. By changing the operation method in this way, it is possible to clear a part of the area of the main control RAM 1312 and execute the process in which the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Further, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 clears the RAM immediately. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also in the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 while operating the RAM clear switch 954 when changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 should be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 performs the RAM clear switch 954. It is determined whether or not the operation is being performed, and whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared is determined. If the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, and a base calculation process (step S801) is provided instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Further, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operation ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a switch input process (step S74), a timer update process (step S76), a random number update process 1 (step S78), and a prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (see step S801, FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it may be executed in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the employee of the hall performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Subsequently, the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and can display the current setting.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame opening switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that some abnormality (malfunction or fraudulent activity) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is made. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer for measuring the elapsed time from turning on the power (or the initial setting of the CPU in step S28) so that the set value can be displayed until the timer is timed up.

Further, a setting display condition may be provided so that the set value can be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game. That is, a setting display condition is provided so that the set value can be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol change and the jackpot. In addition, the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal can be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, output between the start and end of the set value display, or output from the start of the set value display to the predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the set value display is completed, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even if the setting display condition is not satisfied, a security signal is transmitted when the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected. good.

After that, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974.

If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be completed. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And display the set value. If the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a gaming state where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desirable to check the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal for setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of a security signal output when a setting is changed or a setting is confirmed.

As described above, a security signal is output at the time of setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154, S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode but for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear processing executed in association with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation but for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the detection of the error. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (a predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, it is not necessary to extend the security signal output time. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection do not overlap. That is, the security signal output time is not extended even if an error occurs during the setting change mode, but the security signal output time is extended if an error occurs during the setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, an example in which the setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing has been mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation processing is performed in the initialization processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, when the setting key is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of the process will be described below. The timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process not including the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step). S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the set value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the process of step S8062 is executed again.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated following the process of step S8064 and its output is off (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the determination of step S8071 is executed again. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the set value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the number of reserved storages managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (setting without turning off the power). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol change resumes. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using a display device, effect using a lamp, sound effect using a speaker, effect using a movable body, etc.) performed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. Nothing will happen after the fluctuation resumes.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process is completed. You may resume the production that was being performed with. For example, the interrupted production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is resumed. Further, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect after the movable body is returned to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol change or when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

In other words, if the movable body shifts to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it returns to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation process is completed, and then based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be operated (moved). If the setting confirmation state is entered while the movable body is moving (moving), the movement pattern of the movement (moving) may not be executed, or the movable body is once returned to the initial position. A movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated even from.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process is completed. Of the effects that were performed at the same time, the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker were restarted, and the movable body was moved to the initial position after the restart of the special symbol change or when the power was turned on. It is not necessary to return and produce using a movable body.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, the main liquid crystal display device is used when the special symbol change is restarted after the setting confirmation process is completed. The variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the 1600 may be resumed (the production originally planned to be performed is resumed), or the variation of the decorative symbol may be performed until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). ) The decorative symbol may be made transparent and subjected to high-speed fluctuation, or the decorative symbol may be hidden until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). Further, at the time of determining the symbol, for example, a combination of decorative symbols scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed when the initial power is turned on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed at the time of a normal special symbol change. The combination (eg, "XXX", etc.) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, and the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is in the off state. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) (for example, an operation such as confirming a predetermined operation of a movable body or a predetermined light emission of an LED) may be performed. (The above-mentioned effect or the like may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change is restarted, the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect for the special symbol change that was held immediately before the power is turned off are not executed (specifically, it is performed before the power is turned off. A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, on a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple fluctuations, from the rival horse production described later to the horse racing production A developing zone (a special zone where the horse racing production has a higher expectation (for example, a special zone where the expectation is relatively higher than the dialogue production described later))) Waiting display or the special The display effect in the zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white). However, the look-ahead effect may be executed for the special symbol change corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change resumes, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the special symbol change that was performed before the power was turned off. The standby display, the display effect in the special zone is erased, and if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white), but the following The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (the erased display may be restored, or if the effect pattern is to promote the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after promotion. May be good). In this case, the look-ahead effect executed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, assuming that the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead effect scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
Hereinafter, an example of a process in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability change rate at the time of winning a big hit is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the explanation of FIG. 142 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common fluctuation pattern table is used in all the settings.

The fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the fluctuation pattern, the outline of the production of the fluctuation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, the information of the fluctuation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the variation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate shown in the variation pattern table. As in the example of FIG. 144, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column has a high percentage selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and the percentage selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order is extremely low. Is. In other words, the expectation of a big hit of fluctuations in which movie reach is executed is high. Further, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" when the winning type is "missing" described in the summary column means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state is in the reach state. Indicates that the decoration pattern has passed one and then stopped. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol "7", the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". When the winning type is "big hit", "+1 symbol" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has changed to the end has passed one of the decorative symbols in the reach state and temporarily stopped. After pretending to be like this, the decorative symbol stops as the same symbol as the decorative symbol in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol "7", the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end appears to have stopped temporarily at "8", and then the decorative symbol stops at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "big hit (non-probable change)" among the big hits, but in the case of "big hit (probable change)". Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of "big hit (non-probable change)" and "big hit (probable change)". Further, "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the winning type is "missing".

Further, "+ pseudo 1" and "+ pseudo 2" described in the summary column indicate that two pseudo-continuous effects and three pseudo-continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. "Ending the variation of the decorative symbol" means, for example, a mode of stopping and displaying a part or all of the decorative symbol, a mode of making the player recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol has ended once, and a mode of the decorative symbol. A mode in which a pseudo-ream symbol (a symbol in which a pseudo-ream is confirmed if this symbol is stopped) is partially stopped. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-series pseudo-continuous effect, and the M-th variation of the decorative symbol (M is 1 or more N) in the N-series pseudo-continuous effect. The following natural numbers) are called the M-th pseudo continuous production. In addition, while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again. The production that does not occur is called "pseudo-gase production". Further, hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous production is also simply referred to as "pseudo-continuous production".

Pseudo-continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. Peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous symbol at at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol when it is confirmed that the pattern is to be used. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" As a pseudo-continuous symbol on the intermediate decorative symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are odd or even numbers and reach is not generated) may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol. It should be noted that the pseudo-gase effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal variation" or the like. Further, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern is such that "+ pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo-gase effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-ream in "+ pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Last hold color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, the peripheral main control ROM. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the change pattern, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern) (hereinafter, the final hold color). Also called) selectivity and keeps.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a hold display area indicating the number of pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142, a hold number designation command for designating the hold numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command in the hold display area.

Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the number of holdings (the number of holding storages) specified from the holding number designation command increases. , Adds and displays one hold display to the hold display area. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of holds stored) specified from the hold number specification command is reduced. , Clear the hold display in the hold display area.

In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there are display modes of hold display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, the color of the hold display is white, blue, green, red, and rainbow in this order, and the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display is high. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161 the rainbow-colored hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selection rate indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU corresponds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display, for example, during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area until the hold display is erased. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol).

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display. It should be noted that the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, in the hold notice table, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing are defined for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing.

It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a jackpot expectation degree equal to or lower than the jackpot expectation degree of the final hold color. In addition, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold display does not demote at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). It should be noted that there may be a hold notice table that differs depending on the number of hold memories at the time of winning.

In addition, for example, the start of the special symbol change held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above, and for example, even during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display. , The change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

The look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142. To.

Hereinafter, the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-judgment process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not it becomes a big hit by comparing the pre-judgment table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number, and if it becomes a big hit. The type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not obtained, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Depending on the type of game effect to be executed, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process relating to the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number. ..

Then, by transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved storages stored corresponding to the starting port where the starting winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning is obtained. Whether or not the display result of the variable display of is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each fluctuation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each fluctuation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the hold display of the higher jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the higher the jackpot expectation of each color, the higher the expectation. The appearance rate and the degree of expectation are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and for the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all the settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that differs depending on the setting. In this case, for example, in the same display mode of the reserved display, the selection rate of the final reserved color table of the final reserved color is set so that the higher the setting, the higher the expectation of big hit. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for a higher setting is further increased, so that the player can obtain an uplifting feeling.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white, which is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation when the mode of the hold display is red is 50% in the setting 1 which is the low setting, and 30 in the setting 6 which is the high setting. Set to%). As a result, for example, even if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for the high setting is high, so that the player's disappointment is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table so that the jackpot expectation is substantially the same in all settings. The selection rate of may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final reserved color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the reserved display. Further, for example, when the big hit is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possibility of low setting is high.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The advance notice effect table holds, for example, the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, there are a dialogue effect, a weather change effect, and a rival horse effect as the advance notice effect. The dialogue effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation and the dialogue is spoken. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the fluctuation. The rival horse production is a production in which a rival horse of a horse raised by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation.

It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect using the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect table stores the selection rate of each advance notice effect according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, "without set" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and "with set" indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the advance notice effect to be executed based on the fluctuation pattern and the selection rate of the advance notice effect table.

In each advance notice effect in each variation pattern of the advance notice effect table, it is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set to a low setting is significantly lowered, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is high, the number of players who presume that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases and the operation of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect does not change depending on the number of pseudo-reams. , The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for a variation pattern whose outline is "SP reach", "SP reach + pseudo 1", and "SP reach + pseudo 2", the pseudo setting suggestion effect is such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, although the jackpot expectation is low for the fluctuation pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low even when compared with the fluctuation pattern with a large number of pseudo-reams. You can also be interested in fluctuations in small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. It should be noted that the above-mentioned problems may occur when the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases. However, it is desirable to set the values to be almost the same (specifically, for example, if there is a set of dialogue effect when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of off, there is a set of 15/256, and there is a set of the dialogue effect when the variation pattern 6 is selected. Set as 16/256, etc.).

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit (or a production in which the expectation of a big hit is not a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, but the expectation of the appearance is relatively high (for example, a production in which the expectation of a big hit is equal to or higher than a predetermined value)). ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of "normal fluctuation", fluctuation including "normal reach", fluctuation including "SP reach", and fluctuation including "movie reach". The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined.

Further, in the example of FIG. 165, the setting suggestion effect may occur in all the advance notice effects (line effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect), but for example, the advance notice effect in which the setting suggestion effect does not occur. May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher when the special lottery result is a big hit without a probability change than when the special lottery result is a big hit with a probability change. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined. As a result, when the jackpot without probability change is won, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes high, and the player's disappointment for not being given the probability change can be reduced. In the above example, the three types of advance notice productions of dialogue production, weather change production, and rival horse production have been described, but it goes without saying that they are not limited to the three types.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
The details of the dialogue production among the advance notice productions will be described below. When the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue effect without the setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, for example, the character A appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation). , "What day is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and "Come on ..." as the dialogue of the character B. Is displayed. In addition, for example, the dialogues of character A and character B may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue effect with the setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU selects the line of the character B (the line suggesting the setting) from the dialogue effect table described later. The peripheral control MPU is attached to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as the timing at which the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect described above). Character A is made to appear, and "What day is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A. For example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and displays the dialogue of the selected character B. The dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a setting value such as "Do you know the setting of this platform today?".

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The dialogue effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of the dialogue production and the selection rate of the content of the dialogue of the character B for each setting. It should be noted that the production type includes "a pattern that is halfway together" and "a pattern that suddenly branches", and there are "Kamone-type" lines and "determined-type" lines for each of the two patterns. ..

Each line that belongs to the "pattern together halfway" contains the same line halfway, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" start with "Come on ..." and then branch to different lines. On the other hand, the lines that belong to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch to different lines from the beginning. It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern". This is to raise expectations.

The lines that belong to "Kamone-kei" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a line of "maybe" that suggests an even setting. "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a "maybe" line, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even with odd settings. However, the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting shall be sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-kei" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line shall be sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in the other settings.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "deterministic system" is a dialogue that deterministically announces the setting. For example, "Oh! I remembered! It's an even day!" Is a line of "deterministic system" that definitely announces the even setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd number setting is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even number setting.

It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a good possibility that the player will be definitively notified of the high setting in a short time after the start of the game. This is because there are a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when performing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-ream, the dialogue that suggests the setting of character B is written in red (in the jackpot expectation suggestion production, etc.). The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white characters). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the dialogue of the expectation suggestion effect and the dialogue of the setting suggestion effect, so that the two types of effects (setting suggestion effect and expectation suggestion effect) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made to. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value, and specifically, a notice effect suggesting an expectation for a jackpot within one fluctuation, or a plurality of. Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a big hit across the fluctuations of.

Although not shown, the peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table for the weather change effect and the rival horse effect. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" In the setting suggestion production in the rival horse production, the combined horse production by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, a number such as "135?" Is displayed on the number of the rival horse. (Producing a "Kamone system" that suggests an even number setting).

In the above example, "How many days is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A in the dialogue production, but in addition to this line, character A is "How many points was the test last week?" Character B is one, such as "66 points! (" Definite system "where setting 6 is confirmed)" and "I feel like it was 55 points ... (" Maybe system "which suggests setting 5)". A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) is more credible to the setting suggestion than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). Specifically, for example, when the A production says "I feel like it was a day with a 6 ... (maybe system)", the expectation level of setting 6 is only 30%, but the B production " The expectation level, which is the setting 6 when it is said that "I feel like I got 66 points ... (maybe system)", should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of the notice production table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the advance notice effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information about whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the advance notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the variation pattern of the advance notice effect table of FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fluctuation pattern and the type of the selected advance notice effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal variation” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. be. FIG. 168 (B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the advance notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the variation pattern and the advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the advance notice effect, but determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect before determining the content of the advance notice effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that of the table as shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this alternative example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of the setting suggestion effect. The effect that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (B), and (C) is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is selected as the line of character B in the line effect. It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169 (A), the special symbol change starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol change, the line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialogue is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol change.

The effect that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E) is an outline of the setting suggestion effect when "It's a day with 6!" Is selected as the line of character B in the line effect. be. In the effect of proceeding in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion effect starts from the start of the special symbol change, while the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect is during the end of the special symbol change. has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol change, the line "It's a day with 6!" Is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each line (finally displayed line) in the line production table, one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue effect table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even day!" Is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character B may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. In addition, character A appears before the dialogue of character B, and character A talks to character B, but it is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B has won a prize at the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol change in a state where the special symbol change is not reserved. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the character B's line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Will be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed and then the character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170 (B), the number of holds indicated by the display in the hold display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. In addition, the line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Of character B is still displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), the special symbol change corresponding to the winning is started. At the same time as the start of the special symbol change, the line of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 5 or 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is completed. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the prize, the line of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of the character B has been promoted.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a line of the character B and a line look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the change timing of the line. Specifically, for example, the dialogue look-ahead effect table defines the change timing of the dialogue of the character B and the dialogue of the character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. It should be noted that there may be a dialogue look-ahead effect table that differs depending on the number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the look-ahead effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the line look-ahead effect by referring to the line look-ahead effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. Also, in the case of promotion, in Fig. 170, it is promoted one step at a time ("It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 6". It may be promoted in the order of "!"), But it may be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue of (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue of (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under specific circumstances other than those described above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the hold sequence is satisfied. The hold ream means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number held by the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the hold is performed and before the end of the jackpot game. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern is continuous a predetermined number of times, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation at the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after special conditions]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the set value, which is started when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171 (A) is an example of an effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of an error-occurring effect restriction table. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence are stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode is started while the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or held. Stores a restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict the setting suggestion effect.

In the setting confirmation mode, the effect restriction table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined to perform the setting suggestion effect). Record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion variation (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). Includes record 1702, which stores the limit flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Therefore, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode stores the column 1703 for storing the restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and the restriction flag when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode. Includes column 1704 and.

Further, if the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change is suspended by winning a prize at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a limit flag in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode. It should be noted that each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set by the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, the player can operate it, for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like. It may be set by an operation medium that can be operated). When a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be executed for the entry. However, even in such a case, the special symbol change that has already been suspended is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one value of the field 1706 and the field 1707 is 1 and the value of the other is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are set. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the fields 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0. One value of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1706 is 0 and the value of the field 1707 is 1). For example, when audio or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way during the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When the audio and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the audio and image are given priority over the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. .. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by hiding it.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1708 is 0 and the value of the field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting confirmation effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion change corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode About the setting suggestion production of.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1710 is 0 and the value of the field 1711 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the setting value, the setting value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect. Since there is a possibility that the odd number setting will be confirmed later in the setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hole and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

It is desirable that the image, sound, light, etc. indicating that the setting is confirmed as described above appear regardless of the value of the field described above. In addition, it is assumed that a new prize will be valid even when the game is stopped after the setting confirmation state is entered. In that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). , And when the game stops at the start of the setting confirmation mode.

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is resumed (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the set suggestion effect that has already been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, when audio or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 during the setting confirmation mode, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way during the setting confirmation mode. However, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, about the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When the audio and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in effect are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the audio and image are given priority over the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (The image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in the setting confirmation mode" are displayed so as not to overlap. ). It should be noted that this display and the like can be processed in the same manner even when an error occurs, which will be described later. Note that "non-overlapping" here means that the appearance from the player does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by hiding it.

(4-2) Cancel the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') A new game corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and the setting confirmation mode starts and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode. About the setting suggestion production of various setting suggestion fluctuations.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1716 is 0 and the value of the field 1717 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the setting value, the setting value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect. Since the odd-numbered setting is displayed in the later setting suggestion effect), trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

When the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, if the setting confirmation mode straddles a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU is set after the setting confirmation mode is started, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311. At the time of confirming the first symbol of, or at the start of the next fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is used. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode is the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect together with the change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the setting value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is suggested. (When the effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like can be set. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Subsequently, the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (B). The effect restriction table at the time of error is the setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during the execution or pending of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter). Stores a restriction flag that indicates whether or not to restrict.

The effect restriction table at the time of error has a record 1801 that stores a restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and an error occurs during the change of the setting suggestion variation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion variation. Contains record 1802, which stores the restriction flag in the case of.

The errors include a strong error notified by stopping the game and a weak error notified while the game is in progress. The error of detecting an illegal magnetism in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, an effect restriction table when an error occurs, a column 1803 that stores a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified when the game is stopped, and a column 1804 that stores a restriction flag corresponding to an error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, if the game progresses even during the error occurrence, the game ball may win a prize at the starting port during the error occurrence, so that a new setting suggestion change may be withheld. Therefore, the column 1804 includes a column 1805 that stores a limit flag in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error.

The restriction flag in the error-occurring effect restriction table can be operated by the player even if the operation medium is provided in the pachinko machine 1 (the operation medium that the player cannot operate), for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like. It may be set by the operation medium).

In the effect restriction table at the time of error, one value of the field 1806 and the field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of the field 1808 and the field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0. One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 0. The value of 1 and the other is 0, the value of one of fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to inform the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects were performed. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1808 is 0 and the value of the field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') Setting suggestion When an error occurs before the start of the effect and the game progresses even while the error is occurring (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error is occurring. About setting suggestion production of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

(3) When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is resumed (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the set suggestion effect that has already been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game so as not to cause an error. Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even during the error occurrence (weak error).

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting was displayed", hide all of the setting suggestion effect. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) Cancel the setting suggestion effect (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, if an error occurs, the setting suggestion effect may be canceled, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, the player will proceed with the game so as not to cause an error, and the game will be played. It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game progresses even while the error occurs (weak error), a new prize is given to the starting port during the error. About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion fluctuation.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game progresses even while an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error, so that the player stops launching the game ball and cancels the error at an early stage.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like can be set. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on production in new start prizes]
Hereinafter, the limitation of the production in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize during the special symbol fluctuation and in the state where the new fluctuation can be withheld will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start winning effect restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumption about the pre-variation effect and the effect limit in the effect in the new start prize in the assumption. The pre-change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new start prize. As a condition for the effect of the pre-variation, there are a case where only the expectation suggestion effect is performed to see if the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit, and a case where the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

In addition, as the effect limitation of the look-ahead effect in the new start prize, only the setting suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There are two cases: the suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are not executed), and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table to be referred to when executing the look-ahead effect restriction in the new start winning, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize.

In addition, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect restriction table is, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc. It doesn't matter), and it can be set.

If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start prize while the special symbol is changing and the new change can be withheld, and only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start prize effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column is executed, in which the value in the "pre-variation effect" column is the flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion only" and the flag column in which 1 is stored as the value. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU has a new start prize when the special symbol is changing and there is a new start prize in a state where the new change can be withheld, and the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change. The value in the "pre-variation effect" column of the effect restriction table is the flag column corresponding to "expected suggestion + setting suggestion", and the flag column corresponding to 1 is stored as the value. Determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize.

Hereinafter, each condition indicated by the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition in which the processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation, only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Is to be done. In the first condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start prize, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the pre-variation effect is achieved. The feeling of exhilaration may decrease. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggestion effect, which may make the player happy. Therefore, by executing the first condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

Further, in the first condition, the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, but if the setting suggestion effect is further executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning in this state, the player Even if it is assumed that the previous fluctuation will deviate, the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect by the advance notice effect table of FIG. 165, for example, whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the peripheral control MPU determines the effect by the table and then limits the setting suggestion effect is 1. (Whether to limit or not) is determined, and if it is 1 (restrict), even if set is selected, it is rewritten and displayed without set to limit the setting suggestion effect. do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can execute the limitation of the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by performing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly, in the expectation suggestion effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU limits the expectation suggestion effect even when the look-ahead hold display is selected other than white using the final hold color table of FIG. Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition in which the processing table 2 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. It is to limit both productions. In the second condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect and the period attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player's consciousness is directed to these effects as well. There is a risk that the feeling of exhilaration in the production of pre-variation will decrease. Therefore, by executing the second condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

The third condition (condition in which the processing table 3 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. Do not limit any of the productions. In the third condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, by executing the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, in addition to the uplifting feeling for the big hit, the uplifting feeling for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect). Alternatively, when a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed), the player can be given.

The fourth condition (condition in which the processing table 4 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. Only is limited. In the fourth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player may win a big hit in the pre-variation, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). (When is executed) I feel an uplifting feeling due to the setting suggestion. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start prize, there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, and the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the pre-variation The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally set 5 or higher, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player presumes that not only the setting suggestion effect in the pre-variation but also the expectation suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red). It is presumed that the expectation of a big hit is not high even for the hold, which is the case, and there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement for the expectation suggestion effect may decrease. By executing the fourth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The fifth condition (condition in which the processing table 5 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And to limit both the expected suggestion effect. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times in a short period of time. This will be done, and the player may guess the set value with high accuracy (for example, when the odd number setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is 5). If the player determines that the setting is low in such a state, the game on the pachinko machine 1 may be stopped, and if it is determined that the setting is high, other pachinko machines in the hall may be stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 1 will decrease. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the previous fluctuation, and the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (condition in which the processing table 6 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And neither of the expected suggestion effects should be restricted. In the sixth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect may be performed, so that the expectation level due to these two expectation suggestion effects may be raised.

Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 4 or more is executed in the pre-variation, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning prize, the player As for the expectation suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation, the expectation degree at setting 4 or higher is assumed. However, after that, since the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start prize suggests the setting 5 or more, the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect comes to assume the expectation degree of the setting 5 or more, and the player. The feeling of exhilaration increases.

In this way, the effect is exhibited for each of the pre-reading effect restriction contents corresponding to the new start prize, so by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such pre-reading effect restriction contents, the needs of the sales style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine tailored to the needs of the game.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the look-ahead effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new start winning corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number which is an identifier of the processing content.

The processing content held by each processing table defines the processing content for the look-ahead effect that is not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, the processing content of the processing table 1, which is a table referred to when limiting only the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect limit of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, includes the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, as the pre-reading effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when both the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are restricted includes the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect of the restriction target in the new start prize and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start prize effect restriction table, and is not the restriction target based on the processing table. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

The processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store a flag for selecting the processing content related to the new start winning from a plurality of processing contents. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ) Can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start winning prize defined by the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which hold look-ahead is performed as a look-ahead effect for suggesting expectations will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a reduced working hours. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU is, for example, when the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode (for example, a hold display mode such as blue, green, red, etc.) having a high expectation of a big hit. At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won by the previous variation, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is returned to the default (the white display mode in the final hold color table of FIG. 161). However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode (that is, leave the default display) at the time reduction transition after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode even if the hold of the new prize is not exhausted at the end of the reduced working hours (that is,). Leave the default display).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without shortening of working hours. In the process of process number 2, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode in which the jackpot expectation is high, for example, at the start of the jackpot opening screen won by the previous variation. The mode of the hold display of the new start prize is returned to the default. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. Further, even at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the jackpot game is completed, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left).

The process of the process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if it is a blue hold display mode, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small hit won by the previous variation. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display.

The process of the process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if it is a blue hold display mode, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and both the set suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and neither the set suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be.

The processing of the processing numbers 5 to 6 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a reduced working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 5 to 6 is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect is performed when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 5. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. In addition, since the jackpot with a time reduction was won in the previous fluctuation, it is highly likely that the fluctuation corresponding to the new prize will start after the end of the time reduction (during the time reduction, the game ball will be placed at the second starting port 2004. If a prize is won frequently and the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are suspended, the second special symbol change will be executed in preference to the first special symbol change). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the end of the time reduction by the processing of the processing number 6, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time reduction.

The processing of the processing numbers 7 to 8 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 7 to 8 is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, and the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 7 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy big hit games in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the end of the big hit by the process of the process number 8, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the time reduction is not given.

The processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10 is the processing related to the new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10 is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 9 starts the setting suggestion effect at an early timing, which is disappointing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrust. By the process of the process number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 11 to 13 is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed about the disappointment despite the appearance of the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit in the pre-variation. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of big hit, the setting suggestion as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize. Do not perform the production. Because the process of process number 13 causes a mode of hold display with a high expectation of big hit to appear in the pre-variation, but the change corresponding to the new start winning prize does not appear as a pre-reading effect. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a reduced working hours. The process for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process number 14 is the same as the process of the process number 1.

The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. The process for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process number 15 is the same as the process of the process number 2.

The process of the process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. The process for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process number 16 is the same as the process of the process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. The process for the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process number 16 is the same as the process of the process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the new start is performed regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Refer to the processing table 5 when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table to be done. Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table.

The processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a reduced working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21 is the same as the processing of the processing number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting that the setting suggestion effect is performed when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 18. can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU has a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. (Specifically, for example, it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Only when it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time reduction accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested.

By the process of the process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect during the big hit with the time reduction at the latest, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the big hit with the time reduction and the high setting suggestion can be obtained. Further, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and is processed. By processing the number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting 5 in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the player is likely to continue the game even if it is not notified that the above is confirmed, there is a high possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be a useless effect, and the process of the process number 19 is such a useless effect. The production can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Since the process of the process number 20 often starts the setting suggestion effect immediately after the end of the time reduction, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the time reduction state ends.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player when the time saving state ends.

The processing of the processing numbers 22 to 25 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit without a reduction of working hours. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 22 to 25 is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, and the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 22 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy big hit games in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, and the like. When the setting suggestion effect is started during the big hit game at the latest by the processing of the processing number 23, the big hit game can be enjoyed in a state where the disappointment is alleviated.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start prize. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect starts immediately after the end of the big hit, so that it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed not to rush into the time saving will be shown a more useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of stroking the person in reverse.

The processing of the processing numbers 26 to 29 is the processing related to the new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 26 to 29 is the same as the processing of the processing number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In a small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 26 starts the setting suggestion effect at an early timing, which is disappointing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the small merit being given in the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrust. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the pre-reading effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player that only a small merit is given in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small hit will be given a more useless setting suggestion effect. It will be shown, and there is a risk that the player will be struck in the opposite direction.

The processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34 is the processing related to the new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 30 to 34 is the same as the processing of the processing number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the variation corresponding to the new start prize. By the processing of the processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the deviation of the pre-variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with high expectation of big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed at the fact that the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display in the hold pre-reading effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. Setting as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize The new start prize is only when the setting suggested in the suggestion effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the process of the process number 32, the player's disappointment that the pre-variation, which was the mode of the hold display with a high expectation of a big hit, was out of order can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start prize only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the process of the process number 33, the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained by the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation can alleviate such disappointment by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) having a high expectation of big hit. Therefore, only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is better, during the change corresponding to the new start prize, The setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start prize is executed. A situation in which the processing of the processing number 34 amplifies the annoyance of the player that the mode of the hold display of the previous variation suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize with a low expectation. Can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned process, even under the situation where the setting suggestion effect is not restricted as the pre-reading effect limit of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the peripheral control MPU may suggest the setting in the following cases. You do not have to perform the production. For example, if the new start prize is given during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each of the processes related to the new start winning prizes defined by each processing number, the hall or the like can set the processing related to the new starting winning prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Further, for example, the new start prize is just before the end of the ST state (probability change state that continues until a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state). Go to the state where the remaining number of fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.). If so, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win a big hit in the ST. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of doing so. By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Further, for example, after the ST state ends and the normal state is entered, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the ST state). Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and in consideration of this, the new start port 2004 may be opened until a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) of special symbol fluctuations are performed. When the start prize is won, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a big hit of a type having a great merit for the player, will be executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of doing so. By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Further, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect that is completed independently is executed in each of the plurality of holds, one setting suggestion effect straddling the change corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed in the previous variation. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 1]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to describe the function separately from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 captures the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the captured level data in the register (step S201). Whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated is determined by the main control MPU 1311 in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. Therefore, if the hall employee mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the hall employee unintentionally clears the RAM. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power, the power is supplied. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of the closing operation is reliably detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be used to change the logic between the positive and negative, and the RAM clear switch 954 may be turned ON at the High level and the setting key 971 may be turned ON at the Low level. Further, the voltage determined to be ON may be changed by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves and make it difficult to perform fraudulent activities to activate the setting change mode. Further, as will be described later, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages of 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within a predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. For this reason, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value when the power is turned on, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to a normal game such as a special figure or a normal figure is not executed.

The set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when a prize is entered at the start port, when a variable display game is started, or when the game state is switched (from a normal state to a big hit state, from a low probability state to a high probability state). , Non-time saving state to time saving state, etc.), etc.) is also determined. This prevents the lottery from being performed based on the erroneous set value even if the set value is erroneously changed to an abnormal value.

If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained until the game is stopped and the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. .. If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, it is advisable to set a predetermined value. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the storage area of the set value by using the value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the maximum setting and the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only via the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning on the power again. This is because the RAM abnormality may be caused by fraud in addition to the defect, and if the RAM abnormality caused by the fraud can be resolved by the power cycle operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM error cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM error cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key is included, the security performance against fraudulent activity can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting will be used for the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and is, for example, a normal game state (game startable state), a setting confirmation mode, and a setting change mode. , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for startup (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cutoff is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and stored in step S48. A fixed value check code may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area, the data in the RAM is normally backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the backup flag area value is abnormal as a result of the determination, a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area (setting) of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded. Initialize (including the area where the value is stored) (step S207), and proceed to step S216. The erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization", but "RAM clear" is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine if it is. If it is not a setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and / or setting key 971 are both OFF), set in the setting status management area to determine whether the status was being changed before the power was turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating that the change is being made is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation has been performed, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are used to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that it is in a state. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step). S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when shifting to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state of is in the RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before the power is turned on is in the RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before the power is turned on is not during the RAM error (the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, so that the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the setting state management area In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated when the power is turned on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

After that, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is shown in the setting status management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initially set (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initially set to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is terminated and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, the initial setting at the start of the game or the initial setting at the time of recovery from the power failure is performed. After that, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, the power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

181 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 is different from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, and the setting change processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide as many LED common counters as there are indicators.

After that, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as in step S74 of FIG.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting status management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change / confirmation processing (step S234 or later) in the timer interrupt processing, so that the normal timer interrupt processing is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, the performance display processing (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change / confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt process, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. Is suppressed and LED flicker is prevented.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / confirming the set value. On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not the operation of changing / confirming the set value is performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value is added by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the upper limit is exceeded as a result of adding the set value, the initial value is returned. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting status management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key is used. It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is operated to the normal position, so that the setting change / confirmation mode termination process is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change / confirmation mode is not terminated and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change / confirmation mode end process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or the recovery from a power failure occurs. To perform the initial setting of (step S241) and send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (game state such as low probability / high probability, time reduction / non-time reduction) at the time of power-on. In the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol at the time of recovery after a power failure is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status of the special symbol / special electric accessory (state of each process (standby, changing, determination, jackpot, etc.) related to the special symbol / special electric accessory) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state and the operating state of the special electric accessory related to the special symbol when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

The command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only at the setting change / confirmation mode end process at the time of turning on the power but also at the start of the fluctuation or the switching of the game state. At that time, the command of the set value transmitted at the time of turning on the power and the command transmitted during the normal game such as at the start of fluctuation may be the same command or a different command (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is different between when the power is turned on and during normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variation display game. Upon receipt, it determines if the command is missing. By making the content of the command different at the timing when the command is transmitted (at the time of power-on, during normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 may be the set value correctly received at the time of power-on, or the set value other than the set value at the start of fluctuation. It can be determined whether the fluctuation pattern command or the symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, a setting is made for displaying an error on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) (step S246). On the other hand, if the value indicating the RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (in the case of a separate body, the setting display 974) is made (step). S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing is started, the set value change operation is determined (step S237), and then ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of the set value). To switch). The set value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change / confirmation process is being executed by performing the process related to the setting change / confirmation within the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started, instead of performing the process when the power is turned on. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state due to a power failure, the setting at the time of the power failure does not have to be operated at the same position as the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972. It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change / confirmation process, it is possible to standardize the processes that are also executed in the normal game process, such as the command transmission process and the control of the dynamic lighting of the LED.

Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244 and the like are actually output as serial data from the main control board 1310.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processing May be provided to activate different timer interrupt processing in the normal game state and the setting change mode and / setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, even if a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be configured by different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes are not started at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by the bank, and the main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. It has 1 (during a normal game) and timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode) that is executed periodically, and is common to at least two processes of the main control side main process, timer interrupt process 1, and timer interrupt process 2. Use the registers in the bank of.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may be executed in different cycles. Since the switching sampling in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is executed in the setting change mode where the execution cycle is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED displaying the set value is delayed, and the display mode of the set value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight LED commons, if the timer interrupt processing execution cycle is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt process execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the LED lighting flicker increases, so that the display mode is different from that of the base display during normal gaming. Can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated when the power supply is started, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is started in the normal game state (does not shift to the setting change / confirmation mode), the timer interrupt process 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, the base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed by the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state described above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing of the timer interrupt processing step S233 shown in FIG. 181 and the base display output processing of the timer interrupt processing step S2087 shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register save buffer (step). S261). In step S261, the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

After that, it is determined whether the first power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and 5AH is set when the area outside the game control area is initialized. Will be done. That is, if the value of the initial power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is set in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within a predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the ejection ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section of the base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes display of a test section with less than 500 out balls, and blinking display when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) (for example). Step S269).

After that, the register value is returned from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is returned to the original value (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

Next, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal when the power is turned on, the setting change mode, or the setting confirmation mode is notified, the pachinko machine is notified to the employees in the hall. Inform the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern in combination with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). It should be noted that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs blink at high speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 "RAM error" characters are displayed sound (sound effect) RAM error notification sound is output (RAM error notification sound is set change) It may be the same as the notification sound other than the mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (voice) Output the voice of "RAM error" Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp) provided on the door frame 3 Including, excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED All off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output By changing the setting on the main control board 1310 The RAM was cleared, or the power was turned on again to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at medium speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Display sound of "setting changing" (effect sound) Output sound of setting change mode notification sound (voice) " Outputs the sound "Settings are being changed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Flashes white (excluding top lamp, ball burnout and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition for re-notifying the output Peripheral control board 1510 Received "A001H" as an operation command when turning on the power

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at low speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the characters "Setting confirmation in progress" Sound (sound effect) Output setting confirmation mode notification sound (setting confirmation mode notification) The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (voice) Output the voice of "setting is being confirmed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding ball burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as an operation command when the power is turned on.

As for the notification of the above-mentioned three states, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be set in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 has a high priority for notification, and priority 9 has a low priority for notification. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be performed, the notification with a high priority (small number) is performed. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions having the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict, even if the plurality of conflicting notifications are switched and notified, the previously established notification is performed and the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be performed. Specifically, at priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so that the notifications do not conflict with each other. At priority 4, the prize ball excess abnormality notification and the ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may compete with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM error is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in the setting change mode 3: RAM clear RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the switch 954. Notification (excluding RAM clear by changing settings)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize balls when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Abnormal notification priority 4: Ordinary electric accessory A predetermined number or more continuously when the electric accessory is not operating When a prize is detected, or when a prize equal to or higher than a predetermined value is detected during the operation of one ordinary electric bonus, the normal electric bonus prize abnormality notification priority 5: Difference between the number of prizes and the number of discharges of the large prize opening Discharge abnormality notification priority when the number exceeds a predetermined number 6: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of consecutive prizes are detected when the big prize opening is not operating, or when a single big hit, a predetermined or more prizes are awarded. Large prize opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, the details of the power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) described above will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 makes a determination as to whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is held while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2006). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

After that, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages of 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time reduction) and return to the normal state with low probability time reduction). In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the set value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the power is cut off and the setting change mode is started to reset the set value and continue business, and the original setting value is set again. There is a need. In order not to generate such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer is timed up, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used. (Step S2008). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2009). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power cutoff process was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

If there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 in FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 of FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different, so that the program can be shared by both. You can reduce the size.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2019). If the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the process proceeds to step S2031 in FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM abnormality (08H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error is always via a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting status management area (step S2022), and FIG. 187 is shown. The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is confirming the setting, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 are performed. Either of the determination of the operation of (step S2021) and the determination of the operation of (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and the setting state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination result can be determined based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the RAM abnormality initialization process. Initialize the RAM (work area and stack area) used outside (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2036), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). The details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step 2041). The details of the random number update process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power outage process, the process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2042). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed is reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be surely completed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value) that may be changed between the power-on and the execution of the main control side main processing in the work area in the game control area. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2045). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid to enable access to the entire area of the main control RAM 1312. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM abnormality initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and all the registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether or not the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on based on the value of the initial power-on flag at the time of power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means when the power is first turned on as a pachinko machine and when the power is turned on from a state where the backup power is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data of the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

If the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not the initialization at the time of the first power-on, it is determined whether the discharge ball to be calculated based is out of the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharge ball to be calculated based is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball to be calculated based is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the RAM error initialization process is terminated and the process returns to the caller process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written to and initialized in all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the used area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag at the time of power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the caller's process.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is not set.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to the input of an unauthorized detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, the winning detection is performed, but the fraud is not detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (Goto teacher) who intends to commit fraud forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt process, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. Is suppressed and LED flicker is prevented.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the game state error signal may be turned on, and the others may be turned off.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2072) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

Subsequently, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is stored. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as a large winning opening and excessive winning of ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is lit according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. It manages the time such as the ACK signal input judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not it is. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. And store it in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program is used. Creates a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch, which creates a corresponding command when the passage of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch is detected and sets the command in the transmission information storage area, is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed by using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is displayed. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the random value for jackpot matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the random number value of the jackpot symbol. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the random value for big hit matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" means a state in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery "). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2070 in FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, the process returns to the caller's processing without executing the setting processing.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM error is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure is processed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting status management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the caller process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for the period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error condition continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In the case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored and the setting change mode continues after a power failure occurs during the security signal output by the setting change mode ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output by the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output should be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the security signal is abnormal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2106). The setting change switch 972 may be configured to be also used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 is used. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the driver is driven so as to output the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter (step S2113) and output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to caller processing.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is made into a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). As shown in FIG. 202A, the power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is the initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S212). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202B, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the gaming state of the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command for notifying the set value.

Along with the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted to display the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In, the hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The order in which the special symbol hold count command is sent is to send the power-on status command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, even before these commands are sent, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is executed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is restored, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, setting value command) are sent when the power is restored, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and updates random numbers other than random numbers mainly for making a winning determination in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt permission (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, interrupts are prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Initial value Interruption is permitted after random number update processing. The initial value random numbers are a random number for determining a big hit to draw a big hit of a special symbol, a random number to draw a hit of a normal symbol, and a symbol type (low probability / high probability / time saving / non-time saving, etc.) at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle, such as a random number.

After that, a random number other than the winning random number (excluding the initial value random number) is updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the caller process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of the timer interrupt process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, it is preferable that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode. It does not switch between confirmation modes, but only has a function as an operation to change the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), executes the switch input process 3 (step S2141), and details of the switch input process 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. do. In step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change / confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer update process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and the switch passage command output process is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by the return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process. do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Further, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected by using the logical correction value specified in the switch winning information data (step S2165).

After that, it is determined whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by referring to the value recorded in the setting state management area (step S2166). Then, if it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire a bit of the input port used during a normal game.

On the other hand, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during setting change / confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode among the input ports can be acquired.

After that, the input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). When it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162 and processes the next input port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times processing is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a mask during normal game. Includes values, setting changing / checking mask values, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area.

The switch input level / edge data area includes n pairs of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the next address of the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. The address of the input level data area and the input edge data area is a 16-bit (2-bit) value, but is set as the address of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, and FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199 (B). Shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Each of the switch winning information data tables shown in FIG. 199 is configured by dividing into n blocks (n is the number of times of processing repetition), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the like. And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports in which the logical correction value and the mask value are different. That is, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is set to a different value between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199. In, different switch winning information data tables are used between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

In order to cope with such a configuration, the switch input process 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the mode is a setting change mode (or a setting confirmation mode) or a normal gaming state, and the start address of the switch winning information data according to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change / confirmation process is terminated and the process returns to the process before the interrupt. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, bit 7 detects a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 at level 1. At bit 6, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. At bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door open sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism, the level becomes 0. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201B is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 08H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal game, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is created twice, that is, when the power is turned on and when the setting is changed / confirmed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it notifies the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the state of the RAM abnormality in the above-described manner (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the game commands during the normal game are continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, it may be notified at a low volume that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the gaming state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting opening is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether or not the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine model may be notified using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220 (C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220 (C), the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before a power failure) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a return destination command when the power is turned on. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the game state related to the special symbol. show. The return destination command when the power is turned on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a set value command. The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The setting value command is sent at the time of recovery from a power failure that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the gaming state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it is changed to the correct set value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of fluctuation of the special symbol), so that the setting is incorrect. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value by using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, or a movable body, and an effect mode that is unlikely to occur (or does not occur) in normal times is performed with a predetermined probability. By generating it, the set value is suggested. This set value suggestion effect may include an effect of another aspect of the effect illustrated below, and may include a ghost. As a set value suggestion effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display device, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value, and changes the variation mode of the symbol from the normal time (for example, the variation of the left and right middle symbols). The start and confirmation timings are different from the normal timing (normally, each symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time, and in the case of high setting, the fluctuation starts in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), voice If you use, a notification sound corresponding to the set value will be generated with a predetermined probability at the start opening prize, or a voice different from the normal time will be generated (male voice in normal time, female voice in high setting). Voice etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating the processing state of the special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start where the normal game state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310nH) → the set value command (A10mH). It will be sent in order.

Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command ( It is transmitted in the order of A10mH).

Further, in the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, then the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H) → the power-on status command (3001H) → the power-on recovery destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, then the setting value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is performed. → The power-on status command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310nH) → the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) activates the setting change mode when the power is restored after the power is turned off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on status command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is turned off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is transmitted. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on status command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is started in a normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) indicating that a plurality of commands return the power is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal gaming state can be started after all the reception of a series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), it is determined. It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the normal game state cannot be started.

That is, in the same manner as the effect in which the above-mentioned game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition is performed (for example, the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc. are received. (The effect corresponding to the command is performed), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that the inconsistency of the gaming state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game supplements the set value command missed when the power is turned on and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it receives the set value command when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on. It may be updated to the setting value corresponding to the command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of a value set after the power is restored from the state before the power is cut off in the setting state management area.

The operation when the power of the pachinko machine with the setting function is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example will be described in the case where the normal gaming state (VALUE_PLAY = 00H) is set when the power is cut off immediately before the power is cut off and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. Even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least the area in which the information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (the storage in which the information related to the game is stored). The area (area related to special symbol, area related to normal symbol, area related to prize ball, random number generated by the program (variable pattern random number, initial value random number, etc.)) only needs to be maintained, and it is necessary to return to the game state before the power failure. The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a different state after the power is restored than before the power failure. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal gaming state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of the presence / absence and the presence / absence of the operation of the setting key 971, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

The initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 can be performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area together with the storage area initialized by the initialization process already executed when the power failure occurs. good. For example, when the power supply is cut off during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area for which the initialization process has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of a power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is being initialized (for example, the RAM clear process in progress flag) is provided, and while the RAM clear process in progress flag is set, the area is provided. It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

Further, the process of monitoring the power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, a power failure warning signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

The power failure monitoring process and power cutoff process can be executed in the same process in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or in separate processes, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation. In the mode, it may be executed by a common process, and in the normal game state, it may be executed by another process. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power cutoff process may be shared in at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1 it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, it is activated in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. (The setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, or if any switch is not operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1 it always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the operation may be performed in another pattern shown in FIG. 204 (C), unlike the pattern 2-1. good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312 The memory content of is not changed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value in the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process.

That is, in pattern 2-1 the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode regardless of the state after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is made when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode is performed by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is activated, and the game cannot be executed when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states (RAM error). And. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as a RAM abnormal state, and it is normal after passing through the setting change mode. Start the game. Therefore, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as RAM abnormality and the setting confirmation mode, and the game is canceled by notifying the hall. Employees may be prompted to activate the configuration change mode.

When a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation is performed without initializing the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process. After that, once the power is cut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and it becomes the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An operation example will be described when the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before the power is cut off and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored as shown in FIG. 204 (D). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds). In this case, as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value in the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the above), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirmation of the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of recovery from a power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The stored contents of the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored (1). Initialize the device built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) It is advisable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of setting interrupt permission.

Further, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination of whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). Judge the presence or absence of the operation of. Then, when the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is set). Regardless of whether the activation operation is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or none of them is operated), the RAM abnormal state is maintained. That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing, but the power is turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If so, different processes are executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again from the RAM error state and it recovers, when starting in the setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but it starts in the setting confirmation mode. When doing so, a process different from the normal process is executed in the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart when shifting to the setting change mode in the setting change mode during a power failure with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 207).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting change mode in the setting change mode during a power failure with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 208).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 209).

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the start of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting status management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 above according to the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and updates the base display 1317. The later set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. To.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 ends all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal gaming state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. As described above, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and the operation error at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. It should be noted that both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so either of them is the main control board. It is enough to send to.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the effect of waiting for customers. During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is set. This is to secure it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned off in the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode immediately before the power is turned off. , The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the start of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area to set. Move to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). When the value of the setting state management area becomes 00H, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. In the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized in principle, so that the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command when the power is turned on.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state). For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the effect of waiting for customers. During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode. As shown in FIG. 204 (B), if the setting change mode is used when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on. It shows the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the start of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting status management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 resets its operating state and returns to the initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program of the power cutoff processing, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off process, the power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and resetting due to the power supply (5V) being reduced before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process, so that the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power failure is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 resets the operating state and returns to the initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the effect of waiting for customers. During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the whole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so this is the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in a different operation mode by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on, even if the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the start of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting status management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 resets its operating state and returns to the initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and the base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program of the power cutoff processing, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off process, the power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and resetting due to the power supply (5V) being reduced before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the signal level of 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. Since the value (02H) indicates the setting change, the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Will be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process, so that the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power failure is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is changing the setting, YES is set in step S2015, the branch is branched to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187), and the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034) is executed. However, if it branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power is cut off is continued without executing the RAM error initialization processing step S2034. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, regarding the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to be ON when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set when the power is turned on. It is possible to start the setting change mode even if it is not ON.

Although it is indicated by a broken line at the timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned off when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is displayed. You may record 00H and restart in a state where normal games cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system restarts in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 resets its operating state and returns to the initial state when the power is cut off, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). It should be noted that the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the effect of waiting for customers. During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the whole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so this is the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is used when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the start of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting status management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the program of the power cutoff processing, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power-off process, the power consumption during the power-off process can be reduced, and resetting due to the power supply (5V) being reduced before the power-off process is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, power is supplied to the main control board 1310, and when the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335, and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. Since the value (01H) indicates the setting confirmation, the system is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 to be ON when the power is turned on and the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated to OFF, and further, the setting key 971 is not ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

Even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting confirmation mode and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is used as the base display without updating the set value. It is continuously displayed in 1317.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it ends the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. You may. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 cancels the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state). For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the effect of waiting for customers. During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect of the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some of the decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the whole computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so this is the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of a jackpot determination threshold table. In the jackpot determination threshold table, the hit determination threshold value of the jackpot determination random value for drawing the jackpot of the special symbol is stored.

The jackpot threshold value determination table shown in FIG. 210 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The determination threshold table for each set value stores the threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the threshold value at the time of high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the threshold value for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold value determination table with the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset. Then, when the big hit determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is equal to or more than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value has a lower threshold at low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state), and a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state). Store the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, with the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the block is a low probability block or a high probability block in the selected threshold value judgment table, and the lower limit threshold value and the upper limit for big hit judgment are determined. Get the threshold. Then, when the big hit determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

The jackpot judgment threshold table shown in FIG. 212 is an address table for selecting a low probability setting value table, a judgment threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a high probability setting value table, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a table for low probability and a table for high probability integrally, whereas the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a table for low probability and a table for high probability. It is configured separately.

In the low probability setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each low probability (normal state) setting value is defined, and in the high probability setting value table selection address table. Defines the pointer address of the determination threshold table selected for each set value with high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value for low probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state). The judgment threshold table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) determines whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table, and is determined. The set value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the set value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current set value is selected by the acquired offset. Then, when the big hit determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

[12-17. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting change function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to describe the function separately from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the processing of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to the operation in the operation of the process) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose register is divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without retaining the information in the event of a power failure, which is different from the area of the RAM in which the information is backed up in the event of a power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 makes a determination as to whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is held while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2206). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer is timed up, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2207). The standby for starting the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2208). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2208.

After that, the set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range, and it is determined whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). The details of the set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because the information used in one process does not affect the other process in order to ensure the independence between the process outside the game control area and the process inside the game control area. After that, the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. The general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process at the time of turning on the power.

The value set in the setting state management area in the second embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220 (A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power cutoff process was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

After that, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). As the register in which the value of the PF port is stored, a general-purpose register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235 is different. In this way, since the value of the setting status management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clear processing are shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the size of the program size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error is always via a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure (step S2227).

After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2228). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting status management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is set. If the state at the time of the power failure is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the mode may be changed to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure, instead of the normal gaming state.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226) and the setting key 971 Which of the operation determination (step S2228) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, it is possible to determine an abnormality outside the game control area based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM clear process outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2232), and the processing when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal is executed (step S2233). Details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the set value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the set state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clear process outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When a RAM abnormality outside the game control area occurs, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and the game stops, as in the case of a RAM abnormality inside the game control area. It is not possible. However, while the condition for clearing RAM outside the game control area is only setting change, the condition for clearing RAM inside the game control area is setting change and RAM clear switch 954 operation (even if no RAM error has occurred). When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the operation of the employee).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area of step S2235, excluding the set value and the set state management area causes damage to the hall side when the set value becomes high due to an illegal RAM clear operation by the player. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game at the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off with the command stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process is started and the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2237), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is activated at the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. You may. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), determines whether the set value in the set state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value in the set state management area is within the normal range. do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the gaming state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.).

In the set value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220 (A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages of 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is out of the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on processing. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on processing.

Regarding the values and the set values recorded in the set state management area, it is determined whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal even during the progress of the game (every change start, when the game state is switched, etc.). Therefore, the condition for determining the RAM abnormality regarding the set state management area and the set value during the game, and the RAM abnormality (the work area in the game area excluding the set state management area and the set value and the outside of the game area) when the power is turned on. The two conditions for determining (work RAM abnormality) are different. It should be noted that some of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the set state management area and the set value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the reason why the RAM abnormality judgment conditions are different is that if the RAM abnormality judgment regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on, if the set value is changed due to a malfunction due to fraudulent activity or noise, a hole or a game This is because it causes a disadvantage to the person, and it is desirable to detect the abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs.

In addition, by making the RAM abnormality determination process related to the setting state management area and the set value into a subroutine during the game, the same program can be used multiple times by calling the subroutine as necessary while the game is in progress to determine the RAM abnormality. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it in a place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be handled as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set before the power failure, and when the RAM abnormality is determined when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, if an abnormality (that is, a RAM abnormality) occurs in the value of the setting state management area, it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the target of the RAM abnormality determination at the time of turning on the power or may be excluded from the target of the RAM abnormality determination.

As for the priority order in the determination at the time of turning on the power, the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Further, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing the RAM clear process by the RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the priority of the derived states, it is possible to accurately derive the high priority state even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on out-of-game area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on time process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value in the stack pointer (step S2261). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2263). Specifically, if the value of the power-down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized by the first power-on or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and is the calculated checksum normal? Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. It should be noted that, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the check sum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to the blinking cycle value (600). (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the time of the LED blinking cycle timer is up. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling the mode switching in the base display 1317, and when the mode switching time timer is timed up, the mode is switched to the base display mode.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area for initialization (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) saved in the register save buffer outside the game area and used in the caller's processing are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on processing.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing. The out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing is executed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214), and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), and then sets the stack pointer value. All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the process of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). It should be noted that the stack area outside the game control area may be used as a save buffer for storing all the registers in the process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process outside the used area is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the RWM initialization process outside the used area will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normal determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMEROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, 5 seconds is set in the LED check timer, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set in the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all the register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on processing of the caller.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the used area. The out-of-use RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and initializes it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written to the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and initialized (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the processing when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is made into a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the initial setting at power-on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later in FIG. 220B, the power-on operation command is a command consisting of two bytes for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting status management. It is the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is the initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller is called. Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220C, the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, in which the upper byte indicates the state before a power failure and the upper byte indicates a state before a power failure.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the game state related to the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory are shown. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the set value, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value.

Along with the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted to display the hold number on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The order of transmission of the special symbol hold count command is transmitted after the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command are transmitted, before these commands are transmitted, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF of the setting key 971 is detected and the setting change / confirmation process is completed. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change / confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from the power-on process step S2239 and the setting process step S2355, so that the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.) on the peripheral control board 1510. By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification corresponding to a state such as a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, and a RAM abnormality.

In the setting / confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employee of the hall (peripheral board box 1520) is stopped. (Adjustment of volume and brightness by the volume provided in) may be effective. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the full screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display whether the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is abnormal. .. In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Further, the notification may be performed by using a partial lamp or all the lamps (the lamp provided in the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during normal game, so if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to a hot start, RAM clear, and RAM error, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on processing. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command at the time of setting change / confirmation end.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 is described above according to the normal game startable state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). (See FIG. 184). Although the notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, the demo screen is displayed and the standby state for explaining the game content is produced.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the game commands during the normal game are continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, it may be notified at a low volume that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the gaming state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting opening is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second embodiment defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further notifies the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized to notify the RAM clear. Further, when the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a low probability / non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a high probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 is restored without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

Further, as described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the gaming state at the time of the power failure in order to restore the state before the power failure, but the power-on state command is used. , The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred.

If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power outage process, the process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2312). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from being performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed is reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be surely completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the process when the power is turned off will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value) that may be changed between the power-on and the execution of the main control side main processing in the work area in the game control area. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2318). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. Therefore, by invalidating the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the process when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main processing (FIG. 221), and necessary processing is executed before the power is turned off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), and sets the stack pointer value. All the register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5AH is set in the power-down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). When 5AH is recorded in the power-down check area, the power failure process is normally executed. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process is executed normally, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control is performed. The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed are provided in each of the game control area and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. .. This is because the determination is made twice between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, it is independent. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power failure processing has been executed normally, 5AH is erroneously set in the flag, and if the flag is restored without performing the power failure processing, it is erroneously assumed that the power failure processing was executed normally. Is judged. By making a double judgment in this way, the possibility of erroneous judgment is reduced.

Further, the two flags are provided in separate areas (for example, areas where the lower byte (** 00H to ** FFH) or the upper byte (00 ** H or 01 ** H) of the address do not overlap). Therefore, even if the data is rewritten due to a defect such as noise, it can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) saved in the register save buffer outside the game area and used in the caller's processing are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the caller is returned.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is not set.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since NO is determined in step S2335, winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected. For example, since the operation of changing the setting and confirming the setting is performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are in a state of being easily shaken, so that the vibration sensor can be used. There is a possibility of false detection of vibration. Therefore, by stopping the detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, such false alarm can be prevented. In addition, the employees in the hall have magnets for collecting the balls that have fallen on the floor, and it is possible to prevent false alarms of the magnets held by the employees when changing settings or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, restricting, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at the time of turning on the power). After the end of), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during the setting process), the fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the above means.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (Goto teacher) who intends to commit fraud forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the result is updated regardless of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed, so the random number generated by the software is also updated at the same timing as the hardware random number is started, that is, By updating during the process of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random numbers and software random numbers is unlikely to occur, and the design value of the expected value of the production in the game and the expected value from which the big hit is derived at the time of a specific production. It is possible to suppress the deviation from.

After that, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). The set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it is at the start of fluctuation and at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability). It is advisable to take the opportunity of satisfying specific conditions such as switching, the start and end of the jackpot game, the start and end of the time saving state), and the fraud detection (for example, when the door is opened and when the magnetism is detected). Even if the determination is not made periodically in a short cycle as in the case of executing the timer interrupt process, if the determination is made when a specific condition is satisfied, the resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting state management area immediately after is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt process, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. Is suppressed and LED flicker is prevented.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed, and the test signal is output (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved and restored after the process is completed, as in the case of other out-of-game area processing. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a processing outside the game control area. If the test signal processing is executed as a process in the game control area but does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag registers (steps S2337 and S2340) executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. The command generated for each command generation is stored in this transmission information storage area, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area in the FIFO format of the serial communication circuit.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2345) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area is the same as the process described above in FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 of FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the caller's process.

As a result, in the case of a RAM error, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM error is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM error is cleared. This is because the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine because the RAM abnormality is not re-notified when the command is missing if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, the game is not performed and commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. is doing.

That is, the pachinko machine of this embodiment has a predetermined number of times (for example, timer interrupt processing) executed in a predetermined cycle in a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command). The first case in which a small number of times such as once, two or three times is transmitted) and the second case in which the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at predetermined cycles without limiting the number of times during operation. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 is correctly received, and other game-related commands are not transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command to be sent.

Upon receiving the command regarding the RAM abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the command related to the received RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and the normal notification can be performed.

The command regarding the RAM error may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing of transmission. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the transmission timing. For example, by making the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during a normal game). Can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be different in each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality at the time of turning on the power continues, it is possible to notify that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the set value is abnormal.

During the RAM abnormality notification, the player may stop the setting adjustment function (for example, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3). This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM error is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure is processed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined that the setting change or setting confirmation is completed), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting status management area is initialized (step). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the caller process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt process), the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

Further, when fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, it is preferable to output the security signal for the period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 starts.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error condition continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. If the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or if a hot start occurs after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored and the setting change mode continues after a power failure occurs during the security signal output by the setting change mode ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output by the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output should be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the security signal is abnormal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal is canceled.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). The setting change switch 972 may be configured to be also used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 is used. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area is not a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and a process of displaying the set value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to caller processing.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting change function will be described. In the third example described below, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game, which is the main difference from the second example described above. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the above-mentioned alternative example 2.

In the third example, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In the third embodiment, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation is not performed after stopping the function of the gaming machine as a RAM error and making it impossible to play. The main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, and the game is controlled so as not to be executed.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is effectively set, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to a malfunction or a malfunction, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing, a reset occurs. Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clear process, but also the game cannot be restarted unless the hall employee performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be effectively set. By effectively setting the prohibited area, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud, etc., the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM error release operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraudulent activity can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state other than a power failure).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 makes a determination as to whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is held while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after turning on the power. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2406). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. In the loop of step S2406, since the watchdog timer is not cleared, the watchdog timer is reset unless the power failure is canceled. In this reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check like the system reset, and the power-on processing is executed. Therefore, unless the power failure warning signal is released in the loop of step S2406, the loop is not exited.

In this way, the power failure determination process for detecting the power failure warning signal is first in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and second in step S2450 of the main control side main process during normal gaming. Running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power failure process after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power failure, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), the power failure process is not executed even if the power failure is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be correctly restored without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by the reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer and the game control RAM 1312. In the system reset, the program is started after the security check for several hundred milliseconds is executed, but in the user reset, the program is started immediately without executing the security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs by the watchdog timer during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. To. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clear process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, even if a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of power failure is correct. You can return.

In this way, regarding the reset generated by the watchdog timer, it is normal to provide a case where a setting change operation for clearing a RAM abnormality is required and a case where it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 1. The reset by the watchdog timer occurs during the game, when a software problem occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the content different from the game state at the time of the power failure is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the reset by the watchdog timer occurs in the power-on processing when a hardware problem occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initially used. This is because there is little need to reset it.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets caused by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-mentioned process can be executed by a reset generated by one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer is timed up, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2407). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2408). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the power failure warning signal is during a power failure may be determined not only in both steps S2406 and S2408, but may be determined in either one.

After that, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in the third embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220 (A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) among the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, and The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power cutoff process was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power failure". It is not necessary to re-execute the process (process to judge the match of checksum and backup flag), and the size of the program can be reduced.

Further, the value of the setting state management area at the time of power failure or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power recovery is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436. It is necessary to execute the JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by specifying S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, JUMP is shown in the source code example illustrated below. You can reduce the number of orders.

Source code example when the RAM error value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR Z, $ 111;
$ 000:
LD W, 03H; Equivalent to S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$ 111:
CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, $ 000;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
Source code example when a RAM error value is temporarily set in step S2419
LD W, 03H; S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as the tentative setting value. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435 is different. Therefore, since the value of the setting status management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the program for both RAM clear processing is shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example illustrated below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting status management area at the time of determination, but then 00H is set in the setting status management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON. Processing to record is required. Therefore, since the processing content differs between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing when the setting is changed, dedicated processing is required for each part other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to make the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 common between the time when the setting is changed and the time when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is temporarily set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A, 10H; S2426 (PF port information is stored in the A register)
JR NZ, $ 000; (bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR NZ, $ 111;

LD W, 01H; S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;

$ 000:
Equivalent to XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2435; Increase

$ 111:
XOR W, W; increase
LD (VALID_PALY), W; Increase
JR S2436; Increase

S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436
Source code example when 00H is temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

CP A, 10H; S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W, 01H;
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on by using the value stored in the register (step S2426). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error is always via a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of the power failure is the RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the setting value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, even if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal gaming state.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is turned off, and when the work area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal when the power is restored, the game is stopped. The game process may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the power switch ON / OFF.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is turned off, and when the power is restored, the work areas in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and are set. When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. By doing so, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the game state before the power failure occurs (step S2427). By doing so, the effect corresponding to each gaming state (for example, low-probability state or high-probability state, time-saving state or non-time-saving state) on the peripheral control board 1510 side (background, decorative pattern mode (low-probability time)). Preparations are made to restore (using decorative symbols of different aspects between high probability and high probability). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, a power-on operation command is made. Used when creating.

After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2428). If the setting key 971 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting status management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426) and the setting key 971 Which of the operation determination (step S2428) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above can be used to determine an abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432), and the process when the RAM outside the game area is abnormal as shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2432 is restored (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the set value and the set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM after the power is cut off with the command stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process is started or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when moving to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to interrupt enable. The time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of the CTC1 for the normal game is still set to disabled.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, the winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hard random number, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) for the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. Determination (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 in order to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, after switching the interrupt timer for the normal game, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal game (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting process) is stopped, and the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2454) is stopped. The timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt enable is set (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed.

When a power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the power cutoff process in the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from being performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed is reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be surely completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power OFF processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value) that may be changed between the power-on and the execution of the main control side main processing in the work area in the game control area. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write prohibition) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. When an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area and an access is detected in the specified prohibited area by setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 performs. It may be reset.

In the above-mentioned processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 3, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) for the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting process executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured to allow use of either bank. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process for the setting process or the normal game. Therefore, although the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is not set.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, NO is determined in step S2473, so that the winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode and that the fraud is not detected.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (Goto teacher) who intends to commit fraud forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like. For example, while an employee in the hall is changing settings or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position close to the next pachinko machine. For this reason, while the setting change operation and the setting confirmation are being performed, it is possible to detect the goto action caused by radio waves or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt process for setting change processing, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is set in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but the determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , A solenoid signal such as a large winning port / electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of receiving a command to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt process, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. Is suppressed and LED flicker is prevented.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is issued. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Further, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is set. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit without determining the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit may be set to the same amount as or less than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible with one timer interrupt cycle. If one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20 = 4, so 4 commands should be the upper limit. In practice, the upper limit may be set to 5 commands, which is one more command. This is because the maximum command length is assumed to be 20 bits, but there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so as not to be full. The capacity of the storage area where the previous command is stored should be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2481) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed, but since the hard random number has already been started in S2438, it is hard. Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed by the timer interrupt process for normal games (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. May be good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for a normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured to allow any bank to be used. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the setting process or the timer interrupt process for normal games. Therefore, although the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is not set.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, the switch input special process is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 is lit according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. It manages the time such as the ACK signal input judgment time set as the judgment condition when judging whether or not it is. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2494). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for output of two channels, and one channel transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the other one channel transmits a command to the payout control board 951. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate may be set so that the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side is lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize ball controlled by the payout control board 951 has a game value, so it is not easily affected by noise, etc., and is transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to garbled commands or omissions. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, commands for production that do not accompany the game value are transmitted, so it is sufficient if the production is restored by the next command, and moreover, a large number of commands are transmitted to perform the production with good response, and the game is played. It is desirable to send the command to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as possible so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the person. The response of the effect is poor (for example, even if a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol does not start to fluctuate in the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy that it may be a malfunction.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error cancellation notification command, etc.), and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. And store it in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program is used. Creates a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch, which creates a command corresponding to the passing detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch and sets the command in the transmission information storage area, is executed (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed by using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is displayed. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the random value for jackpot matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the random number value of the jackpot symbol. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the random value for big hit matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a game state that is advantageous to the player. Further, if the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and if the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" means a state in which the winning probability of the above-mentioned special lottery is set relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" Ordinary lottery "). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second starting port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal board 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a gaming state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2508) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting change function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed by the main processing on the main control side instead of the timer interrupt processing. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the above-mentioned alternative example 3.

In the fourth example, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). In the main control side main process of the fourth example, steps S2481 to S2484 are executed instead of the step S2452 of the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third example. The main control side main processing executes the setting change and setting confirmation processing not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in another example 4. It is also applicable to another example 1 and another example 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes a first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for setting process and a second main loop process (steps S2457 to S2458) for normal game. Even in the main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting processing (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt processing. ) And the normal game process are executed. In this case, since there is only one timer interrupt process executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same processing as that of the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result becomes a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) for the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether the setting change / setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change / setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 in order to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change / setting confirmation process is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed multiple times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed by using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process executed later. The edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared without clearing the edge information of the setting key 971. After that, the interrupt is set to permission (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The reason why interrupts are disabled in the processes from S2482 to S2485 is to prevent the setting change process and the setting confirmation process from being interrupted by the timer interrupt.

In the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and when the game shifts to the normal game (execution of the second main loop process). (Inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the setting change / setting confirmation process is completed, the second main loop process for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in the CTC1 for normal games (step S2454), the interrupt of the CTC0 is stopped, and the interrupt of the CTC1 is activated (step S2455). Set CTC1 to enable interrupts (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed. When it is detected that the setting key 971 is operated to ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that fact and controls the peripherals. The board 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during a normal game, it is desirable that the notification effect does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. Characters, specific symbols, and the like may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is operated to ON may be displayed according to the progress of the game.

When a power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power outage process, the process of backing up the data for returning to the state before the power failure occurs is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). This prevents the timer interrupt processing described later from being performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output port and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power supply cutoff process is completed is reduced, and the main board side power supply cutoff process can be surely completed.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power OFF processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting state management (set value) that may be changed between the power-on and the execution of the main control side main processing in the work area in the game control area. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). This completes the storage of the game backup information. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write prohibition) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312, and when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, determines that the area is abnormal and resets the area. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. When an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area and an access is detected in the specified prohibited area by setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, the main control MPU 1311 performs. It may be reset.

In the above-mentioned processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 4, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) for the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process in the fourth example, the setting change / setting confirmation process (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 229) for the setting change process in the third example is deleted. It is a timer.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after the flag register is stacked at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is not set.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, even if a winning is detected in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball is paid out, a special symbol, or the like. Processing related to the progress of the game, such as displaying the variation of the symbol, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and impacts (vibrations) is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnetism and impact (vibration) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism or vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person (Goto teacher) who intends to commit fraud forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). It is not necessary to determine the value of the game state management area in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472) whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. If so, it may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processes related to the change and display of the set value (steps S2474 to S2476). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. As the mode of this abnormality notification, a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, a sound such as a notification of a magnet, a radio wave, a vibration, or the like, or a security signal may be output from an external terminal board 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify one or a combination.

On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , A solenoid signal such as a large winning port / electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of receiving a command to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt process, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED turn-off time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. Is suppressed and LED flicker is prevented.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similarly to the process of setting change / setting confirmation.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral board command transmission processing may be executed after the processing of S2480 or S2481 of the main processing is completed instead of the timer interrupt processing.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2481) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by the software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine provided with a light guide plate will be described. In recent pachinko machines, a light guide plate that emits light by illumination is provided on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a special symbol variation display game is produced together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be produced by superimposing an image, for example, using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, the effect having a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a larger stereoscopic effect.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become a rut, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on one sheet, and there is a demand for a more interesting production by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 with the center accessory 2500 and the table effect unit 2600 disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is emitted and displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is emitted and displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 has a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 2610 that closes the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. It has 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light on the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and light is applied to the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the second pattern substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light guide plate are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen from the player side. It is getting hotter and looks better in the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by innumerable uneven first reflecting portions that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction on the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by a myriad of uneven second reflecting portions that are reflected to. That is, when the front effect unit 2600 causes the light guide plate LED of the first pattern substrate 2611 to emit light in 2613, the light guide plate 2610 can emit light and display the first pattern 2621, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 is emitted. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are light emitting sources (LEDs with lenses) having strong directivity to irradiate light in a narrow range. Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred to the light guide plate 2610 by any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 is finely formed with irregularities constituting a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and irregularities forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622. In a state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the back side. Various decorative objects of the unit 3000, an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized. The light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region that can be seen through the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back surface side even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, and the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected and is polished. A matte region that has been processed into a glass shape, a lame region where a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of the light in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting point of the LED 2613 for the light guide plate ( That is, a moving region in which a reflection pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted or not depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first pattern 2621 becomes a part of the production of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving regions 2621a and 2621c, lame regions 2621b and 2621d, and matte regions 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmission region 2621f. In the moving regions 2621a and 2621c, a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting portion is switched so that the moving region 2621a emits light or the moving region 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, the size of the first pattern 2621 can be made to appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are arranged by being repeated twice, but the repetition may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, the first pattern 2621 can express a complicated movement. Further, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are alternately repeated, but the characteristic (that is, the moving region emits light) without sandwiching the lame region between the moving regions. Moving regions having different incident positions of light) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emission color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, the color can be changed for each moving region 2621a to illuminate. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED 2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of lines of light extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that an obliquely extending light streak corresponds to the position of the light guide plate LED 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one light guide plate LED 2614 is made to emit light, a streak of light extending diagonally downward of the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the portion of the light guide plate LED 2614 on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610.

Since the second pattern 2622 becomes farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 toward the downward direction of the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker toward the downward direction of the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the light streaks appear to extend backward toward the downward direction of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is radiated three-dimensionally. It is possible to make the illusion like this, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the light guide plate 2610.

Furthermore, it is advisable to arrange the reflective portion so that stereoscopic viewing is possible due to the parallax of the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the second reflective portion that emits light that forms the image of the light streak on the player's retina is different from the light guide plate 2610 between the left and right eyes. By arranging it at the position, it is possible to cause parallax between the left and right eyes of the player, and it is possible to show a second pattern with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction according to a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame regions 2621b and 2621d in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c, and 2622a in which a reflection pattern that reflects light in a specific traveling direction is formed. , The first picture can be composed of a moving picture area (dynamic picture) that appears to move and a still picture area (static picture) that appears to be stationary.

Further, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. Therefore, a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which light of a plurality of wavelengths is mixed) is irradiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the upper direction (for example, an adjacent LED group). (2614 emits light at different wavelengths), so that one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, the matte region 2621e of the first pattern 2621, the stationary pattern in the lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and the moving pattern appearing to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a due to the irradiation of light from the lateral direction. Is reflected. That is, the light guide plate effect is performed by both the still pattern and the moving pattern by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still picture and the moving picture by the first picture 2621 are projected at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 may be composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the moving pattern may not be included in the first pattern 2621. In this case, the light guide plate effect is performed by the still pattern by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction and the second pattern 2622 by irradiating the light from the upper direction. In this case, the still picture by the first picture 2621 and the moving picture by the second picture 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving pattern may be projected after the still pattern is projected, or the still pattern may be projected after the moving pattern is projected. In this way, by projecting the still pattern and the moving pattern at different timings, various effects can be performed. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a still pattern, it is possible to produce an effect such that the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying the background with a still pattern and then displaying the character with a moving pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first picture 2621 and the second picture 2622 may be superposed and arranged. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the area where the two patterns are overlapped on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a pattern to be viewed in a plane and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern to be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in a region where the two patterns are mixed. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided and the transmission area 2621f through which the back surface side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen is provided and the pattern by the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. It can be easily stereoscopically viewed by a person.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without being superimposed. When the first pattern 2621 is a pattern to be viewed in a plane and the second pattern 2622 is a pattern to be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where two patterns are mixed. Therefore, the first pattern is the first. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the pattern 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is provided and projecting the pattern by the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622, the second pattern can be easily stereoscopically displayed to the player. You can see it.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting portion will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region 2621f through which the back surface side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen and a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the traveling direction of the light. The lame regions 2621b and 2621d in which the reflection pattern for reflecting the transmitted light is formed, and the moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a in which the reflection pattern for reflecting the light in a specific traveling direction is formed are provided.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting portion.

The reflective portion is formed by a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light, and the player is made to visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ± 30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second pattern 2622 can be seen by the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks being reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237 (A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown in the figure to be large.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged so that the angle is approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular line of the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are approximately 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237 (B).

Further, the light traveling in the direction perpendicular to the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, in parallel with the reflecting surface 2651 along the reflecting surface 2651, does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and is reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emit from the surface of. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (particularly, an acute angle) with the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651 in a small amount, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light and guides the light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light having a wavelength that reaches a large number is visible to the player's eyes, and the pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment irradiates light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting portion 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having directivity. Therefore, it is possible to cause parallax between the left and right eyes of the player, and it is possible to show a second pattern with depth. That is, since the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye The virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears to be in a recessed position, and the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye are reached. If the virtual intersection with the light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the foreground position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflection surface 2651, or the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting the light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are composed of spherical recesses provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, travel in the light guide plate 2610, and travel from a plurality of directions (that is, that is). The light arriving at the reflecting unit 2660 (by a plurality of paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflecting portion 2660 of the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, when each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame region 2621b will shine. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light in different colors, the lame region 2621b shines with a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in a different color, the lame region 2621b is a mixture of a plurality of colors and glitters.

The matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion and is processed into irregularly shaped irregularities like frosted glass, so that the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described, but next, examples of the light guide plates representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflecting portion in the light guide plate constituting the pattern shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects light incident from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits light to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light input unit 2630a, the second specific light input unit 2630b, the third specific light input unit 2630c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. A specific light input unit 2630a to a seventh specific light input unit are provided. In this method, seven specific light input units 2630 (LED group 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect that causes the light guide plate to emit light in seven colors, and the number of specific light input units may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown) repeat the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) in order from left to right (seventh specific light input unit). After that, it returns to the beginning and is arranged in the order of becoming the first specific light input unit 2630a).

The reflection unit 2670 extends and guides in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light input unit 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610). It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflective portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflective portion 2670 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player sitting in front of the above, the reflective portion 2670 does not appear to emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflective portion 2670 is shown in a state of being recessed in a triangle and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2630. It is not limited to the above, and it may be any one extending in the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630.

The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and the second specific light input unit 2630b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a. A plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c corresponding to the third specific incoming light section 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific incoming light section 2630d. Part 2670d and the like are included.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 is capable of displaying a plurality of patterns 2623 capable of displaying light emission in different modes from each other by reflecting light forward by a specific reflecting portion 2670 among the plurality of reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 includes a pattern 2623a composed of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b composed of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c composed of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. Includes a pattern 2623d consisting of part 2670d and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to circulate in order from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and the LED 2614 is mounted at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2630b, and a third specific light input unit 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to the above, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown), the sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input unit (not shown), and the seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown). Note that FIG. 239 shows the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are not shown. In each LED group, a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in the figure) on the second pattern board 2612 are divided in the left-right direction of the second pattern board 2612, and the order is from left to right. (In the order of the 7th LED group, the 7th LED group is returned to the beginning, and the 1st LED group 2614a is formed). In this embodiment, each LED group has 6 LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection unit 2670a to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light input unit 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection unit 2670b to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflection unit 2670a, third reflection unit 2670c, fourth reflection unit 2670d, etc. reflect to other than the front surface, only the second reflection unit 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light input unit 2630c, and is reflected to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 by the third reflection unit 2670c. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection unit 2670d to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group emits light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is incident on the corresponding reflection unit 2670. It reflects to the front, and the other reflecting part 2670 reflects to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting part 2670 appears to shine from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and is composed of the corresponding reflecting part 2670. It is possible to make the pattern that is being emitted emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED group to emit light, and the plurality of patterns are made to emit light in order to create a moving animation. It is possible to perform such a light emission effect. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar figures are superimposed, a moving effect that emits light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. Can be done.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by a moving effect by a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the light emitting LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light input unit is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 240 (A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f and the seventh specific light input unit 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is exposed to light. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e and the sixth specific light input unit 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflection unit. The 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d and the fifth specific light input unit 2630e, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and the light is incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection unit. The 2670c and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670cd and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b and the third specific light input unit 2630c, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect can be achieved in which the pattern is emitted so as to move from the center to the outside. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241 by changing the number of light emitting LED groups with the passage of time, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light input part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit, and the light incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is emitted from the second reflection unit 2670b. -The seventh reflecting portion 2670 g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 2670 g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected fourth. The second reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection unit 2670e to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670 g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the sixth. The second reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size (emission range) of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect of causing the pattern to emit light so as to shrink can be produced. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time, a moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light input unit is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242 (A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light input unit 2630a is reflected by the first reflection unit 2670a, and the first reflection unit 2670a is arranged. The printed pattern emits light in red, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b is lit in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting unit 2670b, and the pattern is emitted in orange. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting unit 2670d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflection unit 2670e, and the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting unit 2670f, and the pattern emits indigo. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific incoming light unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614 g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern is changed. After a further lapse of time, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614 g are lit in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern is lit. The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflection unit 2670 constituting one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light input unit 2630) is controlled to be repeated with the seven LED groups as the repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LED that emits light in the same pattern (the light emitting source of the light constituting one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end portion where the light is incident on the light guide plate 2610. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (half-value full angle θ = ± 30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern). (Interval between LEDs that emit light) The pattern is provided at a length of 0.87 times α away from the end of the light guide plate 2610.

Generally, if the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L = tan θ × α / 2

In this way, when the moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving pattern area that projects a moving pattern is smaller than the still pattern area that projects a stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the light guide plate 2610 can perform a moving effect in a region narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, the player can be made to recognize the progress of the variable display game without obstructing the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. .. Further, by performing the moving effect in the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player pays attention to, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the excitement of the player due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the table unit 2000 is attached has been described. In this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1). In the visible opening window portion), a region where the moving effect cannot be produced is created within a predetermined distance from the end portion of the light guide plate 2610, and the region where the moving effect cannot be produced can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be produced becomes narrower, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is impossible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is impossible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is arranged on the outside of the center accessory 2500, and the moving effect can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located at a position away from the peripheral edge of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer peripheral edge of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorative bodies (decorative unit 3050, movable effect unit 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end of the light guide plate 2610 is located behind these decorative bodies. A light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and a light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decorative body. As a result, the substrate serving as a light source can be arranged at a position invisible to the player, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Further, the LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613, 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LED for emitting light of the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made into an area where a moving effect can be produced, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time, a moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED correspond to each specific light input unit. A group of 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light input unit is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflection unit 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and the pattern in which the first reflection unit 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting unit 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific incoming light unit 2630b, and the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting unit 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflection unit 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting unit 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific incoming light unit 2630e, and the pattern emits light in blue. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f is lit indigo, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflecting unit 2670f, and the pattern emits indigo. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific incoming light unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further lapse of time, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that the lines of light of seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which the two lines of light shown in FIG. 235 intersect, the emission color of each LED group 2614 is changed as described in FIG. 244. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and you can create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that the seven colors of light streaks flow. Further, by using the left-right parallax so that the streaks of light can be seen in the depth or the front side as the distance from the light source increases, a three-dimensional pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the plan view pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245 (B), since the reflective surface of the reflective portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflection unit 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects light arriving at the reflection unit 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, by a plurality of paths), and emits light to the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), since the parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portion 2660, the player can place the pattern 2621 on the flat pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246 (B), the reflective portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflective portion 2650R is used. The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflective portion 2650L and the reflective portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the left and right of the pattern 2621 composed of the reflective portions 2650L and R are arranged. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern composed of the reflection portion 2650L and the right-eye pattern composed of the reflection portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle at which the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R, and the player has the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern located at the rear position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle at which the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), on the light guide plate 2610, the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R, and the player has the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with parallax. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflective portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by one light guide plate 2610, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like. The thickness of the front effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emission display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. By performing a movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns generated by the light emission of the plurality of reflecting portions 2670 emerge to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Because of this, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emission effect using the conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, and at the same time, something good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emission display of the pattern 2623 is displayed from other players away from the front. It becomes difficult to see, and it is difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the attention of other players and other players. You can play the game without worrying about the player, and you can enjoy the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center bonus 2500 in which the center bonus 2500 is mounted in the center of the front view game area 5a, the patterns 2621 and 2622 are emitted and displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the light-emitting pattern does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually performed can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition, which makes it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 (first pattern substrate) can be obtained by matching the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. It can give a strong impact to the player who thought that it was not, and can surprise the player, and can enjoy the light emission display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effect can be shown to the player, various effects can be produced by combining them as appropriate, and the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained by the effect of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 are different. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to a plurality of patterns 2623 emitted by the light guide plate 2610 to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the patterns 2623 displayed by emission. It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract interest, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be monochromatic LEDs or full-color LEDs. Further, the number of the specific light input unit, the reflection unit, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described. FIGS. 249 to 254 are views showing an example of an effect using a light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is projected on the light guide plate 2610, and the movement effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a preview effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen is blacked out. This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 moved to the liquid crystal display device 1600 and displayed may be the same color as the first pattern 2621 or a different color. Further, the image 1611 moved to and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) or the same character (for example, the character's name) but have the same font and color. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249 (D). It is also preferable that the image is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving images 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are over time. It may be changed according to.

During the movement effect, the mode of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251 the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 has a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 of the initial size (for example). The first pattern 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiation with light from (diagonal direction).

After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249 (F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out (blacked out). With this blackout, the player is made to pay attention to the liquid crystal display device 1600, and a space is created to improve the expectation for the next production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (G), an image 1612 (for example, a character having a high hit reliability) different from the first pattern 2621 or the moved and displayed image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation for hitting is increased, but if the size of the character image 1612 is reduced, the player's expectation for hitting is lowered. The color and facial expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be irradiated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns in a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 (for example, diagonally). A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Further, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and a character image may be projected on another light guide plate. When a character image having a different size and facial expression is projected on the light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to display an effect with a sense of depth.

In the movement effect described above in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting the above, the first pattern 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253 (A)) and before the first pattern 2621 is projected as shown in FIG. 253 (B), the first pattern 2621 is displayed. The movement effect of displaying the image moving toward the projected position on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (D), the movement effect of moving the image toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time when the first pattern 2621 is projected (time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time for the image 1611 to move (time when the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect on which the image 1611 is projected may be started before or after the effect of moving the image 1611. Further, the light guide plate effect time on which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern in which the images are gathered appears to move and a still pattern in which the image does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, when a moving pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is high, and when a still pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), the still pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and the displayed still pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 254 (B). A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, the still pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern as shown in FIG. 254 (C). Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (D), the moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 may be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), the still pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (F), the still pattern 2621 is displayed. The moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (G), even if the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the effect is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 may be produced integrally with the moving effect of the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern may not be subjected to the moving effect.

In this way, in the production of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, the static pattern and the moving pattern are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect by a moving body is added to an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described.

FIGS. 255 and 256 are views showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600 constitute one pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or hides from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short cycle according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly raise expectations for big hits for players. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), the entire movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), the pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and the image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), a movement effect of moving an image from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621 may be performed. ..

The movable body 3601 may be made to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color and light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 255 appears, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. It can be enhanced and can be a pachinko machine with a high degree of interest.

In the above-mentioned example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear in place of the pattern to which the images are collected, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, in addition to the effect of the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256A, the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256B, the light guide plate 2610 displays the pattern 2621. A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256C, a movement effect is performed in which the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. You may. After that, as shown in FIG. 256D, the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping with the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), the pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (F), toward the displayed pattern 1613. A moving effect is performed in which the moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256 (G), even if the image 1611 is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (H), the variable display game ends with a loss without the movable body appearing.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body appears can be performed by using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. , The data output from the main control MPU 1311 may be read, or an illegal signal may be input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. Therefore, there is a demand for a configuration in which it is difficult to detect the input / output signal of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside, and if a serial communication function that continuously transmits data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication is required. It becomes difficult to read data or input data at the timing of the line.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring signals when an inspection organization inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on / off) input to a solenoid drive driver (transistor) is used to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. The signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as an inspection signal, it is difficult for the inspection organization to use the serial signal as the inspection signal because a device for analyzing the serial signal is required. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of an inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal changes the level at the same timing as the solenoid drive signal. Was to be generated. When configured with the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the voltage level differs by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting the input by serial communication and reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit, and a part is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after the power is turned on may not be input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit, but may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, so that the signal level can be detected even other than the timer interrupt processing such as immediately after the power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I / O using the chip select, and the signals are input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the serial signal to be received.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the periphery of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial / parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is the main control MPU 1311 and its periphery. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board 1310 of a component. In FIGS. 257, 258, and 259, the thick line indicates the transmission line of the parallel signal, and the thin line indicates the transmission line of the serial signal.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951 and the like), and the main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port for communicating with the interface circuit (synchronous serial communication function) and control signals of other devices (such as solenoids) are output, and are output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensors and magnetic detection sensors. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission / reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel-to-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmit / receive ports is not limited to the one shown in the figure.

In addition, more serial-parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection such as the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmit / receive port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of. Signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, large winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and a photo sensor are input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. It mainly detects a game ball flowing down the game area 5a. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. As described above, since the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, the data of the ball detection sensor can be taken in at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception port both output a signal for lighting the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342, 1343 and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 are connected to the segment side of the LED and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 dynamically lights the LED by outputting a signal at a predetermined timing. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED whose anode side is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is lit, a drive current is transmitted from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. It flows. However, since the integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each conversion circuit 1342 and 1343 (of the output transistor of the driver circuit). Polarity) will be the same. Therefore, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit and 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel / serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial / parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, the parallel-serial conversion function and the serial-parallel conversion function may be switched and used by an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

Further, two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Similar to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1. Output from the parallel port at the timing of rising to. The output of the parallel port is equipped with a transistor for the driver, and the voltage applied to the transistor for the driver is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of the various solenoids are output. Further, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, etc.) Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Further, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output on the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, for inspection, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 are output. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. In addition, + 12V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid at 12V, and + 5V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. In this way, by using two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Of the outputs from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which only a relatively small current flows is thickened. The pattern may be thin. It should be noted that the resistance of the pattern may be reduced without thickening the pattern, and the pattern may be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the substantial cross-sectional area, or the inner layer pattern may be formed to increase the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Further, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and affects the output signal. Does not occur. That is, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 259.

As shown in FIG. 259, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around the main control MPU 1311. Further, an inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. The circuit components (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection organization, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. It is not mounted on 1 (a pattern for mounting parts is provided). That is, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, but the inspection signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is mounted. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. Therefore, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by the fraudulent person and used for the fraudulent act.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area, but a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit arrangement area is pulled up to the power supply (+ 5V) via a resistor (or to GND). (Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount parts are not used in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted in the commercially available pachinko machine 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the parts of the inspection circuit can be miniaturized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be miniaturized, and the main control board 1310 can be miniaturized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 does not have any parts mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. Since it is not mounted on 1, components can be mounted on the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

Among the components of the inspection circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged in the vicinity of the main control board 1310. This separate substrate is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection organization, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally on the market. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally on the market.

By collectively arranging the circuit parts used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area in this way, it is easy to find the missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and the additional parts for fraud can be found. Easy to find the installation. Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise immunity can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are oriented differently from the same type of circuit components arranged elsewhere in the main control board 1310 (eg, 180 degrees as shown). It is better to arrange it in the direction of rotation). In this way, by arranging the circuit parts in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the other place of the main control board 1310, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the parts used for the normal game from the parts for inspection. In the manufacturing process of a commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit parts are displayed by, for example, silk printing, but the symbols of the circuit parts arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the symbols The numbers may be grouped together with the symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are designated by the symbols after IC12. By doing so, it is possible to add symbols and numbers that do not jump to the circuit parts for game control mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is easy to check after mounting the circuit parts on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors connected to the game control parts and the inspection terminals can be easily separated. It can be distinguished and can prevent incorrect wiring when connecting cables incorrectly. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient for connecting the cable at the time of inspection and connection mistakes can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the empty ports so as to consolidate them into the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated positions. By consolidating and arranging the empty terminals, the area on the main control board 1310 where the print pattern is not provided is aggregated, it is easy to find missing parts, and it is easy to find the installation of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting / outputting a game control signal are arranged on the left and right (upper and lower in the figure) on the side where the terminal of the empty port is located. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of additional parts for fraud. That is, wiring in which a large number of data bus circuit patterns are complicatedly arranged by eliminating a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and becoming several signal lines including a control line. Therefore, it becomes a neat circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the routing distance of the data line, it is possible to configure the main control board 1310 which is resistant to noise.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuit can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines, so that the I / O IC (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit pattern, the ground pattern can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 that is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side (anode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Further, the parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side (LED cathode) of the function display unit 1400. It is connected to the terminal), and the output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side (cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317.

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at regular intervals (for example, interrupts every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms), ..., Only PA7 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Is repeated at a fixed cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when 8 ports are repeatedly switched, each port is turned ON every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped and the output port of channel A is focused on, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on in the timer interrupt processing, and the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms) is performed. Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned on, ..., Only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a fixed cycle (4 ms × number of ports) in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). By performing this fixed cycle operation as serial communication, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the parallel input port of the address D5 is a parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, and a switch (ball detection sensor) for detecting a game ball is connected to the inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as serial signals and read as signals at address D5.

Further, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure warning signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (when requested by the program) or outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on), the main control is performed without going through the parallel / serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input / output ports (both input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 have a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when an abnormality (such as fraudulent activity or failure) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and real-time monitoring (when requested by the program) is required. Therefore, a parallel / serial conversion circuit is used. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, the detection signals of these sensors and switches are used to notify the abnormality by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or voice. By this abnormality notification, the employees of the hall come to check the status of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it makes the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress the erroneous detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double-reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read instructions are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I / O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I / O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. It is performed by executing an instruction to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the level of a port is continuously determined via a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of a general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time performance are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input / output port (both input and output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input / output ports (both input / output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 are part of the general-purpose input / output ports (both input / output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Further, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V via a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from becoming an intermediate potential and prevent the influence of noise induced in the power supply line. It should be reduced. If the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it may be pulled up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pulled down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for the game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signal is aggregated and input to one port, and is easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, the signal that needs to be detected multiple times in a short time (so-called double reading) is input to the general-purpose port, and the signal that does not need to be read twice is serialized. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, it is possible to detect the signal level multiple times in a short time and eliminate the influence of noise to make a judgment. If the general purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are assigned to the general-purpose input / output port (both input and output). Since both can be assigned, the general-purpose I / O port is highly versatile for changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output) be reserved as a spare port for adding new functions, and it is desirable to give priority to the general-purpose input port.

Next, the timing of data output and capture by the synchronous serial signal will be described with reference to FIG. 261.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data acquisition timings of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( Data is fetched from PA0 to PB7 at the time of LOW). Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) and controlled so as not to capture new data.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used for the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at any timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesigning. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input / output interfaces of the main control board 1310, which differ depending on the model, are mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. It is configured to be. Performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated and designed by making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component placement, etc. the same. The main control board 1310, whose quality is stable, can be used in common by a plurality of models without redesigning.

Further, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, the problem is where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating by a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating by a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between the boards can be reduced as compared with the latter, which is desirable. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown at which timing and which data is transmitted. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronized clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The input / output board 1351 is provided with a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. The boards can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or by a connector between boards.

Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired, so that the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to an unauthorized person can be reduced. Further, since the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output signals changing depending on the model are set in the input / output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing this can be increased, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Further, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Further, when the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. It is possible to use the main control board 1310 whose performance (for example, noise resistance resistance) is evaluated and the design quality is stable. Further, if the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting hole are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be diverted without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, the noise countermeasures that change for each model may be taken not by the main control board 1310 but by the input / output board 1351.

The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output the drive signal of the base display 1317 may be arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input / output board 1351 and the signal for driving the function display unit 1400 is input to the input / output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 by the parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the input / output with the main control board 1310 is input / output. This is because the number of connecting lines to and from the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input / output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Further, if the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed and the input / output board box 1350 in which the input / output board 1351 is housed are separately provided, each board box becomes smaller and the board mounting position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it needs to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to be visible from the back surface side of the machine 1, the board installation position is free. As described above, in the form shown in FIG. 263, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In the pachinko machine, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 in order to prevent the pachinko machine from being detected by an unauthorized person. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that the fraudster will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. There are times. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronized clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired.

The example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described above. If there is a part where the resistance to fraud and noise does not decrease even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, the output of signals that require drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, the output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor). The signal input of is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), and a base display. The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on the 1310 on the main control board.

Further, when the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to the empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to the empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that the fraudster tries to acquire are transmitted by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted by a serial signal, it is difficult to analyze the serial signal. The fraudster needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the program and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and the ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front surface member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. On the upper part of the front member 4200, an image display body 4500 for displaying and displaying information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for producing sound, and the like are provided. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. The display of various effects and the display of history information on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying the effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

In the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen in the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is displayed mainly around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form a drive source for the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above, thereby increasing the drive torque and the static torque. This makes it possible to use a small motor as the drive source and reduce costs.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom (variation display). On the other hand, in the state where the reel 4301 is stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number of consecutive symbols (for example, three), that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display unit of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower to the middle reel 4301b middle to the right reel 4301c upper. Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower, a line (down-right line) that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "bet operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether the prize (role) is established or not.

When a prize is established, there are cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on the effective line, and there are also cases where three predetermined symbols are lined up on other lines in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line crossing the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (lower line) and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the lines that can be activated (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines that can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to form a symbol stop line (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the upper and lower lines are the effective lines in addition to the middle line, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and lower right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

Below the design display window 4401, a step portion that protrudes to the front side is formed, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation portion 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The single insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

Below the operation unit 4202, a refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet number by the single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (reservoir medal) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit is also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) constituting the lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part of the inside of the housing. An accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and the payout number display LED4562 is used. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate (print, engraving, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board in the vicinity of the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, an effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are mounted. Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged at the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the credit upper limit due to the addition accompanying the winning of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the payout button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guiding.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio display 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop button 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input to the main board 4600 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c can independently rotate and stop, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c have position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting the reference position regarding the rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c have the position sensors 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the input sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted, and even if the player inserts the medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 4600 to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, the drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the input signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, or the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes CPU 4701, ROM 4702, RAM 4703, input / output interface 4707, VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display body 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal board 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal board 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (hereinafter, “+ 12V”), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, “+ 24V”). The three types of power supplies created by the power supply device 4112, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with the above.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301 is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a quiescent torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V as a motor drive voltage is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be multiplied is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player returns the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed from the display content (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the valid line) displayed in the symbol display window 4401 when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, a total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each displayed winning combination is paid out.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 4910 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as ROM4602 and RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I / O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 4910 will be described. The ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 4910. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 4910 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

The second control area stores a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) without being used for game control are stored is the debugging (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the accessory ratio without being used for game control is stored is used as a bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the game control code 13131 Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first isolated area, the second isolated area, the third isolated area, and the fourth isolated area are continuous areas with the preceding and following areas. For example, the start address of the first isolated area is next to the end address of the first control area. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first isolated area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolated area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debugging (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as a debugging (functional inspection) area in FIG. 267. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 4920 will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. The RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, in the event of a power failure, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

The RAM area 4920 is assigned an address from "3000H" to "31FFH". The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 4920 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when the game control (first control) is executed. The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing the debug control (second control) of the program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). The work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not necessarily used. May be good.

The evacuation area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or bonus ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and bonus ratio calculation, but as in the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and bonus ratio. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, it is possible to maintain more independence in game control, debug (inspection function) control, and bonus ratio calculation.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between and is a continuous area with each area (the area before and after). For example, the start address of the isolated area between the work area for game control and the work area for debugging (inspection function) is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the work area for game control, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code for detecting an error in data is added to each area. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code in each area is a correct value (that is, the data in each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is cut off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be kept away, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 269 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive bonus balls is the number of medals paid out during the continuous bonus operation (for example, during the big bonus). The total payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonus payouts by the total number of catch payouts. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total of FIG. 269 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the bonus ratio calculation area update process (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the bonus ratio is updated. , The continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

FIG. 269 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonuses ratio, the continuous bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games) for each predetermined number of games, and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. Also, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area one lagging behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the bonus ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer makes a round. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are each a 2-byte storage area. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The total number of replays, the number of winnings paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games are stored in a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games when n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of replays, winning payouts, bonus payouts, continuous bonus payouts, and game counts is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949627295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total and the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 in decimal. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the explanation in FIG. 269 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The winning payout number is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the area update processing for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted by the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). However, the data is not erased by other triggers. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, 1 day, 1 week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 269 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio are abnormal values (for example, the bonus ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the bonus ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O area 4930 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 4930, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 4930. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to an input such as a switch, a port related to an output such as a grand prize opening solenoid and an LED drive signal. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 4940 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 270, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. Although the definition of the start address and the end address of each area of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio is omitted in FIG. 270, the third control area start setting is omitted. And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the bonus ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the bonus ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the bonus ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the bonus ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 270, it does not have to be continuous as a setting area. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of ROM 4910 and the isolated area of RAM 4920) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, it is possible to execute the program from the startup processing and execute the initial setting again by accessing the isolated area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power cut flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolated area without setting the power cut flag. Become. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, the game is played in parallel, so if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of the slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game is over. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 4940 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. Before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at startup, the parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset startup process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 4920 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is used as an unused area. Assigned. Further, the work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debugging (inspection function) use (or other use), respectively. Further, in the ROM area 4910, similarly to the RAM area 4920, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the start of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 272, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In this embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is executed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power cut flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start to return to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 272) restores the process to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the game control work area because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs will remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is used. Targeting the checksum calculation target may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when the debug (inspection function) signal (information about the start of rotation of the reel, ON of the start lever, and the winning combination) accompanying the start of the game is output in the process at the start of the game, the debug regarding the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process ( Inspection function) When a signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, a debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning determination process (fixed combination displayed as stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of information on the number of sheets, information on the output signal related to the number of payouts at the time of payout (number of payout medals, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process before the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been cleared, and the like. The set value of the game is confirmed.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 can accept the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes a symbol stop process for processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the winning combination determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined to be a winning combination, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the bonus ratio of the RAM area 4920 (FIG. 268, see FIG. 269) (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects an illegality and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is an interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As mentioned above, since the periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the bonus ratio calculation / display process, and the medal stored in the bonus ratio calculation work area. Calculate the bonus ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The bonus ratio calculation / display process is the same as the bonus ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the bonus ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the bonus ratio, the bonus ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

In addition, when the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (combination ratio, continuous bonus ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the display is displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. Only the values to be calculated may be calculated. Further, the bonus ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated bonus ratio may be displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 triggered by the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal board 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal board 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by the software process. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the software random number built in the CPU is updated. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the signals to be output are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and the values of all the registers are saved in the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the evacuation area for debugging (inspection function), and is allocated to a different area separated from the evacuation area for game control.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, the data is not written to the RAM 4603 in the process, and when writing is required, the information is output to the debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. This makes it possible to ensure independence from other game control programs without using a common area even if the program that executes information signal output processing is placed in a different location from other game control programs. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output by the processing from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Output different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the area for debugging (inspection function). (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a signal in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly separated from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, and is a process that does not affect the result of the game and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is statically called from the game control program and then executed, and at this time, the address of the called destination is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine is completed, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-mentioned embodiment of the pachinko machine, it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio of the slot machine in operation, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be obtained. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various changes and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are made. It includes the composition.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control device that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main control device is
The data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises setting whether to use a synchronization method, a communication rate, a parity, or a stop bit for serial communication with the driver circuit after the power is turned on. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a data storage amount for determining a timing for transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a gaming value to a player.
The main control device that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device, so that the main control device, the display device, and the driver are used. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

This makes it possible to reduce the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same direction as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

This makes it possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode for reducing power consumption without displaying characters and numbers on the display device.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio display cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary power consumption of the gaming machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of the game ball launched toward the game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a bonus ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
The winning openings include a general winning opening in which the shape of the entrance does not change depending on the playing state, and an electric winning opening in which the entrance opens or expands depending on the playing state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls paid out to the player, at least the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening, and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory, and stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous bonus ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the bonus ball ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

When the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. For this reason, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by operating the RAM clear switch, and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is prevented from being deleted by the operation of the staff at the game hall. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine modified to a state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high.

(15A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received to the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player reaches a predetermined number in the normal gaming state.

(16C) The control means is
It remembers the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When the winning of a game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total prize balls are consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the game area). , The game machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by (the sum of the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is the timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, whereby the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the predetermined number is moved to the number.

(16E) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the constraint of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
Count the number of balls consumed by the player,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of machines is counted.

(17D) The information regarding the game value is based on
The control means is
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated, stored in the buffer, and stored.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out balls, thereby causing the total out balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means is
Taking the opportunity of winning a prize at the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold storage of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning of the starting winning opening is not stored and the number of prize balls is counted.

(17G) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine that can be visually recognized when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame, and is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided in the case of the control means so as to be visible from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in the sales of the hall can be suppressed.

(19A)
It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
The preceding paragraphs are characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game execution means. The game machine described.

(19B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
As the predetermined condition, the control means said at any timing of detection of a prize to the winning opening, transmission of a prize ball payout command, reception of confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and reception of a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means is
By controlling the transition from the normal mode to the low power mode in which the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) The effect of the special symbol variation display game is displayed, and the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold storage of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means is characterized in that the display mode is not changed so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a full energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of a normal game state and a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means is
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(21D) The control means is
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, a starting port that is an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the starting port. At least there is a passageway that becomes
The control means is
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the determination of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched into the game area is excluded from the number of game balls winning in the starting port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine provided with peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information regarding the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has transitioned to the second state.

(23B) The information regarding the game value is based on.
The main control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with the timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means is
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of every predetermined time, for each predetermined number of prize balls, or for each predetermined number of consumed balls.
The information about the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and the increase / decrease of the information about the game ball is determined.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by the player at a predetermined timing, and a means for acquiring the number of prize balls.
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
The control means is
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed sphere by the consumed sphere number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed spheres are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information regarding the game value is based on
The control means is
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
An out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area, and an out-port detection means.
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detecting means, and the number of game balls is counted.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the winning balls are counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the number of game balls that have passed through the counted out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means that counts the number of gaming balls ejected from the gaming machine.
The control means is
It has a game state control means for controlling to one of the normal game states and the special game state in which the player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means is
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and controlling the game state to any one of the normal game states.
A means for counting the number of prize balls, excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening, and a means for counting the number of prize balls.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information regarding the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins in the winning opening where the prize is possible.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means is described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information regarding the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the lapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
The first data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
A second data setting means for setting the second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
A third data setting means for setting the third data according to the result of the game,
The first conversion means for obtaining the first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means, and
A second conversion means for obtaining the second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means.
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is obtained by multiplying the first data and the second data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is a game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player.
The third data is the game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls).
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information on the added game value as the second conversion data.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display device displays information (for example, a base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of gaming machines can be displayed accurately in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), it is possible to accurately display information on the game value (for example, a base value) in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes periodic processing to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It has a conversion means for calculating information on the game value, and has
The control means is
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted based on the argument by the conversion means is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of passing an argument and a process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means is
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register to which a divisor is input, a divisor register to which a division is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means is
Write arguments to the divisor register and the divisor register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register, and the quotient is read.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the divisor register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the program to be repeatedly executed.

(28C) A prize game medium number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined game state, and
It has a consumption game medium number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state.
The control means is
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written to the division number register.
The number of consumption game media counted by the consumption game medium number counting means is written in the divisor gista.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iterative process (timer interrupt process), the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A winning opening where a game ball can be won, and
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting prize balls given to a player, and has.
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
The control means is
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
If a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. Is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning openings is a starting winning opening that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of gaming balls.
When the starting winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the starting winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening opened in a special gaming state.
When the winning opening is detected while the winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding a gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29D) The player has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
Each of the preceding means is characterized in that the consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means. The gaming machine described in the section.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means to the total number of consumption balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumption balls, and obtains the consumption balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumption balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total number of consumption balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs as a feature.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
When the control means detects the winning of the winning opening in the closed state and does not pay out the winning balls in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls for the winning. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated by excluding from the number of consumed balls.

(29H) When the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the winning ball number related to the winning abnormality from the consumption ball number and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the number of winning balls related to abnormal winning can be excluded from the number of out balls, and information on the game value (for example, the base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a gaming medium as a prize to a player.
A game area where multiple winning openings are arranged,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize-giving means for granting a predetermined specific prize from any of a plurality of prizes, and a prize-giving means.
A calculation processing means for executing a predetermined calculation process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as prizes given by the prize-giving means.
A processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means, and
A display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device is provided.
When a specific prize is generated among the plurality of prizes in a game, the prize-giving means grants the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the invention of 30, the information regarding the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, prizes (for example, prize balls paid out in connection with winning a prize in a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening or a large winning opening with a large number of prize balls) to which a high-value prize is given) are generated when a specific prize is generated. Even if it is given, the result of arithmetic processing (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). can.

(31A) A game including a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It ’s a machine,
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
Information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
By providing a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Equipped with a general winning opening where a game ball launched into the game area can be won even if it is not in a special game state.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning opening.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the external output means for outputting the information based on the predetermined condition to the external terminal board and the external output means.
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board, and an information storage means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided.
The peripheral control means
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a storage means.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when it is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) The first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means is provided.
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of a signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
Information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
It has a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The peripheral control means
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the ball was released. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and a calculation means.
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means.
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting elements group is output during the period in which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. The game machine is characterized in that the display control of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group is performed in one periodic process by outputting the above at different timings.

According to the invention of 32, a circuit for displaying information on the given game value (for example, a base value or a bonus ratio) can be simply configured, and information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and a calculation means.
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponding to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. Although the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the above are output within the same periodic processing, the said first. The process of outputting the selection signal output to the terminal 1 and the signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal. The process of outputting signals to be output to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is a gaming machine characterized in that signals are output at different timings in the periodic process by different processes in the same periodic process. ..

According to the invention of 33, the circuit for displaying the information regarding the given game value can be simply configured. Therefore, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and a calculation means.
It has a calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means.
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device, and
It has an output driving means controlled by the control device and at least outputting a control signal for displaying by the calculation result display means.
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized by being placed away from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect each other. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device.
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged from the processor in the same direction as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and a calculation means.
It has a display means controlled by the control means and displaying information regarding the game value.
The control means is
A control device that executes processing for game control,
It has a memory that the control device accesses when the process is executed and stores at least information about the game value.
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory.
The control means is
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, it is used as a first initialization means for initializing a predetermined first area of the memory. ,
At the time of turning on the power, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and if it is determined that the input means is operated, the second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have and
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial region also by the first initialization means. Includes overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by the conversion means
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first region other than the overlapping region.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means is
If it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized and the data is initialized.
If it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second area is initialized without initializing the first area.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means is
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal for each execution of periodic processing that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and bonus ratio) regarding the given game value. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A consumption game medium counting means for counting the consumption game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on a given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and a calculation means.
A display means for displaying information on the game value and
It has an electric accessory that is operated by the control means.
Under specific conditions, when a plurality of game media win a prize during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, among the prize-winning game media, some of the game media have information on the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other gaming media, but any gaming medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36B) The control means is
When the predetermined start conditions are met, the variable display game is executed, and
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first gaming state. Control to one of
When a plurality of gaming media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the gaming medium won in the second gaming state is used for calculating information on the gaming value, and the first gaming. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs are characterized in that the gaming media that have won a prize in the state are not used for calculating the information regarding the gaming value, but any of the gaming media can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means is
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines and detects them.
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the winning game medium in a state where the error of a predetermined type is detected is used for calculating the information on the game value. However, although the game medium that won the prize in the state where the error of the predetermined type is not detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any game medium can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, since the game medium is switched to be used for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the game machine, the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is difficult to change the setting, which makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit as compared with the case where the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of conversion.

(37B) When performing a setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game, the outer frame, the main body frame that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame and the game board is provided, and the changed setting state. It is a gaming machine equipped with a setting status display unit to be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making it difficult to see what is displayed by the setting state display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation unit for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to the game are provided. It ’s a pachinko machine,
A gaming machine characterized by having a determination difficulty means that makes it difficult to operate the setting determination operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted.
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, it is characterized in that it is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion by a specific portion of the outer frame. A game machine to play.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation for a specific operation unit is provided.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A variable time determining means for determining the variable time of the symbol, and
It is provided with a probability determination unit that determines the probability that the hit result is derived to one of a plurality of probabilities based on the operation for the specific operation unit.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the probability determined based on the operation for the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation for a specific operation unit is provided.
The fluctuation time determining means may determine a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different fluctuation time according to the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that a different variation time is determined according to the setting information is set lower than the probability that the common variation time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines one of a plurality of predetermined setting information related to a game based on an operation for a specific operation unit, and a setting information determination unit.
Equipped with an effect control unit that performs a predetermined effect,
The fluctuation time determining means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information.
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to the specific setting information in the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion effect suggesting a result and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player detect the setting state in a new mode and improve the game entertainment.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls a game, another control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control. It is a gaming machine equipped with a setting-related operation unit for changing the setting state related to the game performed by the department.
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means that allows an operation related to a change of the setting state to the setting-related operation unit.
The setting change allowable state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information, the operation related to the change of the setting state is permitted. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit that controls a game and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to control performed by the game control unit are provided, and a game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined launch operation unit. It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening with a gaming ball fired toward.
It is characterized by having a launch disabling means for disabling the launch of a gaming ball by the operation of the launch operation unit for a predetermined period when the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state. Gaming machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine including a gaming control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the gaming control unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(38B) The case described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing the setting can be accommodated together with the game control unit. Pachinko machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
The first operation unit for starting the setting state in which the setting can be changed, and
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by having a setting display for displaying the contents of the setting.

(38D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine having no setting function can be standardized, and efficiently designed and produced.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor for executing a program for controlling a game, a memory accessed by the processor, and a game control unit.
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory, and
A gaming machine provided with a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed.
The game control unit
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated, the setting state is started.

(39B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit initializes a first area of the memory after the end of the setting state.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the game control unit is described in a second region that is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the memory is initialized.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A gaming machine including a gaming control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the gaming control unit.
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information regarding the given game value.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting.
The game control unit is characterized in that, in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means are displayed so as not to be confused.

(40B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are composed of one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the given game value on the display without delay as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display device in place of the information on the given gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by different indicators.

(40F) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the setting state, any of the characters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state is displayed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the above setting state, the light is turned off or all lights are turned on.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

According to the invention of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start opening, and
A production determination means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
The effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the effect executing means.
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, the setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on the predetermined display unit is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the setting suggestion effect is determined by the effect determination means.

(41B) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start opening, and
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
A production determination means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
The effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and the effect executing means.
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the setting suggestion effect can be executed during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a start condition, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, and a special symbol change execution means.
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the start condition is restricted.

(41D) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a start condition, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, and a special symbol change execution means.
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol change in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the start condition.

(41E) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a start condition, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, and a special symbol change execution means.
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of start conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, and a special symbol change execution means.
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect is restricted in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41G) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a start condition, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol change execution means for executing a special symbol change based on the establishment of a start condition, and a special symbol change execution means.
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(42A) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing,
It has a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and has.
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
The first storage means is used when the first program is executed, and the first storage means is used.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) The first storage means and the second storage means are gaming machines characterized in that accessability is switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction for switching the first storage means to be accessible and the instruction for switching the second storage means to be accessible are characterized in that at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand) is different. Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game.
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) that calculates information regarding the game value given in the game, and is a game machine that is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing,
It has a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and has.
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used.
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) The calculation means is a gaming machine, characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the second program is switched so that the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible.

(42G) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means for performing required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing,
It has a second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and has.
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used.
When the second program is started, in the first program, the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the first program that has returned from the second program so that the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, when processing is transferred between programs, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction, and precautions at the time of program creation can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
It is provided with a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel on a specific path to the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel on a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine, and has a plurality of second reflecting portions.
The peripheral control means
A dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means changes the emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements with the passage of time so that light of different colors travels in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed with the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the path of light in the display panel of the plurality of first reflecting units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed with the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part thereof.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(44A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel on a specific path to the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel on a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine, and has a plurality of second reflecting portions.
The first reflecting unit includes a plurality of first right-eye reflecting units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's left eye. Includes a plurality of first left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching
The plurality of first right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of first left-eye reflective portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from that of the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflecting portion and the first left eye reflecting portion, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern are emitted. Is displayed on the display panel so that the player can recognize the three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes.
A gaming machine characterized in that a flat pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(44B) The second reflecting unit is the front side of the gaming machine, and the direction in which the light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths reaches the right eye and the left eye of the player. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflection unit includes a plurality of second right eye reflection units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's second reflection unit. Includes a plurality of second left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching the left eye.
The plurality of second right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of second left-eye reflective portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form the left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the plane pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting unit.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and the deterioration of the game entertainment can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means
By making the light emitting device emit light, a dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized by performing an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery by combining the display of the dynamic pattern and the display of the static pattern.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel by a specific path and emit light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit out to the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, so that a pattern that changes is displayed on the display panel. Display on
By reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit, a stationary pattern is displayed on the display panel.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern are combined to produce an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a deterioration in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(46A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect image,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel toward the front surface of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By making the light emitting device emit light, the target pattern is displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target pattern is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or character.

(46C) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns of different modes, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(47A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine including a setting operation means operated for changing or confirming a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.
The game control means is
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
After executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the periodic process. A gaming machine characterized by being.

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the process related to the change of the set value, the process related to the confirmation of the set value, the process related to the normal game, and the plurality of processes. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a process to be executed in the above.

(47C) The periodic process is composed of at least a first iterative process for executing the process related to the normal game and a second iterative process for executing the process related to the change of the setting.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in the area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off.
The game control means is
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set is set in the setting state management area.
In the setting confirmation mode, as the predetermined condition, the gaming machine is characterized in that the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine including a setting operation means operated for changing or confirming a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.
The game control means is
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The periodic process makes it possible to execute a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation.
The game machine is characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common between the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means that can store information related to the game
In the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means among the storage means.
In the power-on processing, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is being operated, the determination is made based on the information stored in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means is the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing. Is a means to initialize
When the storage means is initialized when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing, the specific setting operation means is specified. A gaming machine characterized in that the storage means is not initialized.

(49B) A peripheral control means for controlling the effect on the display device is provided.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for activating the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means is
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to a game and a second storage area different from the first storage area is provided.
The first storage area is an area for storing the set value, and is an area for storing the set value.
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used by the game.
The game control means is
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized.
When it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area.
The game control means is characterized in that, when the third condition is satisfied, the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area are initialized. The described gaming machine.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in a normal game.
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when the power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines that the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area are satisfied. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the storage area of the machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is
Equipped with a storage means that can retain information related to the game even when the power is cut off.
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means stores a setting state management area in which a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to the operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on processing. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) The game control means is provided with a setting operation means operated to start in a setting change mode for changing a setting value related to control performed by the game control means.
The game control means is
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting change mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and the memory When the predetermined area is initialized and the setting change mode is terminated by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in the normal game state in which the game ball can be launched. Start the machine and
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting confirmation mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means terminates the setting confirmation mode.

(52) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means is
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the first periodic processing executed in each predetermined first cycle, and the second periodic processing executed in each predetermined second cycle are executed. Possible and
In the power-on processing, it is determined whether or not the operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means.
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is determined according to the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation has not been performed in the setting operation means, the setting corresponding to the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. It is possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on processing.
The second periodic process is executed after the normal game start process can be executed in the power-on process.

(53A) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit for outputting a drive signal for driving the accessory is provided.
A gaming machine that can be equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting inspection signals used for inspection of gaming machines.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit to which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal,
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The second driver circuit is a gaming machine characterized in that a control signal output as a serial signal from the gaming control means is converted into the inspection signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine according to the preceding items, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to the preceding paragraph, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount component. ..

(53E) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game.
Among the events related to the progress of the game, the first detecting means for detecting the event captured by the game control means in the periodic processing, and the first detecting means.
A gaming machine including a second detecting means for detecting an event captured by the gaming control means in a process other than the periodic processing among the events related to the progress of the game.
The game control means is
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detecting means is a ball detecting means for detecting a gaming ball launched toward a gaming area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
It is provided with a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The serial input port is a serial input / output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal.
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input / output port.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game.
A gaming machine including a first detecting means and a second detecting means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game.
The game control means is
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The first detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal once in the periodic processing.
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal a plurality of times in the periodic processing.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port and is input to the general-purpose input port.
The gaming control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is detected a plurality of times and the signal level is determined within the periodic processing once.

(53I) The first detecting means is a ball detecting means for detecting a gaming ball launched toward a gaming area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine including a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board, and is mounted on a first printed circuit board.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on a second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal converted from a signal repeated at a predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) An inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of a gaming machine can be mounted.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit to which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal,
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is characterized by being mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different board boxes.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

[16. Communication with various boards when executing the setting function]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a setting function, it is possible to execute a setting function (confirmation of setting information (“setting confirmation”) and change (“setting change”)) when a specific operation unit is operated. The method of activating the setting function is as described above, but the processing on the main control board side and the timer interrupt processing when the power is turned on will be described with another example.

In this embodiment, the main control recognition information, which is the information for recognizing the main control board 1310, is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the setting information is changed. .. The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, the ball information control board determines whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is legitimate, and if it is not determined to be legitimate, ball information control is performed. The board can stop the operation related to the prize ball, it is possible to prevent fraud such as falsification of the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310), and the setting information on the main control board 1310 can be changed to the ball information control board. Can be reflected at an appropriate timing.

[16-1. Initialization process]
First, the initialization process (Another Example 5) in the present embodiment will be described. 274 and 275 are flowcharts showing the initialization process of the fifth embodiment. In the initialization process of the fifth embodiment, the process related to the setting function is added in addition to the initialization process described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, and the process related to the calculation of the accessory ratio is omitted. It is not necessary to omit the processing related to the calculation of the accessory ratio, and it is excluded for the sake of simplification.

When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs a power-on processing. Specifically, first, the stack pointer is set (step P10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step P10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack. The power-on processing corresponds to the processing of steps P10 to P52.

Following step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step P14). It should be noted that the voltage does not rise immediately between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the predetermined voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is suddenly stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power failure warning. It is output and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step P12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step P14 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After the power is turned on, when the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit becomes no output, and the process proceeds to step P16.

Proceeding to step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (FIG. 76) is operated (step P16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated.

When it is determined in step P16 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step P18) and proceeds to step P30, while the RAM is in step P16. When it is determined that the clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step P19), and the process proceeds to step P20.

This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game related to a game such as a probability fluctuation and an unpaid prize ball stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU 1311 (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the information, and is set to a value 1 when the game information is deleted and a value 0 when the game information is not deleted. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps P18 and P19 are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Proceeding to step P20, the main control MPU 1311 executes a combination authentication process for determining whether or not the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the sphere information control board is appropriate. The frame maker identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage unit of the main control MPU 1311, and it is authenticated whether or not appropriate frame maker identification information is output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step P30, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality notification is performed using a speaker, a liquid crystal display device, or the like.

When the main control MPU shifts to step P30, the wait timer process 2 is performed (step P30). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

When the wait timer process 2 (step P30) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is an operation for changing the setting information in the present embodiment (step P3031). The operation of changing the setting information is not an operation for confirming the setting information, but an operation for changing the setting information.

When the main control MPU 1311 has an operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the game after the power is turned on proceeds based on the new setting information, so that the main control MPU 1311 is stored in the storage area. In order to clear the game information, the processes after step P44 are executed.

On the other hand, if there is no operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, and clears the RAM. The process is branched based on the value of the notification flag RCL_FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step P34, in the main control MPU 1311, the calculated checksum value (sum value) coincides with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not it is present (step P36). When they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step P38). Whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG stores the backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the power cutoff process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the power-off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag determination process (step P38) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is an operation for confirming the setting information (step P3038). If there is an operation for confirming the setting information (the result of step P3038 is "YES"), the setting confirming information indicating that the setting information is being confirmed is set (step P3039). In order to prevent the game from being continued when the setting information is being confirmed, it is possible to control not to execute the process related to the game or the prize ball by setting the setting confirmation information. If there is no operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3039 is "NO"), or after setting the setting confirmation information (step P3039), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery. (Step P40). For this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs a command creation process at power-on (step P42). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the game information is erased, or in step P36, the checksum values (sum values) match. The main control MPU 1311 has a built-in main control when the backup flag BK-FLG is determined not to have a value of 1 (value is 0) in step P38, that is, when the power off processing has not been completed normally. Clear the entire area of the RAM (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power supply. When the disconnection process is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the counter that updates the jackpot judgment random number based on the taken out ID code is fixed. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, the result of step P32 is "NO"), when the information is not normally stored in the RAM (RAM error, the result of step P36 is "NO", step. When the result of P38 is "NO") and the setting is changed (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power supply. When the disconnection process is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the counter that updates the jackpot judgment random number based on the taken out ID code is fixed. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

The area for clearing the main control built-in RAM is not the entire area, but the area for clearing may be different depending on each situation. For example, when clearing the RAM, the area other than the set value and the work area related to the setting (including a part of the RAM area related to the game processing) is cleared, when the RAM is abnormal, all the areas in the RAM are cleared, and when the setting is changed, the area is cleared. Only a part of the RAM area related to the game processing may be cleared. That is, when a RAM error occurs, all areas are cleared, but in other cases, the corresponding area is cleared according to the operation content. For example, the set value and the work area related to the setting process are cleared unless it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Try not to.

In addition to setting "00h" for each area, the area may be cleared by setting an initial value that does not disadvantage the player or the game field (hole). For example, when the set value is "00h", if the setting is most advantageous to the player (high setting), 00h is set when the RAM is cleared and the game starts from the high setting, which is advantageous to the player. However, since it is disadvantageous to the hole, the minimum setting (for example, "05h") is set when clearing the work area of the set value.

When the process of step P42 or step P48 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a setting process, that is, whether or not there is a setting confirmation or a setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), a setting is made to notify the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information (step P3049). If there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the processes after step P50 are executed without setting to notify the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt process, after the setting confirmation or setting change is completed, the setting for notifying the main control recognition information to the spherical information control board is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the storage area for storing the information to be transmitted to the sphere information control board when the notification of the main control recognition information is set. For example, if the area for storing untransmitted information is in the ring buffer format, the read counter and write counter indicating the read position and write position in the buffer are initialized (both are set to 0), and further, for SIO communication. Clear the buffer as well. If the information remains in these buffers, the first remaining information will be transmitted when the power is restored. Therefore, in order to ensure that the main control recognition information is transmitted to the ball information control board first after the power is turned on. It is configured like this. When the sphere information control board receives the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, it executes the corresponding process and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state from the time when the notification of the main control recognition information is set until the response signal is received. When the response signal of the main control recognition information is received, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 permits the execution of the timer interrupt processing by executing the interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52). In this embodiment, when the main control recognition information is set to be notified to the ball information control board, the process for performing the normal game is not executed until the response signal is received from the ball information control board. To. For example, it is determined whether or not the response signal is received by the timer interrupt process described later, and if it is not received, the process is skipped. With such a configuration, it is possible to start the game after ensuring the activation of the ball information control board.

When the execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop processing. Specifically, first, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step P56). As described above, when the power of the game machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step P56 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs the non-winning random number update process (step P58). In this non-winning random number update process, for example, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. The random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step P58, the process returns to step P54 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, it is determined in step P56 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step P58, and steps P54 to P58 are repeated. The processing of steps P54 to P58 corresponds to "main loop processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step P60). By this setting, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, the writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and the rewriting of the game information is protected.

Following step P60, the main control MPU 1311 has a start port solenoid 2550, a grand prize opening solenoid (attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556), special symbol display (2)). 1185 (1st special symbol display, 2nd special symbol display) 1185, special symbol storage display, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display, game status display, round display, etc. Is stopped (step P62).

Following step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step P64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step P66). This completes the storage of backup information.

Following step P66, the main control MPU 1311 sets the watchdog timer to clear (step P68). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process of repeating a state in which nothing is executed. The processing and loop processing of steps P60 to P68 are referred to as "power cutoff processing". In this loop processing, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a time-out signal, the main control MPU is reset by the time-out signal, and then the main control MPU performs this power-on processing from the beginning again.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the power is turned on by the subsequent restoration of electric power.

In step P36, it is inspected whether or not the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step P38, it is inspected whether or not the power-off processing is normally completed. There is. In this way, by double-checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[16-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing (Another Example 5) in the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process shown in FIG. 274. In the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment, a process for confirming and changing the setting information is added.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (step P3070). As described above, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is a state of waiting until the response signal output from the ball information control board is received after the notification setting of the main control recognition information is set. When the main control MPU 1311 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the subsequent processing and ends the timer interrupt processing. In the process of step P3070, not only the determination of whether or not the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is performed, but also the process of communicating with the ball information control board may be executed. For example, various signals transmitted from the ball information control board in the process of step P3070 are received, and when the response signal of the main control recognition information is included, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is canceled, and the like. In the case of the signal of, the process corresponding to the received signal may be executed. When the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, a launch permission signal is input to the ball information control board, the ball launching device can launch the game ball, and the game can be started.

When the main control MPU 1311 is not in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is “NO”), the main control MPU 1311 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step P54 of the main loop processing.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Following step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs a switch input process (step P74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer subtraction process (step P76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) 1185 is lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). When determining whether or not the ball information main ACK signal for transmitting that the ball information control board has normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs a winning random number update process (step P78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the initial random number for the small hit symbol, which are updated by the non-winning random number update process in step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in FIG. 274. The random number for value determination is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main loop processing and the timer interrupt processing, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. On the other hand, since the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment), the respective counters are used only each time the winning random number update process is performed. Counts up. For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as a value from 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter for updating the big hit determination random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. At this time, the updated value is always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter that the main control MPU extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for deriving the fixed value of is executed, and the derived fixed value is set as the initial value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process as the initial value. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-mentioned method for updating the big hit determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning random number update process in step P78 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the process related to the setting information (setting process) is being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting information is being changed or confirmed. For example, it may be determined whether or not the setting confirmation information is set.

The main control MPU 1311 performs the prize ball control process (step P80) when the process related to the setting information is not being executed (the result of step P3080 is “NO”). In this prize ball control process, a prize ball command for reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and transmitting it to the ball information control board based on this input information can be created, or a prize ball command can be created with the main control board 1310 and ball information control. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the board and the board. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening, a prize ball command representing 15 balls is created and sent to the ball information control board, or the ball information control board sends this prize ball command. Ball information that tells that reception is completed normally When the main ACK signal is not input within the specified time, create a self-check command to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board to control the ball information. Send to the board.

Following step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs frame command reception processing (step P82). The sphere information control board transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process of step P82, when these various commands are normally received as the ball information main serial data, the information to convey that fact to the ball information control board is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. do. Further, the command normally received as the sphere information main serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step P84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big prize opening), an abnormality occurs. A winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as a status is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery"), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and used as the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the range of the above-mentioned jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 32438 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step P86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 2104, various commands related to the special drawing 1 tuning effect are created, while when the lottery result is based on the second start port sensor 2511, special features are created. FIG. 2 Various commands related to the synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as related to the big hit are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the winning opening solenoid is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of times (round) the large winning opening is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2, the round display is displayed. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the 2-round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the lamp is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or send it to the game status display so that the presence or absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. Set the output of the lighting signal of, and store it in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step P88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

On the other hand, when the processing related to the setting information is being executed (the result of step P3080 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the processing such as the prize ball control processing (step P80) to advance the game. Stop it. Then, the setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the setting information is executed (step P3082). In the setting change / confirmation process, the setting information is displayed on the touch panel or the liquid crystal display device 1600, or the change of the setting information is accepted from the input device such as the touch panel.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting process (setting change / confirmation process) is completed (step P3083). If the setting process is not completed (the result of step P3083 is "NO"), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is completed (the result of step P3083 is "YES"), the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board (step P3084), and the processes after step P92 are executed. At this time, the storage area (work area) temporarily used to execute the setting process is initialized, and then the setting process is set so that the setting process is not executed, such as canceling the setting confirmation information. After that, the main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state until the response signal of the main control recognition information is received from the sphere information control board.

As described above, when the setting information is changed or confirmed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the spherical information control board after the setting process is completed, while when the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the power-on processing is performed. The main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board (step P3039). As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the spherical information control board only once when the power is turned on. Further, when the setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board only once after the completion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball information control board from unnecessarily executing the processing related to the setting information a plurality of times, and to reduce the load at the time of starting the gaming machine, so that the starting can be completed quickly. Further, since the main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state until the response signal of the main control recognition information is received from the ball information control board (step P3070), the setting change is surely notified. After that, it becomes possible to execute the processing on the main control board side.

Here, in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 276, the processing from step P80 to step P90 was skipped during the setting processing, but the switch input processing (step P74), the timer subtraction processing (step P76), and the winning random number update. The process (step P78) may be skipped. Further, the port output process (step P90) may be skipped. Since the process for performing a normal game is not executed during the execution of the setting process, there is no problem in the subsequent game even if these processes are not executed. Therefore, the load on the gaming machine during the setting process may be reduced by skipping the random number-related process, or the random number-related process may be performed while the setting process is being executed by an employee of the game hall or the like. By executing the above, the random number update may be advanced so that the random number becomes more random. Also, regarding switch input processing and port output processing, the load on the gaming machine may be reduced by skipping the processing while changing the settings, or by continuing the processing even while changing the settings, from the setting processing. The result of the switch input received during the setting change may be reflected immediately after the return, or the processing at the output destination may not be delayed by continuously performing the port output.

When the processing of step P88 or step P3084 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 performs the port output processing (step P90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1314, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the ball information control board are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1314 based on the output information, the main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board, or a big hit. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the big prize opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening when in the game state, and outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the movable piece. 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals related to are output to the ball information control board.

Following step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and various types classified in the jackpot-related, which are created by the timer interrupt process of this routine. It is divided into commands, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as normal electric function production, various commands classified as notification display, and status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission. The processing of steps P74 to P92 is referred to as "game control processing".

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step P70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) registers (step P96) and ends this routine. Here, when the timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started, the main control MPU 1311 stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the initialization process from being destroyed. In step P96, the contents stacked on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt enable after returning by step P96.

[16-3. Data transmission to the ball information control board]
In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the transmission of data (main ball information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is executed by the port output process of the timer interrupt process. Main ball information As described above, the serial data includes information about the prize ball (prize ball command) and information for confirming the connection status (self-check command), and also includes the main control recognition information in the present embodiment. Is done.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, the main ball information serial data is frequently transmitted to the ball information control board, but the total number of prize balls is correct and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is not always necessary to pay out the prize balls in the order in which the prizes are generated at the prize openings. When a prize is generated in a plurality of types of winning openings in a short period of time, for example, a winning opening set in the number of prize balls "15" is set after a prize is generated in the winning opening set in the number of prize balls "4". Even if a prize is awarded in the (large prize opening), there is no problem even if the prize balls are processed in the order of "15" and "4". Therefore, if a situation such as a big hit game state in which a prize ball command is frequently created occurs, the load may temporarily increase.

Here, in the present embodiment, the interval for transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is set to be longer than the execution interval (4 ms) of the timer interrupt process (for example, 100 ms), and the number of communications is set. By reducing the amount, the load of transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is reduced. In addition, instead of generating a prize ball command for each prize, the load is further reduced by reducing the amount of data to be communicated by aggregating the prize ball information for each communication cycle to the ball information control board. Plan. Hereinafter, a configuration example of prize ball data transmitted to the ball information control board will be described.

FIG. 277 is a diagram illustrating an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, the number of winnings for each winning opening including the gate is counted and stored as winning information. Then, each time the communication cycle arrives, the stored winning information is transmitted to the sphere information control board. At this time, if the number of winnings is 0, the transmission may not be performed.

When the ball information control board receives the winning information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board calculates the number of prize balls by associating it with the prize ball number table shown in FIG. 278. In the example shown in FIGS. 277 and 278, the number of prizes in the gate is 1, the number of prizes in the upper start opening is 2, the number of prizes in the general prize opening 1 is 1, and the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2 is 1. The prize ball at the gate is 1 x 0 = 1, the prize ball at the upper starting opening is 2 x 3 = 6, the prize ball at the general winning opening 1 is 1 x 1 = 1, and the prize ball at the general winning opening 2 is 1 x 1 =. It becomes 1, and the total number of prize balls is 0 + 6 + 1 + 1 = 8.

Further, the ball information control board may transmit the prize ball number including the prize ball number in the winning information without holding the prize ball number table. Further, even if they are arranged in a plurality of game areas as in the general winning opening, if the number of prize balls is the same, they may be aggregated. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example when the number of prize balls is included in the prize information. In (A), when the number of prizes is totaled for each general prize opening, (B) is a collection of general prize openings. This is the case when the numbers are aggregated. This eliminates the need to hold the prize ball number table on the ball information control board, and enables centralized management by the main control board 1310.

In the example described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 279, the winning order is created by ignoring the winning order in the communication cycle, but conventionally, the winning order can be grasped by generating a sequential command at the time of winning. rice field. Here, FIG. 280 shows an example in which information regarding the winning order is added while the winning information is collectively transmitted for each communication cycle. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example in which winning information is stored in the order of winning.

In the example shown in FIG. 280, each time a game ball wins a prize in the winning opening, 1 is added to the order counter, and a record composed of the order, the winning type (winning opening), the number of winning balls, and the number of winnings is generated. The number of prize balls may be omitted as long as it is held by the ball information control board. Further, since the number of winnings is usually one, it may be omitted, but when winnings occur consecutively in the same winning opening, the number of winnings may be added by the number of consecutive winnings.

In the example shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, 1 is added to the number of winnings for each winning, and the winning information for transmission is created at the timing of transmitting the winning information to the ball information control board. However, the example shown in FIG. 280. Then, each record of the winning information is generated for each winning, and the winning information generated for each communication cycle is transmitted. In either case, the transmitted winning information is discarded, and in the example shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, the number of winnings is cleared to 0. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 280, the transmitted record may be deleted.

As in the example shown in FIGS. 277 to 279, by ignoring the winning order and counting only the number of winnings, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of winning. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 280, it is possible to maintain the winning order by creating the winning information at the time of winning, and it is generated without the need to create the winning information again when the winning information is transmitted. Since the winning information may be transmitted as it is, the load when transmitting the winning information can be reduced. In addition, the number of records of winning information can be reduced by adding the number of winnings when winning consecutively in the same winning opening. Normally, in a big hit game state, a game ball is fired aiming at a big prize opening, and when a winning opening that can win only in a specific game state (for example, a probable change state) is arranged, a specific game state is provided. In that case, since the game ball is launched aiming at this winning opening, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of winning information, especially when the number of winnings is large.

The configuration for transmitting the winning information from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board has been described above. The information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board includes not only the winning information (prize ball information, prize ball command) but also the game status signal and the connection between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. A self-check command for confirming the status is transmitted, and further, in the present embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted at the time of turning on the power or at the time of setting processing (setting change / confirmation).

Here, it is necessary to transmit the game state signal to the ball information control board at least every time the game state changes. Therefore, the winning information is transmitted in the same manner in the communication cycle in which the winning information is transmitted, and the winning information, the game status signal, and other information to be transmitted to the ball information control board are aggregated as game information in a common format to standardize the transmission process. Control can be simplified.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in FIG. 281, in order to distinguish the types of data to be transmitted, "data type" as a major classification and "type 1" and "type 2" as minor classifications are defined. Items for distinguishing data types may be changed as necessary. For example, other types may be excluded by defining the data type in detail, and more detailed classification can be set. You may increase the number of items. In addition, although the name is described as it is in the item for distinguishing the type of data in FIG. 281 for easy understanding, the information encoded in advance is actually set. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 281, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

FIG. 281 (A) is data corresponding to the winning information, and “winning” (may be “prize ball”) indicating that the data type is the winning information (prize ball data) is set. Further, the type 1 is set with the type of the winning opening, and the type 2 is set with the information for specifying the winning opening. At this time, if only the information for specifying the winning opening needs to be set, one of the items may be left blank. In the example shown in FIG. 281, two types of data can be set, and in the example shown in (A), the number of prize balls and the number of winnings can be set. Since the number of prize balls and the number of prizes do not actually exceed 100, the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits and the number of prizes is set in the lower 4 bits, and the number of prize balls and the number of prizes are set in one item. May be set. Further, if there is no prize, data indicating that there is no prize and the number of prize balls is 0 may be transmitted.

FIG. 281 (A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball command) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle, but more (for example, in one cycle). The prize ball information of 10 types) may be transmitted together. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, the unit time for the transmitting side (main control board 1310) and the receiving side (ball information control board 110) of the data (commands). Since the load per hit is high, an upper limit for transmission in one cycle may be set. In this case, the data (command) for the amount that could not be transmitted in one cycle (the amount exceeding the upper limit) is transmitted in the next cycle. In addition, when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a big hit, a time lag may occur between the actual winning and the addition of the prize balls, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. However, since the data (command) transmission cycle is about 100 ms for 600 ms, even if the upper limit is temporarily exceeded, it will be immediately less than the upper limit, so the possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable is reduced. ing. Also, although the firing cycle (600ms) is fixed, the command transmission cycle can be set arbitrarily, so the more the data (command) transmission cycle is set shorter than the firing cycle, the more the data (command) to be transmitted. It is possible to prevent a time lag from occurring when the number exceeds the upper limit.

FIG. 281 (B) is an example of transmitting a chip ID that identifies the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and the data for 2 records is stored. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311, for example, is defined in a specific register and can be read from the program. In the present embodiment, it is possible to transmit data (commands) of a plurality of types of data types in one cycle, but when the maximum number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle is exceeded, , Priority may be set for each data type, and data (command) with high priority may be sent with priority. For example, as described above, the prize ball information is likely to generate a larger amount of data to be transmitted than other data, but it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable even if a slight time lag occurs as described above. Therefore, data (commands) of other data types may be preferentially transmitted. In addition, regardless of the data type, the maximum number of data (commands) may be transmitted in the order of generation.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, since the size of the data is fixed, there is a problem that the number of records becomes large when a large amount of data is transmitted. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in FIG. 281 (B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to transmit data for 5 records, and all the information such as the data type is set in each record. There is a need. Therefore, by setting the data length for each record and making the data a variable length, it is configured so that it can correspond to data of many kinds of modes. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 282, an item indicating the data length is added, and data of any size can be stored in the item indicating the data within an allowable range. In the example shown in FIG. 282, since it is not necessary to divide the data, the number of items showing detailed classification is reduced from 2 to 1. Since the transmitted data has a variable length and may have a large capacity, a check item such as a checksum may be added.

Subsequently, the communication between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board will be described. FIG. 283 is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board at the time of starting the gaming machine. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 is started, the main control recognition information is notified to the ball information control board by the initialization process or the timer interrupt process (main control recognition information notification). ). As described above, the main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310, and the sphere information control board determines whether or not the received main control recognition information is normal. If the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, if the main control board 1310 is not a legitimate one and an invalid MPU is mounted, the main control board 1310 is notified that the main control board 1310 is abnormal.

Further, even when the time from turning on the power to transmitting the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. At this time, the activation of the main control board 1310 may be continued as it is, or if the activation process is completed during the abnormality occurrence notification, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the notification may be continued as it is. good. If the notification is to be continued as it is, the employees of the pachinko / pachislot machine may check the situation and decide whether or not to use the pachinko / pachislot machine as it is.

When the sphere information control board receives the main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, it transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response notification from the sphere information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a state where the normal game can be started.

After that, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). As described above, the transmission interval of the game information is 100 milliseconds. Specific examples of the game information include prize ball information (prize ball command). When the ball information control board receives the game information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board transmits a response signal (game information response notification) to the main control board 1310. In this way, it is possible to ensure that communication is normally performed by transmitting a response signal from the ball information control board to the game information notification from the main control board 1310. When the sphere information control board notifies the main control board 1310, the response signal is similarly transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board.

Subsequently, a case where an abnormality occurs in the communication between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board will be described. FIG. 284 is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 284, the game information is notified from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board at a predetermined communication cycle, and an abnormality occurs when the response from the ball information control board does not occur continuously for a predetermined number of times. The communication is cut off and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to eight times, and the game information having the same content is notified up to eight times. Even after the communication from the main control board 1310 is cut off, when the response signal is received from the ball information control board, the communication cutoff is canceled and the processing is restarted as if the normal state was restored. do. In the example shown in the figure, if the response signal cannot be received within one communication cycle, the notification is sent again. However, the notification of the next cycle is stopped, the response is waited for, and the next cycle ends. If the response signal cannot be received later, it may be determined that one communication has failed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid missing the response signal.

Further, when there is no response from the ball information control board, the game information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, in addition to the case where the game information has not reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310. The response signal may not reach the main control board 1310 from the sphere information control board even though it has arrived. Here, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), in the latter case, there is a possibility that prize balls will be continuously paid out based on the same prize ball information, and the lottery result and payment of the game There is a risk that the number of prize balls issued will be inconsistent. Therefore, in order to avoid such a problem, an example in which the next game information is transmitted without retransmitting the game information even when the response signal cannot be normally received will be described.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing another example in the case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board. Here, as in the example shown in FIG. 284, the game information is transmitted for each communication cycle, and the next game information is transmitted even when the response signal cannot be received. Then, when the response signal for the maximum number of transmissions (for example, 8 times) cannot be continuously received, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the communication is cut off, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of prize balls will be inconsistent when the game information is prize ball information.

Further, by retransmitting the same game information, the game information newly generated in the process of progress of the game may be retained in the buffer and cannot be retained, but this can be prevented. Note that the following information is transmitted without resending only in the case of prize ball information for which a large amount of data may be created, while the other information for which a relatively small amount of data is created is shown in FIG. 284. The processing may be different depending on the data type, such as by resending as shown. In this case, the number of times that the response signal cannot be continuously received (the number of times of transmission failure) is counted, and when the predetermined number of times is reached, the communication is cut off and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified.

[17. Edge buffer for fraud judgment]
The gaming machine in the present embodiment is configured to obtain a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) by winning a prize in the winning device. The winning of the game medium is detected by a sensor or a switch provided in the winning device, and the detection result is input at a predetermined interval and stored in a predetermined storage area.

Further, the winning of the game medium is provided with a valid period such as a period during which the winning device is acceptable. On the other hand, in order to detect failures and fraudulent activities, prizes outside the valid period are also counted, and if the number of prizes outside the valid period reaches a predetermined value or more, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside. Or, I was informing about an abnormality.

As described above, it is necessary to detect only the winnings within the valid period, such as when paying out the prize balls, while when detecting the abnormality, it is necessary to detect the winnings of the game medium regardless of the valid period. Therefore, there is a risk that the input determination process for various signals input by the sensor, the switch, or the like will be complicated.

In the present embodiment, the buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals input by a sensor, a switch, or the like, and whether or not the signal is within the valid period (or outside the valid period) are determined according to the state. It is provided with a buffer 2 (second storage area, edge buffer for fraud determination) for counting and storing various input signals. As a result, most of the processing associated with the input judgment can be shared by simply switching the part that specifies the area to be referenced according to the state when the input judgment processing is executed, and the entire processing associated with the winning judgment can be simplified. Is possible.

[17-1. Buffer structure]
First, the structure of a buffer that temporarily stores information for executing various processes will be described. This buffer is allocated to a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1311 as an input information storage area. The input information storage area may be allocated to a RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1311. The input information storage area stores various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311. In addition to the input information storage area, the main control built-in RAM includes backup flags and checksum information for determining whether the contents of the RAM are normal when the power is turned on, random values for various lottery, and peripheral control boards. An area for storing commands and the like for transmission to the 1510, the payout control board 951, and the like is allocated.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in the game control by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each storage area includes a backup flag area, a checksum area, an input level data area, an input edge data area, a prize ball judgment area, etc., and also stores various random value values used for lottery. Contains an area for storing commands to be sent. Further, each area is divided in 1-byte units, and is an area of 1 byte or a plurality of bytes.

Subsequently, the configuration of the input information storage area will be described. Here, the configuration of the input information storage area for storing the input information indicating the detection of the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, specifically, the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) will be described. do. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing an example of a data area included in the input information storage area of the present embodiment, in which (A) is an input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and (B) is a prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). show.

As shown in (A), the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each Bit is stored. Specifically, Bit0 is the first start port sensor 2104 that detects the entry of the first start port 2002, Bit1 is the second start port sensor 2511 that detects the entry of the second start port 2004, and Bit2 and Bit3 are general. General winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the entry of the winning openings 2001, 2, 201, Bit4 is a count switch (large winning opening sensor) that detects the entry of the large winning opening 2005, Bit5 is unused, and Bit6 is the entry to the discharge port. It is the input information by the sensor that detects the sphere. The gaming machine in the present embodiment has a probabilistic variation region (V region of V-AT) in addition to the starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and the Bit 7 is a sensor that detects the passage of the probabilistic variation region of the gaming ball. It is the input information by. The probabilistic region sensor is a sensor that detects only the passage to the V region, and unlike other sensors, it is not a sensor with a prize ball. Further, the arrangement of the bits may be any arrangement. For example, the second starting port 2004 corresponds to the bit 0 and the large winning opening 2005 corresponds to the bit 1, and the sensors to be determined whether or not it is within the valid period are continuously connected. It may be arranged as follows.

Further, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits) like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and the switch corresponding to each byte ( The input information of the sensor) is stored. Each bit in the prize ball determination area corresponds to each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but the second start opening (Bit1), the large winning opening (Bit4), and the probability variation area (Bit7) are valid during the valid period. It is set to "1" (ON) only when the sensor detects it. That is, the input information by each sensor is set as it is for each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but the winning device (winning) in which the valid period for accepting the game ball is set among the bits in the prize ball determination area. The bit corresponding to the area) is set to "1" only when it is detected by the sensor within the valid period.

The validity period of the second starting port 2004 is such that when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal electric accessory is opened and the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. In addition to the period until the accessory is closed (normal electric accessory opening time), the validity judgment period considering the time for the game ball to stay inside the second starting port 2004 after the ordinary electric accessory is closed. (OFF delay, for example 1000 msec) is set. In addition, the validity period of the large winning opening 2005 is the same as the second starting opening 2004, in addition to the time for opening the large winning opening 2005 (the opening time of the large winning opening), it stays inside the large winning opening 2005 and is a count sensor. The validity determination period (OFF delay, for example, 1994 msec) is set in consideration of the time lag until the detection. On the other hand, in the probabilistic region (V region of V-AT), the probabilistic region valid period is set at the timing when the V attacker (large winning opening) is opened, and the valid judgment period after the probabilistic region valid period ends is not set. ing.

[17-2. Switch input processing]
Subsequently, the procedure for setting data in the buffer described above will be described. FIG. 288 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of switch input processing for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The switch input process is executed in the process of step S74 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23.

The procedure shown in FIG. 288 is an excerpt of the procedure for storing the winning information for the starting winning opening and the large winning opening in the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the winning ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). Therefore, it is possible to similarly process the case of storing information such as the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951. Further, in the switch processing shown in FIG. 288, an example of processing data for one port (1 byte) of the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is described, but the present invention is limited thereto. However, if the input port of the switch is 2 bytes or more, processing for the corresponding number of bytes is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines the change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Further, the generated switch edge information is stored in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002), and the number of winning validity determinations is set (step P6003). The switch edge information is data in which individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch is summarized in byte units. Further, the number of winning validity determinations may correspond to the number of switch input information included in the switch edge information, or may be the number of bits of the switch edge information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the switch corresponding to the winning determination is within the valid period (step P6004), and clears the update of the switch input information outside the valid period. Specifically, if it is not within the valid period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the winning determination in the input edge data 1 area is cleared (step P6005). ).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 changes the switch input information to be determined after clearing the update of the switch input information outside the valid period or when it is within the valid period (the result of step P6004 is "yes"). In order to do so, the number of winning validity determinations is updated by -1 (step P6006). Further, the validity period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination is updated by -1 (step P6007). For a switch for which a valid period has not been set, the processes after step P6006 are executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the determination of the validity period may be performed so that the processing is unconditionally skipped if the switch input information has no validity period set. For example, it is always valid by setting a large value as the validity period. It may be within the period.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the number of winning validity determinations has become 0, that is, whether or not the winning validity determination of all the switch input information included in the switch edge information has been completed (step P6008). .. If the winning validity determination of all the switch input information is not completed (the result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is executed again from step P6004. In this process, the timer for determining the valid period is updated after determining whether it is within the valid period, but it is updated together with other timers in various timer update processes executed for each timer interrupt. You may do so.

The main control MPU 1311 completes the winning validity determination of the switch input information whose validity period is set among the switch input information included in the switch edge information, and when the winning validity determination count becomes 0 (step P6008). The result is “yes”), and the switch edge information reflecting whether or not the valid period is within the valid period is stored in the prize ball determination area for the switch input information for which the valid period is set (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information as it is in the input edge data 1 area and storing the switch input information in the prize ball judgment area in consideration of the validity period, the area corresponding to the processing can be referred to. The process can be simplified. For example, in the prize ball control process (step S80 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)) executed when the prize ball is paid out, the sensor that prizes the prize ball only within the valid period when determining the presence or absence of the prize ball is used. It does not require processing such as determining whether or not the prize ball is a prize ball or whether or not to execute the prize ball depending on whether or not it is valid, and when paying out the prize ball, refer to the information in the prize ball judgment area. The prize ball can be paid out only by doing so, and the prize ball payout process can be simplified. Further, when counting the number of game balls that have entered outside the valid period for a sensor that does not win a prize outside the valid period by the fraud detection process (step S84 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)), the input edge By referring to the information in the data 1 area, it is possible to detect an illegal prize by counting the number of prizes won outside the valid period (the number considered to be an illegal prize). Further, it is possible to count the illegal winnings by the difference between the number of winnings detected by the input edge data 1 area and the number of winnings detected by the prize ball determination area.

[17-3. Large prize opening processing]
Next, the large winning opening opening process for controlling the large winning opening 2005 that is opened by winning the lottery will be described. In the large winning opening opening process, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 2005, it is detected by a count switch (large winning opening sensor), and the number of game balls entered in the large winning opening 2005 is counted by the above-mentioned switch input process. To. FIG. 289 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the large winning opening opening process of the present embodiment. The large winning opening opening process is called from the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. As for the special symbol / electric accessory control process, after each start port passing process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol / electric accessory operation number including the large winning opening opening process is called. In the large winning opening opening process, the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening is counted based on the information of the large winning opening (count) switch generated by the switch input process described above.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first acquires the number of large prize openings from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, the number of large winning opening count switches is set as the number of loops, and the large winning opening count switch 1 bit is set as the determination bit value. Whether or not there is a prize is determined from the value of the large prize opening count switch in the prize ball determination area and the judgment bit value for the number of loops, and the number of large prize openings is counted. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of large winning openings is less than the maximum number of large winning openings (step P6012). The maximum number of winning openings is the specified number of winning openings for closing the large winning openings 2005 after opening in one round. Even if the maximum number of winnings is not won, the big winning opening 2005 will be closed after a predetermined period of time.

In the process of step P6011, the number of prizes in the prize opening is counted by looping by the number of count switches of the prize opening 2005. At this time, when the count switch is single, 1 is set as the number of loops, and the number of large prizes in the prize ball determination area is counted only once. Further, in the configuration including a plurality of large winning openings, the number of loops is set for the number of count switches, and the number of winning openings for the large winning openings in the prize ball determination area is counted for the number of loops. When the count switch is single, the number of big prize openings may be counted only once without being set as the number of loops, but the number of count switches in the large prize openings 2005 varies depending on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is necessary to provide two types of large winning opening opening processing, one for one count switch and the other for multiple counting switches, so that the large winning opening opening process can be executed in common without affecting the number of large winning opening switches. The number of loops is set to 1 even in the case of a single loop.

In addition, for over-winning during big hits (the game ball wins in the big winning opening 2005 beyond the maximum number of big winning openings), the value in the prize ball judgment area because the big winning opening 2005 is within the valid period. (It should be noted that the determination can be made in the same manner even if the determination is made based on the value of the input edge data 1 area). On the other hand, for illegal winnings other than big hits (illegal winnings to the big winning opening 2005), since it is not possible to count by the value of the prize ball determination area, the illegal winning is determined by the value of the input edge data 1 area.

In the main control MPU 1311, if the number of prizes in the large prize opening is equal to or greater than the maximum number of prizes in the large prize opening (the result of step P6012 is "no"), the large winning opening is over-winning. A flag with a large winning opening over winning is set in the flag (step P6013). In addition, although the number of large prizes won in the buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area) is obtained to determine the over prize, the number of large prizes in the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) is counted and the over prize is won. May be determined. In addition, even while the large prize opening 2005 is closed, the number of large winning openings is continuously counted, and if the number of large winning openings exceeds the maximum number of large winning openings, the large winning opening over winning flag will be displayed. Winning opening over Winning flag is set. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the large winning opening open state number to “00H”, and then closes the large winning opening 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, when the number of big winning openings is less than the maximum number of winning openings (the result of step P6012 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 refers to the value of the timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning openings. , It is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired (step P6014). If the opening time of the big winning opening is not completed (the result of step P6014 is "no"), this process is terminated and the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning opening 2005 is continued.

When the opening time of the large winning opening 2005 is completed (the result of step P6014 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 makes a setting for closing the open large winning opening 2005 (step P6015). In the process of step P6015, the data necessary for closing the big winning opening 2005 is set.

When the process of step P6015 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets the operation of the large winning opening 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing time data is acquired from the selected large winning opening opening pattern, and is set in the signal output timer during the special electric operation. A time (valid period) for determining whether or not the large winning opening switch is valid is set in the special electric operating signal output timer. The validity period is the interval time between the opening of the big winning opening (the closing time of the big winning opening) -α. If the valid period is longer than the closing time of the big winning opening, a longer time than the closing period will be set. Therefore, a new value will be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2005 before the timer reaches 0. Is set. At the start of opening the large winning opening 2005, the opening time corresponding to the large winning opening opening pattern is set in the signal output timer during the special electric operation. For example, when the opening pattern of the big winning opening 2005 is 1 to 7 rounds, 9 to 16 rounds is 29 seconds, and 8 rounds is 5 seconds, the signal output timer during special electric operation is 1 to 7 and 9 to 16 rounds. 29 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round, and 5 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to continue opening the large winning opening 2005, that is, whether or not it is the final round (step P6017). If the opening of the large winning opening 2005 is continued (not the final round) (the result of step P6017 is “yes”), this process ends. If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is not continued (the final round) (the result of step P6017 is "no"), the processing after the big hit is executed, such as setting the ending command for setting at the ending. (Step P6018). In the process after the end of the big hit, the valid determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending time in which the detection of the game ball by the count switch is valid after the big winning opening 2005 is closed is set. The validity determination period corresponding to the ending period may be the same as the time for each large winning opening opening interval, but may be a different time (for example, the time corresponding to the ending period).

[17-4. Timing chart (large prize opening)]
Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the large winning opening 2005 will be described in chronological order. FIG. 290 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each configuration when a gaming ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2005 in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

In the example shown in FIG. 290, as described above, the effective time is set at the start of the big hit. The effective time is, for example, the opening time of the large winning opening at the time of opening, and the closing interval period of -4msec at the time of closing. The illegal count value sets the initial value to the value (L) corresponding to the type of jackpot, and when it detects that the game ball has entered the jackpot 2005 regardless of the validity period, it is sequentially subtracted and reaches 0. If so, it is assumed that fraud has occurred. The initial value of the illegal count value is, for example, 16 × (10 + 3) = 208 in the case of a jackpot 1 of 16 rounds and 10 counts, and 4 × (9 + 3) = 48 in the case of a jackpot 2 of 9 counts in 4 rounds. do. Further, in the case of a big hit of 3 in 12 rounds (substantially 2 rounds and 5 counts), it is determined as 2 × (5 + 3), and in 10 rounds, a maximum of 1 prize is awarded (10 × 1), and a total of 26 is determined. The timing chart will be described below.

First, at time t1, there is a prize in the big prize opening 2005 during the valid period (winning sensor (count switch) OFF → ON), and the corresponding bit (large winning opening) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)). “1” is set in the count switch), and 1 is also set in the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)). At this time, "1" is added to the number of winnings N of the large winning openings based on the value of the buffer 2. Further, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-1). Further, a production command related to the big winning opening winning command such as a big winning opening winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a prize ball number command for winning the big winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

At the time t2, as in the time t1, a prize is generated in the large winning opening, and "1" is set in the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. Further, "1" is added to the number of large winning openings based on the value of buffer 2 (N + 2), and the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-2). Further, a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 is transmitted.

At time t3, the jackpot game ends, and the initial value (15) of the illegal count value is set. As described above, the valid time of the large winning opening 2005 is a time that allows the winning detection in addition to the opening time of the large winning opening. The initial value of the fraudulent count may be set at the end timing of the jackpot ending, for example, in the special symbol change waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process.

After that, at times t4 to t6, an illegal winning is generated in which the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 in a state other than the big hit (the big winning opening is not activated), and the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area corresponds. While the bit (large winning opening count switch) is set to "1" (valid, ON), the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball judgment area is set to "0" (invalid, ON). OFF) is set. Then, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. The production command and the prize ball command are transmitted based on the value of the buffer 2, but at this time, the value of the buffer 2 is "0" (invalid, OFF), so that the prize is not appropriate in this way. Is designed so that these commands are not sent.

At time t8, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches "0" by subtracting 1 from the illegal count. As a result, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Further, in order to start fraudulent notification, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not sent. It should be noted that the unauthorized notification and the output of the security signal may be either one.

Further, the illegal count number is set to 1 at time t9. As a result, even if the illegal winning is continuously generated, the security signal (external output signal) can be continuously output and the illegal notification can be continuously performed. Note that time t8 and time t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count is subtracted by "1". Since the illegal count is set to "1" at time t9, the illegal count becomes "0" again, and re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification again, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. If an illegal prize is detected again during the output of the security signal, the output time is reset (extended) while the output of the security signal is continued. Subsequently, at time t11, the illegal count number is set to "1" again. The processing at time t10 and time t11 is executed in the same timer interrupt.

After that, the result of the lottery becomes a big hit at time t12, and the effective time and the number of illegal counts during the big hit are set to the initial value (L). At the time t13, as in the time t2, a prize is generated in the large winning opening, and "1" is set in the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. Then, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the large prize opening based on the value of the buffer 2 (1), and the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1 (L-1). Further, a prize ball command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and an effect command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the prize ball is paid out based on the result of the change display of the symbol by lottery based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is accepted (passed) in the starting port (starting area). 2005 (means for accepting game media) can accept game balls (means for adding game value). The game ball accepted by the count switch (large prize opening sensor, game medium detecting means) provided in the large winning opening 2005 is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). In the input information storage area, a buffer 1 (first storage means) that constantly stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the large winning opening 2005, and a result of variable display of a symbol (lottery result). ) Is assigned to the buffer 2 (second storage means) for storing the input information (game medium detection information) when the game ball is received during the valid period (predetermined period). With this configuration, it is possible to refer to buffer 2 when paying out prize balls, detect illegal winning (abnormal occurrence) by referring to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), and count the number of illegal winnings. It becomes.

[17-5. Timing chart (second starting port)]
The case where the game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2005 has been described above. Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 2004 provided with the ordinary electric accessory will be described in chronological order. FIG. 291 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each configuration when a gaming ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 provided with a normal electric accessory in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the effective time is set with the start of opening of the ordinary electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the initial value of the illegal count (for example, "15") is set. The initial value of the fraudulent count is, for example, the maximum number of winnings + α when the normal electric accessory is operated.

At time t2, a prize is generated in the second starting port 2004 during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (second starting port switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) are displayed. Set "1". Further, "1" is added to the reserved storage number N based on the value of the buffer 2, and the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, a lottery is executed based on the occurrence of a prize, and various effect commands (for example, a look-ahead command and a hold number increase command) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the lottery result and the hold number increase. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Since a prize is generated for the second starting port 2004 at the time t3 during the valid period, it is processed as a normal prize in the same manner as in the case of the time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting the game ball of the second starting port 2004 elapses (ends), and the initial value of the fraudulent count value (number of fraud determination: “10”) is set. As described above, the effective time for accepting the game ball at the second starting port 2004 is the time for allowing the winning detection after the normal electric accessory is closed, in addition to the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory. There is. The number of fraud judgments is set to a different value when the normal electric accessory is opened and after it is closed, but it may be the same, and when the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it is set to a larger value than after it is closed. It may be set. Further, when there are a plurality of types of opening times of the ordinary electric accessory, the number of illegal winnings may be switched according to the opening time. For example, the number of illegal prizes is set to 3 for short opening and 15 for long opening (or multiple opening).

After that, at times t5 to t8, the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area is caused by the illegal winning that the game ball wins the second start port 2004 when the normal electric accessory is not operating. ) Is set to "1" (valid, ON), and "0" (invalid, OFF) is set in the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area. Then, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the buffer 1. At this time, since the fraud is determined based on the value of the buffer 1, if the prize is not appropriate as described above, the effect command and the prize ball command are not transmitted. That is, when the winning of the second starting port 2004 is determined to be valid, the process is executed based on the value of the buffer 2, and when the invalidity is determined (counting the illegality count), the value of the buffer 1 is executed. Performs processing based on.

As described above, when a prize (normal prize) is generated in the second start port 2004 within the valid period, "1" is set in the value of the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. It is set and various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. In addition, when a prize is won in the second starting port 2004 outside the valid period, "1" is set only in the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1, and various commands to be transmitted in the normal case are transmitted. Update the fraudulent count without. Instead of updating the illegal count when setting the value of each buffer, the illegal count may be updated based on the value of each buffer after updating the value of each buffer. As a result, the module that updates the value of each buffer and the module that updates the invalid count can be made independent, and the processing from the switch input to the setting of the corresponding buffer value can be standardized. The update of the invalid count based on the value of each buffer may be performed, for example, except when the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 is "1", or the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 is set. This may be performed when "1" and the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 2 is "0".

At time t9, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches "0" by subtracting "1" from the illegal count. As a result, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (output for 30 seconds). Further, in order to start fraudulent notification, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not sent. It should be noted that the unauthorized notification and the output of the security signal may be either one.

Further, the illegal count number is set to "1" at time t10. As a result, even when the illegal winning is continuously generated, the output of the security signal (external output signal) and the notification can be immediately notified when the illegal winning occurs. It is not always necessary to set the illegal count number to "1", but it is desirable to set a value smaller than the initial value ("15") so that it can be recognized that the illegal winning is continuing. Further, a value larger than "1" may be set in order to prevent fraudulent notification from being frequently performed even though it is not fraudulent due to false detection of noise or the like. Time t9 and time t10 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count is subtracted by "1". Since the illegal count is set to "1" at time t10, the illegal count becomes "0" again, and re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification again, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. If an illegal prize is detected again during the output of the security signal, the output time is reset while the output of the security signal is continued. Subsequently, at time t12, the illegal count number is set to "1" again. The processing at time t11 and time t12 is executed in the same timer interrupt.

After that, at time t13, as in time t1, the effective time is set with the opening of the ordinary electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the initial value of the illegal count (for example, "15") is set.

At time t14, as in time t2, a prize is generated in the second start port 2004 during the valid period, and “1” is set in the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2. "1" is added to the reserved storage number N based on the value of the buffer 2, and the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, as the number of reservations increases, various effect commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At the time t15, as in the time t4, the acceptable valid time of the game ball of the second starting port 2004 has elapsed, and the initial value (“10”) of the illegal count value is set.

Since the first starting port 2003 can always accept the game ball, "1" is directly set to bit0 of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) when the game ball is won. It can be set, and there is no need to count fraudulent counts. That is, the winning openings having a valid period that can be won, such as the starting opening and the large winning opening, are set in the buffer 2 on condition of whether or not the winning is illegal, and the winning openings that can always be accepted are set in the buffer 1. The contents may be set in the buffer 2 as it is, or the buffer 1 may be referred to as a reference destination.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a gaming ball (gaming medium) enters the starting port, a lottery based on the occurrence of a prize is executed. The lottery may be executed only when a prize is generated within the valid period (in the case of a normal prize), but the buffer 1 and the buffer may be executed regardless of whether the prize is within the valid period or outside the valid period. It may be determined whether or not to execute the lottery based on the value of the corresponding bit of 2. That is, after setting the corresponding bit value of each buffer, the lottery is executed with reference to the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 without determining whether or not the winning is within the valid period. .. Hereinafter, a modified example of executing the lottery based on the value set in each buffer will be described.

First, when the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different, the lottery is not executed as an invalid prize due to the occurrence of some abnormality (there is a high possibility that the abnormality has occurred), and the surrounding area is not executed. A dedicated command may be sent to the control board 1510. Upon receiving this dedicated command, the peripheral control board 1510 can notify that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the winning. In the present embodiment, as described above, in order to notify the occurrence of fraud when multiple winnings occur outside the valid period, when the fraud count reaches "0", a command different from this dedicated command. May be transmitted to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Further, the value of the illegal count may be included in the dedicated command. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the illegal count is "0", and if the illegal count is "0", it is determined. The occurrence of an abnormality may be clearly notified.

Further, one of the buffers may be prioritized, and the lottery may be executed when the value of the corresponding bit of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2 (priority is given to the value of the buffer 2) with an emphasis on the effectiveness of the winning. On the other hand, the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the winning opening may be emphasized, and the lottery may be executed based on the value of the buffer 1 (priority is given to the value of the buffer 1). At this time, a dedicated command indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When this dedicated command is continuously received a predetermined number of times or more, or when an abnormality is received a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period, the abnormality notification may be performed.

Further, the priority buffer may be determined at the time of executing the lottery process by parameters or the like. For example, a table containing information for specifying a priority buffer is held in advance, and the table is referred to when the lottery process is executed to specify the priority buffer. This makes it possible to switch the preferred buffer by changing the data values in the table without modifying the program code. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the priority buffer is different for each model, it is possible to use a common program code, and it is possible to increase the versatility of the program and improve the development efficiency. ..

Further, a procedure for designating the priority buffer will be described. Further, the start address of the table for storing the data value indicating the priority buffer at the start of execution of the lottery process is stored in a predetermined register. The table is specified from the address stored in this predetermined register, necessary information is fetched, and the priority buffer is specified. The information stored in the table stores the address of the buffer 1 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 1, and the address of the buffer 2 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2. When executing the lottery process, the address of the buffer specified in the table is referred to, so it is possible to switch the reference destination simply by changing the data value stored in the table, and it should be configured as a common process. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to switch the reference destination depending on the game state, etc. For example, in the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, there is a high possibility that the winning is effective, so the game ball becomes the winning opening. The buffer 1 may be prioritized with an emphasis on the fact that the prize has been won, and the buffer 2 may be prioritized with an emphasis on the effectiveness of the prize in the gaming state in which the game ball cannot be accepted to the second starting port 2004.

Further, when the lottery is executed in a state where the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different, commands based on the lottery result (variation pattern command, symbol type command, etc., are transmitted at the start of normal fluctuation. (Same as the command) is sent, and a dedicated command indicating that the peripheral control board 1510 is different is sent. As for the transmission order of the command based on the lottery result and the dedicated command, the command based on the lottery result may be transmitted first, or the dedicated command may be transmitted first. Further, instead of transmitting the dedicated command, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. At this time, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to all the commands of the command based on the lottery result, or any one (partial) of the commands may be added. It may be added only to the command (for example, the command to be sent first). The addition of information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different is, for example, abnormal (difference) when the fluctuation pattern command at the normal (match) time is set to "3001h" to "30FFh". The time fluctuation pattern commands are set to "B001h" to "B0FFh". Specifically, by changing the first bit of the variation pattern command, the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110,000b") to "B0h" ("10110,000b").

Further, when "1" (valid) is set for both the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, the information stored in the buffer 1 (corresponding) is not used and the valid period is reached. The lottery is executed based on the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2 set when the prize is won. As a result, the lottery can be executed based on the information whose validity is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 1 instead of the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2. In this case, since it is sufficient to hold only the minimum information related to the switch input in the buffer 2, the required storage capacity can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, a lottery is executed based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is accepted (passed) in the starting port (starting area), and the variable display of the symbol is started (lottery execution means). , It shifts to a state where it is possible to give a game value to a player (special game state) such as paying out a prize ball according to the result of a lottery. The game ball accepted by the start port switch (game medium detection means) provided in the start port is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) that constantly stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the start port, and a second start port 2004. Buffer 2 (prize ball) that stores input information (game medium detection information) within the period (valid period) during which the game ball can be accepted only when the normal electric accessory is opened (when the conditions for accepting the game ball are satisfied). A determination area (second storage means) is assigned. With this configuration, the lottery is executed based on the input information stored in the buffer 2, the illegal winning (abnormal occurrence) is detected by referring to the buffer 1 (and the buffer 2), and the number of illegal winnings and the like are determined. It becomes possible to count.

[17-6. Timing chart (probability change area switch)]
The case where the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 has been described above. Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball for the probabilistic region that shifts to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot when a prize is won at a specific timing (specific round) during the big hit game will be described in chronological order. FIG. 292 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each configuration when the gaming ball wins a prize in the probability variation region (V-AT region) in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time values, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the passage of the probability variation region switch of the game ball is detected. As a result, the probability change area switch changes from OFF to ON. At this time, since it is a specific round (V passable round) (valid period), "1" is set in the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)). , "1" is also set for the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)), and if 1 is set for the corresponding bit based on the value of the buffer 2, the probability change. Set the judgment flag. After the big hit ends, if the probability change determination flag is set, the state shifts to the probability change state. Further, when the same value is set for the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2, the probability variation determination flag may be set. At this time, the AND value (logical product) may be calculated from the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2, and the probability variation determination flag may be set when the value is 1. At time t1, since it is determined to be normal, an effect command related to the V passage effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (V-passable round) ends at time t2, but a plurality of specific rounds may be generated in one big hit game.

Subsequently, at time t3, the passage of the probability variation region switch of the game ball is detected as in time t1. At this time, since it is not within the specific round (within the valid period), "1" is set for the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area, and the prize ball determination area is supported. “0” (invalid, OFF) is set in the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 2. Since the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2 have different values, it is determined that there is an abnormality, that is, V passage other than a specific round, and the high probability (advantageous state) does not occur after the big hit. A security signal is output until time t4 as a V-passage abnormality notification, and a V-passage abnormality notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The security signal may be the same as the signal at the time of abnormality in the large winning opening 2005 or the second starting port 2004, or may be a different external output. Further, the output time may be a predetermined time, and does not have to be the same time as the big winning opening winning abnormality or the like. Further, the V-passing abnormality notification and the security signal output may be either one.

If the passage of the probability change area switch is detected in a specific round and then the passage of the probability change area switch is detected in a round other than the specific round, only the abnormality notification is executed (the abnormality notification command is transmitted) when the probability change area switch is passed. However, it may shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability change judgment flag is maintained), and it does not shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability variation judgment flag is cleared). You may do so. In addition, when the passage of the probability change area switch is detected even in a round other than the specific round, the abnormality notification command is transmitted, but the security signal is not output, and the abnormality notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side such as lamps and voices is performed. However, although the notification command is transmitted, the peripheral control board 1510 may not perform abnormality notification for the command.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 292, the abnormality is determined by determining whether or not the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 match, but the abnormality is determined as in the case of determining the winning abnormality of the large winning opening. It may be a method of setting the count number in advance. For example, “2” is set in the fraud determination counter at the start of a specific round, and the fraud determination counter is subtracted based on the information in the buffer 1. Further, it may be set to "1" at the end of a specific round, and if the result of subtracting the fraudulent count is 0, it may be determined to be fraudulent. The initial value of the illegal count set at the start of a specific round can be set to a value that cannot occur in normal times, so it is not necessary to limit it to "2", and there are two or more passages of the game ball. If it is not obtained, 2 may be set. In addition, since it is necessary to determine that it is illegal when even one game ball passes other than the specific round, "1" is set at the end of the specific round, and the result of subtraction is "0". Set to.

In the gaming machine described here, the gaming machine shifts to the probabilistic state under the condition that the gaming ball wins the probable change region at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during the big hit game. If the probabilistic area is not in a state where the game ball can be accepted, the game ball is in a state where it is difficult (or impossible) to win, and if the game ball is accepted in the probable change area in such a state, it is illegal. It is judged as a prize. Therefore, as described above, the bits corresponding to the probabilistic region switch are provided with the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), and the buffer 1 is set regardless of whether it is valid or invalid. Set in buffer 2 only when it is valid. As a result, the buffer 2 may be referred to without determining the illegal winning in the process of shifting to the probabilistic state, so that the process can be simplified. On the other hand, by referring to the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, it is possible to determine the illegal winning and count the number of illegal winnings.

[17-7. Summary / Modification Example]
From the above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment detects the acceptance of the gaming ball (gaming medium) at the large winning opening, the starting opening, etc. by the detection sensor (switch) (detects that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area). ) A game medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing game medium detection means and detection information (game medium detection information) of these game balls (game media) is provided, and game medium detection information storage is provided. The means are a buffer 1 (first storage means, an edge buffer for fraud determination, an input edge data 1 area) that can always store the game medium detection information, and the game medium detection information within the valid period (when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It has a buffer 2 (second storage means, prize ball determination area) for storing, and for example, when a game ball wins a prize within a valid period and pays out the prize ball (execution of processing based on the establishment of predetermined conditions). In the case of), the process is executed with reference to the game medium detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

Further, when the valid period for accepting the game ball is set in the winning opening or the probability change area, the number of times (illegal winning number) that the switch input information (game medium detection information) is stored only in the buffer 1 is counted. By doing so, the abnormality can be determined. The number of illegal prizes may be counted by subtracting 1 each time an illegal prize occurs with the threshold value for abnormality determination as the initial value, and when it reaches 0, it may be determined as abnormal, or the initial value may be 0 and 1 each. It may be added, and when the threshold value for abnormality determination is reached, it may be determined as an abnormality.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the area referred to when the input determination process is executed, the process associated with the input determination can be standardized and the entire process can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to pay out prize balls based on the information detected within the valid period, or to make an abnormality judgment by counting the number of game balls won outside the valid period. Development efficiency can be improved. For example, when determining the winning of the big winning opening 2005, in the above-described embodiment, the determination is made based on the value of the prize ball determination area, but the counting of the winnings to the big winning opening 2005 in the big hit state is determined. The value of the input edge data area 1 may be used for determination, and the value of the prize ball determination area may be referred to only for the winning determination associated with the prize ball.

In the present embodiment, a configuration having two types of buffers, a buffer 1 that constantly stores an input and a buffer 2 that stores an input within a valid period, has been described. However, two or more types such as a buffer for each gaming state are provided. It may be configured to have a buffer of.

Further, in the embodiments described so far, the winning opening whose validity period is set at the time of winning has been described, but the first starting opening 2002, which can always accept the game ball, determines the validity period when the game ball wins. Without doing so, "1" (valid) is set in the corresponding bit (first start port switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area). Therefore, for the first starting port 2002, the prize ball may be played based on the value of the buffer 1, or the prize ball may be played based on the value of the buffer 2 as in the second starting port 2004. Further, since the value of the buffer 1 and the value of the buffer 2 match and the result of the determination processing of the valid period at the second starting port 2004 is always normal, for example, a prize ball when the first starting port 2002 is won. May be the same as the processing of the prize ball of the second starting port 2004.

The buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are included in the input information storage area allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM), but these buffers may be arranged in a continuous area or in a distant area. You may. When allocating buffer 1 and buffer 2 to continuous areas, when storing values in each buffer, it is possible to set to each buffer simply by executing the INC instruction / DEC instruction, which simplifies the process. can. On the other hand, when the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are assigned to distant areas, each buffer can be freely arranged, so that the degree of freedom in designing the storage area is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

[18. Bit transfer instruction]
In recent game machines, complicated game control is required in order to further enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, the game control device that actually controls the game is subject to certain restrictions in order to ensure the fairness of the game and prevent excessive gambling, and the game is played within a predetermined framework. ing.

Therefore, in order to realize complicated game control, there is a possibility that problems such as problems may occur due to the complicated structure of the program. Therefore, the program was simplified by converting the game control into data. For example, the structure of the program is simplified by the program sequentially processing the data in which the control contents are defined, and it becomes easier to respond to the specification change by changing the data.

On the other hand, the digitization of game control has increased the dependence on data, and the complicated specifications of gaming machines have led to an increase in data capacity. Further, since the capacity for storing data for controlling the gaming machine is limited, it is necessary to suppress the increase in the data capacity.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment is made in view of the above circumstances, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity by compressing and storing the data in order to suppress the increase in the data capacity used in the gaming machine. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by compressing the data, it is possible to retain more data, it is possible to provide a game incorporating complicated specifications, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Is possible. Further, by further advancing the data conversion of the game control, the program can be further simplified, the complexity of the game control can be suppressed, and the probability of occurrence of a defect can be reduced. Furthermore, it becomes easier to respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to easily provide various variations of the gaming machine by replacing some data.

Specifically, in the game machine in the present embodiment, by improving the instruction for reading the game data, the degree of freedom in the structure of the table for holding the game data is improved, and the process for reading the game data is simplified. This reduces the capacity of game data and simplifies game control that involves reading data. Hereinafter, the configuration and procedure for reading the data in this embodiment will be described.

[18-1. Bit transfer procedure overview]
First, an outline of a configuration and a procedure for reading data in the present embodiment will be described. In the data transfer procedure in the present embodiment, it is possible to read the data in bit units from the specified bit position of the table, instead of reading the data in byte units from the specified address.

FIG. 293 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the bit transfer procedure of the present embodiment. The bit transfer procedure in the present embodiment is configured to specify a position (address) for reading data based on an index (index information) for designating a data read source, and read data for a specified number of bits. There is. When executing this procedure, the index, the extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of the read data, and the storage destination of the read data are specified as parameters. For the index, a register in which index information is stored may be specified, or a value may be directly specified.

The index in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the start address of the data table (table position information), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position to read data from the specified data table (data relative position information). ing. In the present embodiment, the address of the designated data table is specified by correcting the designated index, and the read position of the data in the data table is acquired. Specifically, the upper 13 bits of the index before correction are set as the lower 13 bits, and "000" is added to the upper 13 bits to make 2 bytes (16 bits), thereby creating the corrected index.

Next, the reference address (N) of the data acquired by adding the corrected index to the value set in the "TP (register)" indicating the reference address of the data storage position (table arrangement). Is calculated, and the storage position (address) of the table is specified. Further, the read position (read start bit position) of the data of the reference address (N) is specified from the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in FIG. 293, the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction (the hatched portion falling to the left) is the read start bit position of the reference address (N). When "100" is set, the read start bit position of the reference address (N) is the 4th bit (" 100").

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the address of the area where the data is stored can be specified by adding the value set in the TP register to the index value, it is sufficient to specify the lower address of the data storage position. , The area for storing the upper address can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area (lower 3 bits of the corrected index) for designating the data read start bit position. With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the address of the data storage area and the data read start bit position by a 2-byte index. That is, it is possible to specify the data storage position in bit units and read the data without causing an increase in capacity even when compared with the case where the data is read by specifying the address as in the conventional load instruction. It has become.

Further, in the bit transfer procedure in the present embodiment, extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read as a parameter at the time of execution is specified. A value of the number of bits -1 of the data to be acquired is set in the extraction designation information. In the example shown in FIG. 293, the data for 6 bits (when the extraction designation information = 5) is read from the 5th bit of the table indicated by the reference destination address (address N) and stored in the designated storage destination.

In the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding the corrected index to the value of the start address (reference address) of the data area set in the TP register in advance is the address where the data is actually stored. Further, when the CPU is reset at the time of turning on the power or the like, the start address of the data area is set as the default value (initial value) as the value set in the TP register. Further, the TP register can be rewritten to an arbitrary value by a program. With this configuration, by appropriately rewriting the value of the TP register according to the game state, etc., it is possible to change the data reference destination without changing the program code, simplifying the program code, and playing the game. The development efficiency of the machine can be improved. The details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to FIGS. 299 and later.

The TP register is a dedicated register for designating an index as a reference address among the registers of the CPU. A general-purpose register used in an operation or the like is composed of two or more banks, but a TP register is not a bank configuration like a flag register but is configured as one register. It should be noted that a TP register may be provided for each bank like a general-purpose register, and the TP register of one bank may be used in the same manner as the general-purpose register each time the bank is switched. For example, when bank 0 is used in the initialization processing and the general-purpose register of bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing, the TP register used in the initialization processing is the one set as bank 0, and the timer interrupt processing is performed. As the TP register used in, the one set as bank 1 will be used. This makes it possible to switch the value of the TP register according to the processing, and for example, the data reference destination can be switched for each processing. Even if the TP register is provided for each bank, it can be rewritten by the program as in the case where it is not provided for each bank, and the default value is set at the time of reset. Further, the default value may be a common value regardless of the bank, or a different value may be set for each bank.

[18-2. Types of bit transfer instructions]
Subsequently, an instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction) will be described. In this embodiment, a case where a bit transfer instruction is executed by an assembler (mnemonic) will be described, but the same applies to other development languages. FIG. 294 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment.

The bit transfer instruction is composed of an instruction code "RBT" and parameters. The parameters are the storage destination of the data to be referenced, the index indicating the reference destination address, and the extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of the data to be extracted. In the present embodiment, the storage destination of the data to be referred to is a register, but it may be written directly to the storage area on the RAM. The index value specifies the address of the table in which the data to be read is stored and the position of the data to be read, as in the example shown in FIG. 293.

Next, an example of actually using the instruction code will be described. FIG. 295 is a diagram showing an example of the types of bit transfer instructions of the present embodiment. As described above, the instruction code is "RBT", and the acquired data is stored in the register r. As the register r, for example, W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, H register, and L register, which are general-purpose registers, are designated. When the data to be read is 2 bytes, a pair register such as a WA register, a BC register, or a DE register may be specified.

In addition, the parameters (storage destination of reference data, reference destination address, and extraction specification information) may be specified either directly by specifying the index (address) value mm or by specifying the register rr for address specification. .. When the register rr is specified, the value stored in the register is read and processed. Since a 2-byte value is stored in the address designation register rr, a DE register, an HL register, an index register (IX register, IY register) and the like correspond to it. Hereinafter, an example of the bit transfer instruction code shown in FIG. 295 will be described.

For "RBT r, (mm) .n", the address mm of the table for storing the data is directly specified, the data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n is read out, and the data is stored in the register r. The extraction designation information n directly specifies a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or designates a register A. When the register A is specified, the data corresponding to the number of minutes stored in the register A is read out.

Further, when the specific operation (procedure) of "RBT r, (mm) .n" is explained, as described with reference to FIG. 293, the address of the table specified by the upper 13 bits of the 16-bit index mm is used. Therefore, mm / 8 corresponds to the corrected index. The value set in the TP register described above is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the table to be referenced. Further, the lower 3 bits of the index mm are extracted (mm∧07H), and the bit position of the start of reading data from the referenced table is specified. Then, the data for the extraction designation information n + 1 bit is extracted from the specified position and stored in the register r. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 11, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 5 bytes. Further, even after the instruction is executed, the J flag and the Z flag in the flag register become zero, and the values before the instruction is executed are retained for the others. The change in the flag register is the same even with the instruction code described below.

“RBT r, (rr) .n” specifies a register rr that stores the address of the table, reads data for the number of bits based on the extraction specification information n from the table, and stores it in the register r. Other parameters are the same as the parameters of "RBT r, (mm) .n". Specifically, the address of the table to be referred to is stored in the HL register, and when the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes "RBT A, (HL) .n". The specific operation of "RBT r, (rr) .n" is the same as when the address mm of "RBT r, (mm) .n" is replaced with the value stored in the register rr. Although omitted, the detailed procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 300. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 9, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. When the object to be read is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity is 1 byte in order to specify a register such as a DE register, an HL register, or an index register (IX register, IY register) as a storage destination. It increases by a minute to 4 bytes. The detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later with reference to FIG. 302.

“RBT r, (rr +) .n” is executed by the same operation as “RBT r, (rr) .n”, and then the value of the address stored in the register rr is added by n + 1. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. This makes it possible to continuously read the designated area. For example, by executing "RBT A, (HL +) .n" and then "RBT W, (HL) .m", from the specified position in the table of addresses initially stored in the HL register. After reading the n-bit data and storing it in the A register, the m-bit data can be read from the next area and stored in the W register. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r, (rr +) .n", a plurality of data can be read from the continuous area, and the data having the same number of bits can be read as much as necessary or a plurality of types. It is possible to simplify the process of reading a record (data group) composed of data having the number of bits of. A detailed procedure for reading a plurality of data from a continuous area will be described later with reference to FIG. 301.

“RBT r, (rr + d) .n” reads data from the position where the value d is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. This makes it possible to specify arbitrary data in the specified table and read the data. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 4 bytes.

“RBT r, (rr + W) .n” reads data from the position where the value stored in the register W is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. This makes it possible to specify arbitrary data in the specified table and read the data. Further, by updating the value of the register W, data can be continuously read from the positions specified by the common code. “RBT r, (rr + A) .n” can be processed in the same manner only by changing from register W to register A. The cycle for processing these instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing the instructions is 3 bytes.

[18-3. Program example]
Subsequently, an application example of the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction “RBT” will be described. FIG. 296 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of a process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 297 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 296) of the process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in the present embodiment. The steps of the corresponding flowchart are described as comments of the program. The process shown in FIGS. 296 and 297 is a process of reading data from the table in units of 6 bits. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table as the initial value of the reference destination address as an index value (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program of FIG. 297, the address of the table to be referred to is stored in the HL register (“LD HL, table_Top”). The address of the referenced table is specified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. In this table, the number of bits allocated to one data (total number of bits of the basic configuration block) is set to 6, and four data (“25, 48, 32, 63”) are stored. As for the start address of the data area, the "start address of the data area" is set in the TP register as a default value every time a reset signal such as when power is restored is input. Therefore, when the TP register is not rewritten, that is, If the start address of the data area is still stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the start address of the data area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 extracts pointer information (pointa_a) of the data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register (“LDA, (pointa_a)”).

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the reference table (step P8003). The basic configuration block indicates an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. Further, the total number of basic constituent blocks is the number of bits in the area for storing data, and corresponds to the data capacity of each record. For example, in a table that stores an integer value in the range of 0 to 30, an area for 5 bits is required to store each data, so the total number of basic constituent blocks is 5. In this embodiment, the total number of bits of the basic constituent block is 6. The result of the multiplication is stored in the A register (“MUL A, 6”) as shown in the program.

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the number of basic units (step P8004). The number of basic units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine of the present embodiment (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) is 8 (the number of bits of 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register as shown in the program (“LD C, 8 → DIV WA, C”). When the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the W register.

The main control MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in the process of step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the WA register is added (“ADD HL, WA”). When referring to the program, the WA register is saved in the stack area by executing "PUSH WA" before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register. This is because the value of the W register in which the remainder is stored is cleared (“XOR W”), and then the value of the remainder is used as the calculated value (“POP WA → LD A, W → ...”).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of the process of step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). On the program, the value of the HL register is multiplied by 8 by performing the left shift (SLA HL) three times (shifting by 3 bits).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder value of the division of step P8005 to the calculation result of the process of step P8006, and sets it as the reference destination address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register is the start bit position for reading the reference data from the start address of the reference table. On the program, the remainder value is calculated (“POP WA” → “LD A, W” → “XOR W”), and the remainder value (value stored in the WA register) is stored in the HL register in which the index value is stored. Adding (“ADD HL, WA”). By these processes, the index (pre-correction index) shown in FIG. 293 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction designation information based on the number of information to be acquired (the number of bits of the data to be referred to, 6 in this embodiment), and stores the reference data from the reference destination address information by the bit transfer instruction. Set first (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the pre-correction index, and the data for the number of bits (6 bits) corresponding to the extraction specification information n is stored in the A register (“RBT A, (HL) .n”. ).

[18-4. Modification example]
As described above, the procedure for issuing the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment is (1) designation of data to be referred to, (2) creation of an index (pre-correction index), and (3) reading / storing of data. ing. Here, a modified example will be described in which a process that can be executed independently of the process of executing a bit transfer instruction is made independent as a subroutine to simplify the structure of the program.

(1) The designation of the data to be referred to is to set the information for specifying the data (reference data) required for the processing during execution, and in the flowchart of FIG. 296, it corresponds to the table referred to in step P8001. The process of designating the information and designating the information corresponding to the data read position in step P8002 corresponds to the process. These processes are specialized for the content being executed (caller) and are individually specified when various functions are executed. (3) The same applies to the process of reading / storing data, which is executed in the subsequent process based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creating an index (pre-correction index), in addition to the pointer information of the reference table address and data reference position specified in (1), the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is specified. Therefore, the index before correction can be created independently of the processing being executed. Therefore, (2) the index creation process can be converted into a subroutine.

FIG. 298 is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process in the present embodiment is made into a subroutine, (A) is a process of a caller of the index creation process, and (B) is a subroutine-like index creation process. The flowchart shown in FIG. 298 (A) executes the same processing as in FIG. 296. The flowchart of the index creation process of FIG. 298 (B) is a subroutine of the processes from step P8003 to step P8008 of FIG. 296. By making the index creation process into a subroutine in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of the caller and improve the development efficiency.

The input parameters of the index creation process are the "index value" which is the start address of the reference table, the "pointer information" of the data to be referenced, and the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" of the stored data. In the present embodiment, the result of subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table is set as the "index value" in the HL register (step P8001), and the "pointer information" is set in the A register (step P8002). ). Further, "total number of bits of the basic constituent block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting "index value" and "pointer information" as input parameters of index creation processing, it is performed by setting (specifying) in the register handled as "index value" and "pointer value" in index creation processing. .. Further, for the "total number of bits of the basic constituent block", the numerical value itself may be specified, or may be set (specified) in the register treated as the "total number of bits of the basic constituent block".

[18-5. Compressed data]
In the conventional data read instruction, since the storage of data is managed in a predetermined basic unit (byte unit), it is necessary to read the data from the table in this unit. In the conventional table structure managed in 1-byte (8-bit) units as in the game machine of the present embodiment, even if the data does not require the capacity of 1-byte (8-bit), the data is stored in byte units. Needed to be stored. For example, if the numerical value is in the range of 0 to 63, it is sufficient to secure the capacity for 6 bits for each data, but it is necessary to allocate and hold the capacity for 1 byte for each data.

On the other hand, in the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, it is possible to read data for a specified number of bits from a specified position in the referenced table. Therefore, it is sufficient to allocate the data area as much as necessary, and the data can be compressed and held. The structure for compressing and holding the data will be described below with reference to FIG. 299.

FIG. 299 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table structure in this embodiment. In the table shown in FIG. 299, four records (data) "25, 48, 32, 63" are held. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "00011001b, 00110000b, 0010000b, 00111111b". Since the basic number of units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the game machine is 8, it has a table structure that holds data in 8-bit units such as the area of 4771 shown by the dotted line, and the top 2 of each record. The bit was "0".

Since the above-mentioned bit transfer instruction can read data from any bit of the specified address, in the present embodiment, the data for 6 bits of each record, that is, the data included in the area 4772 is continuously stored. By doing so, it becomes possible to arrange the data as shown in the area 4773. As a result, "19h, 0Ch, FEh" is stored.

As described above, the conventional table structure requires a capacity of 4 bytes (32 bits), but by reading the data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, unnecessary bits are deleted and 3 bytes (24 bits) are deleted. It can be a table structure compressed into bits). As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to minimize the area for holding data, and it is possible to save the storage capacity. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

[18-6. Detailed procedure of bit transfer instruction]
Subsequently, a typical pattern will be described with respect to the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment. Here, when reading the specified single data (RBT A, (HL) .5), when reading the data continuously from the table ([1] RBT A, (HL +). 5 → [2] RBT B, (HL) .5) A case of reading a data having a capacity larger than 1 byte (RBT DE, (HL) .9) will be described. In the examples described below, the value of the TP register is set to "8000h", which is the start address of the data area.

[18-6-1. Reading single data]
FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where a single data is read from a referenced table. The referenced table is the same as the table shown in FIG. 299. The bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBT A, (HL) .5".

As shown in FIG. 300, the pre-correction index “4C6E” is stored in the HL register. The address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and the example described here shows the case of transferring the second stored data (30h) of the referenced table. As described above, the total number of bits of the basic building block of the referenced table is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). The pre-correction index "4C6E" can be calculated by executing the index creation process (FIG. 298 (B)) based on this information.

When the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL) .5" is executed, first, the reference destination address for reading the data is specified. Specifically, the reference address ("898Dh") can be calculated by dividing the pre-correction index "4C6E" by the number of basic units (8) ("098Dh") and adding the TP "8000h". ..

Further, by calculating the logical product of the pre-correction index “4C6E” and “07h”, the lower 3 bits (“110b”) are acquired, and the read start position (bit) of the reference destination address is specified. In the example shown in FIG. 300, it is the 6th (= “110b”) bit of the reference destination address. Then, "110,000b" (= 48 (" 30h")) can be acquired by extracting data for 6 (n + 1) bits from the 6th bit of the reference destination address "898Dh". The acquired value is complemented with "00" in the upper 2 bits according to the number of basic units (8) and stored in the A register.

[18-6-2. Continuous reading of data]
FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is continuously read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the table shown in FIG. 299, as in the case of FIG. 300. Further, a case where the bit transfer instruction [1] "RBT A, (HL +) .5" is executed and then [2] "RBT B, (HL) .5" is executed will be described. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction, and correspond to the arrow of the reference destination address in FIG.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL +) .5" is the same as "RBT A, (HL) .5" (FIG. 300) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. In the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL +) .5", after the acquired data is stored in the A register, the value of the extraction designation information n + 1 (5 + 1) is added to the index value "4C6Eh" stored in the HL register. do. The value stored in the HL register (index before correction) is not changed from the value set before the bit transfer instruction is executed even after the bit transfer instruction is executed (after the data is read). It has become. By executing the index update process for updating the index value to the storage position of the next data in this way, the storage position of the next data of the read data can be specified. In the example shown in FIG. 301, it is "4C74h".

After that, the reference destination address and the read start position (bit) are specified in the same manner as in the case of reading the single data described with reference to FIG. 300. In the example shown in FIG. 301, 6 bits of data are read from the 4th (= “100b”) bit of the reference address “898Eh” and stored in the B register.

In this way, when reading data continuously from the specified table, the index value is calculated by first executing the index creation process, and then added to the index value for the number of bits of the read data. The index value can be updated sequentially by.

In addition, when each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different bit numbers, it is possible to acquire data for each record by specifying the extraction specification information according to the number of bits that make up the record. It will be possible. For example, when a record is composed of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, data for one record is acquired by sequentially executing bit transfer instructions by designating 4, 6, and 10 as extraction designation information. can do. At this time, when composed of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, the total number (number of bits) of the basic constituent blocks is 20 (= 4 + 6 + 10). In this case, for example, the program configuration is such that the bit transfer instruction is executed in the order of "RBT A, (HL +) .4", "RBT B, (HL +) .6", "RBT DE, (HL) .10". This makes it possible to acquire each data constituting the record. By configuring as described above, it is not necessary to acquire data while individually creating index values, so that it is possible to simplify the program for acquiring data in record units and speed up the execution time.

[Reading data with a capacity larger than 18-6-3.1 bytes]
FIG. 302 is a diagram illustrating a bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte of the present embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a procedure. be.

The table shown in FIG. 302 (A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and holds three records (data) “55,258,942” as an example. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "37h, 102h, 3AEh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "0000101111b, 01000000010b, 1110110110b".

However, since the upper limit of the table shown in FIG. 302 (A) is 1000, the table can be stored in 10 bits. As described above, since the basic number of units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine is 8, it is necessary to store the data in units of 8 bits (1 byte), and 16 bits are required to actually store the data. Needed enough capacity. Therefore, conventionally, the table structure is as shown by the dotted line 4801, and "0" is assigned to the upper 6 bits of each unused record. Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 299, the data for 10 bits of each record, that is, the data in the area 4802 is continuously stored, and the data is arranged as shown in 4803. As a result, "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah" is stored. In this way, it is possible to similarly compress and hold data having a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte).

For the total number of basic constituent blocks, the number of bits of the maximum value of the configured data may be specified. For example, as in the above example, if the upper limit of the configured data is 1000 (3E8h), 10 which is the number of bits is the total number of basic constituent blocks. Further, if the total number of basic constituent blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored is 0h to 3FFh (1023). Further, as described above, when each record in the table is composed of a combination of data having a different number of bits (for example, the first data, the second data, and the third data), the maximum value of the first data is used. The number of bits, the number of bits of the maximum value of the second data, and the number of bits of the maximum value of the third data are the total number of basic constituent blocks of the first data, the total number of basic constituent blocks of the second data, and the basic configuration of the third data, respectively. It is the total number of blocks.

As described above, FIG. 302 (B) is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing a bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte, and executes the bit transfer instruction “RBT DE, (HL) .9”. do. The pre-correction index "4C72h" is stored in the HL register. The start address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and an example of transferring the second data of the referenced table is shown. Further, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 10, and the basic unit is 8. The pre-correction index "4C72h" can be calculated by executing the index creation process (FIG. 298 (B)) based on this information.

The reference destination address is specified in the same manner as in the procedure shown in FIG. 300, and "898Eh" is calculated. Further, the read start position (“010b”) of the reference destination address is specified by the same procedure. Then, “0100000010b” (= 258 (“ 102h”)) is acquired by extracting 10 (n + 1) bit data from the 2nd (“010b”) bit, which is the read start position of the reference destination address “898Eh”. be able to. Since the acquired value exceeds the number of basic units (8), the upper 2 bits (“01b”) of the acquired value are extracted from the upper bits, and “000000” is complemented to the upper 6 bits of the extracted value. (“00000001b”) and store in the D register. Further, the remaining lower 8 bits (“00000010b”) are stored in the E register.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the data requires a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte), the data can be compressed and held, and the data can be read out by a simple procedure. It will be possible.

[18-7. Application example]
Subsequently, an example of applying the bit transfer command of the present embodiment in game control will be described. Here, a process of extracting a random number and selecting a variation pattern of a symbol variation display (dynamic display) in game control based on the extracted random number will be described as an example. In this process, the extracted random numbers are sequentially compared with the threshold value acquired from the fluctuation pattern table, and when the extracted random numbers are equal to or greater than the threshold value, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to this threshold value is selected as the lottery result. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 303 to 305.

[18-7-1. Fluctuation pattern table configuration]
First, the variation pattern table in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 303 is a diagram for explaining an application example of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the corresponding range, and (B) is a program code showing a fluctuation pattern table. (C) is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about the variation pattern table corresponding to (B).

In the present embodiment, the range of the extracted random numbers is 0 to 63 (integer value), and as shown in FIG. 303 (A), the extracted random numbers are included in the range corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern number corresponding to is selected. In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns from pattern 1 (PT1) to pattern 5 (PT5) are defined, and patterns 1 are defined when the random number values are 0 to 32, and patterns 2, 46 to 54 are defined when the random number values are 33 to 45. The case of is pattern 3, the case of 55 to 60 is pattern 4, and the case of 61 to 63 is pattern 5. In addition, the larger the pattern number, the higher the expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (the lottery result will be a big hit). It should be noted that the larger the pattern number, the higher the expectation, and the smaller the pattern number, the higher the expectation. Also, the pattern number is set based on a standard other than the management expectation. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 303 (B), the fluctuation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as one record with a set of a random number threshold value and a pattern number. The random number threshold and the fluctuation pattern number are continuously stored in the same table.

As mentioned above, the range of random numbers to be extracted is 0 to 63, and the threshold requires a capacity of up to 6 bits. Similarly, since the variation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7) is required. When data is stored by the conventional method, the gaming machine of the present embodiment requires a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for storing one data, and is therefore shown on the left side of FIG. 303 (C). As described above, if the number of records composed of the random number threshold value and the fluctuation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 303 (C), by adopting the data compression technique of the present embodiment, it is sufficient to secure a capacity of 6 bits for the threshold value and 3 bits for the fluctuation pattern number, and these data can be continuously stored. If the number of records is 5, the data can be stored with a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), and the capacity can be reduced by 40% or more.

The table shown in FIG. 303 is an example, and the compression rate of the table changes according to the threshold value of random numbers, the range of fluctuation pattern numbers, and the like. For example, if the capacity of the random number threshold is in bytes (8 bits), the data cannot be compressed, but if the capacity of the random number threshold is not in bytes, that is, if there is a fraction of 1 to 7 bits, each data The capacity can be reduced from 8 bits by a fractional bit. In particular, when the data capacity is 1 bit such as 9 bits or 17 bits, it is possible to reduce the capacity of 7 bits with one data, and the maximum effect can be obtained.

[18-7-2. Procedure for selecting a fluctuation pattern]
Next, the outline of the procedure for selecting the variation pattern in the present embodiment will be described. note that. When a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables are defined, the fluctuation pattern tables are selected in advance according to the game state and the like.

First, a random number in the range of 0 to 63 is extracted as a random number for the lottery of the fluctuation pattern. Next, the random number threshold value and the fluctuation pattern number are sequentially acquired from the top of the table in record units from the fluctuation pattern table. Further, the threshold value of the acquired random number is compared with the extracted random number, and if the value of the random number is equal to or larger than the acquired threshold value, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected as the lottery result. On the other hand, when the value of the random number is less than the acquired threshold value, the next record is acquired from the variation pattern table and the variation pattern is selected by comparing with the threshold value in the same procedure. Thus, the threshold corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers for selecting the corresponding variation pattern. Further, since the threshold value of the last record of the fluctuation pattern table is 0, the fluctuation pattern is always selected in the last record. To show a numerical example of the fluctuation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is "48", it is less than the threshold value compared to the threshold value "60" corresponding to the first record in the table, so the next record. Compare with the threshold value “54” of. Similarly, when compared with the threshold value “45” of the next record, the extracted random number “45” becomes equal to or more than the threshold value, so the same pattern “PT3” (variation pattern number 3) on the right side of the corresponding end is selected.

Here, the procedure (variation pattern selection process) for acquiring the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table will be specifically described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in the present embodiment. FIG. 305 is a diagram showing an example of a program for selecting a variation pattern in the present embodiment. The flowchart of FIG. 304 corresponds to the program of FIG. 305. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure of the variation pattern selection process first specifies the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern (number). Next, an index is created to acquire data from the specified variation pattern table by the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment. Then, a random number for selecting a fluctuation pattern is extracted. Finally, the random number threshold value and the corresponding variation pattern number are obtained from the variation pattern table using the bit transfer instruction, and the variation pattern number is selected by comparing the random number threshold value with the random number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first acquires the address (Hp_no_table) of the fluctuation pattern table (step P8021). In the present embodiment, one variation pattern table is defined, but when a plurality of variation pattern tables are defined according to a gaming state or the like, the variation pattern table is specified at this timing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a parameter for index creation for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT of the present embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating the index is performed by the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 296 and 297.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the fluctuation pattern table specified in the process of step P8021 as the index value in the HL register as the initial value of the index. ("LD HL, Hp_no_table-9000h" and "9000h" correspond to "TP" in the program code shown in FIG. 297 and are values stored in the TP register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a parameter for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, first, the pointer information of the data to be referred (record of the fluctuation pattern table) is extracted and set as a parameter. Here, since the data is acquired from the beginning of the fluctuation pattern table, the pointer information of the data is 0. Furthermore, the total number of basic building blocks is set as a parameter. As described above, the total number of basic configuration blocks corresponds to the data capacity of the area for storing one unit of data (records) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the threshold value of the random number is 6 bits and the fluctuation pattern number is 3 bits, a capacity of 9 bits is required to store one record, and the total number of basic constituent blocks is 9.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an index creation process for creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the pointer information (0) of the data to be referenced (variation pattern table) is multiplied by the total number of bits (9) of the basic constituent block. The result of multiplication is 0, which is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value of the WA register by the number of basic units (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder is stored in the W register (0). Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register and adds the value of the WA register to the HL register. As described above, the value before clearing the W register is saved in the stack area in advance so that it can be used in a later operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shifts the value of the HL register to the left (multiplies by 8) by 3 bits. Further, the value of the saved W register is added to the HL register, and the index creation is completed.

When the index creation is completed and the preparation for acquiring the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table is completed, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for drawing the variation pattern (step P8024). As described above, the extracted random number is a 6-bit integer from 0 to 63 and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Subsequently, a process of specifying the fluctuation pattern number is performed by comparing the extracted random value with the threshold value stored in the fluctuation pattern table. First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number threshold value from the fluctuation pattern table based on the index created in the process of step P8023 by the bit transfer instruction (step P8025). Specifically, 6 bits of data are acquired from the position specified by the index and stored in the A register (RBT A, (HL +) .5). Further, the fluctuation pattern number stored in the continuous area is acquired by the bit transfer instruction (step P8026). The variation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBT W, (HL +) .2).

Next, when the main control MPU 1311 acquires the threshold value of the random number and the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table, it determines whether or not the threshold value is 0 (step P8027). In the present embodiment, since the threshold value of the final record of the variation pattern table is set to 0, the determination of whether or not the threshold value is 0 is to determine whether or not the final record is detected (AND A, FFh). → JR Z, hp_select_2). When the threshold value is 0 (the result of step P8027 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process using the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, when the threshold value of the random number is not 0 (the result of step P8027 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the threshold value of the random number is smaller than the random number for selecting the variation pattern (step P8028). If the random number threshold is greater than the variation pattern selection random number (result of step P8028 is "yes"), the process of step P8025 to select the next record and obtain the threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number. Return to.

Further, when the threshold value of the random number is equal to or less than the random number for selecting the variation pattern (the result of step P8028 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 ends the present process with the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result. (Step P8029).

In the variation pattern selection process of the present embodiment, by looping the processes from step P8025 to step P8028, the threshold value of the last record from the first record of the variation pattern table and the acquired random value are sequentially compared to obtain the variation pattern. It is configured to break out of the loop once it has been identified and the variation pattern has been identified. On the program, as shown in FIG. 305, the processing from the tag "hp_select_1" to the tag "hp_select_2" corresponds to this loop.

Further, in the variation pattern selection process of the present embodiment, an index is created with the start address of the table as the data read start position, and the bit transfer instructions "RBT A, (HL +) .5" and "RBT W, (HL +). 2 ”is executed sequentially. As a result, reading of data is started from the beginning of the table, and it is possible to continuously read the next data without recalculating the index. In this way, even when the data is continuously acquired, the data can be acquired without resetting the parameters, so that the program can be simplified.

[18-8. Other application examples]
Here, the application example shown in FIG. 303 uses the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment for the table for selecting the variation pattern, but it is not necessary to limit the use to this, and other applications are required. It can also be applied to the table of use. For example, it is a table for specifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, and each port is composed of a port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, a data area address, and the like. It can also be applied to what is available. At this time, if all the data constituting the table is not in byte units, the effect of the data transfer instruction in the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, as another example, it can be applied to data for creating a command to be transmitted to various boards, for example, data for specifying a parameter of the command to be transmitted. Specifically, if the command specifies the number of prize balls in the prize ball command for instructing the number of prize balls to be paid out, if the number of prize balls is 1 to 15, it can be specified with a capacity of 4 bits. At this time, a capacity of 5 bits may be secured so that the number of prize balls of 16 or more can be specified, or the first bit is fixed to "1" to specify that the number of prize balls is the number of prize balls. The number of prize balls may be specified by the lower 4 bits.

As yet another example, it can be applied to a table for specifying an area for storing various data. Specifically, it is a table composed of records including information for specifying data (information for identifying data) and information for specifying the address of an area for storing the data. The information that identifies the address of the area for storing data does not store the address itself, but stores the reference address in another area in advance, and stores the difference value (difference address) from the reference address in the table. You may try to do it. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity for storing the address. In addition, it is possible to flexibly deal with the case where the number of data or the data capacity is large or the data capacity changes.

In addition, as another example of the table for specifying the area for storing various data, the address (2 bytes) of the area for storing data can be specified by combining the upper address (1 byte) and the lower address (1 byte). It may be configured to do so. In this case, the upper address may be stored in another area in advance as the reference address information, and only the lower address may be stored in the table. The data capacity can be reduced by making it possible to store the lower address in an area smaller than 1 byte. In addition, since the address for storing data can be specified without calculation (or by simple calculation), the process for specifying the address can be simplified. Further, since the address where the data is actually stored can be easily specified by referring to the table, maintenance can be facilitated, such as when reviewing the address where the data is stored.

Further, since the data compression technique in the present embodiment makes it possible to acquire data having a specified number of bits as described above, it can be applied even when data of different sizes are continuously stored. However, when data of different sizes are continuously stored, it is necessary to specify the size of each data, and it is not possible to efficiently reduce the data capacity by holding the size of each data individually. there is a possibility. Therefore, by securing an area corresponding to the maximum value of a series of data and storing each data, it is possible to acquire the data without specifying the size for each data, and the entire process is simplified. be able to. As described above, when storing a plurality of types of data as one record in a table, first specify the size of each data constituting the record, and then specify the size of the specified data in the table. By acquiring each record, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and simplify the processing at the same time.

Further, if the table structure is the same, data compressed by a common process can be acquired, so it is preferable that similar tables have a common structure. For example, when a plurality of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern tables are defined according to the gaming state, a common structure is used even if it is possible to reduce the data capacity for each table due to reasons such as a small number of fluctuation pattern types. By doing so, it is possible to acquire data from the fluctuation pattern table by a common process without depending on the game state, and the entire process can be simplified.

[18-9. Effect, etc.]
As described above, by reading the data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, it is possible to delete unnecessary bits to form a compressed table structure, so that the area for holding the data can be minimized. It will be possible. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

Further, since the process of creating the index for executing the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment can be made independent, it is possible to suppress the original game control from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity while suppressing the complexity of conventional game control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to read a plurality of data from a continuous area by continuously executing bit transfer instructions while incrementing the index, the required amount of data having the same number of bits is obtained. It is possible to simplify the process of reading only the data or reading a record (data group) composed of data having a plurality of types of bits.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even data requiring a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data is read out by the same procedure as the data having less than 8 bits. This makes it possible to provide a highly versatile data reading means.

The data structure that can be read by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment is effective when the size of the data is not in bytes, and the larger the number of data, the larger the capacity saved. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of defined data such as data used for processing related to special symbols and ordinary symbols, for example, fluctuation patterns. When the data is composed of byte units, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction (“LD”) or the like. On the other hand, in the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, the procedure for reading the data is larger than that in the load instruction. Therefore, when it is necessary to quickly perform routine processing such as power-on processing or power failure processing, or data to be handled. When the number of is small, the load instruction may be preferentially used instead of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment. In this way, when controlling the game based on a wide variety of data such as controls related to the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, the data capacity is increased by using a bit transfer instruction that can acquire data in bit units. Can be reduced. On the other hand, if you need to process routine steps quickly, you can simplify the process by using load instructions that can access the data stored directly at the specified address without the need to create an index. Or speed up.

[19. Improvement of instruction to call process]
The means for reducing the capacity by compressing the area for storing data has been described above. Subsequently, by shortening the word length of the instruction (command) constituting the program, the procedure (number of clocks, number of steps) processed by the arithmetic means (main control MPU1311) is reduced to speed up the processing, or the processing is frequently combined. A means for simplifying a program by collectively executing the instructions to be executed will be described. Here, an instruction obtained by improving an instruction (INV instruction) for executing a predefined process will be described. Since the execution frequency of the INV instruction is very high, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by speeding up the execution of the INV command. In addition, the program can be simplified by implementing an instruction that integrates the processes executed in combination when the INV instruction is executed.

[19-1. INV instruction]
First, an outline of a normal INV instruction will be described. The word length of the INV instruction differs depending on the type of MPU (processor), but it is 4 bytes in the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in the present embodiment.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, the return address that is the return destination for returning to the caller's process after the execution of the called process is completed is stored in the stack area. As a result, by executing the return instruction in the called process, the value of the program counter is rewritten to the return address stored in the stack area to return to the caller, and the process is continued from the next instruction of the executed INV instruction. be able to.

Further, since the INV instruction can specify all the addresses of the storage area, it is possible to call all the processes stored in the memory. Therefore, the arrangement of programs and data can be freely set. On the other hand, since the procedure for calling the process (the number of required clocks) may increase due to the high degree of freedom and overhead may occur, it was desired to reduce the load of the entire process by reducing this.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in order to reduce the load for calling the processes that are frequently executed, a table in which the addresses of the processes to be called are stored is defined in advance, and the processes are arranged based on the table. Prior art has been proposed that makes it possible to call a process while reducing the load for identification (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174833). Hereinafter, the outline of the INVD instruction having a function similar to that of the prior art will be described.

[19-2. INVD instruction]
In the INVD instruction, as described above, a processing address table including an address in which frequently executed processes are stored is created in advance, and a process to be called when the INVD instruction is executed is specified based on the processing address table. An index (1 byte) is assigned to each process in the processing address table, and it is possible to call a specific process simply by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). Become. This makes it possible to shorten the word length of the instruction, speed up the processing, and simplify the program structure. In addition, even when the program layout (process storage destination) in the memory is changed, the data defined in the processing address table may be changed, so that the program layout or configuration is changed. It is possible to respond flexibly and improve the efficiency of program development.

Here, the configuration of the storage area for storing the processing address table will be described. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of the storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The storage area is provided by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313.

The area accessed by the game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), an internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), and a ROM area (8000h to C12Fh). ) And the extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used areas), and access by the game control program is basically prohibited.

Explaining each area, the RAM area is an area for temporarily storing data to be read / written when the program is executed. Further, the internal function register area stores the setting values of various registers for controlling the internal function. In the present embodiment, the internal function register areas are arranged in two places, but they may be one area or may be divided into three or more areas. Although the internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, the value is not stored in the process of the operation of the main control MPU 1311 unlike the RAM area, and the main control MPU 1311 executes it. It identifies the function for. That is, once the value of the internal function register area is set at the timing when the power is turned on, the set information is not changed like the information stored in the RAM area.

The ROM area includes a program / data area (8000h to BFFFh), a ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), a processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and an HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program / data area stores read-only data and programs. Data such as the program title and version are set in the ROM comment area. The processing address table area stores data related to a process (subroutine) called when a specific process call instruction (for example, an INVD instruction described later) is executed. In the HW parameter area, hardware-related parameters for executing the internal functions of the main control board 1310 are set.

The extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated as an unused (access prohibited) area in a normal (mass production) gaming machine, while it is an area that can be allocated as a program / data area in a development gaming machine. The program / data is assigned to a ROM different from the ROM in which it is stored. By doing so, the mass-produced gaming machine does not have the expansion ROM, so that the program / data arranged in the expansion ROM area for development does not function erroneously.

The extended ROM area may be stored in the same ROM as the ROM in which the program / data is stored. In that case, the extended ROM area should be set as an inaccessible area in the mass-produced gaming machine. Therefore, even if the program / data for development is mistakenly left in the extended ROM area, the HW parameter may be set so that the program / data does not function.

Next, the configuration of the processing address table will be described. FIG. 307 is a diagram showing a program implementation example of a processing address table in which processing (subroutine) addresses are stored. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 307, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table in which the address of the processing executed by the INVD instruction is stored, the interrupt processing address table in which the address of the processing executed when various interrupts occur is also included. May occur. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the "processing address table" refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used in the INVD instruction.

The processing address table stores the addresses of processes that are frequently executed and are commonly used. The processing with high execution frequency is, for example, a timer interrupt processing or a processing executed in the main loop processing of the initialization processing on the main control board. Further, the process used for general purposes is a process of reading a signal from a designated port, a process of performing a predetermined operation on a designated numerical value, and the like, which will be described in detail later. In order not to impair the versatility of these processes, the processes are greatly simplified (for example, the program capacity) as compared with the processes specialized for game control (for example, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process). (Small processing, processing with short processing time, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIG. 306, the processing address table is stored in an area different from the area in which the program is stored. As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction has high versatility, and may be used as a common process in the development of another gaming machine. By arranging the areas separately in this way, it becomes possible to manage them separately from the program of the processing depending on the model, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game control program. In addition, since the ROM comment area is arranged between the area where the processing address table is stored and the area where the program is stored, processing exceeds the program / data area due to a problem during program execution. Even if it is executed, unexpected processing is executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table because data that does not match the program code such as the program title is stored in the ROM comment area. Can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 307, 16 types of processes of INVD0 to INVD15 are defined. For example, INVD0 includes a port read process (PORT_RD), INVD1 includes a data setting process (DAT_SET), and the like. When executing the INVD instruction, the number (processing index) corresponding to the process to be called may be specified.

Here, the processing index will be described with reference to FIG. 308. FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored in an address stored in the process address table. In the program code shown in FIG. 308, a processing index that can be called by the INVD instruction is defined in advance. In the program, the variable corresponding to the process name (function name) may be specified instead of directly specifying the numerical value. For example, when the port read process (PORT_RD) is executed, the constant "0" may be specified by the label (_PORT_RD) instead of being directly specified. As a result, the readability of the program can be improved, and the development efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned prior art (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-174833), the upper address is set in advance and the lower address is specified, and the number (processing index) is specified as in the present embodiment. It's not something to do. Therefore, when the address of the process is changed, it is necessary to modify the instruction to execute the process each time, so that the development efficiency cannot be improved as compared with the case of specifying the number.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the processing index is 0 to 15 and the number of processes defined in the processing address table is 16, the capacity of the index is 4 bits. As a result, the storage capacity required to specify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction can be reduced as compared with the case of specifying the (lower) address. Further, since the instruction portion (opcode) of the INVD instruction is composed of 4 bits, it can be composed of a total of 8 bits (1 byte) including the capacity (operand) of the index. Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, and the number of clocks for the main control MPU 1311 to call the process specified by the INVD instruction is reduced as compared with the case where the process is called by the normal call instruction (INV instruction). In addition, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Further, in the present embodiment, the INVD instruction is frequently used in the processing executed when the power is turned on and the processing during the game (main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.), while being used in the power cutoff processing. The frequency is low. This is to prevent the overhead at the time of processing call from increasing by increasing the number of reference points in the memory while the power is cut off, and to suppress the power consumption as much as possible. In addition, the process when the power is cut off is executed less frequently than the process during the game, the specifications are not changed frequently, and the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited. , The processing called when the power is turned off is configured not to be executed by the INVD instruction except for the general-purpose processing. As described above, in the power cutoff process, the control is simplified and the execution load of the process is reduced rather than reducing the program capacity by using the INVD instruction.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the process by the INVD instruction will be described. FIG. 309 is a diagram illustrating an operation at the time of executing an INVD instruction in the present embodiment. FIG. 309 describes changes in the program counter and the stack pointer when the INVD instruction stored at the address “80A4h” is executed.

When the INVD instruction is executed, first, the address to be the return destination after the processing executed by the INVD instruction is saved on the stack. In the example of FIG. 309, the INVD instruction stored at the address “80A4h” is executed, and since the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, the value saved in the stack is “80A5h”.

Next, the 2-byte length data (call destination address) corresponding to the number (operand, processing index) specified by the INVD instruction is fetched from the processing address table. The fetched 2-byte length data (call destination address) is set in the program counter, and the specified process is called. Here, a procedure for calling the designated process with reference to FIG. 310 will be described.

FIG. 310 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process called by an INVD instruction in the present embodiment. Here, a procedure for executing the port read process (PORT_RD) will be described. As shown in FIG. 307, the port read process (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (0th) of the process address table.

The number specified by the INVD instruction shown in FIG. 310 is "_PORT_RD", and referring to the INVD instruction processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Then, the processing address table is referred to, and the instruction corresponding to the specified number is specified. Specifically, "PORT_RD" is specified. The left column of the processing address table in FIG. 310 corresponds to the number of rows and is added for explanation. As shown in FIG. 307, it is not included in the actual processing address table. In the INVD instruction, the instruction corresponding to the specified number is specified. "PORT_RD" is a label indicating the processing address ("80D4h").

When the address of the process specified by the INVD instruction is specified, the program counter is updated to the address of the specified process. Returning to the description of FIG. 309, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to "80D4h" which is the start address of the port reading process "PORT_RD". At this time, the value of the stack pointer is moved by 2 bytes because the address at the time of returning from the processing of the caller is stored in the stack area, and is updated from "01F8h" to "01F6h".

After that, the process of the call destination (port read process "PORT_RD") is executed, and the instructions are sequentially executed from the call destination address ("80D4h"). After that, in order to return to the caller by the return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and the subsequent processing is sequentially executed. At this time, the value of the program counter is updated from the return instruction address “80E8h” to the address “80A5h” saved in the stack area. Further, by changing the stack pointer from "01F6h" to "01F8h", the area in which the return destination address of the stack area is stored can be used again. After returning to the processing of the caller, the processing is sequentially executed from the address "80A5h".

As described above, the INVD instruction in the present embodiment can call the processing with a smaller number of clocks than the normal processing calling instruction, that is, at a higher speed, and can further reduce the program capacity. In particular, as described above, by configuring the frequently called process so that it can be called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire control process. In this embodiment, 16 types of processing are defined as defined in the processing address table (FIG. 307). Specifically, port read processing (PORT_RD), data setting processing (DAT_SET), work area setting processing 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting processing 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search processing (LD_HLA_HL), command buffer setting processing. 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage processing (COM_SET), output judgment common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), fluctuation information number search processing (TI_SRCH), fraudulent notification It is a setting process (ILG_OUTSET), a data search process (HLA_SRCH), a multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), and a SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA).

Hereinafter, each process executed by the INVD instruction in the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 311 to 324 show examples of programs (modules) for each process. The comment at the beginning of each program describes the input register, output register, protection register, and caller. The input register is a register that stores the value set by the calling module. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register that stores the value set in the called module. The execution result of the process is stored. The protection register is a register whose use is restricted by the called module. If the value at the start and end of execution of the called module is the same, it may be used. For example, when the register is destroyed (used), it is temporarily stored in the stack or the like and then restored after use. If so, you can use it. The caller is a module that calls the module. If the number of modules described here is large, it can be recognized that the frequency of use is high. Since the actual number of executions depends on the call frequency of the calling module itself, even if the number of modules is small, the frequency of use is not necessarily low.

FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a program example of the port reading process (PORT_RD) of the present embodiment. The port read process is a process of reading an input signal of a designated port. Specifically, the port read process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register) and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read a plurality of times, and a predetermined flag (for example, J flag, Z flag) included in the PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) is set depending on whether or not the acquired signals match. Update. This makes it possible not only to read the input signal from the designated port, but also to determine whether or not the signal is normally input.

FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a program example of the data setting process (DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The data setting process is a process of collectively setting a series of data defined in a table specified by a set data address set in the HL register in a work area (for example, a DE register). In addition, the number of data settings (number of data in the table) is defined in the first data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process, and the subsequent data (records) are (lower) of the work area that stores the setting values. It consists of an address and a set value stored in the work area. The set values are sequentially read out by calling the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) described later with the INVD instruction. As described above, when the data setting process is started, the data is acquired by first acquiring the number of data settings stored in the address specified in the input register, and then acquiring the data (records) for the number of data settings. It is possible to acquire a series of data regardless of the number.

FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) of the present embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process for setting a work area that is temporarily used when the program is executed. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table identified by the address stored in the HL register. The work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) is also called from a process executed by another INVD instruction. As described above, the process executed by the INVD instruction is composed of a very short program that realizes a general-purpose function, and can be called multiple times. As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of the entire game control by combining and configuring the processes called by the INVD command. Moreover, since duplication of the program code can be avoided, the program capacity can be compressed.

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing a program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of the present embodiment. In the work area setting process 2, it is possible to simplify the process of continuously setting the work area by setting the specified setting data address to the next address after executing the work area setting process 1. Become.

Here, in the example of using the data setting process, the work area setting process 1 and the work area setting process 2, the (lower) address of the work area and the work area are set according to the data setting process program shown in FIG. 312. The process of acquiring data from a table consisting of the setting values to be stored and storing it in the work area will be described.

In the data setting process, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the setting data address is acquired, the work area is set by the work area setting process 2 for the number of records, and the data in the work area is set. Repeat the setting (loop processing). In the loop processing, first, the setting data address is updated (incremented) to move to the next line, and then the work area setting processing 2 is called by the INVD instruction.

In the work area setting process 2, the work area is set by the address specified by the set data address by the work area setting process 1. Subsequently, the set data address is updated (incremented) to the address of the data storage area. After that, the work area setting process 2 returns to the data setting process, and the data specified by the set data address (value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (value set in the DE register). When the data for the number of records in the table is set in the corresponding work area, the loop processing is exited and the data setting processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the structure of the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced by calling the data setting process, the work area setting process 2, and the work area setting process hierarchically by the INVD instruction.

FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of the present embodiment. The 2-byte data search process is a process of selecting an address set in the data table specified by the HL register (input register) and setting it in the HL register. Since the address value is 2 bytes, the address of the target data table is specified by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, and the address is used as the HL register (output register). Reset the settings. For example, it is used when executing a process of selecting a migration destination address by a job number (selection value) based on a jump table when shifting to various processes in a special symbol / special electric accessory control process.

FIG. 316 is a diagram showing program examples of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET) of the present embodiment. Normally, in the process called by the INVD instruction or the like, a return (BK) instruction or the like is arranged at the end, and the process returns to the process of the caller. Since the command for returning to the caller's process is not arranged in the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in FIG. 316, after the jackpot information command setting process is completed. , The command buffer setting process 1 is continuously executed, and further, the command storage process is executed. Then, the return command placed at the end of the command storage process returns to the caller's process.

If the command buffer setting process 1 is to be called by the INVD instruction in the jackpot information command setting process, as described in FIG. 309, processing such as storing the return destination address in the stack area is required. These processes can be omitted by continuously arranging the above, and the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, since the stack area is not used, the effect of reducing the amount of memory used can be obtained.

The jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is a process for setting a jackpot information command that specifies an operation when a jackpot occurs. Set the corresponding big hit information command according to the situation such as opening and closing operation of the big winning opening in the big hit state. After that, it is transmitted from the transmission buffer to the destination by the command buffer setting process 1 and the command storage process that are continuously executed.

The command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) identifies the command to be actually transmitted by the reference command data (MODE value) and the command addition data for specifically specifying the command, and stores the command in the transmission buffer by the command storage process described later. Store. The command stored in the transmission buffer is appropriately transmitted to the destination. The "reference command data" is composed of 2 bytes. For example, in the case of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 1, "1001h" (upper 1 byte: variation pattern type, lower 1 byte: command reference value (starting from 01h)). ). When the fluctuation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1, the result (“1006h”” of adding the value (05h) of the fluctuation pattern 5 to the lower 8 bits of the above reference command “1001h”. ) Is the command to be sent.

The command storage process (COM_SET) is a process for storing a command or the like in a transmission buffer. As a specific procedure, first, the state of the transmission buffer is determined to determine whether or not there is a free space of a predetermined number of bytes or more. If there is no free space in the transmit buffer, the process ends, while if there is free space in the transmit buffer, the status and mode that make up the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmit buffer. Further, the sum value obtained by adding the value of the H register and the value of the L register is set in the transmission buffer. In the case of the command "1006h" in which the variation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the variation pattern of the above-mentioned special figure 1, "10h" + "06h" = "16h" is the sum value. The sum value does not necessarily have to be set in the transmission buffer.

The command stored in the transmission buffer consists of 2 bytes (excluding the sum value), and the 1st byte indicates the type of command to be transmitted (variation pattern, symbol stop, hold storage, jackpot, etc.) and 2 bytes. The eye indicates a specific operation for the type (if it is a variation pattern type, a specific variation pattern number).

The transmission buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built in the main control MPU 1311, and is a memory different from the RAM 1312. The transmit buffer is configured to be capable of storing multiple bytes of information (with a capacity of 64 bytes). The commands stored in the transmission buffer are serially output to the destination in the order in which they were stored first by the hardware.

FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of the present embodiment. The output judgment common process 1 acquires data from the information judgment output data (value indicated by the HL register), and determines whether or not a flag is set in the work area (lower address) set in the information judgment output data. , If the flag is set, the information set corresponding to the flag (work area) is set in the A register (port output operation value). By looping the above work for the number of times set in the information judgment output data, the value to be output to the port is stored in the A register. For example, when the information judgment output data is "solenoid information judgment output data", 3 is set as the number of loops, the content of the large winning opening 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) is first determined, and 1 (flag value) is set to DSOL1_FG. ) Is set, _TDSOL1_PB (large winning opening solenoid 1 bit data) set corresponding to DSOL1_FG is set as an output value (when this value is output, the large winning opening solenoid 1 is set. It is turned on). Such processing is repeated a number of times (three times) set in the solenoid information determination output data.

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of the present embodiment. The output determination common process 2 acquires data from the state determination output data and processes the LED port output value and the like. Like the information judgment output data, the status judgment output data has a table structure, and the number of records in the table is acquired and the data for the number of cases is processed.

FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a program example of the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The output port data setting process is a process for setting the information in the I / O area to the output port or the built-in register, and the output destination (output port, built-in register) is set to the output destination set in the table (setting data address). ) Is output.

FIG. 320 is a diagram showing a program example of the variation information number search process (TI_SRH) of the present embodiment. The variation information number search process is a process of searching a predetermined data area for an information number that matches a designated comparison value, and is used when selecting variation pattern information based on a variation pattern random number. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written in the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random number value, etc.) and the information set in the table specified by the HL register (value to be compared with the random number (judgment value)) are compared, and the condition (for example, random number value < The process is repeated until the determination value) is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, the information (search result (for example, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) set corresponding to the determination value is stored in the A register and returned to the caller.

FIG. 321 is a diagram showing a program example of the fraudulent notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET) of the present embodiment. The fraudulent notification setting process is a process for performing notification when an abnormality occurs. Specifically, the specified error display command is set by the command storage process, and the time for performing unauthorized notification is set.

FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a program example of the data retrieval process (HLA_SRCH) of the present embodiment. The data search process is a process of searching the specified data from the specified search data. In the data search process, first, data matching the comparison value is searched from the area (address) for storing the specified search data. At this time, the data to be searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Further, a search is performed from the area of the searched address based on the specified selection value. The data search process is executed by combining a plurality of search processes, and the subsequent search process is executed based on the search result of the preceding search process. In the present embodiment, the first search is performed by the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by the variable information number search process (TI_SRCH). As a result, it is possible to specify a plurality of defined tables according to the game state and the like in the first search, and to acquire a specific fluctuation information number in the next search. By implementing in this way, it is possible to facilitate multi-step search, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data by holding data in stages.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one process is configured by combining a plurality of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction having a shorter word length than the other calling instructions. By calling the process configured in this way with the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire process while reducing the program capacity. Further, if the process is executed in multiple stages, it can be applied not only to the data search process but also to the data search process. It becomes possible to realize the processing.

FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL) of the present embodiment. Multiplying value addition The address acquisition process is a process of multiplying a designated base value by a multiplying value and adding to the designated base address value. It is a collection of routine operations that are frequently executed, and can simplify the program.

FIG. 324 is a diagram showing a program example of the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) of the present embodiment. The SPI 2-byte output process is a process for setting output data in the SPI port when outputting 2-byte data by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used when data is transmitted to a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor / solenoid.

As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction in the present embodiment is more versatile because it is composed of a short process of several to several tens of bytes, and the process can be called by the INVD instruction with a word length of 1 byte. Therefore, the speed of the entire game control program can be increased and the program capacity can be reduced.

[19-3. INVS instruction]
In the INVD instruction, the procedure for calling a process (subroutine) is streamlined by storing the address in the process address table in advance. However, since only the predefined process can be called, when adding or changing the process to be newly called, the contents of the process address table and the definition information of the process address table number must be updated. rice field. In addition, the word length was set to 1 byte by limiting the processing that can be called by the INVD instruction to 16 types, but if it is applied to 17 or more types of processing, the processing speed will deteriorate, and the INVD instruction There was a risk that the effect of using was impaired.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, an INVS instruction having a higher degree of freedom than the INVD instruction is proposed while having a shorter word length than the normal INV instruction. The INVS instruction can reduce the overhead (procedure, number of clocks) for calling the process by storing the process (subroutine) in a specific area, and can realize the same process with a smaller word length than the INV instruction. .. Further, if the processes are stored in a specific area, an arbitrary number of processes (subroutines) can be defined, so that the degree of freedom can be increased as compared with the INVD instruction. The specific area (third area) is included in the program / data area of the ROM area described with reference to FIG. 306.

Subsequently, the INVS instruction will be further described. FIG. 325 is an excerpt of a part of a program for calling a process by an INVS command of the present embodiment, (A) is a program excerpting a part for calling a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, and (B) is an excerpt. A program example (part) of the solenoid drive process and (C) show a program example (part) of the motor drive process. The program example shown in FIG. 325 is composed of an "address", a "program", a "mnemonic", and a "comment". The "address" is the location where the program is stored. "Program" is a so-called machine language (machine language), and is an instruction that can be directly interpreted and executed by the main control MPU 1311. "Nimonic" is a simple memory symbol that makes it easy to program the machine language (list of numbers) for executing a program. The "program" value corresponds to the "mnemonic" value. The "comment" is an explanation for making the program easier to read, and is ignored when the process is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 325, the solenoid drive process (“89A6h”) and the motor drive process (“89CCh”) are called by the INVS command. The INVS instruction constitutes an instruction in which the upper 4 bits (“Ch”) access the first area (8000h to 8BFFh) of the specific area, and indicates the address of the process called by the lower 12 bits. Specifically, the lower 12 bits (“9A6h”) of the program “C9A6” that calls the solenoid drive process specifies the address for storing the solenoid drive process, and the upper 4 bits of the first region are fixed and “. Since it is "8 *** h", the address of the storage location of the solenoid drive process in combination with the lower 12 bits of the program is "89A6h" as shown in FIG. 325 (B). Similarly, in the motor drive process, since the lower 12 bits are "9CCh", the address of the storage location is "89CCh". As described above, in the present embodiment, the process (procedure, number of clocks) until the process to be called is specified by storing the process in a specific area is reduced, and the process is stored in the first area by a 2-byte length instruction. It is possible to execute the process.

Further, the second area (8C00h to 93FFh) of the specific area can be accessed, but in that case, unlike the case of accessing the first area, the upper 1 byte becomes the opcode of the INVS instruction, and the lower 2 Since the byte is the call destination address, the instruction is 3 bytes long.

The game control program is designed with the address 8000h as the start address, and the frequency of accessing the first area is much higher than the frequency of accessing the second area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and reduce the processing time (clock number) for the instruction by shortening the word length when accessing the frequently used area.

On the other hand, in the INV instruction that executes the process stored in an arbitrary area in the memory, the upper 2 bytes are the code information (opcode) of the INV instruction and the lower 2 bytes are the call destination address (operand). It is a byte length instruction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by using the INVS instruction that executes the process stored in the specific area, the process is performed with a smaller word length than the INV instruction that executes the process stored in any area in the memory. Can be executed.

In the present embodiment, a process (subroutine) having a high call frequency is arranged in a specific area (particularly, a first area), and a process having a low call frequency (for example, an error process or a test signal) is placed in an area other than the specific area. By arranging (processing for output, etc.) and data, it is possible to speed up the entire processing. If the capacity of the program code is limited due to rules or the like, the program is placed with priority given to the first area. If possible, all the processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area, such as the limit of the capacity of the program code is smaller than the capacity of the first area. Further, all the processes (programs) called by the INVS instruction may be configured to be stored in the first area, and the program may not be stored in the second area. By clearly defining the area for storing the program, the configuration can be simplified and the management can be facilitated.

Further, at least the processing directly related to the game control is arranged in the first area, and the error processing and the display of the role ratio monitor (base monitor) which are not directly related to the game control are arranged in the second area. As mentioned above, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by arranging the processes with high call frequency in the first area, but by consolidating the related processes, the readability of the entire program is improved and developed. It may be arranged to increase efficiency. Since the processes that can be called by the INVS instruction can be freely arranged within a specific area, for example, when the same model has multiple specifications, the control common to each specification is aggregated in a predetermined area, and each specification is used. Processes with different controls (depending on the specifications) are aggregated and placed in different areas. Specifically, the special figure-related processing, the special electric accessory-related processing, the normal figure-related processing, the ordinary electric accessory-related processing, and the like are not distributed and arranged, but related processing (for example, fluctuation start processing, variation). Special figure-related processing such as intermediate processing, symbol confirmation processing, and fluctuation stop processing) are aggregated and arranged. Further, the programs may be arranged in an order according to the control executed in a normal game, for example, according to the execution timing even in the aggregated and arranged area. Specifically, in the special figure-related processing, it may be arranged in an order according to the timing such as the start winning prize, the fluctuation start time, and the fluctuation end time.

On the other hand, even game machines of different models can be used for general purposes, and error processing and display processing of the role ratio monitor (base monitor) that are not affected by the game specifications are also centrally arranged. Since these processes may be used in multiple types of models, it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if there is a team that develops multiple types of models in parallel, the above-mentioned processing that depends on the game specifications can be shared within the team, while the processing that is common between these models can be shared between the teams. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the entire game machine development. In addition, the processing that depends on the game specifications may differ depending on the model even if the upper limit of the capacity is set, so the processing program (module) that can be used for general purposes even for different types of gaming machines is the first. By arranging the two areas, the address can be shared even when the process is called from the game control programs of different models.

As described above, the INVS instruction makes it possible to arrange a program (module) in a specific area according to development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). As a result, in the INVD instruction, in order to limit the number of processes that can be defined, general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading were defined with priority, but processes that depend on the game content are collectively arranged. It becomes possible to facilitate management such as consolidating processing for each function, and it is possible to improve development efficiency.

It is also possible to execute the process by the INVD instruction in the module called by the INVS instruction. With this configuration, it is possible to further speed up the processing called by the INVS instruction and reduce the program capacity, and further, it is possible to speed up the entire game control program and reduce the program capacity. It becomes. It is also possible to call a module with an INVS command in a module called with an INVD command. Since the number of processes that can be defined in the processing address table is limited, it is possible to call highly versatile processes that could not be defined in the processing address table by the INVS instruction. In this way, it is configured so that processing can be mutually called within the module called from the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

Further, while the processing that is executed at predetermined intervals such as timer interrupt processing and is extremely frequently executed is arranged in a specific area (first area), even if it can be called from the timer interrupt processing such as the processing at the time of setting operation. For processes that are actually called infrequently, it is better to place them outside the range of a specific area. With such a configuration, it is possible to secure the capacity of a specific area without reducing the processing speed.

Further, the program may be arranged only in the first area where the effect of speeding up by the INVS instruction is more exerted, and may be configured so as not to access the second area from the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to simplify the management of storage areas such as the placement of programs. For example, by arranging a program that defines a process that can be shared between different models outside a specific area with few restrictions instead of the second area, the degree of freedom in arranging the program is increased, and the program is shared when the program is shared. It is possible to reduce the restrictions caused by the difference in capacity. Further, even if the specifications of the INVS instruction are changed due to the specification change of the main control MPU 1311, if the area accessible by the INVS instruction is single, the correspondence becomes easy, and the basic configuration of the game control program can be changed. Since there is no need to make major changes, existing programs and data can be utilized and development efficiency can be improved.

[19-4. INVI instruction]
Up to this point, an aspect of speeding up an instruction for calling a process has been described, but a means for simplifying a program by implementing an instruction that integrates processes that are frequently combined and executed will be described.

When a specific program is executed when the game control is executed, if the information in the memory is rewritten by other processes executed in parallel, the progress of the game may be hindered. Therefore, a means for prohibiting interrupts until the processing is completed is generally used so that the information stored in the area commonly accessed by a plurality of processes is not rewritten. In particular, a procedure is frequently performed in which interrupts are prohibited when a specific process is executed, and after the specific process is completed, the interrupt prohibition is released.

In game control, procedures such as interrupt prohibition, processing call, and interrupt prohibition cancellation are frequently executed, but since the size of the program area is limited, the common procedure is omitted to reduce the program size. It was desired to make it smaller. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the INV instruction that calls the process is extended, and an INVI instruction that prohibits interrupts before the process is called is proposed.

Since the INVI instruction specifies and executes the process to be called, the execution procedure is the same as that of the INV instruction. However, as an internal process at the time of executing the INVI instruction, necessary data is stored in the stack area and interrupts are prohibited before the program counter is moved to the specified address. After that, the called process is executed. At the end of the called process, a BKI instruction is executed to return to the caller's process while returning to the interrupt state before calling the process. That is, if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained as it is, and if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt prohibition is released. Hereinafter, a series of procedures of the INVI instruction will be described with reference to FIG. 326.

FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of an INVI instruction in the present embodiment. The procedure at the time of executing the INVI instruction stored in the address "8200h" will be described.

Since the storage destination of the process specified by the INVI instruction is "A800h", the value of the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h". At this time, the address "8202h" (the next address of the caller, the return address after the processing of the called destination) indicating the position to return after the processing is executed and the PSW (Program Status Word) at the time of processing the processing are stored in the stack area. do. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h". In the example of FIG. 326, the return address is stored in "01F6h" and "01F7h", and the PSW is stored in "01F8h".

The PSW is a control word (status register) for controlling the order in which instructions are executed in the main control MPU 1311 and for indicating and holding the state of the computer system related to a specific program, and is the main being executed. It also includes the status of the control MPU 1311. In addition, the contents of the flag register, the interrupt status, and the like are collectively stored in one byte. PSW will be described with reference to FIG. 327.

327 is a diagram showing an example of the PSW of the present embodiment, (A) is a configuration of the PSW, and (B) is a description of each configuration. PSW has jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF), register bank flag (RES), interrupt master permission. It is composed of flags (IMF).

The jump status flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of a jump instruction and a subroutine instruction. ZF or CF is set by the executed instruction.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 when the calculation result or transfer data is "00H (0000H)", and is cleared to 0 in other cases. Further, in the bit / flag operation instruction, 1 is set when the designated bit is 0, and is cleared to 0 when the designated bit is 1.

The carry flag (CF) sets the carry / borrow at the time of the carry flag calculation. Further, in the shift / rotate instruction or the bit / flag operation instruction, the instruction execution content is set. The half carry flag (HF) sets the carry / borrow of the 4th bit in the case of 8-bit operation.

The sign flag (SF) is set to 1 when the MSB (maximum effective number of bits) of the operation result is 1, and is cleared to 0 in other cases. When the most significant bit indicates a positive or negative sign, the sign can be identified by the sine flag. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 when an overflow occurs in the calculation result, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.

The register bank flag (RES) indicates the selected bank of the general purpose register. In the case of bank 0, 0 is set, and in the case of bank 1, 1 is set.

The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) is interrupt disabled when IMF = 0 and interrupt enabled when IMF = 1. Further, when the DI (Disable Interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF = 0, and interrupts are prohibited. Further, when an EI (enable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF = 1 and an interrupt is permitted. Interrupts that can be disabled / permitted to generate interrupts in this way are called masqueradable interrupts.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 326. When the INVI instruction is executed, the IMF value included in the PSW is set to "0" and interrupts are disabled. At this time, the interrupt is prohibited along with the execution of the INVI instruction without executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and the processing is sequentially executed from the address "A800h". Then, when the process is executed up to the address "A80Eh", the BKI instruction to return to the caller is executed. In the BKI instruction, the return destination address stored in the stack area is set to the value of the program counter, and the contents of the PSW are returned to the contents of the PSW saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to "8202h" which is the return destination address. Further, in order to return the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW before the execution of the INVI instruction, if the value of the IMF (interrupt master permission flag) before the execution of the INVI instruction is 1 (interrupt permission), the interrupt prohibition is canceled. Since the value stored in the stack area is deleted when the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, when the process is executed by the INVI instruction, it is possible to disable the interrupt until the execution of the specified process is completed without explicitly executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, by returning to the caller by executing the BKI instruction, if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt is interrupted without explicitly executing the interrupt prohibition release instruction (EI instruction). The prohibition can be released, and if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled state is maintained. It can be used not only when the INVI instruction is executed but also when the process is executed with the interrupt disabled by the DI instruction or the like and then returned to the original process. Further, the BKI instruction is not an instruction for directly canceling the interrupt prohibition, but merely returns the interrupt master permission flag (IMF) to the value before the execution of the INVI instruction by returning the PSW to the state before the execution of the INVI instruction. If the interrupt is enabled before the instruction is executed, the interrupt is returned from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the interrupt is disabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt is continuously disabled even after returning. Further, since it is not necessary to execute the interrupt prohibition instruction and the interrupt prohibition release instruction, the control can be simplified and the program capacity can be compressed. As a result, the process can be executed without the data being changed by other processes.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, an area (used area, game area) in which the program can be mounted is defined in advance, and it is basically prohibited to execute the program outside the used area. However, some processing such as test signal processing is not directly related to game control, so execution outside the usage area is permitted. In addition, since the role ratio monitor (base monitor) and error processing are not directly related to the game control, execution outside the used area is permitted. When executing such a process, interrupts can be prohibited by the INVI instruction, and the PSW (status register) can be saved and executed to suppress the influence on other processes.

Further, when calling the process stored in the area outside the used area by the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage destination by using the processing address table like the INVD instruction described above, but it is in the used area. Inconvenience may occur because the process is called by directly specifying an address outside the area from the process. Therefore, a temporary area that always passes through for executing the INVI instruction may be set. In this case, the process called from the INVI instruction is defined in a limited temporary area (for example, the range of "A800h" to "A8FFh"). However, since it is not possible to define all the processes within this limited range, the address in the temporary area is specified from the caller's process, but the process actually stored outside the used area from that address is specified. Execute. Specifically, it moves from the address specified from within the used area to the address where the process specified by the jump instruction or the like is stored. A specific example is shown in FIG. 328.

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a program example for explaining the arrangement of the processing called by the INVI instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a program example of the area to which the processing is read out, and (B) is an entity of the processing. An example program is shown. Here, the area up to the address "A8FFh" is the used area, and the area after the address "A900h" is outside the area.

As shown in FIG. 328 (A), the process called by the INVI instruction is defined by a set of a label indicating the process and a jump instruction (JP). For example, when the performance display monitor process is called by the INVI instruction, it is described as "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is predefined in another area. The value of "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is "A900h".

When the instruction "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is executed, the value of the program counter is updated to the address "A800h" corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW is saved in the stack area. Further, the value of the IMF (interrupt master permission flag) of the PSW is set to 0 (interrupt disabled). After that, the performance display monitor process (“EX_MONITOR_OUT”) defined in the address “A900h” which is the jump destination set in the operand of the jump instruction is executed.

Since the performance display monitor process is a process outside the used area, the contents of the register are saved so as not to affect the process inside the used area (register save process in the used area). After that, the performance display monitor processing main unit is executed. Finally, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the process of the caller is restored by the BKI instruction, and the interrupt state before the execution of the process is restored.

By configuring as described above, it becomes easy to separate the processes outside the used area, and it becomes easy to manage the program. In addition, since interrupts are prohibited when the INVI instruction is executed, interrupts are prohibited while processing outside the used area is being executed, ensuring independence from the processing stored in the used area and ensuring safety. Can be secured. In the example described with reference to FIG. 328, the area for storing the process called by the INVI instruction is limited, but the area may not be limited to this. This makes it possible to simplify the call of the process to be executed in the state where interrupts are disabled for the process stored in an arbitrary area.

[19-5. Application example of extended processing call instruction]
A specific application example of various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) for calling the process (subroutine) described above will be described. Here, it is applied to the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. A specific application example of the processing call instruction will be described together with the program code for the game stop processing included in the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing using various processing call instructions of the present embodiment. The basic functions of timer interrupt processing are the same as those described so far.

The main control MPU 1311 first designates the register bank 1 (step P101). As described above, the main control MPU 1311 includes two types of registers, bank 0 and bank 1, and switches banks to use one of them. Bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used in main control side main processing. It is not always necessary to switch the bank in the timer interrupt processing, and for example, the register value may be saved in the stack area and restored after the processing is completed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step P102). In the switch input process, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a set value confirmation process for determining whether the value in the set state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

When the set value confirmation process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a playable state (step P104). When the game is not available (the result of step P104 is "NO"), that is, when the setting operation is performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the setting operation processing is executed (step P105).

In the processing at the time of setting operation, processing for changing or confirming the setting of the gaming machine is executed. Load the setting data for the setting operation and set it in the corresponding output port. Specifically, the power failure clear signal is output OFF and the ACK output port is cleared. Further, the LED common port and the LED cathode port are turned off, the motor port and the solenoid port are cleared, and a security signal is output. After that, the setting display process and the setting confirmation / change process are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine is in a game-enabled state (the result of step P104 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a gaming stop factor (step P106). If there is a game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "YES"), the game stop processing is executed (step P107). In the game stop processing, the processing necessary for stopping the game machine is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 330.

Further, when there is no game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a game-enabled time process in order to advance the game (step P108). The game-enabled time process is a process for performing a normal game. Specifically, switch input special processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, switch passage command output processing, performance display monitor processing, special symbol / special electric accessory control processing , Solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, output data setting processing, etc. Each process is as described above.

When the game enable time process or the game stop time process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output process (step P109). Further, after the display LED output process or the setting operation process is completed, the test signal output process is executed (step P110). In the test signal output process, a process for outputting a test signal for output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine is performed. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111) and returning the register bank to 0. , Terminates timer interrupt processing.

The outline of timer interrupt processing has been described above. Subsequently, processing using various processing call instructions will be described. As described above, the game stop processing of the timer interrupt processing will be excerpted and described. First, the procedure for processing when the game is stopped will be described, and application examples of various processing call commands will be appropriately described with reference to the program code.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. FIG. 331 is a program code for game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. The game stop processing is a process for stopping the game when an abnormality such as a magnetic abnormality or a vibration abnormality is detected or when a setting is changed. In addition to magnetic anomalies and vibration anomalies, there are door / body frame opening, radio wave anomalies, and winning anomalies, and there are cases where settings are being confirmed in addition to setting changes. Depending on the type of gaming machine, only error notification may be given, or the game may be stopped. In particular, in the type where a big hit can be obtained by passing through a specific area (V area) in the accessory, the big hit can be obtained by illegal winning, so it is configured to stop the game as an illegal act when an abnormality is detected. To.

When the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command for notifying the outside that the game machine is stopped. With reference to the program code, in the setting of the game stop command, first, the command addition value (game stop factor; PLAY_STOP_NO) is set in the A register when determining whether or not there is a game stop factor in the process of step P106 described above. In this state, the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) is set in the HL register, and then the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

The command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by the INVD instruction. The variable "_CMBF_SET1" specified by the INVD instruction is a number corresponding to the address of the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the process address table, and is "4" (INVD4) in the present embodiment. There is. When the number of the processing address table is specified by the INVD instruction, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the processing address table and executes the process corresponding to the specified number. As a result, it is possible to execute the process without directly specifying the address, so that it is possible to speed up the call of the process and reduce the program capacity.

In the command buffer setting process 1, as described above, the game stop command is specified based on the reference command data (HL register value) and the command addition data (A register value, the value corresponding to the game stop factor). It is stored in the transmission buffer by the command storage process, and the game stop command is output.

After storing the game stop command in the transmission buffer, the main control MPU 1311 executes an external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information (step P123). The external output information includes, for example, symbol confirmation data, start opening data, large winning opening winning data, main winning ball data, security data, and the like.

The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. In the INVS instruction, as described above, by storing the process in a specific area, the process can be called more quickly than when it is stored in an arbitrary address. The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is stored in a specific area because it is frequently executed such as being called from the output data setting process (PORT_SET) during the game (when the game is possible process is executed). In the output data setting process (PORT_SET), in addition to the external output process (GAIB_OUT), the output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), etc. It is configured so that many processes called by INVD instructions defined in the processing address table and processes called by INVS instructions stored in a specific area are called.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing for outputting various signals to be transmitted to a drive body such as a solenoid or the outside by SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication process, the data to be output to the WA register is set, the address to output the data set in the WA register is set in the E register, and then the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is executed. The SPI2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is a process called by the INVD instruction as in the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable "_SPI_TX__WA" specified by the INVD instruction becomes "14" (INVD14). There is.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, an output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data in the output port is executed (step P126). The game stop data is data for clearing, for example, a power failure clear signal, an LED common port, an LED cathode port, etc., and a motor port, an ACK output port, or the like.

The output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) is a process called by the INVD instruction as in the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable “_PORT_DAT_SET” specified by the INVD instruction becomes “10” (INVD10). ing.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor process for displaying various information related to the game on the performance display monitor (step P127). The performance display monitor process only displays various information, the process directly related to the game control is not executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, the performance display monitor process of the present embodiment is stored outside the used area, and interrupts are prohibited while the process of displaying the performance information on the performance display monitor by the INVI instruction is executed, and the process is independent of the game control process. Can be executed. Since the BKI instruction returns to the caller after returning to the interrupt state before the process call at the end of the performance display monitor process, the caller returns to the caller even if the interrupt state before the process call is the interrupt enable state. There is no need to cancel interrupt prohibition with.

Further, since the test signal output process in the timer interrupt process is not a normal game but a process called during the test to output the game information, it is stored outside the used area. Initialization processing, backup processing, etc. for executing processing when the power is turned off or processing outside the used area may be stored outside the used area.

When executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, interrupts may be disabled to prevent multiple interrupts, but the timer is designed so that there is no problem even if multiple interrupts occur. In the interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state may be set. Since the INVI instruction of the present embodiment returns to the interrupt state before the processing is executed, it can be used without any problem regardless of whether or not multiple interrupts are allowed in any case.

[19-6. Placement of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program in which the processing executed by various calling commands in the game control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is defined will be described in detail. The program is stored in the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh) included in the ROM area of the storage area provided by the main control board 1310.

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of an area related to a program / data in the ROM area shown in FIG. 306. The left side of FIG. 332 shows the configuration of the area related to the program / data, and the right side of FIG. 332 shows the details of the configuration of the first area of the program / data area.

The area related to the program / data in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a first area (8000h to 8BFFh) and a second area (A800h to BFFFh) (left in FIG. 332). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used areas), and access by the game control program is basically prohibited. Further, data of 00H is set as unused data in the area, and 00H is a NOP (non operation instruction) as an instruction of the CPU, and even if the area is erroneously accessed, unnecessary control is performed. It is not executed. In addition, when the area is erroneously accessed, a reset signal is input to the CPU, and the game processing can be returned immediately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 332, the first area is arranged on the start address side of the area related to the program / data, and the second area is arranged on the final address side of the area related to the program / data, and is located between the first area and the second area. An unused area (outside the used area) is placed. As will be described later, a program in which processes for executing main game control including processes related to the result of the game are defined is arranged in the first area, and error processing, test firing test processing, and combination are arranged in the second area. A program that defines processes that are not directly related to the result of the game, such as processes related to the calculation of the object ratio, is placed. By arranging an unused area between the first area and the second area, the independence of each area can be enhanced. For example, even when the first area is expanded, the influence of the specification change can be minimized by sufficiently securing an unused area that does not require the address of the second area to be changed.

Subsequently, each area will be described. In the first area, processes (programs) related to game control including processes (programs) called by various calling commands are stored. As shown in FIG. 332 (right), the start process is arranged at the beginning (8000h) of the address in the first area. The start process is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started, and is a process that does not depend on the model. Specifically, it corresponds to the power-on processing (FIG. 213, etc.). Further, if the start process is arranged at the head of the area and the initial value of the program counter is set to "8000 h", the start process can be automatically started at the time of initialization. The initialization time is when a reset signal is input to the core of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. Specifically, when a reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on, a defect detection inside the main control MPU 1311 (execution of an illegal instruction, access outside the specified area of ROM / RAM, watchdog timer) Etc.) when a reset signal is input.

Following the area where the start processing is stored, the area is where the processing group called by the INVD instruction is stored. Since the capacity of the area where the start processing is stored is small, the area where the processing group called by the INVD instruction is stored is an area close to the start address of the first area (a relatively young address). The processing group called by the INVD instruction is the processing defined in the processing address table, and the substance (program) of the processing defined in the processing address table is stored in this area. It is preferable that the processes called by all INVD instructions are centrally arranged in the area where the process group called by the INVD instruction is stored, but the processes called by other than the INVD instruction are preferably arranged in the area. May be included.

As described above, the processing group called by the INVD instruction is a general-purpose processing, and is a processing that does not depend on the model (it is difficult to depend on it) like the start processing. In the present embodiment, the start address (8000h) of the first area is larger than the area for storing the model-dependent processing such as the game control processing described later for the processing that is difficult to depend on the model such as the start processing and the processing called by the INVD command. By arranging in an area close to, it is possible to make a common arrangement (address) even for different models. This makes it easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, and makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the initial stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start time of gaming control processing for each model. Further, even when a plurality of teams develop a gaming machine, it becomes easy to share each process (program), and the development period can be shortened.

The remaining area of the first area following the area for storing the processing group called by the INVD instruction is the area for storing the program that defines the game control processing, and is the area on the final address side of the first area. ing. The game control process is various processes for controlling the progress of the game, and includes processes depending on the model. Specifically, processing called from timer interrupt processing (FIG. 190, FIG. 329, etc.) that controls the game, for example, processing such as control of symbol variation display (dynamic display) (special symbol / special electric accessory control). Processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089 in FIG. 190), ordinary symbol / ordinary electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090 in FIG. 190), etc.) are included.

The program that defines the process called by the INVS instruction is included in the area in which the program that defines the game control process is stored. As described above, by calling a process based on a program placed in a specific area with an INVS instruction, it is possible to execute with a word length (2 to 3) shorter than the word length (4) of a normal INV instruction. Become. The word length refers to the total length of the opcodes and operands that make up the instruction. The opcode is the part that is decoded by the instruction decoder after being fetched by the processor and is the part that specifies the type of operation to be performed. An operand is a part that specifies a value or variable to be operated.

In the second area (A800h to BFFFh), processes that are not directly related to the result of the game (display of fluctuations in symbols / dynamic display) such as error processing, test firing test processing, and processing related to the calculation of the accessory ratio are stored. .. For processing that is not directly related to the result of the game, for example, a test signal is output to an inspection device connected to the game machine in the process of controlling the game in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 190, FIG. 191, FIG. 329, etc.). The test signal processing (step S2067 in FIG. 190, step P109 in FIG. 329) for performing the processing and the performance display monitor processing for displaying various information related to the game on the performance display monitor are included. The performance display monitor process is called and executed in the game enable time process (step P108 in FIG. 329) or the game stop time process (step P107 in FIG. 329, step P127 in FIG. 330). Further, the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S89 in FIG. 23) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) is also included in the process that is not directly related to the result of the game. In the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317. This makes it possible to confirm the gambling of the gaming machine. Although there are differences in terms between the performance display monitor processing and the accessory ratio display processing, they are common in that they display information for confirming the gambling of the gaming machine, and are necessary depending on the type of gaming machine. Information is displayed. For example, a pachinko machine displays the base (total number of prize balls by entering the winning opening during non-time reduction (excluding balls released during big hits) / total number of shots during non-time reduction), and is a rotating body type gaming machine. Now, let's display the bonus ratio.

Further, when calling another process from the process stored in the second area, only the INV instruction is used. The INV instruction (4 bytes) has a longer word length than the extended processing call instruction (INVS instruction (2 bytes), INVD instruction (1 byte), INVI instruction (2 bytes)), but has been extended. While the specifications of the process call instruction may differ depending on the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310), the INV instruction that calls the specified process without any special restrictions is reliable even if the arithmetic unit is changed. Compatibility is maintained. Therefore, by configuring the program by using only the INV instruction when calling other processes in the process defined in the second area, the independence of the process defined in the second area is guaranteed. It is possible to facilitate the reuse of the program even when there is a major change in the specifications of the gaming machine such as a hardware update such as a change in the arithmetic unit as well as a change (update) in the model.

On the other hand, the process stored in the first area is configured by using not only the INV instruction but also the improved process call instruction INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. Further, the processing called by the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction has a program configuration in which it is arranged only in the first area. For this reason, in the processing called by the INVS instruction, it is possible to call the processing by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction as necessary (arbitrary number of times), and further speed up the processing and simplify the program. Can be done.

For example, in the setting operation processing (step P105 in FIG. 329) for executing the processing for changing or confirming the setting of the gaming machine, as described above, the setting data for the setting operation is loaded into the corresponding output port. After setting, the setting confirmation / change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS, FIG. 192) and the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY, FIG. 193) are executed. The program is configured so that the setting confirmation / change processing and the setting display processing are called from the game control processing (timer interrupt processing; FIG. 190, etc.) by the INVS instruction.

In the setting confirmation / change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS), when the setting key 971 returns from the ON position to the OFF position without detecting a RAM abnormality, when the power is turned on to determine the state at the start of the game by the INVS command. The program is configured to call the setting process (step S2104 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194, etc.).

In the power-on setting process, the program is configured to execute the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, FIG. 316) by the INVD command in order to set the power-on operation command (step S2120 in FIG. 194). Subsequently, in order to initially set the work in the game area, the program is configured to collectively set the power-on initial data specified by the data setting process (DAT_SET, FIG. 312) by the INVD command in the work area. (Step S2123 in FIG. 194). Then, if the game is in the game start state, the RAM initialization time game start data or the power recovery time game start data is specified, and the power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are sent to the command buffer setting process by the INVD command. The program is configured to be set according to CMBF_SET1, FIG. 316) (steps 2124 and 2125 in FIG. 194). Further, the program is configured to execute the set value command transmission process for transmitting the set value command by the INVS command (step 2126 in FIG. 194).

In the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), first, it is determined whether or not the setting state is abnormal, and if it is normal, the current setting value is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). ), If it is abnormal, the error is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112 in FIG. 193). After that, the LED common signal is output to the LED common output port (step S2113 in FIG. 193), and the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display is output to the base display 1317 (step S2114 in FIG. 193). .. In the process of outputting to the base display 1317, first, in order to acquire the LED port output value (LED common signal) based on the LED status determination output data address table, the output determination common process 2 (_OHAN_SUB2; FIG. The program is configured to execute 318). Further, in order to transmit the output data to the base display 1317 by setting the LED common signal to the SPI port (LED common output port) by SPI communication, the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA; FIG. 324) is executed by the INVD instruction. The program is configured to do so.

In the timer interrupt process, in addition to the above-mentioned setting confirmation / change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS) and setting display process (SET_PROCESS), various processes are executed by the extended process call instruction. The processes called by timer interrupt processing are listed below. Since the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 329 is partially integrated, it will be described in correspondence with the timer interrupt processing of FIGS. 190 and 191.

The processes executed by the INVS command include switch input process 1 (SW_INPUT; step S2062), random number update process 1 (R_ATAR_K; step S2063), peripheral board command transmission process (SCM_JOB; step S2070), and setting process (SET_PROCESS; step). S2068), setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY; step S2069), switch input processing 2 (SW_INPUT2; step S2080), timer update processing (TIM_DEC; step S2081), prize ball control processing (PAY_JOB; step S2082), frame command reception processing ( WK_CM_JOB; step S2083), command output process when switching (SW_COMSET_JOB; step S2085), special symbol / special electric accessory control process (TOK_JOB; step S2089), normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process (FUT_JOB; step S2090) , Output data setting process (PORT_SET; step S2091) is included. Since these processes are modules with a relatively large amount of processing and cannot be reused due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVS instruction.

In the processing executed by the INVS instruction, as described above, various processing is executed from the inside by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction to reduce the program capacity and increase the processing speed.

Further, the process executed by the INVI instruction includes a process of outputting a test signal (KENIG_OUT; step S2067), a fraud detection process (ILG_ACT_JUDG; step S2084), and a base display output process (EX_MONITOR_OUT; step S2087). .. As described above, the program that defines these processes is stored in the second area, and the process based on the program stored in the second area is configured so that it cannot be called by the INVS instruction or INVD instruction. There is. Since these processes are easy to reuse regardless of the specifications of the gaming machine and do not affect the result of the game, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVI instruction.

As described above, the program is configured so that the process called by the INVS instruction and the process called by the INVI instruction coexist in one timer interrupt process. With this configuration, the structure of the program code can be simplified while reducing the program capacity. Further, the call of the process by the INVS instruction and the call of the process by the INVI instruction may be aggregated to form a program. For example, the call of the process by the INVI instruction may be the beginning or the end of the program that defines the timer interrupt process. Alternatively, they may be centrally arranged in a specific place. Since the INVI instruction returns to the interrupt state before execution, by configuring the call of the processing by the INVI instruction to be aggregated at a specific location in the program, while the processing aggregated at the specific location is being executed. The interrupt state is maintained, and it becomes easier to grasp the interrupt state, which facilitates debugging. Further, since the process called by the INVI instruction is a process that does not affect the result of the game, the process called by the INVI instruction is configured to be aggregated in a specific place in the program, so that the process called at the specific place is the game. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the processing is related to the result of.

Further, as for the power-on processing (start processing), the program is configured to execute various processing by the extended processing call instruction as in the timer interrupt processing. As the process called in the power-on process of FIGS. 213 and 214, the process executed by the INVS instruction includes a set value confirmation process (SET_LV_CHK; step S2209) and a power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET; step S2239). .. Further, the process executed by the INVI command includes a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on (EX_RWMSUMCK; step S2211) and a process when the RAM is abnormal outside the game area when the power is turned on (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233; FIG. 217). There is.

In this way, the program is configured so that various processes are called by INVS instructions, INVD instructions, and INVI instructions not only in timer interrupt processing but also in power-on processing (start processing). In particular, by using the general-purpose processing called by the INVS instruction in the timer interrupt processing etc. in the power-on processing (start processing), it is possible to compress the capacity of the entire game control program, rather than executing it by the INV instruction. Since it can be processed at high speed, it is possible to speed up the startup of the gaming machine. In addition, even when interrupts are prohibited to ensure that various initialization processes are executed when the game machine is started, it is not necessary to add interrupt control to the program code by the INVI instruction, so the program capacity is compressed. The readability of the program can be improved.

In the INV instruction, INVS instruction, and INVD instruction, the BK instruction returns to the caller's processing, but in the INVI instruction, the BKI instruction returns to the caller's processing and returns to the interrupt state before the processing is executed. That is, if the interrupt state at the time of executing the INVI instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained as it is, and if the interrupt state at the time of executing the INVI instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt prohibition is released. The BKI instruction is a return instruction that can also be used when returning from the timer interrupt process, and maintains the interrupt enable / disable state before the timer interrupt process is executed. For example, since the power-on game area out-of-game area RAM error processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233) is called by the INVI instruction in the power-on processing, as shown in FIG. Is executed, and the process other than the game control is executed by calling the RWM initialization process (EX_EXRWMCLR) outside the used area with the INV instruction. Further, by returning by the RET instruction (corresponding to the BKI instruction) after the processing of step S2289 is executed, it is configured to return to the interrupt state before calling the RAM error processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM) outside the game area when the power is turned on. There is.

Also in the processing executed after the start processing (FIG. 221 and the like), the processing is called by the INVS instruction or the INVI instruction. In the main loop that repeats the process of step S2310 and the process of step S2311, the random number update process (R_OTHER_K; step S2311) is repeatedly executed by the INVS instruction and waits until the next timer interrupt process is started. Further, in the power failure processing (processing after step S2312), the power OFF processing (EX_POWER_DOWN) is executed by the INVI instruction, and the checksum calculation processing (S2317) is called by the INVS instruction. The checksums of the work RAM used for processing outside the game area and the work RAM used for processing inside the game area in the power failure process by calling the process (process when the power is turned off) arranged in the second area and using the INVS command. The process of calculating (inspection value of work RAM) (arranged in the first area) can be executed. As described above, in the power failure processing, the processing based on the program arranged in the first area and the processing based on the program arranged in the second area can be called as needed, and thus are related to the game. Since it becomes easy to configure the program by combining the processing and the processing not related to the game, the degree of freedom in arranging the program is increased and the management efficiency can be improved.

Further, the process of calculating the checksum in the game area and the process of calculating the checksum outside the game area are separately provided, and the process of calculating the checksum in the game area is set as the first area, and the process outside the game area is set. The process of calculating the checksum may be arranged in the second area. In this case, the process of calculating the checksum in the game area arranged in the first area is called by the INVS command, the power OFF processing is called by the INVI command, and then the process is placed in the second area by the INV command. You may call the process of calculating the checksum outside the game area. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the independence of processing for an area outside the game area.

Further, a process of selecting a variation pattern when executing a symbol variation display (dynamic display) is also included in the game control process, and is called by an INVS instruction in the timer interrupt process. In the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select), the variation pattern number is specified by using the bit transfer instruction described above. FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). The processing by the program code shown in FIG. 333 realizes the same function as the processing by the program code shown in FIG. 305, and uses the processing call instruction extended to some functions. Similar to the program code shown in FIG. 305, it corresponds to the flowchart of the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 304.

Referring to FIG. 333, when selecting a variation pattern, it is first necessary to specify a variation pattern table corresponding to parameters such as a special symbol (type of dynamic display result) and a gaming state (step P8021). To explain the process of step P8021 in more detail, first, the identification information (result of dynamic display) of the special symbol is set as the selection value, and the address of the selection data address table is used as the search data address (step P8021-1). The 2-byte data search process (FIG. 315, LD_HLA_HL) is configured to be executed by the INVD instruction (step P8021-2). The 2-byte data search process identifies the selected data address table corresponding to the identification information (result of dynamic display) of the special symbol, and the specified selected data address table is used as the search table (step P8021-3) as the selected value. Set the status flag. After that, the variation pattern selection table can be specified by executing the 2-byte data search process by the INVD instruction (step P8021-4).

Further, an index for using the bit transfer instruction is created by executing an index creation process (step S8023; GEN_IDX) for creating a data transfer index based on the address of the specified variation pattern selection table. At this time, the index creation process is configured to be executed by the INVS instruction. Finally, the bit transfer instruction is used to acquire the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern selection random number extracted from the specified variation pattern selection table (step P8028). In this way, by constructing a program by combining the extended processing call instruction (INVD instruction, INVS instruction) and the bit transfer instruction, it is possible to speed up the processing and reduce the capacity.

The process of using the extended process call instruction and the bit transfer instruction in combination is not limited to the process of selecting the variation pattern, and may be any process stored in the first area. In addition, by defining the index creation process required to execute the bit transfer instruction in the processing address table and configuring the program so that it is called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and speed up the processing at the same time. Will be. In this way, the bit transfer instruction can be used for general purposes by summarizing the processes required for executing the bit transfer instruction.

On the other hand, it is preferable that interrupts are disabled when the process is called for the process stored in the second area. For example, this is to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped when an error occurs, or to prevent the number of acquired balls from changing during the calculation of the bonus ratio so that the accurate bonus ratio cannot be calculated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by configuring the program to call the process stored in the second area by the INVI instruction, interrupt control (interrupts are prohibited at the time of processing execution, and interrupts before processing execution after processing execution). Control to return to the state) is simplified. Further, when the INVI instruction is executed, the PSW including the interrupt prohibition / permission information is stored and saved in the stack area, and the PSW stored in the stack area is returned to the state before the return when returning from the called process. Since it is necessary to use an instruction to save / restore the PSW to the stack area individually, the control can be simplified. By configuring in this way, processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (variable display / dynamic display of the symbol) is aggregated and stored in a specific area to simplify the game control while managing the program layout. Can be planned.

[19-7. Frequency of use of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Although there is a concern that the program capacity will increase as the game control becomes complicated by improving the game entertainment, the program capacity can be compressed by the expanded processing call instruction. In particular, the INVD instruction has a shorter word length than the INVS instruction and the INVI instruction, and the program capacity can be expected to be compressed most by replacing the INV instruction with the INV instruction. However, since the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited to 16 that can be defined in the process address table, in the present embodiment, particularly frequently used processes are defined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the program is configured so as to be used most frequently among the three types of extended processing call instructions. For example, in the game control process in the present embodiment, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (the number of lines of the process call instruction / the total number of lines of the program) is about 8% for the INVD instruction and about 8% for the INVS instruction. The program is composed of 4% and INVI instructions of about 0.3%. The frequency of use of the extended processing call instruction differs depending on the model of the gaming machine and is not limited to the above numerical values, but the frequency of use should be increased in the order of INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. Therefore, it is possible to compress the data capacity and speed up the processing.

On the other hand, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (the number of lines of the process call instruction / the total number of lines of the program) and the execution frequency (number of executions) of the extended process call instruction at the time of program execution are different. For example, when it is used in a process with a large number of calls such as a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically, the actual execution frequency is high because it is repeatedly executed periodically even if the frequency of use in the program code is low. .. In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329) of the present embodiment, the execution frequency of the INVD instruction in one cycle is configured to be higher than the execution frequency of the INVS instruction. In this way, by increasing the number of executions of the INVD instruction having a shorter word length than the INVS instruction, it is possible not only to compress the program capacity but also to speed up the processing of the program.

As described above, the process that can be called by the INVD instruction has high versatility, and is composed of a program having a relatively small number of bytes (short number of steps) as compared with the process called by the INVS instruction. A program with a small number of bytes can speed up the processing because the overhead at the time of execution by the arithmetic unit is reduced, so that the entire game control can be speeded up by calling it by the frequently used INVD instruction.

On the other hand, the process called by the INVS instruction has restrictions on the storage area of the program, but the number of processes and the capacity are less restricted than the process that can be called by the INVD instruction. It is a high processing. Since the INVI instruction calls the process stored in the second area, the program is configured so as to be used less frequently than the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

[19-8. Summary of processing call instructions]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU (CPU) 1311 of the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game by executing the program stored in the ROM 1313. The program defines processes that realize various functions required for controlling the gaming machine, and is executed by a process call command. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of types (4 types) of processing call instructions are implemented.

Unlike other process call instructions, the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction (first specific process execution instruction), is not a value that directly indicates the address in which the process to be called is stored, but identification information from 1 to 16. Is set as the operand. The INVD instruction calls the process (first specific process) selected from the process address table based on the identification information set as the operand at the time of execution.

The processing address table used in the INVD instruction is information stored in the same ROM (storage means) as the program / data area, and although it is used as an address table in the program, the program and data are stored. It is stored in an area different from the program / data area. Specifically, it is stored in an area (C080h to C0FFh) having a larger address than the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh).

The INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction (second specific process execution instruction), is an instruction to call the process (second specific process) specified in the identification information set as a parameter. Further, the INVS instruction is an instruction in which the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area in which the program defining the process to be called is stored. Specifically, when the area in which the program is stored is the address 8000h to 8BFFh. Has a word length of 2 bytes, and in the case of addresses 8C00h to 93FFh, the word length is 3 bytes.

The INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction (third specific process execution instruction), is set to the interrupt prohibit state after the PSW including the interrupt prohibition / permission information is stored and saved in the stack area at the time of instruction execution. , Is an instruction to call the process (third specific process) specified in the identification information set as a parameter.

Further, unlike other process call instructions, the INVI instruction uses the same return instruction (BKI instruction) as when the timer interrupt process is executed when returning from the called process, thereby setting the interrupt disable / enable state to the INVI instruction. You can return to the state before execution. Specifically, after the interrupt prohibition / permission information (PSW in FIGS. 326 and 327 (B)) stacked in the stack area when the INVI instruction is executed is saved in the stack area, the IMF value of the PSW is set to 0 (interruption prohibited). By setting to, the interrupt disabled state is set, and by restoring the PSW saved when the BKI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled / enabled state can be returned to the state before the INVI instruction is executed.

The fourth process call instruction, the INV instruction, is an instruction to call the process specified in the identification information set as a parameter. The INV instruction is an instruction having a longer word length than the INVS instruction.

In the game control program of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, at least the first to third processing call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) are used. Further, the word length of the INV instruction is longer than the word length of any of the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI instruction, and the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction (INVI instruction) should be used with priority over the INV instruction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity, speed up the call of processing, and improve the development efficiency of the game machine by simplifying the program code.

The program process (module) called by the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, is arranged on the start address (8000h value) side, which is the relative start address, in the program / data area (8000h to BFFFH). There is. The INVD instruction is a process that does not depend on the model, and by arranging it in an area close to the start address of the program storage area, it is possible to make a common arrangement (address) even for different models. As a result, it becomes easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, and it becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the initial stage of development of a gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start time of gaming control processing for each model. Further, even when a plurality of teams develop a gaming machine, it becomes easy to share each process (program), and the development period can be shortened.

Further, the program process (module) called by the INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction, can be arranged at an arbitrary position in the program / data area, unlike the program process called by the INVD instruction. Further, in the INVS instruction, as described above, the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area in which the program defining the process to be called is stored, but the word length is shorter and faster than the word length (4) of the INV instruction. Can be done. Therefore, the INVS instruction can be called at a higher speed than the INV instruction while allowing the program to be arranged more flexibly than the INVD instruction, so that the processing speed can be increased and the capacity can be reduced.

The program process (module) called by the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, is an instruction for calling a process not related to the result of the game arranged in the second area as described above, and is a game of a different model. By making it possible to divert it to the machine, it is possible to improve the development efficiency at the time of new development of the game machine. Therefore, when the program that defines the process called by the INVI instruction is ported to another model by arranging it relatively on the last address (BFFFh value) side of the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh). Even so, the impact is minimized. Further, the program is configured to call the process by the INV instruction instead of the extended process call instruction such as the INVD instruction so that the compatibility is maintained even if the hardware configuration of the gaming machine is changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the reuse of the program even if the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

On the other hand, in the process stored in the first area (the area on the start address side), not only the INV instruction but also the improved process call instruction INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction can be used. It is possible. Further, the processing called by the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction has a program configuration in which it is arranged only in the first area. For this reason, in the processing called by the INVS instruction, it is possible to call the processing by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction as necessary (arbitrary number of times), and further speed up the processing and simplify the program. Can be done.

In the game control program of the present embodiment, the INVD instruction which is the first process call instruction, the INVS instruction which is the second process call instruction, and the INVI instruction which is the third process call instruction are the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI. The program is configured so that the frequency of use (number of uses; number of executions) increases in the order of instructions. Since the INVD instruction is the instruction with the shortest word length among these processing call instructions, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and speed up the processing of the program by configuring it in this way.

From the above, according to the present embodiment, by improving the existing instruction for calling the defined process, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process and reduce the program capacity. Further, the program can be simplified by implementing an instruction such as an INVI instruction that integrates an interrupt control and a processing call instruction.

[20. Arrangement of electronic components on the main control board]
The procedure of SPI communication in the game stop processing has been described above. By the way, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus by adopting serial communication such as SPI communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310. That is, the circuit pattern can be simplified by eliminating a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and performing communication with a small number of signal lines including control lines. This facilitates the arrangement of various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and other connectors for outputting external information and a serial-parallel conversion circuit (first electronic component) for serial communication on the main control board 1310. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of arranging electronic components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 334.

FIG. 334 is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The mounting diagram shown in FIG. 334 corresponds to the circuit diagram shown in FIGS. 93, 259, and the like, and the reference numerals and explanations of the electronic components are as described above.

In the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged near the center of the board. The main control board 1310 has a first region 6100 centered on the main control MPU 1311 and a second region 6200 other than the first region (outside the first region). The arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 may be such that a predetermined distance is secured from the end portion of the main control board 1310, and the first region 6100 and the second region 6200 can be secured.

In the first area 6100, the non-mounting area 6101 in which electronic parts other than the main control MPU 1311 such as logic parts (logic IC, integrated circuit) and discrete parts are not arranged, and the discrete parts that need to be arranged in close proximity to the main control MPU 1311. There is a component mounting area 6102 in which is arranged. A discrete component is basically an electronic component having one circuit function. By providing the non-mounting area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, the heat generated by the operation of the main control MPU 1311 affects other electronic components, or the heat generated by the other electronic components affects the operation of the main control MPU 1311. It can be prevented.

Various logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) are arranged in the second region 6200. Parts that need to be placed near the main control MPU 1311 (eg, noise sensitive parts) are placed in the area close to the main control MPU 1311 in the second region 6200, and the other logic parts are further outside. Placed in the area. Hereinafter, typical arrangements of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

The reset circuit 1335 is arranged in a region of the second region 6200 that is close to the main control MPU 1311 (a region close to the component mounting region 6102 of the first region 6100). Specifically, the electronic components are arranged as close as possible to the main control MPU 1311, and the electronic components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311 are reduced so as not to intersect with other wiring. As a result, it is possible to configure the system so that an erroneous signal is not input due to factors such as noise generated by crosstalk, and the erroneous signal is input to the reset circuit 1335, which interrupts the game and causes the game to proceed. It is possible to prevent a significant hindrance.

The clock oscillator 1336 (second electronic component) is arranged in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. If the wiring distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is long or intersects with other wiring, noise is likely to occur, and the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock oscillator 1336 varies. , There is a risk that the progress of the game will be hindered. On the other hand, if the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is too close, the clock oscillator 1336 may not operate normally due to heat generated by the main control MPU 1311 or the like, and the frequency may vary. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment, the influence of heat generation of the main control MPU 1311 is suppressed by providing the non-mounting area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, while the clock oscillator is set in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. By arranging the 1336, it is suppressed that the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 are separated from each other, and the generation of noise is suppressed.

As described above, the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 includes a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, large winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and a photo sensor. A signal such as is input, and a game ball flowing down the game area 5a is mainly detected. Since the switches and sensors that output these input signals are distributed and arranged in the game area, a plurality of parallel / serial conversion circuits 1341 are provided (in this embodiment, the parallel / serial conversion circuits 1341a). ~ 1341c). Further, these input signals are once input to the buffer and input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is arranged in the second region 6200, but since a signal for imparting game value such as winning detection to the starting winning opening and the large winning opening is input, the influence of noise and the like is exerted. Arranged so that it is as difficult to receive as possible.

As described above, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 output a signal for lighting the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). Since the display of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 does not directly affect the result of the game, it may be located relatively far from the main control MPU 1311, and the degree of freedom of arrangement is increased. For example, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is arranged on the end side of the main control board 1310. Further, a drive circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and the drive circuit 1344 once receives a signal and then outputs the signal to the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317).

The base display 1317 is arranged in an outer region of the second region 6200 (on the end side of the main control board 1310), that is, at a position relatively distant from the main control MPU 1311. The base value is displayed on the base display 1317, but even if an incorrect base value is displayed or the base value is not displayed due to the influence of noise, the display of the base value itself affects the result of the game. Does not give. Further, it is possible to output the base value information from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, or to display the base value on the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to secure an alternative means. Therefore, in order to prioritize other logic components (first logic components) that may affect the game in the event of a malfunction and arrange them in the vicinity of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 is placed from the main control MPU 1311. Place it in a distant position. Further, the logic components (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, second logic component) that are unlikely to affect the game such as outputting a signal to the base display 1317 are located at positions away from the main control MPU 1311. It may be arranged in the vicinity of the base display 1317.

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, as described above, the external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A, and various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B. .. The various solenoids include a large winning opening solenoid and the like, which affects the game value given to the player. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 is a region close to the first region 6100 of the second region 6200. Is placed in. As a result, the signal line connecting the main control MPU 1311 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be shortened. Further, since the solenoid drive signal from the main control board 1310 is transmitted and received to serial communication (SPI communication), the number of data lines can be reduced, which facilitates the routing of data lines when arranging electronic components. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction due to the influence of noise and the like.

Since the serial-parallel conversion circuit that outputs a signal that controls a motor other than the solenoid directly outputs the output signal without passing through a buffer, a transistor, or the like, the main control MPU 1311 and the output destination connector (for example, It is necessary to arrange it in the vicinity of the connector 13103).

As described above, in the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, the inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output port of the channel B, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory opening signal, a normal electric function). An object release signal, etc.) is output. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is arranged in the inspection component mounting area (inspection circuit arrangement area) 6300, and in addition to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347 and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided. The electronic components provided in the inspection component mounting area 6300 are mounted only on the gaming machines that are inspected by the inspection organization, and are not mounted on the gaming machines that are generally on the market. However, although the component is not mounted in the inspection component mounting area 6300, a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided, so that noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, it is arranged at a position away from other electronic parts (first logic parts) that affect the game. For example, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 that display LEDs are inspection parts rather than the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 that outputs a signal to control the solenoid for opening and closing the big prize opening. It is arranged at a position close to the mounting area 6300 (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346).

In the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 334, the setting key 971 is provided on the main control board 1310 and is arranged at the end of the main control board 1310 (outside the second region). Since the setting key 971 is directly operated by an employee of the game, various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit that performs the main control of the game are used to avoid the influence of vibration during operation. It is placed at a position away from the first logic component). Further, the control based on the signal input by the operation of the setting key 971 may directly affect the progress of the game because the control based on the signal input by the operation of the setting key 971 includes the setting change of the gaming machine. Therefore, wiring is performed so that the wiring between the setting key 971 and the main control MPU 1311 is reduced so as not to be affected by noise or the like.

As described above, in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, the basic guideline for circuit design is clarified by specifying the arrangement for each area according to the function and characteristics of each electronic component. Can be. As a result, it is possible to maintain and improve the quality without lowering the development efficiency even if the system is changed due to the design of a new gaming machine or the transfer of developers.

[21. Serial communication (SPI communication) control]
Here, the serial communication function (SPI communication) that outputs a signal from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be further described. The serial communication function is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but here, the procedure of SPI communication will be described in more detail with reference to the program code.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, serial communication is used for signal transmission in the main control board 1310. Typical serial communication includes I2C communication and SPI communication. SPI communication has an advantage that the number of signal lines is increased but the communication speed is higher than that of I2C communication. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, SPI communication is used when the main control MPU 1311 receives signals from various switches and when the main control MPU 1311 transmits control signals such as various LEDs and solenoids.

It should be noted that not all signals are input / output by SPI communication, but some signals such as a signal for detecting fraudulent activity against the gaming machine in the initial setting process at power-on are mainly performed by parallel communication. It is input to the control MPU 1311. For example, signals such as "setting key switch", "main RWM erase / setting change signal", and "power failure warning signal" are directly input from the general-purpose input terminal of the main control MPU 1311 by parallel communication. The "setting key switch", "main RWM erase / setting change signal", and "power failure warning signal" can be confirmed in the initial setting process (for example, the initialization process of FIGS. 21 and 22) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Since it is a necessary signal and it takes time to capture and determine the input signal when the input signal is captured via the SPI circuit, it is captured by parallel communication. In this way, since parallel communication can communicate at a higher speed than serial communication, it is possible to speed up the initial setting processing compared to the case of transmitting and receiving various signals only by serial communication, and the time until the game processing is started. Can be shortened.

In addition, when input / output of some signals is transmitted by parallel communication and other signals are transmitted by serial communication (SPI communication), when an unauthorized person tries to acquire a signal for performing game control. Since it is necessary to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, it is possible to enhance the deterrence against fraud.

SPI communication outputs a signal based on the information stored in the SPI communication buffer register. For example, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a stop signal is output to the solenoid in the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing, a case where a signal is output to the LED cathode port or the LED common port in the display LED output processing and the setting display processing. In the game machine, the signal transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication is mainly a signal for controlling a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor / solenoid.

In addition, signals input from various sensors in SPI communication are input to an arithmetic unit such as the main control MPU 1311. For example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the winning is detected by the starting opening switch, and a signal is input to the main control MPU 1311. Hereinafter, a configuration and a procedure for transmitting / receiving signals input / output to / from the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be described.

[21-1. Serial communication (SPI communication) control configuration]
First, a configuration for realizing SPI communication will be described. The basic configuration is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, and further, with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337, setting of parameters required for each configuration and control will be described, and FIG. 338 will be combined. The procedure at startup such as initialization of various parameters at the start of SPI communication is also supplemented with reference to.

FIG. 335 is a block diagram of a configuration for performing SPI communication to the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the master control MPU 1311 controls communication, and various ICs arranged on the main control board 1310 constitute slaves. Specifically, the slaves are a serial-parallel conversion circuit (1342, 1343, 1346, 1349) and a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341. A part of the slave may be arranged not on the main control board 1310 but on the relay board connected to the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, two types of communication are possible from the master (main control MPU 1311) by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is performed to slaves 1 to 4. Communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is basically communication for performing normal game control, inputting signals from various switches and sensors, controlling solenoids that open and close the big prize opening, and emitting light from various LEDs. A signal for control is output. On the other hand, communication by SPI transmission (CHB) is performed to the slave 5, and is mainly used for communication for outputting a test signal.

In communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA), it is possible to start communication with all slaves (1 to 4) at the same time, and at this time, each slave starts communication in a predetermined order. In this case, the communication start (“1”) is set in the enable setting of all slaves (SPECNBan; n corresponds to an individual slave). If no data is stored in the communication (transmission) buffer, the communication of the next slave is started without the communication of the corresponding slave.

It is also possible to specify slaves individually and start communication. For example, when the LEDs connected to slave 1 and slave 3 are turned on, the enable setting is communicated to slave 1 and slave 3. By fixing the enable settings of the slave 2 and the slave 4 to (“0”) while setting the start (“1”), the communication of the slave 3 is started after the communication of the slave 1 is completed.

As described above, each slave can input and output a signal, and takes in the input signal when the output signal is output. Further, each slave may be controlled by limiting (specificing) the function as output-only or input-only, and in the communication in SPI transmission / reception (CHA) of the present embodiment, slaves 1 to 3 are output-only and slave 4 are used. Is for input only. Therefore, the input-only slave is configured to capture the input signal while transmitting dummy data. The procedure for the master (main control MPU 1311) to capture the signal received from the slave will be described later.

Subsequently, the SPI communication of the present embodiment will be further described. As described above, in the SPI communication in the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two channels, SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). The number of SPI transmission / reception (CHA) channels is four. Further, the communication speed can be set for each channel, and a 16-byte transmission / reception buffer is provided for each channel. There are four types of SPI communication operation modes, which are common to each channel. The bit direction can be set to LSB first or MSB first, and can be set for each channel. The LSB first starts communication from the least significant bit, and the LSB first starts communication from the most significant bit. Further, SPI transmission (CHB) is dedicated to transmission, and the number of channels is one. Other settings are the same as for SPI transmission / reception (CHA), but all reception-related settings are unused (fixed to "0"). Hereinafter, the operation mode and the registers for setting each parameter will be described with reference to FIGS. 336 and 337.

First, the operation mode of SPI communication will be described. FIG. 336 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Four types of operation modes are defined for SPI communication, and as shown in FIG. 336, whether the initial state of the clock is "Low" or "High" and the timing of data change is "at the falling edge" of the clock. It is specified by "at the time of rising" or whether the sampling timing is "at the time of falling" or "at the time of rising". The initial state of the clock is a state in which communication has not started, and one bit of data is transmitted between the timing of data change and the timing of sampling. The operation mode is set according to the specifications of the slave (serial-parallel conversion circuit), and the master (main control MPU 1311) outputs a signal according to the set operation mode.

Next, the configuration of the register for setting the parameter for controlling the SPI communication in this embodiment will be described. Here, the case of SPI transmission / reception (CHA) will be described, but the same applies to the case of SPI transmission (CHB). FIG. 337 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in which (A) is the control register 1 (SPICNA0) and (B) is the control register 2 (SPICNA1). ), (C) are prescaler registers (SPECPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPICPSA2, SPIPPSA3).

The control register 1 shown in (A) is composed of 8 bits and includes a bit shift setting (SPBSFAn), an operation mode (SPMODA), and an initialization setting (SPRSTA). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are set at power-on (initialization), and the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is set at power-on or when communication cannot be performed normally at each slave. If it is determined, initialization is executed for all slaves. When the initialization is executed, the bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and the operation mode (SPMODA) are reset. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the SPI communication circuit, it is possible to recover from the abnormality at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress the hindrance to the progress of the game.

In the bit shift setting (SPBSFAn), it is specified whether to transmit data from the most significant bit (“0”: MSB first) or from the least significant bit (“1”: LSB first). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) can be specified for each slave, and in the present embodiment, 4 bits corresponding to the number of slaves are allocated and can be set individually (bits 6 to 3). Specifically, bit 6 corresponds to slave 4, bit 5 corresponds to slave 3, bit 4 corresponds to slave 2, and bit 3 corresponds to slave 1.

The operation mode (SPMODA) specifies the above-mentioned four types of operation modes, and is set in common for each slave. Since there are four types of operation modes, an area for 2 bits is allocated, "00" is mode 1, "01" is mode 2, "10" is mode 2, and "11" is mode 4 (). Bits 2, 1).

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) has different functions at the time of reading and at the time of writing, and is set in common for each slave. At the time of reading, the initialization setting indicates that the initialization is completed when the set value is "0", and indicates that the initialization is in progress when the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when "1" is written in the initialization setting, SPI communication is controlled to be initialized, and when "0" is written, the control is continued without doing anything in particular. For example, when it is determined that communication cannot be performed normally, "1" is written in the initialization setting and initialization is executed. Further, it is possible to initialize the communication circuit by writing "1" in the initialization setting regardless of the communication state such as whether or not communication is in progress. When the communication circuit is initialized, it is necessary to reset various parameters.

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) can determine whether or not initialization is in progress at the time of reading, and after confirming whether or not initialization is in progress (“1”) based on the value of the bit, Initialization may be performed or communication may be started. The initialization time when the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is initialized (bit 0 is set to (“1”)) can be executed in a shorter period than when one instruction is executed, and is set to initialization. When the next instruction is executed later, the initialization is completed. Therefore, if the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is still being initialized (“1”) even after the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is read after the initialization is set, it is possible that some abnormality has occurred in the SPI communication circuit. Therefore, in that case, the game may be reset to the main control MPU 1311 (reset by the watchdog timer) by forcibly shifting to the game stop, the abnormality notification, and the power interruption processing. As a result, even if the SPI communication circuit becomes abnormal, it can be restored immediately.

It should be noted that each slave does not need to be initialized because it is started in the initialized state when the power is turned on. On the other hand, at the time of reset by watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, out-of-area access reset, etc., the state before reset is maintained. Therefore, even if the program is started by any of the reset factors such as system reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, and out-of-area access reset, it is initialized without setting the initialization for the SPI circuit. Initial settings other than the settings are made. If watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset occurs, it is possible that the game is not being executed normally, and the SPI circuit settings may have been changed. .. Therefore, when the program from the reset is started, it is determined whether the reset of the watchdog timer, the illegal operation code reset, or the out-of-area access reset has occurred, and then the watchdog timer reset, the illegal operation code reset, If it is determined that the reset has been performed by any of the out-of-area access resets, the stability of the game control after the reset is improved by performing the initialization setting of the SPI circuit (writing "1" to SPRISTA). It can be improved and the hindrance to the progress of the game can be suppressed as much as possible.

The control register 2 (SPICNA1) shown in (B) is composed of 8 bits and is set every time communication is started. The control register 2 includes the reception status (SPRSAn) and enable (SPECNBan) of each slave. The reception status is set for each slave (bits 7 to 4), and is set to "1" if there is received data and "0" if there is no received data.

The enable is set for each slave, and the function differs between reading and writing (bits 3 to 0). At the time of reading, "1" is set if communication is in progress, and "0" is set if communication is completed. On the other hand, when "1" is written to enable, communication of the corresponding slave becomes possible and communication is started. The communication status can be determined by acquiring the enable value at the start of communication. If the value is "0" (communication end), "1" is set to start communication and the value is "". In the case of 1 ”(during communication), it is possible to control such as waiting until the communication is completed.

The prescaler register shown in (C) is composed of 16 bits and is provided for each slave. The prescaler register is composed of a 5-bit transmission buffer status (bits 15 to 11) and a 10-bit baud rate setting (bits 9 to 0) (bit 10 is an unused bit).

The number of transmission data is stored in the transmission buffer status. In the case of "00h", there is no transmission data, and in the case of "01h" to "10h", the transmission data in the transmission buffer is 1 to 16 bytes. Is shown. The transmit buffer status can also be used to check the number of data remaining in the transmit buffer. If the value of the transmission buffer status is "10h", all the data is stored in the transmission buffer (full state), so the writing of the data is ignored. Whether or not communication is in progress can be determined by referring to the enable value of the corresponding slave in the control register 2.

The baud rate setting corresponds to the communication speed at the time of communication, and is set once when the power is turned on. The set value can be set from "000h" to "3FFh", and in the present embodiment, the actual baud rate can be calculated by the system clock (20Mhz) / (set value × 4). When the set value is "000h", it is calculated as "001h". It should be noted that it is necessary to reset the SPI communication at the time of initialization (when "1" is set in the initialization setting of the control register 1).

[21-2. Control at the start of SPI communication]
Subsequently, the control from the start (initialization) of the gaming machine to the start of SPI communication will be described. FIG. 338 is a time chart showing a state from the initialization of the gaming machine of the present embodiment to the start of SPI communication.

In FIG. 338, a reset signal is input by turning on the power of the gaming machine at time a, and the gaming machine is started (initialized). When the gaming machine is started (initialized), before the user program such as the initial setting process is executed (started), it is checked whether an unauthorized device is installed or an unauthorized modification is performed. Perform a security check to be inspected (Period A).

When the security check is completed, the initial setting process, which is a user program, is executed by the main control MPU 1311 (time b). The initial setting process includes a process specific to the model of the gaming machine and executes a process necessary for enabling the start of the game (period B).

The initial setting process includes initialization of various parameters set in SPI communication and the like. Specifically, the control register 1 (SPICNA0, SPICNB0) shown in FIG. 337 (A) is set (time c). In the control register 1, as described above, the bit shift setting of each slave and the operation mode common to each slave are set.

In the operation mode setting, the clock initial state is set according to the set operation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 338, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to “1” (High) when the power is turned on. Therefore, when mode 1 and mode 2 are specified, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to “0”. Set to "(Low)". The signal change of the clock terminal of each mode is as shown in FIG. 338. Bit shift settings should be set appropriately according to the specifications of the slave. Since the SPI circuit is automatically initialized when the gaming machine is started, it is not necessary to execute the initialization setting of the SPI circuit (write "1" in SPRISTA) at the time of mode setting by the initial setting process. As a result, it is not necessary to mount the process of initializing by the user program, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization.

After that, when the initialization setting process is completed (time d), the game process is started (period C). The start of the game process corresponds to the start of the main loop process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22) in the initialization process (FIG. 21 and the like), and the timer interrupt process can be executed. When the timer interrupt process is executed (time e), a process for performing SPI communication such as a switch input process is executed (time f).

In addition, reset when the reset signal is not input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 (user reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset "These resets are performed unless otherwise specified. In the case of "user reset"), the program starts immediately after the reset is released, and the settings related to SPI communication are performed by the same process regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset. ing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization by setting the communication of the same SPI without distinguishing between the system reset and the user reset.

Further, the period from the reset release to the setting of the operation mode (the period from the time a to c) is set to be longer in the case of the system reset than in the case of the user reset. Since there is a high possibility that a security problem will occur when the power is turned on, the function check of various main control MPUs 1311 by restarting after the power is turned on can be surely completed.

[21-3. Control at the time of output signal transmission in SPI communication]
SPI communication is performed by various processes called from timer interrupt processing and initialization processing. For example, in timer interrupt processing, switch input processing that processes signals input by SPI communication from various switch sensors, display LED output processing that outputs signals for controlling lighting of various LEDs by SPI communication, and external output. The game stop processing and the like for outputting the signal of the above to the external output terminal by SPI communication are included. Here, a procedure for outputting a signal by SPI communication in the game stop processing will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing for executing SPI communication is simplified while using the processing calling instruction such as the INVD instruction described above.

The outline of the procedure for transmitting a signal by SPI communication is to set the data to be transmitted in a predetermined SPI communication buffer register and execute the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) called by the above-mentioned INVD instruction. Here, the SPI communication process of step P124 of the game stop time process (FIG. 330) is taken as a specific example, and the program code of the game stop time process (FIG. 331) and the program code of the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) (FIG. 324) are used. The procedure will be explained with reference to it.

As shown in the program code of FIG. 331, when the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmission buffer and performs an external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information. It is executed (step P123), and the external output information to be output is set in the A register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets the external output information set in the A register in the W register by loading (storing) (“LD W, A”) the value stored in the A register in the W register. Then, by setting the content of the A register to "0" ("XOR A, A"), the solenoid signal output when the game is stopped is set to OFF.

Then, the address value of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) is set in the E register, and the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) called from the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) and the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) called by the INVD instruction is performed. ), The external output information set in the WA register and each solenoid signal are set in the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) indicated by the E register, and are output by SPI transmission (CHB). The contents of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) will be described with reference to FIG. 339.

The SPI communication B0 port corresponds to the parallel output port of the address DA, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 and various solenoids via the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 (FIG. 257). FIG. 339 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in the present embodiment. The SPI communication B buffer register has 16 bits, and a port for outputting external information (PB0 to PB7) and a port for outputting data (drive signal) to the solenoid (PA0 to PA7) are each composed of 8 bits.

The signal output from the port for outputting external information includes a security signal, a ball payout signal, and the like. Various signals output from the external terminal board 784 are detected by the hall computer. The hall computer accumulates signals received from each gaming machine and monitors the player's game by grasping the number of gaming media and gaming information paid out by the gaming machine.

Further explaining each port that outputs a drive signal to the solenoid, as shown in FIG. 339, the output port PA1 corresponds to the solenoid 1, the output port PA2 corresponds to the solenoid 2, and the output port PA3 corresponds to the solenoid 3. In this embodiment, other ports are not used, and the number of output ports increases or decreases depending on the model. The solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the large winning opening, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. Since the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game ball is distributed, 3 These ports are the output destinations of the solenoid drive signal.

Further, although one output port corresponds (connects) to each solenoid, it may be configured with a plurality of bit outputs (for example, 2-bit output). For example, the output ports PA0 and PA1 are solenoids that open and close the first prize opening 2005, the output ports PA2 and PA3 are solenoids that open and close the second prize opening 2006a, and the output ports PA4 and PA5 are the second prize opening 2006b. It may be configured to correspond to (connect) a solenoid that opens and closes. In this way, by bundling a plurality of output ports (output terminals) and outputting a drive current connected to one solenoid, it is possible to prevent the drive current from becoming insufficient and to reliably drive the solenoid. On the other hand, when the drive signal is output from one output port (output terminal), the drive signal may be amplified by an amplifier circuit arranged on the main control board 1310 or the relay board.

Returning to the description of the program code for the game stop processing in FIG. 331, when the output destination by SPI communication is specified by setting the SPI communication B buffer register in the E register, the main control MPU 1311 performs SPI 2-byte output processing. (SPI_TX__WA) is called by the INVD instruction to start SPI communication. The SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is called in each process of the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), the output data setting process (PORT_SET), and the LED_DISPLAY (display LED output process) in addition to the game stop process (Play_Stop), and is serial. This is a process called when communication (SPI communication) is executed.

Subsequently, the details of the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) will be described with reference to FIG. 324. When the SPI2 byte output process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first outputs the contents of the W register to the SPI communication B buffer set in the E register (“OUT (E), W”). As described above, the port output value created in the external output process (step P123) of the game stop processing is stored in the W register. Further, the contents of the A register are loaded into the W register (“LD W, A”), and the contents of the W register are output to the SPI communication B buffer (“OUT (E), W”). By the above processing, after setting the data for external information output, the data (drive signal) for the solenoid can be set.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the definition information for performing SPI communication (“LDT HL, SPI_COMTX_B—_OFS_TP”). SPI_COMTX_B is a table (setting data at the time of SPI common output) in which setting data for output by SPI communication is defined, and _OFS_TP is an initial value address of an area in which various tables are defined. Hereinafter, the SPI common output setting data will be described with reference to FIG. 340.

FIG. 340 is a diagram showing an example of SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of the present embodiment. In the SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B), the number of data settings is defined first, and then it is defined that communication is possible for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB).

The number of data settings is the number of records defined in the table, and data for a total of two records, that is, the setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and the setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB), are defined. Therefore, the actual number of data settings is 2. The value of the number of data settings is configured to be calculated based on information such as the end address of the table in order to flexibly correspond to the table structure (increase / decrease in the number of records in the table).

SPI communication is started by writing the SPI communication enable bit to the SPI communication control register. The SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) defines the setting data for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). For each setting data, the setting address of the SPI communication control register 1 and the setting value of the SPI communication enable bit are defined. Specifically, for SPI transmission / reception (CHA), the setting address (_SPICNA1) of the SPI communication A control register 1 and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPECNBA_PB), and for SPI transmission (CHB), the SPI communication B control. It is the set address (_SPICNB1) of the register 1 and the set value (_SPI_SPECNB_PB) of the SPI communication B enable bit. In _SPI_SPECNB_PB, communication start information is set for the slave that executes communication in SPI transmission / reception (CHA). For example, when communication is started for all of slaves 1 to 4, slaves 1 to 1 to Since the lower 4 bits corresponding to the slave 4 are "1", "0FH" ("00001111B") is set. In _SPI_SPECNB_PB, communication start information for a slave that executes communication in SPI transmission (CHB) is set.

Here, since the slave 4 is used as an input, it is not necessary to start communication with the slave 4 at the timing of the output. However, even if the enable signal of the slave 4 is set to start communication, the communication of the slave 4 is not started as a result because there is no data for communication in the buffer of the slave 4. In this way, the reason why the communication start is set including the enable signal of the slave that does not need to start the communication is that the table can be commonly used at the time of SPI communication. By doing so, it is possible to set the setting at the start of SPI communication and execute it in one table, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program (data). It should be noted that the tables may be separately configured so that communication is not possible for all slaves, but only slaves that require communication are enabled. By doing so, the program (data) capacity will increase, but it will be possible to avoid erroneous communication in slaves that do not originally need to communicate.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication by executing the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) by the INVD instruction (“INVD_PORT_DAT_SET”). This will be further described with reference to the program code shown in FIG. 319.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the number of data settings in the B register (“LD B, (HL +)”). The HL register stores the table "SPI_COMTX_B" (FIG. 340) containing the definition information of SPI communication in the SPI 2-byte output process that is the caller of the output port data setting process, and is the number of data settings initially defined. Will be stored in the B register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication for SPI transmission / reception (CHA). Specifically, the address corresponding to the SPI communication A control register is set in the W register (“LD W, (HL +)”), and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit is set in the A register (“LD A,”). (HL +) "). After that, by setting the SPI communication A enable bit in the SPI communication A control register, SPI communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is started (“OUT (W), A”). Further, it is determined whether or not the loop for the number of data settings has been completed (“DJNZ P? ORTDAT_SET_1”), but since SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB) has not started, communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is performed. Similarly, after setting the SPI communication B enable bit in the SPI communication B control register, the output port data setting process is terminated.

In the process of "LD B, (HL +)", the data of the address indicated by the HL register is loaded into the B register, and then the value of the HL register is incremented by +1. As a result, when reading the data at the address indicated by the HL register one after another, it is not necessary to execute the process of increasing the HL register by +1 (INC HL), and it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

When the SPI communication process in step P124 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets the game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, an output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data in the output port is executed (step P126). Finally, the performance display monitor process for displaying various information about the game on the performance display monitor is executed (step P127), and the process returns to the caller's process (timer interrupt process).

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) and the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) are called by the INVD instruction in order to execute the SPI communication, so that the SPI communication is performed. It is possible to reduce the overhead for executing and speed up the processing.

[21-4. Control when receiving input signal in SPI communication]
Subsequently, in SPI communication, a configuration and a procedure for receiving signals from various sensors and switches will be described. First, a configuration for receiving an input signal by SPI communication will be described. The slave that receives the input signal corresponds to the slave 4 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 335, and corresponds to the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 when applied to the specific configuration of the present embodiment. As shown in the main board mounting diagram of FIG. 334, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 is actually composed of three ICs (1341a to 1341c).

[21-4-1. Configuration for receiving input signals by SPI communication]
FIG. 341 is a circuit diagram centered on a configuration for receiving a signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives an input from each switch and sensor at the Q / D1 to 8 terminals via each connector. Further, the clock signal output from the SPICK terminal of the main control MPU 1311 which is the master is received from the CK terminal. Further, the signal output from SPITX of the main control MPU 1311 is not taken in, and by outputting "0" data from SPITX, a LOW level signal is input to the CLR / LOAD terminal, and Q / D8 to The signal connected to the Q / D1 terminal is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The specific data acquisition timing is as described with reference to FIG. 336 or the like based on the operation mode.

The parallel signal input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314 is converted into a serial signal and input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311. The signals input to each parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314 are sequentially output (for example, in the order of parallel / serial conversion circuits 1314c, 1314b, 1314a). The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314a outputs the converted signal from the Q8'terminal and inputs it to the SI terminal of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314b. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b outputs the signal input to the Q / D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8'terminal, and then outputs the signal input to the SI terminal from the Q8'terminal. The signal output from the Q8'terminal of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314b is input to the SI terminal of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314c. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c outputs the signal input to the Q / D1 to 8 terminals from the Q8C terminal, and then outputs the signal input to the SI terminal from the Q8C terminal. The signal output from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314c is input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311.

Subsequently, for each parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 (1341a to 1341c), signals input from various switches and sensors will be described. In this embodiment, each parallel-to-serial conversion circuit (1341a to 1341c) has the same hardware.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a receives the input of the signals output from the normal winning opening switches 1 to 3 and the large winning opening switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the input of the signal output from the start port switch 2 via the connector 13107 and the start port switch 1 via the connector 13108 is received. The signal input from each switch passes through the interface (IF) circuit 13105a before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314a.

The interface circuit 13105a can detect disconnection, short circuit, power supply abnormality, etc. for the input signal. When an abnormality is detected, an error signal is output from the E terminal. Further, the interface circuit 13105a receives the input of the signal detected by the proximity sensor. The proximity sensor outputs a voltage of about 9 V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected), and outputs a voltage of about 0.8 V when passing is detected. Therefore, inside the interface circuit 13105a, when the input signal is 0V, it is determined to be a disconnection, and when it is 12V, it is determined to be a short circuit (short circuit). Since the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b (described later) are directly connected by a wiring pattern, it is not possible to determine whether the abnormality is on the interface circuit 13105a side or the interface circuit 13105b side. It has become. This is because it is not necessary to detect the abnormality individually because it hinders the progress of the game regardless of which sensor causes the abnormality. By connecting the E terminal of each interface circuit, an abnormality may be detected individually for each interface circuit. The error signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 from the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 like other input signals, and the main control MPU 1311 receives the error signal together with the signals from various sensors in the input processing, and the error signal indicates an error. It is determined by the processing of the program, and if it is determined as an error, a command for notifying the peripheral control board of the switch abnormality is sent, and a switch abnormality occurs in the lamp (LED), voice, liquid crystal display device, etc. It is designed to notify you of what you have done.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314b receives the input of the signal output from the out switch and the safe switch via the connector 13104, and receives the input of the signal output from the start port switch 3 via the connector 13106. Further, the input of the signal output from the general-purpose input, the discharge port switch, the specific area switch, the combined operation gate switch, and the normal gate switch is received via the connector 13101. The signal input from each switch passes through the interface (IF) circuit 13105b before being input to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The interface circuit 13105b has the same function as the interface circuit 13105a and receives the input of the signal detected by the proximity sensor. As described above, the wiring from the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b is connected to the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel serial conversion circuit 1314c.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314c receives inputs of signals output from the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection switch, the specific area fraud prevention switch, and the start port fraud prevention switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314c receives the input of the error signal (SW-E) input from the E terminals of the interface circuit 13105a and the interface circuit 13105b. The specific area fraud prevention switch and the start port fraud prevention switch 1 to 3 are photo type sensors, and output a voltage of 12V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected) and a voltage of 0V when passing is detected. The vibration detection sensor and the magnetic detection switch are not photo-type sensors, but similarly, when vibration or magnetic abnormality is not detected (when not detected), a voltage of 12V is output and vibration or magnetic abnormality is detected. When is detected (at the time of detection), a voltage of 0 V is output. The voltage at the time of detection and the voltage at the time of non-detection may be opposite, and a voltage of 0V may be output at the time of non-detection and a voltage of 12V may be output at the time of detection. Unlike the proximity sensor, the voltage at ON / OFF is different, so the signal is converted to 5V by the transistor 13109 and output without going through the interface circuit. The transistor 13109 used at this time has a removal circuit (resistor) built in the input stage of the transistor for preventing erroneous detection due to noise or the like at the time of signal input.

A pull-up resistor 13109b is connected between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109 and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit 1314. In addition to the pull-up resistor 13109b, a capacitor 13109c is connected between the GND and the signal line for noise reduction. Further, a pull-up resistor 13109d is connected between the connector 13101, the interface circuit 13105, and the transistor 13109a. These pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitors 13109c, interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109a are located relatively close to the connector 13101, while the parallel serial conversion circuit 1314 does not need to be located near the connector 13101. .. That is, the electronic components arranged in the vicinity of the connector 13101 are specific circuits (pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitors 13109c, among the input circuits (circuits of the input section from the connector 13101 or the like to the main control MPU 1311). It is an interface circuit 13105 and a transistor 13109a). This is because the output from the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a has a high drive capability and is not easily affected by noise even if the distance between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a is long. Further, when receiving a signal from the outside of the main control board 1310, if the wiring pattern is routed in the board, it may affect the wiring pattern of other signals. Therefore, the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a and these are used. Electronic components such as connected pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d) and capacitors 13109c need to be placed near the connector.

[21-4-2. Procedure for receiving input signals by SPI communication (switch input processing)]
Subsequently, a procedure for inputting data input from various switches provided in the gaming machine to the main control MPU 1311 by serial communication (SPI communication) will be described. Specifically, the switch input process in step S74 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be described. Regarding the switch input process, FIG. 288 describes a process of detecting the winning of a game ball such as a starting port and storing the switch edge information in the prize ball determination area, but here, it is limited to the prize ball information. A procedure for receiving input signals from various sensors and inputting the signals to the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be described.

FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of switch input processing for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the switch input process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 342. Hereinafter, the details of the switch input process will be described with reference to FIGS. 342 and 343, and a procedure for receiving the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, the input signal is received using the third channel (slave 4, A3 channel) of SPI transmission / reception (CHA). When explaining the processing of the program, "slave 4" will be described as "A3 channel".

When the switch input process is started, the main control MPU 1311 sets transmission dummy data (8 bytes) in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel (step P6001). Specifically, first, the start address of the SPI input setting data (see FIG. 344) is set in the HL register. At this time, by setting the value obtained by adding the test pointer address (fixed to 9000H; rewritable by the program) + the value of the second operand in the HL register by the LDT instruction, a 3-byte word length instruction (LD HL) should be used. , SPI_SWRX_B), the word length can be 2 bytes, and the capacity of the program can be reduced. The value of the second operand is the difference value from the start data address of the data to be set, and the start data address of the data to be set by adding the value of the second operand to the value indicated by the test pointer is the HL register (first operand). ). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the input signal is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314 (slave 4), the input signal is controlled to be taken in every time the dummy data is transmitted. The dummy data set at the time of data reception is defined in the SPI input time setting data, and the contents of the SPI input time setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 344.

FIG. 344 is an example of the program code of the setting data (setting data at the time of SPI input; SPI_SWRX_B) at the time of starting the reception of the input signal by the SPI communication of the present embodiment. As the SPI input setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, and then the address of the transmission (communication) buffer and the transmission data (dummy data) stored in the transmission buffer are defined. In the example shown in FIG. 344, dummy data is set in the transmission (communication) buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel. At this time, the transmission data of the 1st byte and the 5th byte are used as load data of the input signal (latch data; LOAD signal for SPI reception (_SPI_LOAD_SIG = FEH)), and others (2nd to 4th, 6th to 8th bytes). The transmission data of is dummy data (SPI general-purpose reception signal (SPI_COMM_SIG = FFH)). This is because the input port of the switch is allocated for 3 bytes and the same amount of transmission data is required. A set of 4 bytes of data, 1 byte of load signal and 3 bytes of dummy data. In the present embodiment, the 8th bit of the load data is set to "0", but since the load data is discarded without being taken in as described later, the 8th bit is not limited to the 8th bit, for example, the 1st bit. May be set to "0". Further, instead of outputting the load signal by serial communication, the load signal may be output from the input / output port.

In the case of the configuration to be transmitted as load data by serial communication, the wiring pattern for outputting the load signal rather than the case of outputting the load signal from the input / output port, the configuration for noise removal, the hardware such as the arrangement of the input / output ports, etc. It is possible to reduce the cost on the wear (circuit) and the cost on the software such as the processing of the program for turning on / off the load signal. On the other hand, when the load signal is output from the input / output port, the process of transmitting the load data is not required, and it is not necessary to discard the data captured at the timing of the load data without transmitting the load data. The process can be simplified. When data is output by SPI communication, "0" data (LOW level signal) may be output as the SPITX signal. In that case, the input signal is sent to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. However, since the transmission buffer of the A3 channel is empty, SPI communication on the A3 channel is not started, so the data was taken into the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 at this timing. The signal is updated when the load signal is output in the input process, and is eventually discarded.

In the SPI communication of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game from proceeding due to erroneous data due to the influence of noise or the like, the signals input from the switch or the like are read out twice, and when they match, normal communication is performed. Communication accuracy is improved by judging that it is a thing. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 2 sets (8 bytes in total) of 1 byte load signal and 3 bytes of dummy transmission data for a total of 4 bytes are transmitted, and the received data for 2 sets are compared. To determine if communication was successful. Since the 1st and 5th bytes of the transmission data are used as load signals, they are not captured as input signals at the time of transmission, and the input data becomes invalid data. In addition, communication is performed when the input signals captured when transmitting the transmission data of the 2nd byte, the 6th byte, the 3rd byte, the 7th byte, the 4th byte, and the 8th byte correspond to each other, and the corresponding input signals match, respectively. (Read twice) Create edge data as success and control the game.

When the SPI input time setting data is set in the HL register, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) by the INVD instruction. As a result, the transmission data for 8 bytes defined in the SPI input setting data is set in the communication buffer of the A3 channel, and then the enable of all slaves used for communication of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to 1. By setting to, 8 bytes of dummy data stored in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel are transmitted.

If you want to start communication only for a specific slave, such as communicating only with the input slave 4, individual processing and setting data are required, but communication should be started for all slaves. By configuring it, it is possible to standardize processing and data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the monitoring time until the SPI communication is completed (step P6002). If the communication is not completed by the set start time, it is determined that the communication has failed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not communication is in progress (communication is continuing) (step P6003). Specifically, first, the value set in the control register 2 (SPICNA1; SPI communication A control register 1; see FIG. 339 (B)) for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is stored in the A register. Then, the enable bit is referred to from the value stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not communication is in progress. If communication is in progress (the result of step P6003 is "YES"), the system waits until the communication is completed or the monitoring time elapses (step S6004).

When the monitoring time elapses while the A3 channel is in communication (the result of step P6004 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 sets the initialization of the communication circuit (step P6005). Further, instead of the input data, the communication abnormality data is set in a predetermined register described later (step P6006). After that, by executing the processing after step P6008, it is controlled so that the edge data in which the signal changes from OFF to ON (the switch is not determined to be ON) is not created.

Here, the initialization setting of step P6005 will be described. FIG. 345 is an example of the program code of the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) for initializing the communication circuit of the SPI communication of the present embodiment. As the SPI restart setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, and then setting data for initializing the communication circuit is defined. First, by setting "00000001B" in the control register 1 (SPICNA0) for SPI transmission / reception (CHA), "1" is set in SPRSTA, and the initialization of the communication circuit is executed. The set value of the control register 1 for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is as described with reference to FIG. 337. Further, the bit shift setting of the slave 1, the slave 3 and the slave 4 is set to "1" (LSB first), and the operation mode is set to "0" (mode 0). Further, the bollets of the slave 1 (_SPIPSA0), the slave 2 (_SPIPSA1) and the slave 4 (_SPIPSA3) are set. Since the slave 3 (A2 channel) is unused, it is not set in particular.

The "communication abnormality data" set in step P6006 is "FFH" (when the input signal is OFF) so that the edge data is not set when creating the edge data that changes from OFF to ON in the process of step P6008. The same value as the value of) is set. In the present embodiment, since it is determined to be ON when all the signals are Low, the communication abnormality data is the same "FFH" so as to be the case of High. Therefore, for example, if it is determined to be ON when the input signal is High, the communication abnormality data to be set is "00H" instead of "FFH".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 is not in communication (when the communication of dummy data is completed) (the result of step P6003 is "NO"), the input data captured together with the transmission of the dummy data is input from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. It is taken in as input data and set in a predetermined register (step P6007). Explaining the process of step P6007 in detail, as described above, the data is fetched by 8 bytes ((load data + dummy data x 3) x 2 times = 8 bytes) from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. To do. First, the data of the first byte is fetched, but the fetched data is discarded because of the invalid data fetched at the same time as the transmission of the load data, and the captured data of the second byte and the data of the third byte are each pair register (2). It is temporarily stored in the WA register, which can be used as a register for bytes), and then moved to the BC register. Furthermore, the data of the 4th to 6th bytes is taken in. As described above, the data in the 5th byte is discarded due to the invalid data captured when the load data is transmitted, and the captured data in the 4th byte and the data in the 6th byte are temporarily stored in the WA register, respectively, and further. Move to DE register. Finally, the captured data of the 7th byte and the data of the 8th byte are stored in the WA register, respectively.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 creates edge data from the input data stored in a predetermined register (step P6008). In the process of step P6008, edge data is created based on the data captured in each register regardless of whether or not the communication is completed normally. This is because when a communication abnormality occurs, "communication abnormality data" is set in a predetermined register in the process of step P6006, so that the edge data from which the input data is taken in (changes from OFF to ON) is not created. .. As a result, even if the communication is abnormal, the edge data is created by the same processing as when the communication is normal, and the control structure of the program can be simplified.

To specifically explain the process of step P6008, first, the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged, and the start address of the SPI switch input information data is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, three types of SPI switch input information data 1, SPI switch input information data 2, and SPI switch input information data 3 are defined, and a specific configuration is shown in FIG. 346.

FIG. 346 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data of the present embodiment. The SPI switch input information data is composed of adjustment data, mask data, and level area address.

The adjustment data is defined by a bit string for one byte, and is data for adjusting the input data. The adjustment data is intended to be 1 when the captured input signal is ON. In FIG. 346, since the adjustment data is “00h”, when the captured value is “1”, it is set to ON and the switch level data becomes “1”. On the other hand, when it is "0", it is set to OFF and the level data of the switch becomes "0".

Like the adjustment data, the mask data is defined by a bit string for one byte, and is data for specifying the data to be compared as needed. By configuring the mask data with the bit used as the input signal as "1" and the unused bit as "0", even if the unused input bit is erroneously turned ON ("1"), it is turned off by the mask data. It can be set to (“0”).

The level area address is the address of the area for storing the level data created from the input data. Since the edge data is stored after the level data is stored, the area for storing the edge data is continuous with the area for storing the level data, so that the edge data is included in the SPI switch input information data. The address to store is not set. Further, the area for storing the level data and the edge data has the same configuration. If the area for storing level data and the area for storing edge data are not stored in a continuous area, the area for storing edge data may be set (held). In this case, if the upper byte of the address of the area that stores the level data and the area that stores the edge data is fixed (common), it is better than holding the address of each area as it is by setting only the lower byte of the address. The data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 347 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the area for storing the level data and the edge data of the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 347, the level area address of the SPI switch input information data 1 is “0006h”, the first bit (BIT0) is the start port SW (switch) 1, and the second bit (BIT1) is the start port SW2, 3. The bit (BIT2) is the large winning opening SW1, the 4th bit (BIT3) is the large winning opening SW2, the 5th bit (BIT4) is the large winning opening SW3, and the 6th bit (BIT5) is the normal winning opening SW1, the 7th bit. (BIT6) is the normal winning opening SW2, and the 8th bit (BIT7) is the normal winning opening SW3. The area (edge area address) for storing the edge data corresponding to the SPI switch input information data 1 is "0007h", which is a continuous area with the area for storing the level data. With this configuration, it is not necessary to redefine the area for storing edge data, so it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and data, and it is sufficient to read a continuous area when reading data. Processing efficiency can be improved while simplifying.

Here, it returns to the description of the process of step P6008 of FIG. 342 (FIG. 343). After setting the SPI switch input information data in the HL register, the input data is checked and the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) for creating the level data and the edge data is executed. The details of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) will be described with reference to FIGS. 348 and 349.

FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of the present embodiment. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 348.

When the SPI2 reading process is started, the main control MPU 1311 saves the value of the DE register in the stack area because the DE register may be used in the subsequent process (step P6101). Next, the level area address is specified from the address of the SPI switch input information data stored in the HL register that stores the level data, and is stored in the index register (step P6102). After the level data and the edge data are created by the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) described later, the data created based on the address stored in the index register is stored. Further, after the processing of step P6102, the value of the HL register is subtracted and adjusted for the subsequent processing. The level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) is also called to create edge data of a general-purpose IO switch (input signal from a parallel port) that does not depend on SPI communication in addition to input by SPI communication. At this time, since the switch input information data for inputting the signal from the general-purpose IO switch is larger than that for SPI communication, the address of the switch input information data is adjusted by subtracting the value of the HL register (“DEC HL”). is doing. The data not included in the switch input information data for SPI communication is, for example, the number of times the data is read or the address of the input port.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the input data read twice match (whether the data to be compared matches) (step S6103). The data to be compared is stored in the W register and the A register, and is compared by the CP instruction. As described above, immediately after the input data is fetched from the communication buffer, the input data fetched second, third, fourth, sixth, seventh, and eighth are the B, C, D, E, W, and A registers (predetermined). However, since the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged before the first SPI double reading process is executed, the 4th fetched data and the 8th fetched data are stored. Will be compared. After that, when the SPI double reading process is executed, the target data is exchanged as necessary by exchanging the value of the register in which the data to be compared is stored in the caller's process (switch input process). It is possible to execute the process without being aware of the number of bytes of the data, and the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) can be a highly versatile process.

When the input data read twice does not match (the result of step P6103 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 stores "00H" as edge data in the edge data area (step P6105). Further, the saved DE register is returned from the stack area (step P6106), and this process is terminated.

If the input data read twice match (the result of step P6103 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS instruction (step P6104). Create level data and edge data corresponding to the input data. The level edge data creation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 350 and 351.

FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the level edge data creation process of the present embodiment. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of a program code of the level edge data creation process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 350.

The main control MPU 1311 first creates level data from the input data based on the adjustment data and the mask data included in the switch input information table (step P6201). Specifically, for the input data stored in the A register, the value of each bit is adjusted so that the input signal captured based on the adjustment data is "1" when it is ON and "0" when it is OFF. .. Further, the level data is created so that the bits other than the bits used as the input signal by the mask data are not set to ON (“1”). Further, the calculated level data is saved in the E register.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the level data and the XOR value (intermediate data) at the time of the previous interrupt (step P6203). As a result, 1 is set only in the case of the ON or OFF edge. Next, the main control MPU 1311 stores (updates) the current level data in the level data area (address stored in the index register) (step P6204). Further, the AND value between the intermediate data (value of the A register) and the level data created by this interrupt is calculated, and the edge data is created (step P6205). At this time, "1" is stored if it is an ON edge, and 0 is stored in other cases. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 stores the edge data stored in the A register in the edge data area (area continuous with the level data area) (step P6206).

After creating the level data and the edge data, the main control MPU 1311 returns the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106), and ends this process.

Here, the process returns to the switch input process of FIG. 342 (FIG. 343), and the processes after step P6008 will be described. When the creation and storage of the level data and the edge data of the first input data are completed, the main control MPU 1311 exchanges the values of the C register and the E register, and stores the value of the DE register in the WA register. By exchanging the values of the C register and the E register, the DE register stores the 7th captured input data and the 3rd captured input data, and by storing this in the WA register. The level data and edge data of the input data are created by comparing the input data captured in the seventh and the input data captured in the third. Subsequent processing is the same as the first procedure of processing the input data captured in the fourth and the input data captured in the eighth. Furthermore, the second captured input data and the sixth captured input data are stored in the BC address, which are stored in the WA register and processed in the same manner to process 3 bytes of input data. Completed and the capture of the signal input from the serial port is completed.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the data input from the parallel port, calls the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS instruction, and creates the edge data of the input signal captured by the parallel port (step P6009). This process ends.

[21-4-3. Procedure for receiving input signals by SPI communication (time chart)]
The procedure for receiving an input signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the flowchart and the program code. Subsequently, the process of receiving the input signal by SPI communication will be described in chronological order with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 352 and 353.

FIG. 352 is a time chart showing the process from the start of the switch input process of the present embodiment to the completion of data transmission by SPI communication in chronological order. FIG. 353 is a time chart showing the process from the completion of data transmission by SPI communication to the start of the switch input process by the next timer interrupt in the switch input process of the present embodiment in chronological order.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 is executed. As described above, the timer interrupt interval (CTC setting) is set at the time of initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, and can be set to an arbitrary value such as "0000h" to "FFFFh", as well as a fixed value (1ms, 1ms,). 2ms, 4ms, 1,489ms) can be set. Further, the CTC can set an arbitrary fixed value, and among the arbitrary fixed values, the first setting, the second setting, and the third setting are set so as to have a multiple relationship, and the fourth setting is the first to the first setting. It has a function that allows settings that are not related to multiples of the three settings. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms by setting the third set value. A timer interrupt may be generated at any of the first set value, the second set value, and the fourth set value without being limited to the third set value. The cycle for sampling by the timer interrupt (input signal capture). , Output signal output, timekeeping update reference time, random number update cycle, etc.) are set to be appropriate values as the specifications of the game machine. In particular, sampling of input signal capture is important, and the timer interrupt cycle is set according to the pulse width at which the ON signal is output when the switch detects the passage of the game ball. When the switch detects the passage of the game ball, the pulse width changes according to the falling speed, and the faster the falling speed, the shorter the pulse width. Therefore, the shorter the pulse width (the faster the falling speed), the shorter the sampling period needs to be. If the sampling cycle is too short, the processing cannot be completed in one timer interrupt cycle. Therefore, the timer interrupt cycle is set according to the processing amount and the shortest pulse width from the switch.

When the switch input process is started, first, 8-byte dummy transmission data is set in the communication buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel by the SPI input time setting data (SPI_SWRX_B; FIG. 344) (step P6001). .. As described above, the transmission data is the load signal for latching (“FEH”; _SPI_LOAD_SIG) at the 1st and 5th bytes, and the dummy data (“FFH”; _SPI_COMM_SIG) at the 2nd to 4th bytes and the 6th to 8th bytes. ) Is set. The value of the dummy data is not limited to "FFH" and may be any value.

At the start of SPI communication, the enable terminal (SPECNB3) is updated from OFF (“0”) to ON (“1”), and a clock signal is output from the clock terminal (SPICK) at predetermined intervals. Then, a load signal is output from the transmission terminal (SPITX) of the main control MPU 1311. At this time, since the corresponding input data does not exist in the load signal and is ignored by the receiving side, the state of the receiving terminal (SPIRX) is undefined.

When the load signal is received, it changes from ON (“1”) to OFF (“0”) at the signal of the 8th clock, and this changed signal is input to the LOAD terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341. The input signal for bytes is latched by the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, and the main control MPU 1311 receives the input data from the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 sequentially from the receiving terminal SPIRX as a serial signal. Specifically, the input data of the first byte is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341c at the time of data transmission of the second byte of the transmission data. Subsequently, the input data of the second byte is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341b at the time of data transmission of the third byte of the transmission data, and finally the parallel / serial conversion circuits 1341a to 3 are received at the time of data transmission of the fourth byte of the transmission data. Receives the input data of the byte. Then, the data for reading (checking) twice (second time) is received. Similar to the first data reception, when the load signal is output first, the input signal for 3 bytes is latched again in the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, and then the input data for the 4th to 6th bytes is 6 to 8 bytes. The data is sequentially received from the reception terminal (SPIRX) according to the transmission timing of the transmission data of the eye, and then the transmission of the data is terminated. At this time, the reception status of the A3 channel is set to with reception (“1”), and the enable (SPECNB3) of the slave 4 of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to end communication (“1”) during communication (“1”). It is updated to "0").

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the next data, it confirms that the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPECNBA_PB) has reached the end of communication (“0”), and starts reading the input data from the communication buffer (SPIBFA3). (Step P6007 or later). At this time, the monitoring time is set, and if it cannot be confirmed that the communication is completed within the monitoring time, the SPI communication circuit is initialized (steps P6002 to P6005). The contents of the communication buffer are designed so that the read data is cleared in order each time the data is read, and the buffer becomes empty when the reading of all the data is completed. After that, the setting of dummy data in the communication buffer and the reception of input data are repeated until the next timer interrupt processing is started. When the next timer interrupt process is started, the switch input process is executed from the beginning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the wiring of data on the main control board 1310 by serial communication (SPI communication), and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in board design. Further, by adopting SPI communication, the number of wirings is larger than that of I2C communication, but the communication speed can be increased.

In the present embodiment, electronic components are managed by dedicating slaves (parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, etc.) controlled by the master (main control MPU 1311) to reception (input) or transmission (output). It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging electronic components. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring distance between electronic components, and it is possible to eliminate the effects of noise and stabilize communication, such as making it easier to separate the wiring that outputs the clock signal from the wiring that sends and receives data. can.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 enables synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication as serial communication, and has a plurality of channels for synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication. The communication format of asynchronous serial communication is 8 bits. In asynchronous serial communication, each channel is fixed to either reception or transmission, and each channel is provided with a storage means (communication buffer) capable of storing communication data. Multiple types of communication buffer capacities can be defined. For example, among the communication buffers, the one with the maximum size (for example, 512 bytes) for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510, which has a large capacity of data to be transmitted, is used. do. On the other hand, a small size (for example, 128 bytes) may be used for sending commands to the payout control board, and a buffer that can be used for general purposes may be prepared. By performing asynchronous communication, it is possible to send and receive data in parallel with other processing, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the entire processing.

[22. Switch-related control]
The serial communication function (SPI communication) for inputting / outputting signals to / from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. As described above, a signal is input to the main control board 1310 by a switch or a sensor for detecting the winning of the game ball. The input data (signal) is taken in by the switch input process (step P102) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329). Further, if the game is playable, various processes based on the input signal are executed in the switch-related control process (step 01 TKS0010; FIG. 357) included in the game enable time process (step P108; FIG. 354).

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, detection signals (detection signals) by various switches and sensors are input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 outputs commands to various control boards (for example, peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951 and the like) based on the input signal, and controls drive bodies such as motors and solenoids and light emitters such as LEDs. To do. As described above, the input signals include many types of signals, such as those related to the progress of the game and those for detecting fraud or abnormality. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the process corresponding to each signal, the program for controlling the game may be complicated or the program capacity may be increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine is provided that enables control corresponding to an input signal to be executed by a general-purpose procedure by forming data related to input signal control processing into a specific structure. This makes it possible to simplify the game control, suppress the increase in the program capacity, and improve the development efficiency of the game machine.

Hereinafter, a configuration for storing necessary data for switch-related control processing that performs processing based on signals and a procedure for controlling a game using these data will be described.

[22-1. Processing when game is possible]
First, before explaining the switch-related control process, the game-enabled time process for calling the switch-related control process will be described. As described above, the game-enabled time process is a process in which a normal game is executed in a state in which the normal game can proceed after the game machine is started. Specifically, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329), the game is executed when the game is available and there is no game stop factor (step P108). Hereinafter, an outline of the procedure for processing when a game is possible will be described.

FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing a procedure of game enable time processing executed by the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. FIG. 355 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the game enable time processing of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 354.

When the game-enabled processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the switch-related control processing (step 01 TKS0010). In the switch-related control process, data is created based on the signals input from various switches and sensors provided in the game machine, and the process corresponding to the input signal is executed. Details will be described with reference to the figures after FIG. 357.

After the switch-related control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the probability variation region passage determination process (step 01 TKS0020). In the probability change area passage determination process, when the timer set in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS0080) is valid, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the probability change area, and the determination result is determined. It is a process to change the probability state. The valid timer is set in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS0080) and updated by the next interrupt. However, if this process is executed during the execution of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, the interrupt is interrupted. Since it is determined that the timer interrupt processing has passed by the switch input in, it is called at the start of the timer interrupt processing (before the execution of the special symbol / special electric accessory control processing).

After the probabilistic region passage determination process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step 01 TKS0030). In the timer update process, various timers required for the progress of the game are updated. These timers include a 1-byte timer and a 2-byte timer depending on the time to be measured.

After the timer update process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step 01 TKS0040). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated based on the read input information. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. In addition, processing such as confirmation of the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is executed.

After the prize ball control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step 01 TKS0050). In the frame command reception process, the received command is stored as information for transmission to the payout control board 951 or the peripheral control board 1510, or a command is generated.

After the frame command reception process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step 01 TKS0060). In the fraud detection process, an abnormal state such as a prize ball is confirmed. For example, a large winning opening winning abnormality detection process, a magnetic detection abnormality detection process, a random number abnormality detection process, an ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality detection process, and the like are included.

After the fraud detection process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the performance display monitor process (step 01 TKS0070). The performance display monitor process is a process for displaying various information. As described above, the process directly related to the game control is not executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor process is stored outside the used area, and can be executed independently of the game control process by the INVI command.

After the performance display monitor process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS0080). In the special symbol / electric accessory control process, after each start port passing process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol / electric accessory operation number including the large winning opening opening process is called. After the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS090). The normal symbol / normal electric accessory control process performs a process such as drawing a lottery as to whether or not to open the second starting port 2004 when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003.

After the normal symbol / normal electric accessory control process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the solenoid drive process (step 01 TKS0100). In the solenoid drive process, an electric drive source such as a solenoid is driven based on the drive data. In order to update the index register (IY register) in the process of executing the solenoid drive process, the index register is saved in the stack area before the execution of the solenoid drive process, and is returned from the stack area after the end.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step 01 TKS0110), and outputs the output information set in each process from the output terminals of the various output ports. After that, the game-enabled processing is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing is restored while maintaining the interrupt state.

[22-2. Overview of switch-related control processing]
Next, an outline of the switch-related control process will be described. Some of the input signals among the signals input from various switches are stored as history monitoring switch data in chronological order. The history monitoring switch data includes signals for a predetermined number of times from the last input signal, and is configured to discard the oldest signal when a new signal is input. The main control MPU 1311 executes a predetermined process based on the history monitoring switch data. Some of these input signals include, for example, signals input from a contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and a launch stop switch (launch stop button).

Before explaining the switch-related control process, first, an outline of a configuration for receiving the input of signals output from various switches will be described, and then, a basic procedure of the switch-related control process will be described. After that, the detailed procedure of the switch-related control process and the structure for storing the data to be used will be described.

[22-2-1. Configuration for performing control based on input signals]
A configuration will be described in which signals output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509 and the launch stop switch (launch stop button, stop button) are input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311. FIG. 356 is an example of a circuit diagram excerpted from the configuration of the gaming machine of the present embodiment until the signal output from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) is input to the main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows.

The contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) are included in the handle unit 500 provided in the main body frame 4. The contact detection sensor 509 is a sensor that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and the game ball can be launched when the handle lever 504 is touched. The launch stop switch (launch stop button, stop button) detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signals from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) and the launch stop switch (launch stop button) are input to the launch control input circuit included in the payout control board 951 and then input to the launch timing control circuit. The signal input to the firing timing control circuit is input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 via the connector 13104 of the main control board 1310.

[22-2-2. Outline of switch-related control processing procedure]
Subsequently, the outline of the procedure of the switch-related control process will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch-related control process of the present embodiment.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires a signal level from an area (input level data area) in which an input signal is stored, and executes a history monitoring switch data creation process for creating / updating history monitoring switch data (step 01 TKS0110). ). As described above, the history monitoring switch data is data in which the values of the signals input to the main control MPU 1311 are held for a predetermined number of minutes in chronological order. For example, when the history monitoring switch data is 1 byte (= 8 bits), the value of the input signal for 8 times is stored. The details of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 358. The target for creating the history monitoring switch data includes the door opening information and the proximity switch error signal in addition to the touch sensor signal and the firing stop switch described above.

After executing the history monitoring switch data creation process, the main control MPU 1311 executes a disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process (step 01 TKS0120). The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality determination process acquires a proximity switch error signal from the history monitor switch data created in the history monitor switch data creation process, and determines whether or not an error has occurred. If an error occurs, send a disconnection / short-circuit error command.

After executing the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality determination process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the non-operating large winning opening prize ball prohibition process (step 01 TKS0130). The non-operating large winning opening prize ball prohibition process determines whether or not the winning to the large winning opening is valid, and if it is valid, the prize ball determination data is stored in the prize ball determination area. Further, if the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of large winning openings, the determination is made for all the large winning openings.

After executing the non-operating large winning opening prize ball prohibition process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01 TKS0140). In the switch history command transmission determination process, a command is generated based on the history monitor switch data created in the history monitor switch data creation process. For example, the history monitoring switch data is referred to, and a command is transmitted when the signal value is determined to be ON.

In the present embodiment, a set (series) of information for acquiring a signal to be determined (information for specifying an area in which an input signal value is stored), command information, and information for determining an input signal. By structuring and defining it as the data of, it is possible to process the determination of the input signal and the generation of the command for general purposes. The structure and specific examples of the data for executing the switch history command transmission determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. Further, a detailed procedure of the switch history command transmission determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368.

After executing the switch history command transmission determination process, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process including the switch pass command transmission process and the safe switch abnormality determination process. The switch passage command transmission process generates a command for determining the winning of the winning opening. The procedure for generating a command can be executed by a common process regardless of the winning opening. In addition, the safe switch abnormality judgment process counts the number of winnings according to the type of winning opening, or counts the number of safe balls (safe judgment count value) based on the presence or absence of prize balls, and thus the number of winnings (safe). It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the number of balls).

In the switch pass command transmission / safe switch abnormality judgment process, information for identifying the winning opening to be judged, command information, count information for counting the number of safe balls, etc. are structured and defined as a set of data. By doing so, it is possible to perform common processing regardless of the type of winning opening. The structure and specific examples of data for executing the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368. Further, a detailed procedure of the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 369 to 372.

The outline of the switch-related control process has been described above. Subsequently, a detailed procedure and a data structure of each process constituting the switch-related control process will be described.

[22-3. History monitoring switch data creation process]
When the switch-related control process is started, the history monitor switch data creation process that creates history monitor switch data from the received input signal is executed. As described above, in the history monitoring switch data creation process, history monitoring switch data is created based on the history area creation data having a common data structure regardless of the signal type. Hereinafter, a configuration for creating history monitoring switch data will be described. Specifically, first, the data structure of the history area creation data will be described, and then the specific history area creation data will be described. Subsequently, a detailed procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of the history monitoring switch data creation process and the program code.

[22-3-1. Configuration of history area creation data]
FIG. 358 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of the history area creation data of the present embodiment. The history area creation data is information for creating history monitoring switch data corresponding to the input signal. Specifically, for one type of input signal, the lower address of the reference destination (input level data area), the switch bit number, and the lower address of the area for storing the history monitoring switch data (input signal history area) (history management RWM). The lower address) is configured as one set. Since the capacity for storing each data is 1 byte, the history area creation data is sequentially referred to by adding one address at a time from the start address (“XXXXh”) of the history area creation data and referencing it. Can be done.

The lower address of the reference destination (input level data area) is the lower address of the area in which the value of the signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 (history management switch input level data) is stored. Since the upper address is specified in advance, only the lower address needs to be specified, and as a result, the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte. It should be noted that instead of setting only the lower address, it may be set as 2-byte address data including the upper address.

The signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 is stored as 1-byte input level data by aggregating a plurality of predetermined types of signals. In the present embodiment, since the input level data is composed of 1 byte (= 8 bits), a maximum of 8 types of input signals can be assigned to one input level data. The switch bit number is information for specifying which bit of the input level data the signal for which the history monitoring switch data is to be created corresponds to. A value from 0 to 7 is set for the switch bit number. The specific configuration will be described later with reference to FIG. 363.

The signal constituting the input level data is a signal taken in from the input port of the main control MPU 1311 by serial communication or parallel communication. For example, the proximity switch error signal is captured by SPI communication (serial communication). For the proximity switch error signal input to the main control MPU 1311, level data is generated based on the adjustment data and mask data included in the SPI switch input information data (FIG. 346) and stored in "INPUT_LEV3".

As for the area for storing the history monitoring switch data (input signal history area), since the upper address is specified in advance as in the input signal reference destination (input level data area), only the lower address needs to be specified. As a result, the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte.

Subsequently, a specific example of the history area creation data will be described. FIG. 359 is a diagram showing an example of the history area creation data of the present embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a door opening information signal, a touch sensor signal, a launch stop switch, and a proximity switch error signal as input signals for creating history monitoring switch data. Here, the history area creation data for the launch stop switch will be described as an example.

The input signal of the launch stop switch is stored in the input level data "INPUT_LEV4", and the lower address (".LOW.INPUT_LEV4") of the storage location of "INPUT_LEV4" is set as the reference destination (input level data area). Yes (history management switch input level data lower address).

Here, the area in which the input level data is stored will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing a configuration of an area (data area) for storing a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of the present embodiment, which stores a signal for which history monitoring switch data is to be created. Since the frame opening information signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV5" and the address is "000Eh", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Eh". Similarly, since the touch sensor signal and the launch stop switch signal are stored in "INPUT_LEV4" and the address is "000Ch", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Ch". Further, since the proximity switch error signal is stored in "INPUT_LEV3" and the address is "000Ah", the history management switch input level data lower address is "0Ah".

“5” is set for the corresponding switch bit number “_DOOR_SW_BIT” of the frame opening information signal, and the value of the fifth bit of “INPUT_LEV5” is specified. In "INPUT_LEV5", the "frame opening information signal" is stored in the fifth bit, and the other bits are unused.

Similarly, "2" is set for the corresponding switch bit number "_HASSYA_TCH_BIT" of the touch sensor signal, and the value of the second bit of "INPUT_LEV4" is specified. "INPUT_LEV4" is a "setting key switch" in the 0th bit, a "payer ACK input signal" in the 1st bit, a "touch sensor signal" in the 2nd bit, a "launch stop switch signal" in the 3rd bit, and 4 bits. The "main RWM erase / setting change signal" is stored in the eyes, and the 5 to 7 bits are unused. Further, "3" is set for the corresponding switch bit number "_HASSYA_STP_BIT" of the launch stop switch signal, and the value of the third bit of "INPUT_LEV4" is specified.

Further, "6" is set for the corresponding switch bit number "_SW_ERR1_BIT" of the proximity switch error signal, and the value of the sixth bit of "INPUT_LEV3" is specified. In "INPUT_LEV3", a "magnetic detection switch" is stored in the 4th bit, a "proximity switch error signal" is stored in the 6th bit, and the other bits are unused.

As described above, the input of the frame opening information signal can be specified by the history management switch input level data lower address and the corresponding switch bit number.

The explanation returns to the explanation of the history area creation data of FIG. 359. The address of the area (launch stop switch signal history area “HS_STP_HIST”) in which the history monitoring switch data of the launch stop switch is stored is, for example, “002Ch”. At this time, as the lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the area (input signal history area) for storing the history monitoring switch data, the lower address (“.LOW.HS_STP_HIST”) of the launch stop switch signal history area is “2Ch”. "Is set.

At the end of the area where the history area creation data is defined, the number of history monitoring switches (“_HIST_SW_CNT”), which is the number of switches targeted for the history area creation data, is defined. Specifically, it is a value obtained by dividing the number of bytes from the address of the start area of the history area creation data to the address where the number of history monitoring switches is stored by 3. Since the history area creation data is composed of three types of 1-byte data per switch, it is possible to define the data without directly storing the numerical values. By defining in this way, even if the number of switches to be monitored increases or decreases, it is possible to deal with it without changing the program, and it is possible to reduce the possibility of program malfunction such as the occurrence of a bug.

In the above-mentioned example, the data for creating the history monitoring switch data for the door opening information signal, the touch sensor signal, the launch stop switch, and the proximity switch error signal has been described, but other signals are not limited to these signals. It may be managed by the history monitoring switch data. For example, the signal from the position sensor of the accessory (driving body) controlled by the main control board 1310 may be managed by the history monitoring switch data, and it may be determined whether or not the accessory has returned to the fixed position. Further, switches and sensors such as gate switches that are determined only by switching ON / OFF of the input signal may be managed by the history monitoring switch data.

[22-3-2. History monitoring switch data creation process procedure]
In the history monitoring switch data creation process, the history monitoring switch data of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is created based on the information defined in the history area creation data. Hereinafter, the procedure of the history monitoring switch data creation process will be described with reference to the history monitoring switch data creation process flowchart and the program code.

FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the history monitoring switch data creation process of the present embodiment. FIG. 362 is an example of the program code of the history monitoring switch data creation process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 361.

When the history monitoring switch data creation process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the start address of the history area creation data (FIG. 359) (step 01 TKS1010). The start address of the history area creation data is set in the HL register. At this time, in the same procedure as the procedure for setting the start address of the SPI input time setting data in the switch input process, the difference value from the start data address of the history area creation data is set in the second operand of the LDT instruction and executed. Originally, the word length instruction is 3 bytes, but the word length can be 2 bytes, which makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the program.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of history monitoring switches (“_HIST_SW_CNT”) as the number of repetitions of the history monitoring switch data creation process (step 01 TKS1020). The number of history monitoring switches is stored in, for example, the B register. When the address setting of the history area creation data and the setting of the number of history monitoring switches are completed and the preparation for creating the history monitoring switch data is completed, the history monitoring switch data for the number of history monitoring switches is created and each switch (input signal). Creates (updates) the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area corresponding to.

The main control MPU 1311 acquires the address of the area (input level data area) in which the input signal for which the history monitoring switch data is to be created is stored (step 01 TKS1030). Specifically, from the value of the history management switch input level data lower address (for example, the value of ".LOW.INPUT_LEV4"), the area in which the input signal is stored (input level data area, specifically "INPUT_LEV4"). Is acquired and stored in a predetermined storage area (for example, DE register).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 creates and updates the history monitoring switch data based on the input level data area specified in the process of step 01 TKS1030.

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the corresponding switch bit number and stores it in a predetermined storage area (for example, A register) (step 01 TKS104). A value in the range of 0 to 7 is set for the corresponding switch bit number.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires an input signal for history monitoring switch data creation target from the bit corresponding to the corresponding switch bit number and stores it in a predetermined storage area (step 01 TKS1050). At this time, the predetermined storage area may be a register or a temporary area allocated to the RAM. Since the signal value is a binary value of ON (“1”) or OFF (“0”), in the present embodiment, among the data of the address indicated by the DE register, the bit information indicated by the A register is carried by CF (carry). Flag) is set. For example, in the case of a door opening information signal, the bit information (5) of "_DOOR_SW_BIT" of "INPUT_LEV5" is acquired, and when the fifth bit of "INPUT_LEV5" is "1", CF is "1" (carry). The flag) is set to “0”, and in the case of “0”, “0” is set to CF (carry flag). In this way, a series of processes from acquiring arbitrary bit information from a specific address and setting the acquired information in the CF (carry flag) can be executed with one instruction. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the program capacity. The specific configuration will be further described with reference to FIG. 363.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets an area (input signal history area) for storing the history monitoring switch data (step 01 TKS1060), and specifies the history monitoring switch data to be updated. Specifically, by the process of step 01 TKS1060, the contents stored in the DE register are updated from the address of the input level data area to the address of the history monitoring switch data (history management RWM address).

The main control MPU 1311 updates the specified history monitoring switch data to be updated based on the value of the newly acquired input signal (step 01 TKS1070). As described above, the history monitoring switch data of the present embodiment is 1 byte (= 8 bits), and the history of the input signal for 8 times can be stored. As a specific process for updating the history monitoring switch data, the history monitoring switch data stored in the input signal history area is shifted left by one bit by the ROLC command, and the value of the input signal acquired in the process of step 01 TKS1050 is performed. Set the value of the carry flag (CF) in which is stored to bit 0. By implementing in this way, it is possible to simplify the program code and suppress an increase in the program capacity. Further, the ROLC instruction is a 2-byte word length instruction, and the word length is shorter than that for calculating the history monitoring switch data before the update, so that the processing can be speeded up.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the processes from step 01 TKS 1030 to step 01 TKS 1070 for all the input signals for which the history monitoring switch data is to be created (step 01 TKS 1080). After the creation of the history monitoring switch data is completed (the result of step 01 TKS1080 is "YES"), this process ends.

With the above configuration, history monitoring switch data can be created by a common procedure regardless of the type of signal, which simplifies game control and reduces the program capacity. ..

[22-3-3. History monitoring switch Data creation flow (summary)]
The procedure of the history monitoring switch data creation process has been described above, but here, the flow of data until the input signal is reflected in the history monitoring switch data will be mainly described. FIG. 363 is a diagram illustrating a process of creating the history monitoring switch data of the present embodiment, and shows a process until the touch sensor signal is reflected in the history monitoring switch data.

The uppermost stage of FIG. 363 shows a timing chart showing changes in the touch sensor signal input from the contact detection sensor (touch sensor) 509, and time elapses from left to right. In the present embodiment, the touch sensor signal input to the input port of the main control MPU 1311 is periodically taken in at predetermined intervals. The predetermined interval (sampling cycle) is the timer interrupt cycle (4 milliseconds). In FIG. 363, the touch sensor signal is captured in the order of “1” → “1” → “1” → “0” → “1” → “1” → “1” → “1”, and a new touch is made. It shows the state in which the sensor signal "1" is captured. The captured touch sensor signal is converted as necessary and stored in BIT2 of the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" (address "000Ch") as shown in FIG. 360.

When the switch-related control process (history monitoring switch data creation process) is executed and the history monitoring switch data of the touch sensor signal is updated, first, the input level data stored in the input level data area "INPUT_LEV4" is managed in history. Acquired as switch input level data. In the state before the update, the history management switch input level data is "0000110", and the corresponding switch bit number corresponding to the touch sensor signal is "2" (FIG. 359), so that the input stored in BIT2 is stored. The signal "1" is acquired and temporarily stored in the carry flag.

As shown in FIG. 362, the program code for acquiring the value of the bit specified for the corresponding switch bit number from the input level area to be referred to can be realized by one instruction of "LD CF, (DE) .A". It is possible. The address of the input level area to be referred to is stored in the DE register, and the value corresponding to the corresponding switch bit number is stored in the A register. The above instruction stores the value acquired from the value stored in the input level area indicated by the DE register based on the value specified in the A register in the carry flag (CF).

Further, the history monitoring switch data is acquired based on the history monitoring switch data storage destination (HS_TCH_HIST) lower address (history management RWM lower address) of the history area creation data of the touch sensor signal. Input signals of the history monitoring switch data are stored in the order of newest from BIT0 to BIT7, and the history monitoring switch data storage destination is "11110111" from the above timing chart.

The update of the history monitoring switch data shifts the values from BIT0 to BIT6 from BIT1 to BIT7. Further, the input signal stored in the carry flag is stored in BIT0. As shown in FIG. 362, the program code for updating the history monitoring switch data can be realized by one instruction of "ROLC (DE)". The ROLC instruction shifts (rotates) the specified value to the left one bit at a time, and stores the value of the carry flag (CF) in BIT0. An SLA instruction (shift instruction) may be used instead of the ROLC instruction. By executing the "ROLC (DE)" instruction, new history monitoring switch data shifted to the left by one bit to the value of the history management RWM address indicated by the DE register is updated.

[22-4. Switch history command transmission judgment processing]
When the non-operating large winning opening prize ball prohibition process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01 TKS0140). As described above, in the switch history command transmission determination process, it is determined whether or not to transmit a command based on the switch history command transmission determination data and the history monitoring switch data created in the history monitoring switch data creation process, and the determination result. Sends the command defined according to.

The determination as to whether or not to send a command is to detect a change in the input signal from the history monitoring switch data, and if the change is detected, it is determined to send the corresponding command. For example, since the history monitoring switch data of the present embodiment stores the history of the input signal for a predetermined number of times (8 times in the present embodiment), the value of the previously input signal and the value of the latest input signal are stored. When is different from, it can be determined that the input signal has changed.

Hereinafter, a configuration for determining command transmission based on the history monitoring switch data will be described. First, the data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data for processing a plurality of types of input signals for general purposes will be described, and then specific switch history command transmission determination data will be described. Subsequently, a detailed procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of the switch history command transmission determination process and the program code.

[22-4-1. Switch history command transmission judgment data configuration]
FIG. 364 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of the switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to determine whether or not to transmit a command based on the input signal by a common process for a plurality of types of input signals, a data structure common to each command to be transmitted is used. Judgment data (command transmission judgment target data) is defined in.

The individual data of the command transmission determination target data is composed of the detection target history monitoring switch data address (lower address), the transmission command value, the detection mask value, and the detection determination value. In addition to this, the number of data (the number of switch input data 1 block data) for one set of switch history command transmission determination data (1 block) is defined, and the number of switch input data 1 block data of this embodiment is 5. Further, the number m of command transmission determination targets, which is the total number of defined switch history command transmission determination data, is defined. The setting order of each data is not limited to this. For example, the command transmission determination target number m may be defined at the beginning of the switch history command transmission determination data, and the order of the individual data of the command transmission determination target data may not be the same as the above-mentioned example.

The detection target history monitoring switch data address is the address of the area in which the history monitoring switch data created by the history monitoring switch data creation process is stored. Since the upper address is specified in advance in the area for storing the monitoring switch data, only the lower address needs to be specified. As a result, the required area (capacity) can be suppressed to 1 byte. The transmission command value is a value corresponding to the command to be transmitted, and is composed of 2 bytes. This is because the packet that sends the command is 2 bytes, and if the packet that sends the command is 3 bytes, it is updated with 3 bytes, and different sizes are set according to the command size for one packet. do.

The detection mask value is a value for extracting data necessary for determining whether or not to send a command from the history monitoring switch data. The bit required to determine whether to send a command is set to "1", and the unused bit is set to "0". The detection determination value is data for determining whether or not to transmit a command created from the transmission command value by comparing with the masked history monitoring switch data.

Subsequently, a specific example of the switch history command transmission determination data will be described. FIG. 365 is a diagram showing an example of switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment. The contact detection sensor (touch sensor, handle sensor) 509 that detects whether the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504 is ON / ON for the target for determining whether to send a command based on the history monitoring switch data. It includes the determination of switching of OFF, the switching of ON / OFF of the firing stop switch, and the determination of switching of opening / closing of the door. First, switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON / OFF switching of the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle lever 504 will be described.

The switch history command transmission determination data relating to the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle lever 504 includes data for detecting the switch from OFF to ON by the contact detection sensor 509 and data for detecting the switch from ON to OFF.

Since the detection target history monitoring switch data address refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON, the same address (“.LOW.HS_TCH_HIST”) is set. ing.

As the transmission command value, the corresponding value is defined for each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and the falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509.

The signal change of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is detected by comparing the history data (signal values) for the latest four times. Therefore, the detection mask value is set to "00001111B" in order to specify the latest 4 bits of data. Since the target bits are the same regardless of whether the detection is switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON, the same value is set.

The change from OFF to ON of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 is determined to be switched when the signal value is switched from OFF to ON and then continuously ON three times. In this case, the detection determination value is "00000011B". Since the first half 4 bits (“0000B”) are masked by the detection mask value, it is determined that the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 has changed from OFF to ON when the latter 4 bits (“0111B”) match. Will be done. Similarly, regarding the change from ON to OFF, the detection determination value is "00001000B" because it is determined that the signal value is switched when the signal value is switched from ON to OFF and then the signal value is continuously OFF three times. The detection determination value is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 365, and for example, it is determined that the detection has changed from ON to OFF when two consecutive ONs are continued and then two consecutive OFFs are continued. You may.

Further, between the switch history command transmission determination data for detecting the switching of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 from OFF to ON and the switch history command transmission determination data for detecting the switching from ON to OFF. Defines the number of switch input data 1 block data (_SW_HIST_1BLOCK). The number of switch input data 1 block data is calculated by setting the difference from the start address to the last address of the switch history command transmission judgment data that detects the switching of the contact detection sensor (handle sensor) 509 from OFF to ON. There is. The number of switch input data 1 block data of this embodiment is 5 (bytes).

Next, the switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON / OFF switching of the firing stop switch of the handle lever 504 will be described. Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data relating to the firing stop switch includes data for detecting switching from OFF to ON and data for detecting switching from ON to OFF.

Since the detection target history monitoring switch data address refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON, the same address (“.LOW.HS_STP_HIST”) is set. ing. As the transmission command value, the corresponding value is defined for each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and the falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the firing stop switch.

Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, the signal change of the firing stop switch is detected by comparing the history data (signal values) for the latest four times. The detection mask value and the detection determination value are the same as those of the contact detection sensor 509, and the same applies to the determination of the signal change.

Finally, the switch history command transmission determination data for determining ON / OFF switching of the door opening information signal will be described. Similar to the contact detection sensor 509, the switch history command transmission determination data related to the door opening information signal includes data for detecting switching from OFF to ON and data for detecting switching from ON to OFF.

Since the detection target history monitoring switch data address refers to the same area regardless of whether the detection is switching from ON to OFF or switching from OFF to ON, the same address (“.LOW.DOOR_SW_HIST”) is set. ing. As the transmission command value, the corresponding value is defined for each of the rising edge (switching from ON to OFF) and the falling edge (switching from ON to OFF) of the door opening information signal.

Unlike the contact detection sensor 509 and the launch stop switch, the signal change of the door opening information signal is detected by comparing the history data (signal values) for the latest two times. That is, it is determined that the signal has changed when a signal different from the immediately preceding signal is received. The detection mask value is set to "00000011B" because the latest 2 bits of data are specified. Further, the detection determination value for determining switching from ON to OFF is "00000001B", and the detection determination value for determining switching from OFF to ON is "00000010B".

The history data to be determined is not limited to the one shown in the figure. For example, the change in the signal of the contact detection sensor 509 may be determined by the history data for two times, and the influence of noise or the like may be taken into consideration. It may be more than once (for example, 8 times). When it is set to 8 times, all bits are fixed and masked, and the signal change of a specific pattern can be detected exactly. Further, when comparing the history data for the latest four times, the lower 4 bits are fixed and masked, but the upper 4 bits may be fixed and masked. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a predetermined time interval until the processing to be executed after the detection of the signal change is started.

As for the signal changes of the contact detection sensor 509, the launch stop switch, and the door open information signal, the switch history command transmission determination data is defined for the change from ON to OFF and the change from OFF to ON, but one of them is used. Switch history command transmission determination data that detects only changes may be defined. For example, in the case of performing notification for a certain period of time, the notification ends after a certain period of time has elapsed regardless of the change in the signal, so that the notification command may be transmitted only when the change from OFF to ON.

Further, at the end of the switch history command transmission determination data, the number of command transmission determination targets is defined. The number of command transmission determination targets is calculated by dividing the difference from the start address of the area in which the switch history command transmission determination data is defined to the address of the last data by the number of switch input data 1 block data. By calculating the number of switch input data 1 block data and the number of command transmission judgment targets from the defined data address, the modification of the program code is minimized even if the data structure or the number of data changes. Can be done.

If the data structure or the number of data does not change, a numerical value may be directly defined in advance at the beginning of the switch history command transmission determination data. Further, the switch history command transmission determination process may be controlled to end when the final data of the switch history command transmission determination data is detected without defining the number of command transmission determination targets.

Further, in the switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment, a signal to be input processed as history information (history monitoring switch data) such as a touch sensor signal is targeted, but the determination is made based on edge information such as a winning signal. It can be applied even if it is a signal. It is also applicable when the winning determination of the starting winning opening (for example, the middle starting opening switch) is targeted. Hereinafter, application examples will be described with reference to the drawings.

FIG. 366 is a diagram showing an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment to a switch that processes an input signal as edge information. The area for storing the input signal of the middle start port switch is BIT0 of the input edge data 1 "INPUT_EDG1" (FIG. 360). Therefore, a lower address of "INPUT_EDG1" ("LOW.INPUT_EDG_1") is set as the address of the area for storing the input signal. At this time, by setting the detection mask value to "00000001B", the input signal of the middle start port switch corresponding to BIT0 becomes the determination target. By setting the detection determination value to "00000001B", the command ("_SID_ON_CM") defined as the transmission command value is transmitted when BIT0 of the input edge data 1 is "1".

With the above configuration, it is possible to send commands not only to the input signals managed as history information (history monitoring switch data) but also to the input signals to be processed as edge information by the same procedure. It is possible to improve the development efficiency and reduce the program capacity by standardizing the above.

[22-4-2. Switch history command transmission judgment processing procedure]
In the switch history command transmission determination process, a signal change is detected from the history monitoring switch data based on the information defined in the switch history command transmission determination data. Hereinafter, the procedure for detecting the change in the signal will be described with reference to the flowchart of the history command transmission determination process and the program code.

FIG. 367 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the history command transmission determination process of the present embodiment. FIG. 368 is an example of the program code of the history command transmission determination process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 367.

When the switch history command transmission determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the start address of the switch history command transmission determination data (FIG. 365) (step 01 TKS2010). The start address of the switch history command transmission determination data is set in the DE register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the number of command transmission determination targets (“_SW_HIST_ALLBLOCK”) as the number of repetitions of the switch history command transmission determination process (step 01 TKS2020). The number of command transmission determination targets is set in the B register. When the setting of the switch history command transmission judgment data address and the setting of the number of command transmission judgment targets are completed, the history monitoring switch data to be detected is acquired and it is determined whether or not to transmit the command.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the history monitoring switch data to be detected (step 01 TKS2030). Specifically, the detection target history monitoring switch data address is acquired from the switch history command transmission determination data, the history monitoring switch data to be detected is specified, and the data is stored in the W register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the transmission command value from the switch history command transmission determination data (step 01 TKS2040). The transmission command value is 2 bytes and is stored in the HL register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the signal value of the switch has changed based on the history monitoring switch data acquired in the process of step 01 TKS 2030 (step 01 TKS 2050). Specifically, first, the acquired history monitoring switch data is masked by the detection mask value (step 01 TKS2050-1). Further, the change in the signal value is determined by comparing with the detection determination value (step 01 TKS 2050-2) (step 01 TKS 2050-3). If the history monitoring switch data after masking and the detection judgment value match, it is judged that the signal value has changed.

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the signal value has changed (the result of step 01 TKS 2050 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a command storage process for the transmission command value acquired in the process of step 01 TKS 2040 and stored in the HL register. By doing so, it is stored in the transmission buffer (step 01 TKS2060).

If the main control MPU 1311 determines that the signal value has not changed (the result of step 01 TKS 2050 is "NO"), or after executing the command storage process (step 01 TKS 2060), has all the determination of the target command been completed? It is determined whether or not (step 01 TKS2070). When the judgment for all commands is completed, the history command transmission judgment processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, not only the ON / OFF change of the signal value but also the switch history command transmission determination data is added or modified by changing the mask value and the detection determination value. It is also possible to detect a specific change pattern just by doing so. For example, if the pattern of signal change that is likely to occur when a fraudulent activity is performed or a failure or abnormality such as a failure occurs, it is sufficient to set a value corresponding to this signal change pattern. It is possible to easily add or delete data simply by registering the data without increasing the program capacity, thereby increasing the possibility of finding a defect in advance.

[22-5. Application example to information stored in internal function register (built-in register)]
In the configuration described above, history monitoring switch data is created for signals input to the main control MPU 1311 from various switches or sensors, and processing such as transmission of commands is performed based on the history monitoring switch data. On the other hand, in the history monitoring switch data creation process and the switch history command transmission determination process of the present embodiment, it is also possible to specify the internal function register of the main control MPU 1311. Hereinafter, means for applying the history monitoring switch data creation process and the switch history command transmission determination process based on the information stored in the internal function register will be described.

[22-5-1. Creation of history monitoring switch data]
FIG. 369 is a diagram showing an example of an internal function register that stores a random number error of the main control MPU 1311 of the present embodiment. In addition to the general-purpose register, the main control MPU 1311 of the present embodiment can be provided with an internal function register that can store the calculation result and the random number value and the error content at the time of random number generation. It has become. FIG. 369 shows an example of an internal function register that stores a random number error, and an address is defined for each register. For example, a random number clock error indicating an error in which an abnormality has occurred in the cycle (clock) for generating a random number is stored in BIT2 of the register “_RDER3”, and “1” is set when the error occurs. Further, the address "111Ah" is set in the register "_RDER3".

Here, the procedure for creating the history monitoring switch data of the random number clock error will be described. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of the history area creation data of the random number clock error stored in the internal function register of the main control MPU 1311 of the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 370, the address “_RDER3” of the internal function register is set as the reference destination address instead of the lower address of the history management switch input level data. Further, since "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" is set for the corresponding switch bit number and the random number clock error is stored in BIT2 of the register "_RDER3", the value of "_RND_CLK_ERR_BIT" is "2". Finally, the lower address of the area where the created history monitoring switch data is stored is set. By defining the history area creation data in this way, it is possible to create history monitoring switch data by processing in the same manner as signals input from various switches and sensors. Further, by executing the switch history command transmission determination process based on the created history monitoring switch data, the corresponding command can be transmitted. If a 2-byte value including the upper address is specified at the time of executing the work area setting process (_WORK_AD_INC_HL; step 01TKS1030), the upper address may be set in the DE register as it is without being complemented. Further, even if the upper address of the internal function register is different from the upper address of the RAM, the corresponding upper address may be complemented by the work area setting process. With the above configuration, it is possible to create history monitoring switch data by common processing, regardless of whether it is a signal input from various switches or sensors or information stored in an internal function register. It becomes. This makes it possible to aggregate programs for creating history monitoring switch data, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

[22-5-2. Command transmission without using history monitoring switch data]
Here, the switch history command transmission determination data for executing the switch history command transmission determination process without using the history monitoring switch data will be described. The procedure for executing the switch history command transmission determination process without using the history monitoring switch data is the same as the procedure for transmitting the command based on the edge information such as the winning signal described above.

FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of applying the switch history command transmission determination data of the present embodiment to the internal function register (random number clock error). The information to be applied is a random number clock error as in the example of creating history monitoring switch data.

Referring to FIG. 371, the internal function register “_RDER3” for storing the random number clock error state is set so as to correspond to the area for storing the history monitoring switch data. Further, by setting the detection mask value to "00000100B", the random number clock error state corresponding to BIT2 becomes the determination target. By setting the detection determination value to "00000100B", the command defined as the transmission command value ("_RND_CLK_ERR_CM") is transmitted when the random number clock error state is "1 (with error)". With this configuration, it is possible to send a command in the same procedure as when history information is created without creating history information (history monitoring switch data).

As described above, the present embodiment can be applied to the information stored in the internal function register, and even if the signal is input from various switches or sensors, the information stored in the internal function register can be used. Even if there is, it is possible to send a command based on the detection mask value and the detection determination value by a common process. As a result, the program for sending the command can be aggregated as in the case of creating the history monitoring switch data, and the program capacity can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to select the history monitoring switch data according to the type of information or command to be determined. For example, when the game is stopped immediately when a random clock is generated, the command is transmitted by directly referring to the register value without referring to the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random clock abnormality (Fig.). (Data structure of 371), and then, if the random clock error continues for a predetermined period, history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random clock abnormality is created, and the history corresponding to the random clock abnormality is created as the switch history command transmission determination data. The monitoring switch data may be used as a reference address, and a command for continuing random random error, a detection mask value (00011111b) and a detection determination value (00011111b) as a predetermined period may be set.

In this way, it is divided into two stages when the bit information of the random number clock abnormality in the built-in register is erroneously determined to be abnormal even though it is not a random number clock abnormality due to the influence of disturbance noise or the like. Assuming that it has continued for a predetermined period of time, insurance is provided.

When issuing a command when the random number clock abnormality is cleared, the history monitoring switch data corresponding to the random number clock abnormality is used as the reference address as the switch history command transmission judgment data for the judgment when the random number clock abnormality is cleared. , The command at the time of canceling the random number abnormality, the detection mask value (for example, "0001111b") and the detection determination value (for example, "00001000b") as a predetermined period may be set.

It should be noted that switching whether or not to create history monitoring switch data according to the application is the same for various switches and sensors. By defining the switch history command transmission judgment data, even if the command transmission is judged based on the history monitoring switch data, the command transmission is judged without creating the history monitoring switch data. However, the switch history command transmission determination process can be made common, the program can be shared, and the program capacity can be reduced.

[22-6. Switch pass command transmission / safe switch error judgment processing]
When the switch history command transmission determination process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process (step 01 TKS0150). As described above, in the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process, when a prize is detected, a command is transmitted and the number of safe balls (safe determination count value) is counted based on the switch passage command data.

The switch pass command data and the switch pass command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process will be described below. First, we explain the data structure of switch passage command data to enable general-purpose processing for winning (signals from switches / sensors that detect winning) of multiple types of winning openings (starting openings). , Specific switch passage command data will be described. Subsequently, a detailed procedure will be described with reference to the flowchart of the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process and the program code.

[22-6-1. Switch pass command data configuration]
FIG. 372 is a diagram illustrating a data structure of switch passage command data of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to process the winning of a plurality of types of winning openings for general purposes, the switch passage command data is defined in a data structure common to each winning opening (switch).

For the switch pass command data, the number of data settings (the number of winning openings (switches) in which the switch pass command data is defined) is first defined. Subsequently, individual data for each winning opening is defined for each input edge. The individual data for each winning opening is composed of the edge data reference information, the command value, and the safe count number. The number of data settings is the number of blocks when the individual data for each winning opening is one block.

The edge data reference destination information stores information indicating the reference destination of the input edge data of the switch / sensor that detects the winning. The edge data reference information includes the identifier of the storage area of the input edge data and the bit information in the input edge data of the referenced switch.

The command value is the value of the command to be transmitted when the winning is detected (when the switch is determined to be ON). The command value is composed of 2 bytes and is stored in the transmission buffer by the command storage process.

The safe count number is defined as a counter corresponding to the winning opening (switch) for which a winning is detected and a value for increasing or decreasing the counter. For example, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening, the safe determination count value (the number of safe balls) is added. On the other hand, if the safe switch (a switch provided at the place where the game ball is collected (safe mouth) after winning a prize in the winning opening with the winning ball) detects the passage of the game ball, the safe judgment count value is subtracted. do. Since the game ball that has passed through the winning opening with the winning ball passes through the safe opening, the safe determination count value is 0 under normal conditions. Therefore, in consideration of measurement error and the like, if the safe judgment count value is larger than the upper limit threshold value (for example, 100) or smaller than the lower limit threshold value (for example, -100), there is a possibility that some abnormality has occurred. Can be determined to be high. When a game ball passes through a winning opening or a gate where no prize ball is generated, a safe count number that does not increase or decrease the safe determination count value is set. Further, the upper limit threshold value and the lower limit threshold value are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and appropriate values are set according to the structure of the gaming machine and the content of the game.

Subsequently, a specific example of the switch passage command data will be described. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of switch passage command data of the present embodiment. For the switch pass command data, the number of data settings is first defined, and then the individual data for each winning opening is defined. As described above, the number of data settings is the total number of individual data for each winning opening, but in the present embodiment, the address of the label indicating the end of the switch passage command data and the individual data for each winning opening are configured. It is calculated based on the amount of data to be used.

Explaining the individual data for each winning opening by taking the middle starting opening (starting opening 1) as an example, the edge data reference destination information is a bit (“_TSHID1_BIT” corresponding to the starting opening 1 of the input edge data 1 (“_SWCM_P1”). ) Is stored. The value indicating the input edge data corresponds to the upper 4 bits, and the bit data corresponding to the start port corresponds to the lower 4 bits. In the present embodiment, a value indicating input edge data (corresponding to "_SWCM_P1") is extracted by performing a predetermined operation on the edge data reference destination information, and the switch address data "is based on the extracted value. Input edge data (for example, input edge data 1 (“INPUT_EDG1”) is specified from “SW_ADD_W” (FIG. 372B).

Here, the configuration of the switch address data “SW_ADD_W” will be described, and the procedure for specifying the input edge data will also be described. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing an example of the switch address data of the present embodiment. The switch address data defines information for specifying input edge data (for example, “_SWCM_P1”) and corresponding input edge data (for example, input edge data 1 (“INPUT_EDG1”)). Referring to FIG. 374, "00h" is set for "_SWCM_P1" and "08h" is set for _SWCM_P2. “_SWCM_P3” and “_SWCM_P4” are reserves for dealing with an increase in the number of target switches.

Next, a procedure for specifying input edge data will be described using a safe switch as an example. The step numbers attached in the following description correspond to the step numbers attached to the program code (process for acquiring the data of the target bit) of FIG. 377.

As a specific procedure, first, the edge data reference destination information is acquired (step 01 TKS3040-3). At this time, the edge data reference destination information is "_SWCM_P2 (08h) + _EX_SAFE_SW_BIT (06h)" and is "0Eh (14)". Next, a predetermined operation is executed on the edge data reference destination information. Specifically, the division is divided by 8 (step 01 TKS3040-4), and the division result (excluding the remainder) is doubled (step 01 TKS3040-5). Further, the obtained value is added to the start address "9138h" of the switch address data stored in the HL register (step 01 TKS3040-6). In the case of a safe switch, the calculation result is "2", so the value of the HL address is "913Ah". With reference to the address "913Ah", the input edge data 2 ("INPUT_EDG2") can be specified.

With the above configuration, the edge data reference destination information can be implemented in 1 byte, and the data capacity can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 375, the edge data reference destination information may be defined separately for the input edge data area and the corresponding bit. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the developer to grasp the reference destination of the edge data from the program code and the readability of the program is improved, while the capacity per individual data is increased by 1 byte and the capacity is increased by the number of data settings. Will increase.

The command value is defined as the value corresponding to the command sent when the edge data reference information is set to ON. The command value consists of 2 bytes. The command value of the middle start port switch is set to the start port 1 command (“_SID1_ON_CM”), and when the edge data reference destination information is set to ON, the start port 1 command is transmitted. On the other hand, the command value of the right grand prize opening count switch is set to "no command" ("_NO_CM"), and even if a game ball wins in the right grand winning opening, the command will not be sent. There is.

In the present embodiment, by making it possible to set "no command" ("_NO_CM") as the command value, it is possible to have a common data structure even when the command is not transmitted at the time of winning. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize processing such as data recall and calculation regardless of the presence or absence of a command at the time of winning determination, and control can be simplified.

Further, by defining "0" in the command value "_NO_CM" indicating that the command is not transmitted, the Z flag is set when the command value is set in the HL register ("LD HL, (DE +)"; step 01 TKS3050). Is set to "1". Thereby, the condition determination and the execution of the processing, specifically, the command transmission determination (“NZ” (true when the Z flag is not “1”, that is, the command value is not “_NO_CM”); step 01 TKS3070). And command transmission (execution of command storage process "COM_SET"; step 01 TKS3080) can be realized with one command ("INV NZ, COMSET"). With the above configuration, the processing related to command transmission at the time of winning is generalized.

The safe count number of the middle start port switch is a value indicating that the prize ball is paid out at the time of winning, so that it is added to the safe judgment count value (addition count when passing through the winning opening; "_INC_SAFE_CNT"; "1 (01h)"). It has been set. Further, as described above, the safe count number of the safe switch is set to a value indicating subtraction from the safe determination count value (subtraction count when passing through the winning opening; "_DEC_SAFE_CNT"; "-1 (FFh)"). There is. Further, when the game ball is ejected from the out port without winning, the safe count number of the out switch is set to a non-addition count (“_NON_SAFE_CNT”; “0 (00h)”) when passing through the switch, and is a safe judgment count. The value is neither added nor subtracted. Further, the update of the safe judgment count value can be implemented by a common instruction because the defined safe count number may be added regardless of whether it is added, subtracted, or not updated. The program structure can be simplified.

[22-6-2. Switch pass command transmission processing procedure]
The switch pass command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process is configured to call the safe switch error determination process in a state where the switch (winning opening) to be processed is specified when the switch pass command transmission process is executed. First, the switch passage command transmission process will be described, and then the safe switch abnormality determination process will be described.

FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch passage command transmission process of the present embodiment. FIG. 377 is an example of the program code of the switch passage command transmission process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 376.

In the switch pass command transmission process, the switch (winning slot) to which the command is to be sent is specified based on the edge data reference information of the switch pass command data, and the specified command is sent when the switch signal value is ON. do.

When the switch passage command transmission / safe switch abnormality determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires the current safe determination count value (step 01 TKS3010). The safe determination count value is stored in the C register. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch passage command data (FIG. 373) (step 01 TKS3020). The start address of the switch pass command data is set in the DE register. Further, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of data settings (step 01 TKS3030). The number of data settings is stored in the B register. When the process of step 01 TKS3030 is completed, the command transmission determination and the safe switch abnormality determination process for each switch are executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 identifies the switch to be processed and acquires the signal value (target bit) of the identified switch (step 01 TKS3040). Specifically, first, the switch address data table is set. The switch address data table stores data for specifying the input edge data including the target bit, and the address of the input edge data can be acquired. Furthermore, the edge data reference destination information is acquired from the switch passage command data. Finally, the value of the target bit is specified based on the edge data reference destination information and the switch address data table, and the target bit information (“0” or “1”) is stored in a predetermined area (carry flag; CF).

Specifically, the edge data reference destination information acquired from the switch passage command data is set in the A register (step 01 TKS3040-1 to 3), and the operation shown in the program code is performed (step 01TKS3040-4 to 6). As a result, a value indicating the input edge data (for example, “_SWCM_P1”) is extracted. The input edge data address (for example, "INPUT_EDG1") corresponding to the edge data reference destination information is defined in the address obtained by adding the extracted value from the start address of the switch address data table "SW_ADD_W", and the input edge data (for example, "INPUT_EDG1") is defined. The address of the specified input edge data) is specified, and the address of the specified input edge data is stored in the HL register (step 01 TKS3040-7).

In the "LD CF, (HL) .A" instruction, the content specified by the lower 3 bits of the A register is acquired from the value stored in the HL register. The address of the specified input edge data is stored in the HL register, the edge data reference destination information is stored in the A register as described above, and the lower 4 bits of the edge data reference destination information are the start targets to be determined. It is bit data corresponding to the mouth. Since the value of the target bit is in the range of 0 to 7, if the value of the lower 3 bits is specified, the specified bit data is acquired from the input edge data specified by the "LD CF, (HL) .A" command, and CF ( It can be set to the carry flag). With this configuration, it is possible to realize the information for specifying the input edge data and the information for specifying the bit corresponding to the starting port to be determined in one byte in total. Further, when the input edge data and the corresponding bit are specified, a series of processes until the bit information specified from the input edge data is acquired and the acquired information is set in the CF (carry flag) is executed by one instruction. However, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a command value from the switch passage command data (step 01 TKS3050). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the target bit is ON (step 01 TKS3060).

When the value of the target bit is ON (the result of step 01 TKS 3060 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the command storage process unless the command value is no command ("_NO_CM") (step 01 TKS 3080). The command is stored in the send buffer by executing the command storage process. After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the safe switch abnormality determination process (step 01 TKS3090). The safe switch abnormality determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379.

In the present embodiment, the determination of the target command value and the execution of the command storage process are realized by one instruction. In the process of step 01 TKS3050, when a command value is fetched into the HL register by the "LD HL, (DE +)" command, if there is no command to be transmitted, the command value "_NON_CM" is set. The command value "_NON_CM" is "0", and if there is a command to be transmitted, a value other than "0" is set. Therefore, when the command is transmitted, the Z flag is set to "1", and when the command is not transmitted, "0" is set. At this time, the "INV NZ, COM_SET" command is used to determine whether or not to send the command with the Z flag, and when the command is sent, a series of processes to be executed by the command storage process ("COM_SET") is performed. It is realized by the command of. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity without having to execute the determination of whether to send a command and the process corresponding to the determination result (command storage process) by individual instructions.

After executing the safe switch abnormality determination process, or when the value of the target bit is not ON (OFF) (the result of step 01 TKS3060 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 has completed the process for all switches. It is determined whether or not (step 01 TKS3100). If the processing is not completed for all the switches (the result of step 01 TKS 3100 is "NO"), the processing is executed from step 01 TKS 3040 for the next switch. When the processing is completed for all the switches (the result of step 01 TKS3100 is "YES"), this processing is terminated.

[22-5-3. Safe switch error judgment processing procedure]
FIG. 378 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safe switch abnormality determination process of the present embodiment. FIG. 379 is an example of the program code of the safe switch abnormality determination process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 378.

In the safe switch abnormality judgment process, the safe judgment count value is updated for the switch (winning opening) specified based on the edge data reference destination information of the switch pass command data in the switch pass command transmission process, and an illegal prize occurs. Judge an abnormality such as whether or not it is.

When the safe switch abnormality determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first adds the safe count number acquired from the switch passage command data to the safe determination count value stored in the C register (step 01 TKS4010). Subsequently, the updated safe determination count value is stored in the all safe determination count area (step 01 TKS4020).

Three types of safe counts are defined in the present embodiment, and as described above, when 1 is added (“_INC_SAFE_CNT”; “1 (01h)”) and 1 is subtracted (“_DEC_SAFE_CNT”; FFh) ”), there is a case where neither addition nor subtraction is performed (“_NON_SAFE_CNT ”;“ 0 (00h) ”). When 1 is added, a prize ball is generated by winning a prize. The case of subtracting 1 is a case where the game ball is detected by the safe switch as described above. When neither addition nor subtraction is performed, it is the case that a switch (for example, a normal gate) that does not generate a prize ball detects a winning (passing). In addition, the safe judgment count value can be updated by adding the defined safe count number regardless of whether it is added, subtracted, or not updated. Therefore, it is not updated when adding, subtracting, or not. In any case, it can be implemented with a common instruction, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of program development and reduce the capacity.

When the safe determination count value is updated and stored in a predetermined area, it is determined whether or not the safe determination count value is within the normal range (whether or not it is an abnormal value) (step 01 TKS4030). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first compares the safe determination count value stored in the C register with the lower limit threshold value (“_ILG_SAFE_JDG1”) (step 01 TKS4030-1). When the safe determination count value is equal to or greater than the lower limit threshold value (and 0 or less) (the result of step 01 TKS4030 is "NO"), the safe determination count value is normal, and this process ends.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 compares the safe determination count value with the upper limit value when the safe determination count value is equal to or less than the lower limit threshold value, or is equal to or greater than the lower limit threshold value, and is larger than 0 (step 01 TKS4032-2). If the safe determination count value is equal to or less than the upper limit value (and is 0 or more) (the result of step 01 TKS4040 is "YES"), the safe determination count value is normal, and this process is terminated.

The main control MPU 1311 secures the game stop factor number when the safe determination count value is abnormal, that is, when the safe determination count value is less than the lower limit threshold value or larger than the upper limit threshold value (the result of step 01 TKS4030 is "NO"). Set in the game stop setting data when the switch is abnormal (step 01 TKS4040). Further, the safe determination count value is cleared (step 01 TKS4050). To clear the safe determination count value, "00H" is stored in all the safe determination count areas (step 01 TKS4050-1), and the C register is cleared (step 01 TKS4055-2).

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even if the control is different for each winning opening, it is possible to deal with it by common processing, and it is possible to simplify the program code. Become. In addition, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine by additionally modifying the switch passage command data, so that the development efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved.

It should be noted that the program code shown in the drawing stores the values in various registers at the time of processing execution, but these are examples, and the registers for storing the values are not limited to the registers shown in the drawings and are arbitrary. It may be stored in the register of.

In the present specification, the following inventions can be mentioned as typical inventions including the inventions described in the claims.

(1) A gaming machine provided with a gaming control means for controlling the progress of a gaming.
The game control means is
An arithmetic means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
An input signal storage means capable of storing an input signal input to the calculation means, and an input signal storage means.
It is possible to periodically acquire an input signal from the input signal storage means and create input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on the history information creation data defined for each type of the input signal. History information creation method and
A history information storage means capable of storing the input signal history information,
Equipped with
The history information creation data is
The first information indicating the area in which the input signal is stored and
Second information indicating an area for storing input signal history information corresponding to the input signal, and
Including
The history information creating means acquires an input signal from the input signal storage means based on the first information regardless of the type of the input signal, and creates the input signal history information from the acquired input signal. , A gaming machine characterized in that the created input signal history information is stored in the history information storage means based on the second information.

(2) A gaming machine provided with a gaming control means for controlling the progress of a gaming machine.
The game control means is
An arithmetic means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
An input signal storage means capable of storing an input signal input to the calculation means, and an input signal storage means.
It is possible to periodically acquire an input signal from the input signal storage means and create input signal history information in which the input signals are arranged in chronological order based on the history information creation data defined for each type of the input signal. History information creation method and
A history information storage means capable of storing the input signal history information,
Equipped with
The history information creation data is
First information that can identify the input signal storage means indicating the area in which the input signal is stored, and
Second information that can specify the history information storage means indicating an area for storing the input signal history information corresponding to the input signal, and
The third information that specifies the position of the input signal acquired from the input signal storage means specified by the first information, and the third information.
Including
The history information creating means is
An input signal executed from a predetermined cycle and acquired from the input signal storage means specified based on the first information and the third information is specified, and the specified input signal is acquired as input information. The information stored in the history information storage means specified based on the second information is arithmetically processed, and the acquired input information is stored in a predetermined position of the history information storage means.
A gaming machine characterized in that the input signal history information can be created by common processing regardless of the type of the input signal.

In the gaming machines (1) and (2), it is possible to create history information in which signals input by a calculation means (main control MPU1311) from various switches and sensors provided in the gaming machine are arranged in chronological order. .. At this time, even if there is a difference in the types of input signals, a series of processes such as acquisition of input signals, creation and storage of history information can be realized by common processes, so that the program structure can be simplified and the program capacity can be increased. Reduction can be realized.

(3) A gaming machine provided with a gaming control means for controlling the progress of a gaming.
The game control means is
An arithmetic means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
An input information storage means capable of storing a plurality of types of input information input to the calculation means, and an input information storage means.
An input information determination means for determining a pattern of the input information based on the input information determination data corresponding to the input information, and an input information determination means.
Equipped with
The input information determination data is
The first information that can specify the input information storage means indicating the area in which the input information is stored, and
The second information that specifies the range for determining the pattern of the input information, and
The third information for determining the pattern of the input information and
Including
The input information determination means is
The input information is acquired from the input information storage means specified based on the first information, and the input information corresponding to the range specified based on the second information is extracted from the acquired input information. The pattern of the extracted input information is determined based on the third information, and the pattern is determined.
A gaming machine characterized in that a pattern of the input information can be determined by a common process regardless of the type of the input information.

In the gaming machine (3), not only the input information but also, for example, the values extracted periodically and the result of periodically executing the predetermined operation are the information stored in the predetermined storage means in chronological order. Is also applicable. It can also be applied when comparing patterns of combinations of a plurality of related information. According to the gaming machine of (3), it is possible to detect an abnormality at an early stage by determining whether the continuously accumulated change of information conforms to a specific pattern. In addition, since it is possible to identify a pattern in which information changes by common processing, it is possible to simplify game control and reduce the program capacity.

(4) Further provided with a command transmission means capable of transmitting a command for controlling the game.
The input information determination data further includes a fourth information corresponding to a command based on the pattern of the input information.
The command transmitting means is the gaming machine of (3), which transmits a command corresponding to the fourth information based on a determination result of a pattern of the input information.

In the gaming machine of (4), in addition to the configuration of the gaming machine of (3), a command corresponding to a pattern of input information can be transmitted. For example, by detecting a pattern when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to send a command for anomaly notification.

(5) A gaming machine provided with a gaming control means for controlling the progress of a gaming.
The game control means is
An arithmetic means for executing a program for controlling the progress of the game,
A processing information storage means capable of storing a plurality of types of processing information that can be processed by the calculation means, and a processing information storage means.
A processing information determination means for determining a change in the processing information based on the processing information determination data corresponding to the processing information, and a processing information determination means.
Equipped with
The processing information storage means includes an internal storage means provided in the calculation means and an external storage means capable of reading and writing processing information by the calculation means.
The processing information determination data is
The first information that can specify the processing information storage means indicating the area in which the processing information is stored, and
The second information that specifies the range for determining the change in the processing information, and
The third information for determining the change of the processing information and
Including
The processing information determination means is
The processing information is acquired from the processing information storage means specified based on the first information, and processing information corresponding to the range specified based on the second information is extracted from the acquired processing information. A change in the extracted processing information is determined based on the third information, and the change is determined.
A gaming machine characterized in that changes in the extracted processed information can be determined by a common process regardless of the processed information stored in either the internal storage means or the external storage means. ..

The gaming machine of (5) can obtain the same effect as that of the gaming machine of (3), and can specify a pattern in which processing information changes by common processing even if the processing information storage means are different storage means. As a result, the change in information is determined not only for the processing information stored in the general RAM but also for the processing information stored in the built-in register of the arithmetic means such as the main control MPU 1311 by common processing. be able to. Therefore, even if the storage means is changed due to the specification change of the gaming machine, it can be dealt with only by updating the processing information determination data, and the development efficiency of the gaming machine can be improved. Since the storage means hardware that constitutes the sword, it is possible to simplify the game control and reduce the program capacity.

(6) Multiple means of accepting game media that can accept game media,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has accepted the game medium, and
A game medium counting means capable of individually counting the number of game media detected by the game medium detecting means, and a game medium counting means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game medium counting means can count the game medium based on the winning detection data corresponding to the game medium receiving means.
The winning detection data is
The first information indicating the storage location of the detection information of the game medium and
Second information for performing counting based on the detection of the game medium, and
Including
The game medium counting means performs a process of acquiring detection information of the game medium based on the first information by a common process regardless of the game medium receiving means that has received the game medium, and the second information. A gaming machine characterized in that a process of counting the game medium based on the above is performed by a common process regardless of the game medium receiving means that has received the game medium.

The gaming machine (6) is provided with a plurality of gaming medium receiving means (for example, a starting winning opening, a large winning opening, etc.), and the gaming medium is detected and won by a common process for each gaming medium receiving means. It becomes possible to count the number of game media. As a result, it becomes possible to standardize the programs that implement these functions, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity. In addition, it is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications such as an increase or decrease in the number of means for accepting gaming media by updating the winning detection data, which facilitates configuration management of gaming machines and improves development efficiency of gaming machines. Can be improved.

(7) Multiple means of accepting game media that can accept game media,
A game medium detecting means capable of detecting that the game medium receiving means has accepted the game medium, and
Discharged game medium detecting means capable of detecting the game medium discharged from the game medium receiving means, and
A game medium counting means capable of individually counting game media detected by the game medium detecting means or the discharging game medium detecting means, and a game medium counting means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game medium counting means can count the game medium based on the winning detection data.
The winning detection data is
First information that can specify the storage location of the detection information of the game medium by the game medium detecting means or the discharging game medium detecting means, and
Second information for performing counting based on the detection of the game medium, and
Including
The game medium counting means acquires the detection information of the game medium based on the first information, and counts the game medium based on the acquired detection information and the second information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the process of acquiring the detection information of the game medium is a common process regardless of whether the information is the detection information by the game medium detection means or the detection information by the discharge game medium detection means.

In the gaming machine (7), regarding the process of acquiring the detection information of the gaming medium, the detection information by the gaming medium detecting means (for example, the start winning opening switch, the large winning opening switch, etc.) and the discharging gaming medium detecting means (for example, for example). It is possible to perform common processing without distinguishing it from the detection information by the safe port switch). This makes it possible to detect not only a plurality of types of game media detection means but also game media by the discharge game medium detection means by a common process, and the program capacity is reduced by sharing the process including counting and the like. It becomes possible.

(8) The process of counting the game media is a common process regardless of whether the information is detected by the game medium detecting means or the discharged game medium detecting means.
Based on the counting result of the gaming medium detected by the gaming medium detecting means and the counting result of the gaming medium detected by the discharging gaming medium detecting means, the acceptance of the gaming medium by the gaming medium receiving means is normal. The gaming machine of (7) that determines whether or not there is.

The gaming machine of (8) can obtain the same effect as that of the gaming machine of (7), and the counting result of the gaming medium detected by the gaming medium detecting means and the ejection result from the gaming medium detecting means by the discharging gaming medium detecting means. By comparing the counting results of the game media, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the game medium detecting means and the discharging game medium detecting means. Further, it is possible to reduce the program capacity by enabling counting by a common process regardless of the game medium detecting means and the discharging game medium detecting means.

(9) The process of counting the game media is a common process regardless of whether the information is detected by the game medium detecting means or the discharged game medium detecting means.
Each time the game medium is counted by the game medium counting means, it is determined whether or not the game medium is normally accepted by the game medium receiving means based on the counting result of the game medium (7). Gaming machine.

The gaming machine of (9) can obtain the same effect as that of the gaming machine of (7), and can count by a common process regardless of the gaming medium detecting means and the discharging gaming medium detecting means. It is possible to reduce the program capacity. Further, by comparing the counting result of the game medium detected by the game medium detecting means with the counting result of the game medium discharged from the game medium detecting means by the discharging game medium detecting means, the game medium detecting means and the discharging game medium can be compared. Since it is possible to detect an abnormality in the detecting means and determine the abnormality each time the game medium is counted, it is possible to quickly respond when an abnormality occurs.

(10) For the second information, a numerical value of 1, 0 or -1 is set, and the second information is set.
The gaming machine according to (7), wherein the counting of the gaming media is executed by a common command for adding the second information to the number of the gaming media.

The gaming machine of (10) can obtain the same effect as that of the gaming machine of (7), and can increase the variation of counting by making it possible not only to add but also to subtract or not calculate the counting of the gaming medium. Can be done. For example, even for a game medium detecting means without a prize ball such as a normal gate, the number of prize balls is not executed by executing a common command such as adding the value of the second information to the number of prize balls. Can be counted. As a result, the program structure can be simplified and the maintenance efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

[23. Correspondence when disconnecting / reconnecting wiring]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a setting function capable of changing a set value (set value information) that affects the operation ratio (lottery probability) of the conditional device. In the above-mentioned example, the basic operation of the setting function is explained, and further, the control when a power failure occurs while the setting function is being executed is also explained.

Since the setting of the gaming machine affects the gaming value (profit) given to the player in the game, if the setting can be confirmed by the player, the fair game may be hindered. It is natural for a player to want to play a game on a gaming machine that has a setting that is likely to obtain a lot of gaming value (profit), and once the setting is confirmed, the gaming value is obtained. The operating rate of gaming machines with settings that are unlikely to be used will drop significantly. In addition, it is expected that some people will try to execute the setting if it is possible to check or change the setting by cheating (so-called goto act). For example, it is conceivable to try to clear the setting by cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310, or to confirm the setting by the behavior at the time of restarting the gaming machine.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and reconnected, or the power supply is temporarily cut off while the wiring is connected by an illegal method using some unauthorized device. We propose a gaming machine that induces malfunctions of the gaming machine by such things as, and prevents unauthorized confirmation and change of settings.

[23-1. Connection form of various control boards]
FIG. 380 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection form of a connection line that supplies electric power to various substrates that control the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, electric power is supplied from the power supply board 931 to various control boards. Further, power is supplied from the power supply board 931 to each of the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the payout control board 951 by different systems (different wiring). Therefore, even if the power supply between the main control board 1310 and the power supply board 931 is cut off (the wiring related to the power supply is cut off), the power supply to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 is continued. To.

Further, when the power supply from the outside is cut off, the main control board 1310 is supplied with power from a backup power source capable of supplying power for a predetermined time, and the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is stored in the main control board 1310. Retention can be continued. The backup power source is, for example, an electric double layer capacitor (“capacitor”), and may be mounted on the power supply board 931 or may be mounted independently.

Further, various information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312 when the RAM clear switch 954 provided on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 954 is also output to the payout control board 951.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, wiring for supplying the normal power supply to the main control board 1310 and wiring for supplying the backup power supply to the main control board 1310 are separately provided so that the supply of the backup power supply is not cut off together with the normal power supply. There is. As a result, even if the supply of the normal power supply is cut off, the supply of the backup power supply is continued, and various information stored in the main control RAM 1312 is maintained. As another example, when the supply of the normal power supply is cut off, the supply of the backup power supply may also be cut off. In this case, when the wiring connecting the backup power supply and the main control board 1310 is cut off. Is also cut off from the backup power supply. Specifically, a backup power supply is provided on the power supply board 931. The wiring for supplying normal power and the wiring for supplying backup power are integrated, and the wiring between the power supply board 931 and the main control board 1310 is integrated. If the connection is cut off by being physically disconnected or the connector connecting each board is disconnected, the supply of the backup power supply will be cut off as well as the normal power supply.

The main control board 1310 communicates bidirectionally with the payout control board 951. For example, the main control board 1310 transmits various information (game information) related to the game, various commands related to payout, and the like to the payout control board 951. On the other hand, the payout control board 951 transmits to the main control board 1310 a response signal for a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, a payer ACK signal for a prize ball command), various commands related to the state of the gaming machine, and the like. .. Therefore, when only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the payout control board 951 can recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and the error LED display is displayed. An abnormality can be notified by a device or the like.

Further, the main control board 1310 issues various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 via the main control I / O port 1314 to the peripheral control board 1510. Send to. The communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is unidirectional communication from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when only the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot recognize that the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, and the main control board 1310 cannot be recognized. While waiting for the command to be sent from, the ongoing production and screen display will continue.

[23-2. Setting function]
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a setting function, and the setting function will be described again. The setting function includes a setting change function and a setting confirmation function. The setting change function is a function for changing the setting value of the gaming machine, and the setting confirmation function is a function for referring to the setting value.

The setting function (change / confirmation of the set value) is not normally executed during the game, but is executed at the time of starting the game machine (before the start of the game) or by interrupting the game. Further, in order to prevent the set value from being grasped by the player, at least a part of the operation unit necessary for executing the setting function is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, and the operation cannot be performed unless the main body frame 4 is opened. It has become like. The setting function in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is started by performing a predetermined operation on the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954, and the power switch 932.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing an operation example for executing the setting function of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The setting confirmation is started by starting the gaming machine through a setting confirmation operation in which the RAM clear switch 954 is set to "OFF", the setting key 971 is set to "ON", and the power switch 932 is set to "ON". Further, the setting change is started by starting the gaming machine through the setting change operation of setting the RAM clear switch 954 to "ON", the setting key 971 to "ON", and the power switch 932 to "ON".

[23-3. Control when power is turned on]
Subsequently, the control when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the functions related to the setting when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be mainly described, and the processing already described will be omitted.

[23-3-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 382 is a flowchart of the power-on processing of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The power-on processing is the processing that is first executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 first executes the RAM protect permission setting (step 02 TKS0010). An access prohibited area is set in the storage area of the main control RAM 1312, and when the prohibited area is accessed by executing a program during the game, a reset is executed assuming that an abnormality has occurred. Considering the possibility that the power supply may not be stable immediately after the power is turned on, the access prohibition of the main control RAM 1312 is lifted until the initialization of the gaming machine is completed until the gaming is started. The RAM protect permission setting is set so that an arbitrary area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Furthermore, the watchdog timer is cleared and the power failure clear signal is set (after being set to ON, set to OFF).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes a start-up confirmation process when the power is turned on (step 02 TKS0020). In the power-on startup confirmation process, first, the power failure warning signal is read to confirm whether or not a power failure is occurring (main power failure warning signal confirmation process before the power-on wait). Subsequently, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in a predetermined register (power-on wait pre-setting related switch acquisition process). After that, it waits for a predetermined time (wait processing when the power is turned on), reads the power failure warning signal, and confirms again whether or not the power is out (main power failure warning signal confirmation processing before the wait after the power is turned on). If it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the machine waits until the power supply voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes. Finally, it is confirmed whether or not the board (wiring) connected to the main control board is reconnected before the power is cut off. The details of the start-up confirmation process at power-on will be described with reference to FIG. 383.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear determination process (step 02 TKS0030). In the RAM clear determination process, the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of turning on the power is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the contents of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power failure are normally held. For example, it is determined whether the setting information of the gaming machine and the contents of the main control RAM 1312 before the power failure are normally stored. The details of the RAM clear determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 384.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the setting operation determination process (step 02 TKS0040). In the setting operation determination process, the transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the confirmation of the RAM abnormality, the clearing of the main control RAM 1312, and the like are performed as necessary. The details of the setting operation determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 390.

Next, when the setting operation determination process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number setting activation process (step 02 TKS0050). In the random number setting activation process, initial settings such as CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that defines the interrupt timing are executed, and interrupts are permitted. Further, a hardware random number (for example, a winning random number) generation circuit built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the game start determination process (step 02 TKS0060). In the game start determination process, it is determined whether or not the game can be started, a command transmitted when the power is turned on (for example, an operation command when the power is turned on) is set, and initial data when the power is turned on is set. Further, it is set to allow execution of interrupt processing such as a timer interrupt (step 02 TKS0070).

When the execution of the interrupt process is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main control side main process (step 02 TKS0080, step 02 TKS090). In the main processing on the main control side, first, a power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step 02 TKS0080). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process is executed (step 02 TKS090). In the random number update process, random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure warning signal, it executes a power cutoff process (step 02 TKS0200). The power cutoff process executes a process of backing up data to restore the state before the power failure occurred. The specific processing is the same as the processing described with reference to FIG. 188.

[23-3-2. Startup confirmation process when power is turned on]
Subsequently, the start confirmation process at power-on (step 02 TKS0020) will be described. In the power-on startup confirmation process, in addition to confirming the main power failure warning signal when the game machine is turned on and acquiring switch-related input information, the wiring was disconnected / reconnected before the power was cut off. To confirm. In particular, it detects the case where the wiring is disconnected / reconnected so as to interrupt the progress of the game. The disconnection / reconnection (for example, connection with the peripheral control board 1510) of the wiring capable of advancing the game is confirmed by the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process called by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 392).

FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start-up confirmation process when the power is turned on according to the present embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the power-on start confirmation process, it reads the power failure warning signal and executes the power-on wait main power failure warning signal confirmation process (step 02 TKS0110) to confirm whether or not the power is on. Subsequently, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port, and the power-on wait pre-setting related switch acquisition process stored in a predetermined register is executed (step 02 TKS0120).

After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes a power-on wait wait process that waits for a predetermined time (step 02 TKS0130). Further, the main power failure warning signal confirmation process before the wait after the power is turned on to read the power failure warning signal and confirm again whether or not the power is being cut off) is executed (step 02 TKS0140). At this time, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the machine waits until the power supply voltage of the gaming machine stabilizes.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the main control board 1310 is reconnected to another board, a sensor, or the like (step 02 TKS0150). Whether or not the connection is reconnected is determined based on the information stored in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. For example, the determination may be made based on the information at the time of error occurrence due to the failure to receive the response signal from the payout control board 951, or the determination may be made based on the error information such as the proximity switch error. Further, the determination may be made based on the fact that the wiring connection failure flag is set in the backed up game control area.

In the main control MPU 1311, when the wiring connecting the main control board 1310 and other boards, sensors, etc. is disconnected before the power failure and reconnected when the gaming machine is started (the result of step 02 TKS0150 is "YES"). ), Set the wiring reconnection flag (step 02 TKS0160). After setting the wiring reconnection flag, the wiring connection failure flag is released (step 02 TKS0170).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 notifies an invalid setting confirmation error based on the setting of the wiring reconnection flag. As described above, the incorrect setting confirmation error causes the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 to be disconnected and reconnected, so that the illegal power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off / restarted. It indicates the possibility that an illegal setting change operation or setting confirmation operation has been performed to illegally access the inside of the gaming machine and change or confirm the setting value information. Therefore, when an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, it is desirable to stop the functions of various detection sensors, stop the start or continuation of a new game, check the settings, and inspect other game machines for abnormalities. .. The incorrect setting confirmation error notification is to turn on a display composed of LEDs and lamps such as the function display unit 1400 and the setting display 974 in a specific manner, or to display an error screen on a liquid crystal display device. Further, a command may be output from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and notified by displaying the command on the error LED display (not shown) provided in the payout control board 951 in a specific mode. ..

[23-3-3. RAM clear judgment process]
Subsequently, the details of the RAM clear determination process (step 02 TKS0030) in the power-on process will be described. FIG. 384 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RAM clear determination process of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 385 is an example of the program code of the RAM clear determination process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 384. In the RAM clear determination process, as described above, the information stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of turning on the power is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the contents of the main control RAM 1312 at the time of power failure are normally held. The specific contents of the process will be described below.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the RAM clear determination process, it first executes the set value confirmation process (step 02 TKS0210). In the set value confirmation process, the set value information (set value) that affects the lottery probability of the game is acquired, and if it is abnormal, an abnormal value is set in the set state and the set value. Specific processing will be described with reference to FIG. 386.

When the confirmation of the set value information is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM confirmation process outside the used area when the power is turned on, and the information in the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 that is not used for the game (RAM outside the used area) is abnormal. (Step 02 TKS0220).

When the confirmation of the RAM outside the used area is completed, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum of the game control area (the area in which the game information is stored) of the main control RAM 1312 (step 02 TKS0230).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 temporarily sets the abnormal state (RAM abnormality determination value) as the state of the game control area (step 02 TKS0240). Hereinafter, the state of the game control area is specified based on the results of the processes from step 02 TKS 0210 to step 02 TKS 0230.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the checksum value calculated in the process of step 02 TKS 0230 is a normal value (step 02 TKS 0250). If the checksum value is not a normal value (the result of step 02 TKS0250 is "NO"), the game control area is in an abnormal state, so this process is terminated, and if necessary, the contents of the game control area in subsequent processes. To clear.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the value of the backup flag set before the power failure is a normal value (step 02 TKS0260). If the value of the backup flag is not a normal value (the result of step 02 TKS0260 is "NO"), it cannot be confirmed that the game control area is normal, so this process is terminated, and if necessary, the game control is performed in the subsequent process. Clear the contents of the area.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 confirmed in the process of step 02 TKS 0220 is normal (step 02 TKS 0270). If the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 is not normal (the result of step 02 TKS0270 is "NO"), this process is terminated assuming that the game control area is in an abnormal state, and if necessary, in the subsequent process. Clear the contents of the game control area.

When the checksum and backup flag values are normal and the state outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM normal determination value as the state of the game control area. (Step 02 TKS0280), the set state is set to the state before the power failure (step 02 TKS0290). The state of the main control RAM 1312 is set (stored) in the C register, and the state before the power failure is set (stored) in the B register.

[23-3-4. Setting value confirmation process]
Subsequently, the set value confirmation process of step 02 TKS0210 of the RAM clear determination process will be described. In the set value confirmation process, the setting information (set value) of the gaming machine is acquired, and if it is abnormal, an abnormal value is set in the set state and the set value. FIG. 386 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the set value confirmation process of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 387 is an example of the program code of the set value confirmation process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 386.

When the set value confirmation process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first acquires the set state from the set state management area (VALUE_PLAY; setting state storage means) (step 02 TKS0310). As shown in FIG. 388, the setting state management area is a 1-byte area. The values that can be set in the setting state management area are the gameable state (“0”; _SETST_NON), the setting confirmation state (“1”; _SETST_CHK), the setting change state (“2”; _SETST_CHG), and the RAM error state (“3”). "; _SETST_ERR) is set (FIG. 389). It should be noted that an invalid setting confirmation error (“4”; _SETST_CHER) may be set to distinguish it from the RAM abnormal state. The incorrect setting confirmation error does not necessarily mean that the set value is an abnormal value, but it is treated in the same way as the RAM abnormal state in consideration of the possibility that the set value has been tampered with.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting state acquired from the setting state management area is set to an abnormal value, specifically, a value other than the settable value defined in FIG. 389 (step 02 TKS0320). ). As the implementation of the program, the value of the setting state is compared with the setting state management area abnormality determination value (_VALUE_PLAY_CK), and if it is smaller than the setting state management area abnormality determination value, it is determined to be a normal value. The value of the setting state management area abnormality determination value is a value obtained by adding 1 to the maximum value that can be set (RAM abnormality state = "3" in this embodiment), and the set value is 4 or less in this embodiment. If there is, it is judged to be normal.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a set value (when the setting state acquired from the setting state management area is not an abnormal value (the result of step 02 TKS0320 is "NO"), that is, when the setting state is a normal value ( (Set value information) is acquired (step 02 TKS0330). The set value (set value information) is stored in the set value area (SETTEI_AR; set value information storage means; FIG. 388), which is a 1-byte area. In the present embodiment, the set value is set from "0" to "5".

Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the acquired set value (set value information) is within a predetermined range, that is, whether the value is from “0” to “5” (step 02 TKS0340). Since only a positive number can be set in the set value area, as in the case of checking the setting state, the program implementation is set to 1 in the upper limit value (set value upper limit discrimination value; _SETTEI_LIM = "5"; FIG. 389). It may be determined whether or not it is larger than the added number.

In the main control MPU 1311, when the value of the set value (set value information) is within the predetermined range (the result of step 02 TKS0340 is "YES"), the set state and the set value are set normally, so that this process is performed. It ends and returns to the process of the caller (RAM clear determination process).

On the other hand, when the set state is an abnormal value (the result of step 02 TKS0320 is "YES") or the set value is an abnormal value (the result of step 02 TKS 0340 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 is set to the set state. The RAM abnormal state "3" is set (step 02 TKS0350). Finally, the set value is initialized (step 02 TKS0360), and the process returns to the caller's process (RAM clear determination process).

Since the set value is not erased (not initialized) even if the RAM clear operation is executed, if an abnormality occurs in the set value, it is initialized by the set value confirmation process. This is because it is possible to initialize the state of the gaming machine while maintaining the set value, such as when the high probability state is returned to the normal state by clearing the RAM.

[23-3-5. Setting operation judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the setting operation determination process (step 02 TKS0040) in the power-on process will be described. FIG. 390 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting operation determination process of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 391 is an example of the program code of the setting operation determination process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 390. In the setting operation determination process, as described above, the transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the confirmation of the RAM abnormality, the initialization (clearing) of the main control RAM 1312, and the like are performed.

When the setting operation determination process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first temporarily sets a value (_SETST_ERR) indicating a RAM abnormality in the setting state management area (setting value information storage means) (step 02 TKS0410).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been executed when the power is turned on (step 02 TKS0420). Specifically, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the external input port (_PINSTS) immediately after the power is turned on for determination.

If the setting change operation is not executed when the power is turned on (the result of step 02 TKS0420 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting state before the power failure was the setting change, that is, the setting change mode. It is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred in the meantime (step 02 TKS0430). The setting state before the power failure is stored in the B register in the process of step 02 TKS0290 of the RAM clear determination process.

If the setting state before the power failure is not the setting change (the result of step 02 TKS0430 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting state before the power failure was a RAM error (step 02 TKS0440). ). If the setting state before the power failure is a RAM abnormality (the result of step 02 TKS0440 is "YES"), this process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 initializes the setting state management area (step 02 TKS0460) when the setting state before the power failure is not a RAM abnormality (the result of step 02 TKS0450 is "NO"). Further, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 is ON when the power is turned on (step 02 TKS0470).

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not ON (the result of step 02 TKS0470 is "NO") when the power is turned on, that is, when the main control MPU 1311 is OFF, the main control MPU 1311 returns to the state before the power failure. The gaming state at the time of power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer (step 02 TKS0480). Further, it is determined whether or not the setting key is OFF (step 02 TKS0490). If the setting key is not OFF (the result of step 02 TKS0490 is "NO"), that is, if it is ON, the setting confirmation operation is being executed, and the setting state is set to the setting confirmation state (step 02 TKS0500). ).

When the setting key is OFF (the result of step 02 TKS0490 is "YES") or when the setting confirmation state is set, the main control MPU 1311 executes the door state confirmation process (step 02 TKS0510). In the door state confirmation process, the open / closed state of the door frame 3 is confirmed, and if it is in the open state, the corresponding setting is made. When the door status confirmation process is completed, the process returns to the caller's process (power-on process).

The main control MPU 1311 has a setting change operation when the power is turned on (the result of step 02 TKS0420 is "YES"), or a setting state before the power failure is a setting change (result of step 02 TKS0430). Is "YES"), and the setting state is changed to the design change state (step 02 TKS0520). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM outside the used area is normal (step 02 TKS0530). If the out-of-use RAM is not normal (the result of step 02 TKS0530 is "NO"), that is, if an error occurs in the out-of-use RAM, the out-of-use RAM is to be in a normal state. The error processing is executed (step 02 TKS0540).

The main control MPU 1311 is out of the used area when the RAM clear switch 954 is ON (the result of step 02 TKS0470 is "YES") or when the RAM outside the used area is normal (the result of step 02 TKS 0530 is "YES"). When the execution of the RAM abnormality processing is completed, the RAM initialization processing is executed (step 02 TKS0550), and the work area is cleared (step 02 TKS0560). After that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's process (power-on process).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the set value information is acquired when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the set value-related control is performed according to the operation input at the time of turning on the power and the setting state before the power is turned off. For example, if the setting state before the power is turned off is "setting change", the game can be played smoothly by starting the setting change mode at the start of the gaming machine and continuing the setting change regardless of the presence or absence of operation input or the setting state. To resume. In this case, since the set value is not fixed, a RAM error may occur, and the set value may not be the one intended by the setter.

On the other hand, even if the setting state before the power is turned off is "setting confirmation", if there is no operation input (setting confirmation operation) to start the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the gaming machine is started without continuing the setting confirmation. This is because, unlike the setting change mode, the game can be started because the set value is maintained without being changed, so that the operation input may be performed again if confirmation is required again. Further, by not automatically shifting to the setting confirmation mode at the time of startup, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being illegally confirmed by intentionally restarting the gaming machine.

Further, if the setting state is "RAM abnormality", the game cannot be started normally, so that the starting of the game machine itself is stopped without clearing the RAM. If the setting status is "RAM error", it is necessary to reset the setting value information by changing the setting. Therefore, in order to prevent an unauthorized third party from changing the setting value, the administrator intentionally resets it. By preventing the game from starting until it is set, the possibility of fraudulent activity is reduced. Furthermore, if it is possible to set an "illegal setting confirmation error" in the setting state, a third party can illegally start the game by controlling it so that the game cannot be started normally, as in the case of "RAM error". It is possible to prevent the game from being restarted by falsifying the set value.

[23-3-6. Disconnection / short circuit abnormality judgment processing]
Here, a disconnection / short-circuit abnormality determination process (step 01 TKS0120) including a process of confirming that the wiring disconnected during the game has been reconnected will be described. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality determination process is a process executed in the switch-related control process (step 01 TKS0010; FIG. 354) in the playable time process (step P108; FIG. 329) of the timer interrupt process. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process of the present embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process, it acquires the connection error history information (switch error history information) (step 02 TKS0610). Further, it is determined whether or not the connection error history information includes the error information of the wiring to be detected (step 02 TKS0620). Further, in this embodiment, the wiring to be detected in the connection error history information targets all of the plurality of wirings connected to the main control base plate 1310, but not all of the plurality of wirings but some of the wirings. You may want to target only. When targeting only a part of the wiring, not all of the plurality of wiring, it is desirable to set the configuration to target at least the wiring related to the power supply to the main control base plate 1310.

When the connection error history information includes the error information of the wiring to be detected (the result of step 02 TKS0620 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 waits for a predetermined time (step 02 TKS0630), and the wiring connection failure flag. Is set to ON (step 02 TKS0640). Further, a disconnection / short-circuit abnormality command is transmitted (step 02 TKS0650), and this process is terminated. The wiring connection failure flag may be set to ON for each wiring, or it may be a common flag for all wiring, and one wiring connection is made when a disconnection or short circuit is detected in any of the wirings to be detected. The defect flag may be set to ON. Further, the wiring connection failure flag may be stored in the game control area, and the wiring reconnection flag may be set to ON in the power-on startup confirmation process by referring to the wiring connection failure flag when the game machine is restarted. ..

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the wiring connection failure flag is set when the connection error history information does not include the error information of the wiring to be detected (the result of step 02 TKS0620 is "NO"). (Step 02 TKS0660). If the wiring connection failure flag is not set (the result of step 02 TKS0660 is "NO"), the gaming machine is operating normally without any abnormality such as disconnection, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the wiring connection failure flag is set (the result of step 02 TKS0660 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the wiring reconnection flag ON because the disconnected wiring is reconnected (the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON). Step 02 TKS0670). After the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON, the disconnection and short circuit have been resolved, so the wiring connection failure flag is canceled (OFF setting) (step 02 TKS0680). The wiring reconnection flag is released (OFF setting) when the normal setting change performed when the power switch 932 is turned from OFF to ON is executed and the game is normally started.

By the above procedure, it is possible to detect that a connection abnormality such as a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred in the wiring and then the abnormality has been resolved by reconnection or the like. It is unnatural that connection abnormalities such as disconnection and short circuit are resolved without restarting the gaming machine. For example, the gaming machine is illegally operated by fraudulent activity until the wiring is reconnected, and the set value. The information may have been changed or confirmed. Therefore, as described above, an illegal setting confirmation error is generated based on the wiring reconnection flag being set to ON, the continuation of the game is suppressed, and the illegal exploitation of the game value is prevented.

Since the start-up confirmation process when the power is turned on is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started up, the wiring reconnection flag is set in the start-up confirmation process when the power is turned on, and if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the start of the game is stopped. I was trying to do it. On the other hand, even if the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON in the process executed during the continuation of the game, such as the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process, and an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the game value is also illegal. The continuation of the game should be stopped to prevent it from being exploited. However, if a fraudulent setting confirmation error occurs due to fraudulent activity, the game may be continued to the extent that there is no actual harm to the hall side in order to identify the person who committed the fraudulent activity. For example, even between the time when a connection abnormality such as a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the wiring and the time when it is reconnected (during fraudulent activity), it is possible to use a production device such as a liquid crystal display device or a movable accessory. Make sure that the production continues for a predetermined period as usual. At this time, by canceling the game control (new lottery, granting of prize balls, etc.) for newly granting the game value, it is possible to prevent the game value from being illegally exploited. In addition, the function display unit 1400, setting display 974, etc. are used to notify the illegal setting confirmation error to the extent that it cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine, so that it is difficult for the person who commits the illegal act to recognize that the error has occurred. By pretending to be, it is possible to secure sufficient time for the hall side to collect evidence and the like without immediately leaving the person who committed the fraudulent activity, and to make it easier to identify the whole picture of the fraudulent activity.

[23-4. Control when an invalid setting confirmation error occurs]
Subsequently, it is examined how to deal with fraudulent acts that induce malfunction of the gaming machine by disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310. As an example of the fraudulent activity assumed in the present invention, a malfunction is induced by forcibly cutting off the wiring that supplies power to the main control board 1310, or when the wiring is disconnected or restarted due to reconnection. It is an act of illegally gaining profit by outputting a special command (for example, a command for setting) by an illegal method.

As a means for forcibly cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310, it is conceivable to physically cut the wiring connected to the power supply board, but it is difficult to continue the game after the disconnection. It is conceivable that the game can be continued illegally by temporarily disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring connector by some method. The detection of behaviors that may cause fraudulent activities such as disconnection and reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 can be performed by the above-mentioned procedure for determining disconnection / short circuit abnormality.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the illegal setting confirmation error occurs as described above by detecting the reconnection of the wiring instead of the disconnection of the wiring. In addition, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, the progress of the game is stopped. That is, in the state where the fraudulent setting confirmation error has occurred, the game cannot be restarted unless a specific return operation is performed. In order to allow only the hall side to perform a specific return operation, it is desirable to use a specific operation unit that can be operated from the back side of the gaming machine. In order to simplify the configuration of the gaming machine, the setting change operation is configured to also serve as a specific return operation (details will be described later). In addition, by executing the setting change operation as a specific return operation, even if there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally confirmed or modified, a new setting value is set on the hall side and the game is safely restarted. Can be done.

Hereinafter, control for preventing fraudulent activity when disconnection and reconnection of the wiring of the main control board 1310 of the main control board 1310 is detected will be described with reference to the timing chart.

[23-4-1. When executing the setting confirmation operation after reconnecting the wiring]
First, a case where the setting confirmation operation is executed after detecting the reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 will be described. In FIG. 393, the power supply is cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment, and the setting confirmation operation is executed when the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected. It is a timing chart explaining control when a setting confirmation act is performed.

Referring to FIG. 393, the main control side power is continuously supplied until time t11, the power switch 932 is “ON”, the setting key 971 is “OFF”, and the RAM clear switch 954 is “OFF”. There is. Since the wiring connection state is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared.

Since the setting display 974 is in the normal gaming state and the setting functions such as setting confirmation and setting change are not executed, the setting value is not displayed and is hidden (based on the setting display 974). When it also serves as the display 1317, it is in a state where a predetermined base display is performed). Further, the function display unit 1400 displays an aspect showing a normal gaming state, and the special symbol display included in the function display unit 1400 executes variable display of the special symbol. The main control board 1310 includes information for determining the mode of displaying the variation of the effect symbol to the peripheral control board 1510 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and transmits a command instructing the start of the variation. Further, since communication is normally performed between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, the error LED indicator provided on the payout control board 951 is lit in a manner indicating normality.

Further, as with the main control side power supply, the production side power supply is also supplied with electric power. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command instructing the start of variation, the peripheral control board 1510 starts the variation display of the effect symbol and displays a character or the like on the liquid crystal display device according to the variation display of the effect symbol based on the variation start command. Is executed, and further, an effect is executed by an effect device such as a movable accessory or an LED / lamp.

Time t11 represents a case where the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected while the ON setting of the power switch 932 is maintained. In this case, the main control board 1310 Only the power supply to is stopped. Therefore, the game state is being cut off, the game control by the main control MPU 1311 is interrupted, and the power cutoff process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, in consideration of the risk that some kind of fraudulent activity is performed against such behavior, the wiring connection failure flag is set to ON in the process of executing such a power failure process (time t11). The wiring connection failure flag is set to ON based on the mode of voltage change and the like.

Further, if the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected, the signal from the main control board 1310 is interrupted, so that the function of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. At this time, the LED and the 7-segment display included in the function display unit 1400 may be turned off, or an error display may be performed if power is supplied by a system different from that of the main control board 1310. Further, since the error LED display provided on the payout control board 951 cannot receive the signal from the main control board 1310, the error display of the connection abnormality is made in a specific mode different from the case where the connection is normal.

As shown in FIG. 380, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the wiring for supplying power to each board is a separate system, even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the peripheral control board 1510 And power supply to various production devices will be continued. Therefore, even after the time t11 when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the effect display, various lamp displays, sound effects, and the like on the liquid crystal display device can be continued.

The variation display of the effect symbol is fixedly stopped when the command for instructing the variation stop transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received due to the end of the variation of the special symbol. However, since the power supply to the main control board 1310 is stopped, the command for controlling the effect (command for confirming and stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol) is not transmitted, so that the power supply to the main control board 1310 is supplied. The effect display continues with the contents at the time of power failure until is restarted. Specifically, since the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner but the symbol stop command cannot be received, the effect symbol may continue to be displayed at high speed, or may be temporarily stopped (the effect symbol sways at a predetermined position without being fixedly stopped). The variable display of the effect symbol will continue as the state of operation continues.

In the example of FIG. 393, when the connection of the wiring related to the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally disconnected while the ON setting of the power switch 932 is maintained, the power supply of the main control board 1310 is supplied. The timer interrupt process (disconnection / short circuit error determination process) is not executed at the time of reconnection, and the wiring reconnection flag is not set to ON at this timing. Then, when the wiring for supplying power to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted (time t12), and the main control MPU 1311 starts the power-on processing and starts when the power is turned on. The wiring reconnection flag is set to ON by the confirmation process (time t13, step 02 TKS0670). In this way, when the wiring connection is illegally disconnected, the power supply of the main control board 1310 is cut off, and the power supply is re-supplied, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are set in order to remember that fact. It is possible to set ON in sequence and monitor fraud.

When the main control side power is re-supplied and the main control board 1310 is started (time t13), an incorrect setting confirmation error is notified on the back side of the gaming machine by the setting display 974 or the like based on the wiring reconnection flag set to ON. do. By notifying the illegal setting confirmation error on the back side of the gaming machine, the hall side can later confirm the confirmation of the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 due to the power supply to the main control board 1310 being cut off.

Further, any one of the plurality of wirings including the wiring for supplying power to the main control board 1310 is disconnected, and the connection path is used for fraudulent activity (an illegal wiring is connected instead of another wiring). In this embodiment, the following monitoring is performed for such connection routes as well. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when any of the plurality of wirings including the wiring for supplying power is disconnected and reconnected, an abnormality occurs in the set value regardless of whether the power is cut off or not. Executes a specific notification to notify the possibility. FIG. 393 shows, as an example, an example in which the function display unit 1400 executes the specific notification when the wiring for supplying power is cut off and reconnected, but the wiring other than the wiring for supplying power is cut off. When it is reconnected after being connected, the specific notification is similarly performed. The target for executing the specific notification does not have to be the function display unit 1400, and the base display 1317 may display specific information, or the liquid crystal display device 1600 may display a specific image. You may. Further, in order to distinguish from the invalid setting confirmation error, the device may be notified by a device different from the device that notifies the invalid setting confirmation error, or may be notified by the same device as the incorrect setting confirmation error.

As for the error LED display provided on the payout control board 951, the signal from the main control board 1310 cannot be received because the game is stopped, so even if the error of the connection abnormality is continuously displayed. However, even if a command indicating that an invalid setting confirmation error has occurred or a game is not possible is received from the main control board 1310, the incorrect setting confirmation error is notified or the specific notification is performed. good. Since the error LED display provided on the payout control board 951 is connected normally even if the game cannot be started when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is resumed. It may be displayed in a manner indicating that the connection is normal.

If an illegal setting confirmation error occurs, it is possible that an illegal act has been performed, so the continuation of the game is suppressed. Further, even when the specific notification is executed, the game may be stopped or the game may be continued only by the notification, as in the case where the illegal setting confirmation error occurs.

Further, when an error such as that all the contents of the main control RAM 1312 are actually cleared when an invalid setting confirmation error occurs, the RAM clear determination process in the power-on process (FIG. 383). In the set value confirmation process (FIG. 385) of, "RAM error" is set in the set state.

Further, in the present embodiment, even when the content of the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be normal, such as when the checksum is normal, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, fraudulent activity is more reliably prevented. Therefore, an "illegal setting confirmation error" may be set as the setting state so that the same processing as the "RAM error" is performed. When the same process as "RAM error" is performed, the game is maintained in the stopped state without starting the game until the setting change operation is normally executed.

It is possible to send a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 at time t13 after the main control side power is re-supplied, and the liquid crystal display device cannot start the game. The display corresponding to the setting confirmation error is executed, the light emission corresponding to the invalid setting confirmation error is executed in various lamps, and the voice notification corresponding to the incorrect setting confirmation error is executed in various speakers. At this time, the effect symbol during the fluctuation display is stopped or hidden from the fluctuation. Further, for the effect device, the operation of the movable accessory that is being executed is stopped at the timing of time t13, and initialization processing such as moving to the initial position is executed.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off, the game cannot be started even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted as it is. Will be done. As a result, even if an attempt is made to illegally access the set value information by performing a fraudulent act of disconnecting and reconnecting the wiring to the main control board 1310, the profit is illegally exploited and damage is prevented. Can be done.

Subsequently, the control when the execution of the setting confirmation operation is determined at the time t13 after the main control side power supply is re-supplied at the time t12 will be described. The setting confirmation operation is a relatively simple method because it is not necessary to operate the RAM clear switch 954 located on the back side of the gaming machine and the setting key 971 is turned on when the power is turned on. It is possible to check the set value. Therefore, in consideration of the possibility that the setting confirmation operation is illegally executed in some way in addition to the fraudulent act of shutting off and restarting the power supply to the main control board 1310, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is mainly used. Even if the setting confirmation operation is accepted when the power supply to the control board 1310 is illegally cut off and the power supply is restarted (even if the setting key is turned on), the setting value information is illegally confirmed. I try to prevent it from being done. In the setting confirmation operation, the setting key 971 may be operated to the ON position when the start processing is executed (at the time of determination) after the power is turned on, and may be operated to the ON position before the power is turned on (the setting confirmation operation). In FIG. 393, it can be determined if the setting key 971 is operated to the ON position between the times t11 and t12).

Referring to FIG. 393, at time t13, the execution of the setting confirmation operation is specified by determining that the setting key 971 is ON when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted. However, since the wiring reconnection flag is set to ON by the disconnection / short circuit abnormality judgment process, the setting confirmation operation this time is not considered to be valid and invalid, and no processing related to the setting confirmation is performed. In addition, the game is stopped so that the game is not started.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the game is started even if the power supply to the main control board 1310 is restarted and the setting confirmation operation is performed. It is configured so that it cannot be done. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the power supply to the main control board 1310 in order to illegally confirm the set value, and prevent an illegal act of illegally confirming the set value.

In addition, even if a fraudulent act of cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is executed, the gaming machine will operate normally for the time being by not making any changes to the production side. Since it is possible to make it appear as if it is, it is expected that the person who commits the fraudulent activity will be more likely to stay in the gaming machine and identify the fraudulent person.

In the following, the details of canceling the invalid setting confirmation error by a specific return operation (setting change operation in this embodiment) will be described. As described above, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs due to fraudulent activity, etc., the power is temporarily turned off, and the power switch 932 is directly operated to perform the setting change operation while turning on the power again. Can be started. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 393, the power is turned off at time t14 and turned on again at time t15. The shaded area in the period from time t14 to time 15 in the timing chart of FIG. 393 indicates that the functions of each configuration are stopped due to the power cutoff.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on again, the process for starting the gaming machine is started, and it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is executed in the process. The setting change operation may be performed as long as the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set to "ON" when the power switch 932 is operated from "OFF" to "ON" (at the time of determination), and the power is turned on. A pre-operation to set the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to "ON" may have been performed from before.

When the setting change operation is detected and the start of the gaming machine is completed (time t16), the wiring reconnection flag is cleared. As a result, the incorrect setting confirmation error is canceled, and the specific notification and various error notifications are terminated. Then, the setting state of the gaming machine is set to the setting change state, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode (step 02 TKS0520). The setting display 974 can switch the display from the display of the invalid setting confirmation error to the setting value being changed. The function display unit 1400 is completely turned off (or displayed corresponding to the setting change, or may be fully lit) until the setting change is completed. At this time, the liquid crystal display device may display a screen indicating that the setting is being changed.

When the setting change is completed (time t17), the processing necessary for starting the game, such as clearing the game control area, is executed, and the game can be started.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when an illegal setting confirmation error occurs, when the setting change operation is executed as a specific return operation, the illegal setting confirmation error is canceled and the setting change mode is set. After that, it is configured so that a normal game can be started. Since the setting change operation requires the operation of multiple operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971), it is difficult for an unauthorized person to perform this operation, and only the employee in the hall holding the key can operate it. Since the operation of the setting key 971 and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 arranged on the back side of the gaming machine are included, the security performance against fraudulent activities can be enhanced.

In addition, if an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, a special recovery operation may be performed, but since the processing at power-on may be complicated, the operation is the same as the normal setting change operation. By making it recoverable, it is possible to standardize the program, suppress an increase in the program capacity, and suppress the complexity of game control.

[23-4-2. When executing the setting change operation after reconnecting the wiring]
Next, a case where an illegal setting change operation is performed instead of an illegal setting confirmation operation after detecting an illegal reconnection of the wiring connected to the main control board will be described. In FIG. 394, the setting change operation is executed when the power supply is illegally cut off by disconnecting the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment and the power supply is restarted after the wiring is reconnected. It is a timing chart explaining the control when an illegal act is performed.

It is difficult for a fraudulent person to perform a setting change operation as compared with a setting confirmation operation, but in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power supply is restarted, not only the power supply is re-supplied by reconnecting the wiring but also the power supply is re-supplied. The power switch 932 is configured so that the mode cannot be changed to the setting change mode unless a regular setting change operation that requires actually operating the power switch 932 from OFF to ON to turn on the power is performed. Therefore, the timing chart shown in FIG. 394 is the same as the timing chart shown in FIG. 393 except that the setting change operation is performed when the wiring is reconnected, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off, the wiring connection flag is not cleared even if the setting change operation is executed, and the incorrect setting confirmation error continues. , It is configured so that the game cannot be started. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the power supply to the main control board 1310 and prevent fraudulent acts of illegally changing the set value.

[23-4-3. Unauthorized access to set value information without power failure]
Subsequently, while the wiring that supplies power to the main control board remains connected, other wiring (for example, wiring that is connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) is cut off, and when the wiring is reconnected, the wiring path is used. Explains the points to prevent fraudulent acts of confirming and falsifying the set value information by illegally using the input of. FIG. 395 is a timing chart illustrating control when wiring other than the wiring that mainly supplies power to the main control board 1310 is cut off and reconnected, unlike the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 393 and 394.

Referring to FIG. 395, as in the example shown in FIGS. 393 and 394, power is continuously supplied to the main control side power supply until the wiring is disconnected (time t21), and the power switch 932 is used. "ON", the setting key 971 is "OFF", and the RAM clear switch 954 is "OFF". Further, since the wiring connection state is normal, the wiring connection failure flag and the wiring reconnection flag are cleared. Various indicators such as the setting indicator 974 and the function display unit 1400 have the same display.

Further, the special symbol display included in the function display unit 1400 executes the variation display of the special symbol, and the main control MPU 1311 includes information for determining the mode of the variation display of the effect symbol and instructs the start of the variation. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In the liquid crystal display device, an effect of displaying a character or the like while displaying the effect symbol in a variable manner is executed. Further, in conjunction with the variable display of the effect pattern, an effect using a movable accessory, an LED, a lamp, or the like is also executed.

In FIG. 395, among the plurality of wirings connected to the main control board 1310, specific wirings other than the wirings that supply power to the main control board (for example, wirings connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) are disconnected. Then (time t21), the wiring connection failure flag is set by the disconnection / short circuit abnormality determination process without interrupting the power supply to the main control board 1310 (step 02 TKS0640). At this time, the setting display 974 may continue to hide, but may display an error. Further, although the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off because normal gaming cannot be continued, an error display may be performed. If the special symbol variation display is being executed, the symbol variation is stopped at this point. Further, although the error LED display provided on the payout control board 951 has a connection abnormality on the drawing, it may be normal as long as the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 are normally connected. However, it may be displayed as an error indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the connection of the wiring of the main control board 1310.

Further, as in the case shown in FIGS. 393 and 394, the effect being executed is continued. Since the power supply to the main control board 1310 is continued, the production may be stopped when the wiring connection failure flag is set, but the person who cheated by the setting display 974 or the like cannot be recognized. By notifying the managers and employees of the amusement park in a recognizable manner, it is easy to identify the fraudster.

After that, the disconnected wiring is reconnected (time t22), and the wiring reconnection flag is set (step 02 TKS0670). Since the wiring reconnection flag is set, the setting display 974 or the like notifies the above-mentioned incorrect setting confirmation error. In addition, the function display unit 1400 performs specific notification. Further, by transmitting a command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the effect, the effect being executed is stopped and an error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

Since the wiring reconnection flag is set at time t22, an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs and the progress of the game is stopped. As a result, while the wiring that supplies power to the main control board remains connected, other wiring (for example, wiring that is connected to various input switches related to lottery and winning) is cut off, and when reconnecting, the wiring path is used. Even if you try to confirm or falsify the set value information by illegally using the input of, the progress of the game can be forcibly stopped after the reconnection, and the fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Next, in order to eliminate the incorrect setting confirmation error on the hall side, the control when the power of the gaming machine is turned off (time t23) and the power is turned on again while performing the setting change operation will be described. While the power is cut off (hatched portion in FIG. 395), the display by the liquid crystal display device and each display device, the operation of the effect device, and the like are interrupted. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on at time t24, the process for starting the gaming machine is started, and it is determined whether or not the setting change operation is executed in the process. As described above, the setting change operation may be performed as long as the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are turned “ON” when the power switch 932 is turned “ON”, and the state before and after the power is turned on (determination). Is unquestioned.

After that, when the regular setting change operation is detected and the start of the gaming machine is completed (time t25), the wiring reconnection flag is cleared and the incorrect setting confirmation error is cleared. Then, the setting state of the gaming machine is set to the setting change state, and the mode shifts to the setting change mode. The display mode of the display means such as the setting display 974 and the function display unit 1400 is as described with reference to FIG. 393. When the setting change is completed (time t26), the processing necessary for starting the game, such as clearing the game control area, is executed, and the game can be started.

In the example shown in FIG. 395, the power was turned off and on again after the wiring was reconnected. However, if the setting change operation is executed without turning off the power, the setting is as shown in the example shown in FIG. 394. The change function is configured not to be executed. That is, the game cannot be restarted without going through the power re-turning including the operation of the power switch 932. As a result, it is possible to temporarily release the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 and prevent fraudulent acts of illegally changing the set value while the gaming machine is not operating normally.

[23-4-4. If an error occurs when disconnecting the wiring]
Subsequently, a minor warning that allows the game to be continued without stopping the game control such as symbol fluctuation and the payout control of the prize ball (for example, a warning notification of "Please return to left-handed", a warning notification regarding a defect in the decoration system, etc. The behavior of the gaming machine when the power supply to the main control board 1310 is illegally cut off while the warning notification regarding the storage amount of the dish portion is generated will be described. FIG. 396 is a timing chart illustrating control when the wiring connected to the main control board 1310 is disconnected and reconnected during the occurrence of a weak error in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

In the example shown in FIG. 396, the full tank detection sensor 535 detects that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full at time t31, and a full tank error (minor warning) is notified. At this time, the liquid crystal display device is displayed to notify the full tank error, prompting the removal of the stored game balls. At this time, the error LED display of the payout control board 951 is displayed corresponding to the full tank error.

If the connection of the wiring to the main control board 1310 is disconnected (time t32) while the full tank error is notified, the power supply to the main control board 1310 is cut off and the function is as in the case of FIG. 394. The display unit 1400 is completely turned off. On the other hand, since power is continuously supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 and various effect devices, the full tank error display and the effect display on the liquid crystal display device are continued. After that, when the wiring to the main control board 1310 is reconnected, the power supply is restarted (time t33), the power-on processing is executed, and the gaming machine is restarted.

When the restart of the gaming machine is completed (time t34), the wiring connection failure flag is released and the wiring reconnection flag is set. Due to the setting of the wiring reconnection flag, an incorrect setting confirmation error occurs, and the setting display 974 notifies the error. At this time, the function display unit 1400 executes the specific notification, and the main control board 1310 sends a command notifying that an error has occurred to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the error screen corresponding to the liquid crystal display device is displayed. To. The operation for recovering from the state in which the incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred is an operation for turning off the power and changing the setting at the time of turning on the power by directly operating the power switch 932 as described above. Is possible.

With the above configuration, it is possible to make it appear that the error notification is continuing for the time being when an illegal act of cutting off the power supply to the main control board 1310 is executed during the error occurrence. .. This will increase the possibility that the person who committed the fraud will remain as it is until the error notification is canceled even if the fraud is committed by taking advantage of the occurrence of the error, and it is expected that the employee of the hall will identify the fraudster. can.

Further, in order to further enhance the fraud suppression effect for the above-described embodiment, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the fraud setting confirmation error has occurred. At that time, it is stored as history information in which an invalid setting confirmation error has occurred in the history storage unit provided in the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and can be displayed on a liquid crystal display device or the like by accepting a predetermined history display operation. You may try to do it. It is desirable that the history storage unit be supplied with a predetermined backup power supply and retain the history information even if the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. Further, the history information in which the incorrect setting confirmation error has occurred includes the date and time information extracted from the real-time clock provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, and the date and time when the wiring connection failure flag is set. It is desirable to accumulate all or part of the information, the date and time information on which the invalid setting confirmation error occurred, and the date and time information on which the invalid setting confirmation error was resolved by performing the regular setting change operation.

Further, in order to further enhance the fraud suppression effect for the above-described embodiment, the fraudulent setting confirmation error is an error of extremely high importance regarding the illegal change of the set value, and therefore another error (for example, the door frame 3). It is possible to perform the notification processing related to the error and the output processing from the external terminal plate 784, assuming that the priority is higher than the error related to the opening, the magnetic sensor error, and the like. From the viewpoint of importance, it is equivalent to RAM error, and it is desirable to set the priority to be equivalent to RAM error.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, there are a plurality of stages of set values 1 to 6 corresponding to a plurality of types of operation ratios (that is, hit probabilities of special symbols) of the conditional device, and any of the set values 1 to 6 is used. An example of a gaming machine that can be set (a gaming machine that can be set in multiple stages) is an example, but the operating ratio of the condition device is only one type, and the corresponding setting value is also a gaming machine that can set only the setting value 1 (multiple). It is a gaming machine that cannot be set in stages), and the above-mentioned processing related to setting confirmation and setting change, and various related members (setting keys, etc.) are installed as dummies, and the same processing as the illegal setting confirmation error is executed as a dummy. It may be possible. For such gaming machines that can only set the setting value 1 (game machines that cannot be set in multiple stages), check the settings (actually only the setting value 1 can be confirmed) or change the settings (actually only the setting value 1). Although it is possible to set it, there is no damage on the hall side due to unauthorized confirmation or change of the set value. For this reason, if a fraudulent person mistakenly commits a fraudulent act, there is a possibility that the whole picture of the fraudulent act can be grasped or the fraudulent activist itself can be secured without suffering any damage. It can lead to suppression of actions.

[24. Special condition time reduction]
[24-1. Outline of special conditions reduction of working hours]
In the gaming machines described so far, it has been determined whether or not to shift to the time saving state in relation to the result of the special lottery. Therefore, unless the special lottery is won, it is not possible to shift to a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, such as a time saving state. Therefore, it may be necessary to continue a monotonous game without being able to win the special lottery for a long period of time, and there is a risk that the interest of the game will be significantly reduced.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player without winning the special lottery will be described. Specifically, if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is entered (special condition time saving). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to a time saving state based on the above-mentioned special lottery winning (normal time saving).

Explaining the time saving state of the present embodiment, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the lottery (ordinary lottery) in which the second starting port 2004 is open is set to a higher probability than the normal state, and the second starting port is set at the time of winning the lottery. The opening time for opening 2004 is set to be long. In this embodiment, the time reduction state is executed with the same contents regardless of whether the time reduction is normal or special condition, but the type of result of the special lottery, the time reduction state such as normal time reduction or special condition time reduction, etc. The number of continuations of the reduced working hours (number of times of reduced working hours) and the opening time may be different depending on the transition condition to. In addition, the probability of the normal lottery is set high as the same probability regardless of whether it is in the normal game state or the time saving state (100% winning is also possible), and in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is compared with the normal state. The opening time of the may be lengthened.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special lottery is won, and the time saving state ends by shifting to the next gaming state based on the result of the special lottery. Further, even if the game is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the special lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state and the time saving state ends. In this way, the reduced working hours state continues until predetermined conditions such as winning the special lottery and executing the symbol change (special lottery) a predetermined number of times are satisfied.

[24-2. Basic flow of special conditions reduction of working hours]
Subsequently, the control of the special condition time reduction in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. The special condition time reduction of the present embodiment is controlled so as to shift to the time reduction state when the number of times (time reduction transition count) that is not continuously won in the special lottery reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction transition number). Since the special condition time reduction has an aspect such as relief when it is difficult to win the special lottery, the time reduction transition count may not be updated when the winning probability of the special lottery is high.

Further, in the normal gaming state, since the second starting opening 2004 is not opened, the time saving transition count is updated when the special lottery when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 2002 is not won. If the gaming machine can win a prize in the second starting port 2004 even if it is not in the time saving state, the time saving transition count may be updated even if the second starting port 2004 is won. That is, as described above, even in the normal state, if the normal lottery is won with a high probability as in the time saving state, the game ball wins in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. You may want to update the count.

The update of the time saving transition count is executed by the process called from the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS0080) in the game enable time process (FIG. 354), and the specific process contents will be described later. The time saving transition count may be updated by adding from 0 or subtracting the number of time saving transitions as an initial value. Examples will be described individually for each of the update of the time reduction transition count by addition and the update of the time reduction transition count by subtraction.

In the update by addition, when the time reduction shift count reaches the time reduction number of times, the time reduction state is entered, and the value of the time reduction transition count stored in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of executing the game control program matches the actual time reduction transition count. Management such as debugging can be performed easily.

On the other hand, in the update by subtraction, when the time reduction shift count becomes 0, the time reduction state is entered. When the time saving transition count is subtracted and updated, the time saving transition count does not become a value larger than the time saving transition count, so that the capacity of the area for storing the time saving transition count in the main control RAM 1312 can be suppressed. It will be possible. In addition, it is possible to simplify the control related to the time reduction transition count when the number of time reduction transitions is reached. However, if the comparison value is 0, it can be processed with one instruction, which simplifies the control and can reduce the capacity and speed of the program.

It shifts to the time saving state by the special condition time saving function, and if the time saving state continues a predetermined number of times without winning the special lottery, it shifts to the normal game state again. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured so that when the game machine returns from the time saving state by the special condition time saving function to the normal gaming state, it does not shift to the time saving state by the special condition time saving function again until the time saving transition count is cleared. .. This is because the number of time reduction transitions will not be reached again unless the condition for clearing (initializing) the time reduction transition count is satisfied. As a matter of course, if the time saving transition count is cleared at the timing of returning to the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift to the time saving state by the special condition time saving function, and it may be implemented as such.

[25. Special conditions Time reduction (time reduction transition count: addition update)]
As described above, the time reduction shift count for controlling the transition to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is updated by addition or subtraction. Here, an embodiment in the case where the time saving transition count is updated by addition will be described.

[25-1. Control of the reduced working hours by special conditions]
[25-1-1. Control from start to end of time saving state by special condition time saving]
First, the control from the start to the end of the special condition time reduction will be described in chronological order with reference to the timing chart. Special condition The start condition of the reduced working hours is to shift to the reduced working hours state if the special lottery is not won 300 times in a row (the number of times of the reduced working hours) after the time saving transition count is cleared. The maximum number of continuations of the time-reduced state is 100, and the maximum number of continuations of the time-reduced state due to the normal time reduction and the maximum number of continuations of the time-reduced state due to the special condition time reduction are the same, but may be different. It is preferable that the start condition of the special condition time reduction is such that the number of times after the time reduction transition counter is cleared is about three times the so-called jackpot probability (big hit probability in normal time) (for example, 800 to 900 times). Further, it is preferable that the number of times the time reduction due to the special condition time reduction is given is within the range of about three times the jackpot probability (for example, 900 times or less). The number of times of time reduction given may be different for each setting, or may be the same regardless of the setting, but it is preferable to keep the number within the range of about 3 times in any setting. ..

Here, the state of each configuration in the control for shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be described. FIG. 397 is a timing chart illustrating the control for shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 397, the control from clearing the time saving transition count by winning the special lottery to shifting to the time saving state by the special condition time saving will be described.

The time t1 is the timing at which the jackpot ending executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state due to winning the special lottery ends, that is, the timing at which the time is shortened. While the jackpot gaming state continues, the value of the time saving transition count in the symbol change of the special lottery that is to shift to the jackpot gaming state is set. With reference to FIG. 397, the values of the time saving transition count, the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied, and the time saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor are set to the same values from the transition to the jackpot gaming state to the end. As for the number of remaining states, since the number of times the jackpot game state continues is set, "1" may be set, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game may be set. Further, the performance display monitor may display information on game performance such as a base value and a set value in addition to the time reduction transition count value.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time saving shift count is cleared at the timing when the jackpot ending ends, that is, at the timing of shifting to the time saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 397, since the time saving transition count is added and updated, the time saving transition count is set to “0”. When the time saving transition count is subtracted and updated, the time saving transition count (300 times) is set. The details of clearing the time saving transition count will be described later.

Further, at the timing of clearing the time saving transition count, the number of remaining times when the special condition is satisfied is set to "300", and the number of remaining states in the time saving state is set to "100". Since the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied can be calculated based on the time saving transition count and the number of time saving transitions, it should be calculated when necessary, for example, when the special condition remaining number of times command described later is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. You may do it. When updating the time saving transition count by subtraction, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied and the time saving transition count have the same value, and may be stored in the same variable in the program. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced.

The time t2 is the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol is first executed after the transition to the time saving state. The time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and is reflected on the display of the performance display monitor after the update. At this time, a command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, a command for notifying the symbol type of the stopped symbol, a command for notifying the number of pending fluctuation displays of the special symbol, and a game state at the start of the fluctuation ( A command to notify the time saving state) and a command to notify the remaining number of times of the current gaming state are sent. Details of the various commands will be described with reference to FIG. 400.

Time t3 is the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol ends. When the variation display of the special symbol ends, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is updated. At this time, a command for instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the fluctuation display of the special symbol, a command for notifying the game state when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and a command for notifying the remaining number of times the updated special condition is satisfied are transmitted. Will be done. Details of these commands will be described with reference to FIG. 400.

After that, when the stop symbol is confirmed, the next variation display is started (time t4). Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery in the time saving state, the time saving state ends (time t5). At this time, the number of remaining states in the time saving state becomes "0" and the update (counting) is stopped. On the other hand, the time saving transition count is continuously counted.

When the time saving state ends, it shifts to the normal game state. At this time, the number of remaining states of the normal game state does not need to be managed (cannot be managed), so it is not updated. In addition, the number of remaining states may be set as the number of remaining times when the special condition is satisfied when the normal gaming state is entered. This is because if the special lottery is not won consecutively for a predetermined number of times (number of times of time saving shift = 300 times) after the time saving transition count is cleared, the normal gaming state is changed to the time saving state and the normal gaming state ends.

When the game progresses in the normal game state, the time reduction transition count reaches a predetermined number of times (time reduction transition number = 300 times), and the fluctuation display ends (time t6), the remaining number of times that the special condition for transitioning to the time reduction state is satisfied. Becomes 0 and the special condition is satisfied, and the state shifts to the time saving state (special condition time saving). When the system shifts to the reduced working hours state due to the special conditions reduced working hours, the update of the reduced working hours count and the remaining number of times the special conditions are satisfied is stopped. Further, the number of remaining states is set to the upper limit of the number of times of continuation of the time saving state (100 times). When the time saving transition count reaches the predetermined number of times (time saving transition number = 300 times) which is the upper limit value, the value is maintained without updating.

After that, if the special lottery is not won before the maximum number of times of continuation (100 times) of the reduced working hours is reached after shifting to the reduced working hours state due to the special condition shortening of working hours, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (time t7). .. At this time, since the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is not a condition for clearing the time reduction transition count, the values of the time reduction transition count and the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied are maintained. It will not shift to the time saving state due to the condition time saving.

By not setting the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction as the condition for clearing the time reduction transition count, it is possible to suppress the continuous transition to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from becoming too high. In addition, it is possible to adjust the base value of the gaming machine so that it does not become too high, and it is possible to play the game with appropriate settings.

[25-1-2. Clearing (initializing) the transition condition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving]
In the special condition time reduction in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, when the time reduction transition count is cleared and the special lottery is not won consecutively a predetermined number of times, the time reduction state is entered. In the present embodiment, the conditions (special conditions) for clearing (initializing) the time saving transition count are (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) by a predetermined procedure, and (2) when the special lottery is won. (After the big hit game is over). (2) If the special lottery is won (after the big hit game is over), it is as described above.

Here, a case where the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) by the predetermined procedure of the condition (1) will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, in the operation of executing the initialization (RAM clear) of the gaming machine, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently, (b) the setting key 971 is used. There are two types of cases where the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently (first operation), the time saving transition count is cleared. On the other hand, (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; setting change operation), the time saving transition count is not cleared. This is because if the operation of the setting key 971 is required to clear the time saving transition count, the time saving transition count cannot be easily cleared. By facilitating the clearing of the time reduction transition count, the employees of the pachinko / pachislot machine can easily manage the special condition time reduction of the gaming machine.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned example, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently, the time saving transition count is not cleared, while (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971. In some cases, it may be configured to clear the time saving transition count. Special condition It is important for the operation in the game hall to not clear the time reduction transition count, which is the condition for granting the reduction of working hours, because it is directly linked to the game profit. Therefore, (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 to clear the time saving transition count, the clear management has the authority to have the key necessary for the operation of the setting key 971. Since it will be possible to limit it to people and the like, it will be possible to facilitate appropriate (safe) management in the amusement park.

[25-1-3. Update of time saving transition count after RAM clear operation]
Here, the control of the gaming machine at the time of executing the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation) will be described. First, before explaining the control at the time of executing each operation, an outline will be described about the case where the RAM is in an abnormal state when the power is turned on.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, it is first determined whether or not the set value is abnormal (value other than 0 to 5). If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the initial value is set in the set value, the time saving transition count is cleared, and the RAM is set to the abnormal state as the game state. If the set value is not determined to be abnormal, the checksum, the power failure flag, and the RAM outside the game area are subsequently checked, and if any of them is determined to be abnormal, the RAM is set to the abnormal state. At this time, unless it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the value before the power failure is maintained without clearing the time saving transition count. After that, after stopping the game due to a RAM error, it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (including setting change / confirmation) when the timer interrupt process is executed, and whether or not to execute the game-related process based on the determination result. To determine.

The time saving transition count is set to an initial value only when the set value is determined to be abnormal and at the end of the jackpot ending, except when the first operation is executed, and the initial value is not set at other times. Further, it is not determined whether or not the value of the time saving transition count is abnormal. The reason for not judging the abnormality of the time saving transition count is that if the set value is abnormal, there is a high possibility that the time saving transition count is also abnormal, so it is considered sufficient to judge only by the abnormality of the set value. Is.

Subsequently, the control when the first operation or the second operation is executed and the power of the gaming machine is turned on without determining that the set value is abnormal will be described. FIG. 398 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the gaming machine of the present embodiment is powered on by executing the first operation. FIG. 399 is a timing chart illustrating an example of control when the gaming machine of the present embodiment is powered on by executing the second operation. In the example shown in FIGS. 398 and 399, the time saving transition count is cleared in the case of the first operation (the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently), and the second operation (the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971). ) Indicates a control that does not clear the time saving transition count.

In the example shown in FIG. 398, when the power is cut off while the game is continuing in the normal game state, the control of each configuration when the power is turned on while executing the first operation will be described. In this case, the time saving transition count is cleared during the initialization process when the power is turned on.

When the power is cut off at time t11, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is interrupted, and the performance display monitor is hidden. At this time, the backup power supply keeps the time saving transition count in a predetermined area in the main control RAM 1312 even during power failure. At this time, the value of the time saving transition count is "249".

After that, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated (first operation) and the power is turned on (time t12), the initialization process (FIG. 21 and the like) is executed. At this time, since the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, the game control work area of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared. Further, since the first operation is executed, the value of the time saving transition count is also cleared in the process of the initialization process (time t13). Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the performance display is not reflected on the display of the performance display monitor immediately after the value of the time saving transition count is cleared, but is executed by the timer interrupt processing executed after the initialization processing is completed. It is reflected in the monitor process (step 01 TKS0070). When the information is displayed on the performance display monitor after the power is turned on, the value of the time saving transition count before the power failure is displayed on the performance display monitor. On the other hand, when the display of the performance display monitor is updated only by the performance display monitor processing executed by the timer interrupt processing, the value of the time saving transition count is not displayed until the game is restarted, and after the game is restarted and cleared. The value of the time saving transition count (“0”) of is displayed.

When the initialization process is completed, the game is restarted with the value of the time reduction transition count cleared (time t14). Since interrupts are permitted in the initialization process, the timer interrupt process is executed, and the value of the time saving transition count cleared by the performance display monitor process is reflected in the performance display monitor. Then, when the game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the time saving transition count is updated at the start of the variable display. Since the time reduction transition count is updated after it is displayed on the performance display monitor, the display on the performance display monitor is reflected in the next interrupt after the time reduction transition count is updated.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 399, when the power is cut off while the game is continuing in the normal gaming state, the control of each configuration when the power is turned on while executing the second operation will be described. In this case, the setting change function is executed during the initialization process at the time of turning on the power, but the value of the time saving transition count is maintained at the value before the power failure.

When the power is cut off at time t21, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and the performance display monitor is hidden, as in the state of time t11 shown in FIG. 398. After that, when the power is turned on (time t22) while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 (second operation), the initialization process is executed. At this time, the work area for game control of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared, but the value of the time saving transition count is maintained. After the initialization process is executed, the mode shifts to the setting mode (time t23). During the setting mode, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify an area and clear the gaming control work area. For example, even if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, the area in which the set value information is stored is not initialized (RAM cleared) and the stored contents are maintained. Therefore, when the gaming machine is initialized by performing the second operation, the area in which the time saving transition count is stored is excluded from the initialization (RAM clear) target, and the gaming machine is restarted while maintaining the time saving transition count. to start.

In this way, when the gaming machine is initialized while performing the second operation, the time saving transition count (249) before the power failure is maintained even after the initialization process is executed. Then, after the game is restarted at time t24, the value of the time reduction transition count at the time before the power failure (time t21) is displayed at the start of the variation display of the special symbol. After that, when the game ball wins in the start winning opening, the variation display of the special symbol is started, the time reduction transition count is updated at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and the performance is performed by the performance display monitor processing executed at the next interrupt timing. The time saving transition count after the update is displayed on the display monitor.

In addition, when the value corresponding to the time reduction transition count is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device in order to notify the player of the occurrence of the special condition time reduction, the screen is displayed as it is even if the time reduction transition count is cleared. Will be done. The screen display of the liquid crystal display device is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the display is updated based on the command sent from the main control board 1310 to notify the value corresponding to the time saving transition count when the game is restarted. .. As a result, special control on the peripheral control board 1510 side due to the clearing of the time saving transition count becomes unnecessary, and the complexity of the control can be suppressed. In the event of an abnormality, the display contents on the screen may be cleared.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a means capable of confirming the value corresponding to the time saving transition count regardless of whether or not the value corresponding to the time saving transition count is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. ing. The confirmation means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device, may be a display device such as the function display unit 1400, or may be a display device other than this. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the time saving transition count is displayed on the performance display monitor.

When the time reduction transition count is cleared, a common notification sound is output for the first operation and the second operation. Further, in the case of the second operation, the notification sound may be output at the operation timing of the setting key 971. At this time, the process of clearing the RAM may be executed after the setting change is confirmed, or the RAM may be cleared in advance before the setting change and then the setting change may be confirmed. The output of the notification sound can be terminated by a predetermined operation. For example, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be terminated, or the power of the gaming machine may be turned off. When the first operation and the second operation are executed, not only the notification sound but also the screen display of the liquid crystal display device may be common. In this case, it is not necessary that all of the screen displays are common, but at least a part of them may be common. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the time reduction transition count has been cleared due to an abnormality occurring during the game, and to prevent the player from being uncomfortable.

Note that different notification sounds may be used for the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (setting change operation). At this time, the BGM outputs a common sound, and the SE and voice give different notifications (for example, "RAM has been cleared" when the RAM is cleared, and "the setting has been changed" when the setting is changed. (Output) may be used so that the situation in which the RAM is initialized can be distinguished.

As described above, (a) the time saving transition count is cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently, and (b) the time saving transition count is cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971. An example of controlling the RAM clear switch 954 has been described, but (a) the time saving transition count is not cleared when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently, and (b) the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971. In some cases, it may be controlled to clear the time saving transition count. Further, in either case of (a) operating the RAM clear switch 954 independently or (b) operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating the setting key 971, even if the time saving transition count is cleared. good.

Further, in any of the operations (a) and (b), the RAM is cleared and the data contents related to the monitor display are also reset (cleared). In terms of hall operation, it is convenient to be able to operate all at once when clearing the time saving transition count, so the monitor display is also cleared. As for the monitor display, since the display is also updated with the update of the time reduction transition count, it may be maintained as it is without being reset (cleared) at the time of clearing the RAM. As a result, the process of resetting (clearing) the monitor display can be reduced, so that the program capacity can be reduced.

[25-2. Commands related to special conditions time reduction]
In the control performed from the start winning to the first starting port 2002 to the end of the variable display of the special symbol based on the special lottery by the starting winning, the main control board is used to perform the effect according to the progress of the game. Various commands are transmitted from 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Based on these commands, the effect corresponding to the special condition time reduction is also executed. Hereinafter, each command will be described.

FIG. 400 is a diagram showing an example of a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The command shown in FIG. 400 is a part, and various commands are included as needed in addition to the example shown in the figure. The command is mainly composed of a "status" indicating the type of the command and a "mode" indicating the detailed contents of the command, each of which is 2 bytes.

[25-2-1. Special figure winning related commands]
At the time of starting prize for the first starting port 2002, a special lottery is executed in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, and commands and the like related to the starting prize and the special lottery are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. For example, a command for instructing the execution of a pre-reading effect based on a pre-judgment result of a special lottery or an effect associated with a start opening prize (increase in the number of pending operations) is included. The preliminary determination of the special lottery is executed based on the start memory (random value) acquired at the time of the start winning.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, the commands whose classification is "special figure winning" correspond to these commands. The "starting opening winning command" is transmitted when a game ball wins a winning opening. At this time, the command may be different for each starting port, or may be specified by the value of "mode".

The "command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of winning" is a command for transmitting the number of pending operations at the time of winning the start opening. It may be transmitted at the time of winning the start opening, that is, when the number of pending operations is increased, and may be transmitted only when the pre-lottery is won and the look-ahead effect can be executed. Whether or not to actually execute the look-ahead effect may be decided on the peripheral control board 1510 side, or even if the player is not elected, the look-ahead effect (so-called ghost effect) is executed. You may.

In addition, the "command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the time of winning" sets different "status" for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the same manner as the "command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the start of fluctuation", and "mode". The number of pending operations may be specified in. On the other hand, the "status" may be a common value, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 may be specified by the upper bit of the "mode", and the operation hold number may be specified by the lower bit.

The "special symbol type look-ahead command" and the "variable pattern look-ahead command" are sent when the pre-judgment of the special lottery is won, and may be sent together with the "special figure hold number designation command at the time of winning", but peripheral control. It may be transmitted before the look-ahead effect is executed on the substrate 1510. The "special symbol type pre-reading command" is a command for notifying the type (winning type) of the special symbol (stop symbol) specified at the time of the preliminary determination of the special lottery. The "variation pattern look-ahead command" is a command for notifying the variation pattern of the variation display of the special symbol. The "special symbol type look-ahead command" and the "variable pattern look-ahead command" may be different commands as different "status" in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, or may be different commands as the common "status" value of "mode". It may be distinguished by a value.

[25-2-2. Special figure fluctuation related commands]
If the variable display of the special symbol continues after winning the prize at the start opening, the start memory acquired at the time of the start prize is retained up to a predetermined number. When the continuous variable display of the special symbol ends, the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved start memory is started. At the start of the change of the special symbol, a command related to the special symbol variation display game (variation display of the special symbol) corresponding to the result of the special lottery and a command related to the game state at the time of executing the special symbol variation display game are transmitted.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, the commands whose classification is "special figure variation" correspond to these commands. A variable pattern command, a symbol type command, and a symbol stop command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. The special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 may be specified by the "status", or may be specified by the "mode". In the example shown in FIG. 400, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is specified by the "status", and different values are set and distinguished in the "status" depending on whether the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is used. The outline of each command will be described below. Here, the special symbol 1 will be described, but the special symbol 2 has the same configuration.

The "command for specifying the number of reserved special figures at the start of fluctuation" is a command for transmitting the number of pending operations at the start of variable display of the special symbol. It is transmitted when the change of the special symbol starts, that is, when the number of pending operations decreases. A different "status" may be set for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, and the number of pending operations may be specified in the "mode". On the other hand, the "status" may be a common value, the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 may be specified by the upper byte of the "mode", and the operation hold number may be specified by the lower bit.

The "special symbol 1 variation pattern command" is a command for notifying the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol 1, and is transmitted at the start of the variation of the special symbol 1. The "special symbol 1 symbol type command" is a command for notifying the type of the symbol in the variation display of the symbol 1 as a result of the special lottery. Is sent immediately after the transmission.

The "special symbol 1 symbol stop command" is transmitted at the end of the variation display of the special symbol 1, that is, after the variation time has elapsed. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the "special symbol 1 symbol stop command", the effect related to the variable display of the special symbol 1 is terminated, and the result of the special lottery is displayed.

Regarding the "special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command", "special figure 2 symbol type command", and "special figure 2 symbol stop command", information about the special symbol 2 is notified to the peripheral control board 1510 instead of the special symbol 1. ..

[25-2-3. Status-related commands]
Further, a command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of information regarding the game state is transmitted from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control board 1510 executes an effect according to the game state based on the notified command. The command for notifying the information regarding the gaming state includes a command for notifying the current gaming state and a command for notifying the information regarding the transition to another gaming state.

In the table shown in FIG. 400, the commands whose classification is "state" correspond to these commands. The "power-on state command" is a command for notifying the game state at the time of power-on, and notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the game state specified from the RAM information backed up after recovery from the power failure, and the relevant The effect corresponding to the game state is executed.

The "special symbol change state command" is a command for notifying the game state at the start of change of the special symbol, and executes an effect corresponding to the notified game state as necessary. At this time, the commands may be distinguished by different "status" for each game state, or may be distinguished by "mode" as a common "status".

The "special symbol stop state end command" is a command for notifying the game state at the end of the change of the special symbol, and if necessary (for example, when the game state is switched), the effect corresponding to the notified game state is produced. Execute. Further, the parameters related to the game state may be updated (initialized) when the command is received.

The "remaining state count command" is a command for notifying the remaining number of times that the current gaming state continues (the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed). The number of remaining states subtracted according to the progress of the game is notified. Since the number of remaining states can be set to a value (2 bytes) larger than 1 byte (255), the command for transmitting the upper byte and the command for transmitting the lower byte are divided and transmitted. The "transition destination command at the end of fluctuation" is a command for designating the game state of the transfer destination when shifting from the current game state to another game state.

It should be noted that the transition to another gaming state may be determined by changing the "remaining state count command" instead of the "special figure stop state end command". In this case, the transition of the gaming state can be determined at the timing when the number of remaining states changes from "1" to "0". Since the normal game state continues unless a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a special lottery is won and the time is shortened), the number of remaining states of the normal game state cannot be defined. Therefore, for reasons such as simplification of the program, it is conceivable to implement the command so that the command is continuously transmitted with the number of remaining states being "0". In this case, it is necessary to determine the transition of the gaming state based on the change in the number of remaining states, instead of determining the transition of the gaming state only by the number of remaining states.

Further, by notifying the number of remaining states, it is possible to execute a countdown effect suggesting a transition of the gaming state. For example, in the countdown effect, the notification of the remaining number of times is started after the remaining number of times until the transition to the time saving state reaches a specific number of times, and the normal effect is continued until the remaining number of times reaches the specific number of times.

Furthermore, the look-ahead effect is to prevent a discrepancy between the content of the look-ahead effect and the actual lottery result due to the difference between the game state at the time of starting winning and the game state at the time of lottery execution depending on the number of remaining states notified. It is possible to suppress the execution of. For example, when the table of the fluctuation pattern is divided into the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the pre-reading effect is prohibited for the predetermined remaining number of times (for the maximum number of holds) for switching to the fluctuation pattern table in the time-saving state.

Even if the execution of the look-ahead effect is stopped and the countdown effect is being executed, the winning probability does not change, but there is a possibility of winning the special lottery. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the special lottery is won during the execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is interrupted even if the number of times the countdown effect is executed remains, and the game ends without restarting. This is because if the special lottery is won, the game state will be different from the game state suggested by the countdown effect.

Also, if a RAM error occurs during the execution of the countdown effect, the countdown effect is interrupted. At this time, even if the gaming machine can be restarted normally, the execution of the running countdown effect is stopped, and the gaming is restarted in the normal gaming state. This is because the value such as the number of remaining states is initialized by restarting the gaming machine (returning the power) to eliminate the RAM abnormality, so the game cannot be continued from the state before the interruption. be. In addition to the RAM abnormality, a magnetic abnormality or the like is detected, and even when the game is stopped, the countdown effect is interrupted, and even if the magnetic abnormality is resolved, the game is started from the normal gaming state. Since a magnetic anomaly cannot occur in a normal game state (it can occur only by unauthorized operation), the countdown effect is interrupted in order to intentionally reduce the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a minor obstacle such as a ball jam occurs and the door is opened to eliminate the obstacle, the countdown effect is temporarily interrupted. At this time, the game is continued by clearing the ball clogging and closing the opened door again, and the interrupted countdown effect is also resumed. That is, if the door is opened during the countdown effect, the countdown effect is temporarily interrupted, but the countdown effect is restarted when the door is closed. Ball jamming is an obstacle that can occur without being caused by fraudulent activity, and since door opening is also performed by general maintenance, the game is played by starting the game from the initial state without restarting after interrupting the production. Since there is a risk of degrading the interest of the game, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is controlled to continue the game.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a plurality of factors that interrupt the execution of the countdown effect, and it is possible to determine whether to restart the countdown effect or not to restart the countdown effect while the countdown effect is interrupted, depending on the interruption factor. Therefore, if a factor that can be restarted occurs during the countdown effect, the countdown effect can be restarted after the interruption factor is eliminated, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. In addition, when the interruption factor is accompanied by a special situation (RAM abnormality, etc.), by preventing the countdown effect from being restarted, it is possible to prevent the countdown effect from being restarted even though the countdown effect is not originally executed. is doing.

Even if the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied reaches a predetermined remaining number of times that the variable pattern table is switched to the time-saving state, the pre-reading effect may be executed without being prohibited. At this time, a look-ahead effect different from the usual one may be executed. For example, when the lottery by the start memory in which the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied (the remaining number of times until the state shifts to the time saving state) is held within the predetermined remaining number of times is won, the effect of notifying that the special condition time saving does not occur. (Special condition time saving suppression effect) may be executed. As a result, it can be suggested that a big hit occurs for the player by executing the effect of notifying that the special condition time reduction does not occur even though the special condition time reduction should occur. In this way, the special condition time saving function is activated after the end of the jackpot (or the end of the probability fluctuation) to the end of the predetermined number of fluctuations, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the state shifts to the time saving state). If you win the lottery by the start memory that is held within the predetermined remaining number of times), it is decided internally to suppress the activation of the special condition time saving function, and based on this decision, the remaining number of times display is the predetermined number of times. During the displayed period, a special look-ahead effect (special condition time saving suppression effect) may be executed.

As described above, by notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the number of remaining states from the main control board 1310, it is possible to produce an effect that suggests useful information to the player, thereby diversifying the variation of the effect and producing the effect. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy between the content and the actual lottery result, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times after the time saving transition count is cleared (initialized), the gaming machine shifts to the time saving state (special condition time saving). Therefore, the number of times that the special lottery is not continuously won (time reduction shift count) is counted by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the main control board 1310 creates a "special condition remaining number of times command" based on the counted time saving transition count, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. When the time saving transition count is updated by addition, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is calculated from the difference between the time saving transition count and the time saving transition count. When the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the time saving transition count may be made to correspond to the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the main control board 1310 may transmit only the command indicating the value of the time saving transition count without generating the command for the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied and transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the peripheral control board 1510 calculates the remaining number of times until the special condition is satisfied by executing a predetermined arithmetic process based on the command indicating the value of the time saving transition count. Specifically, when "0" is set when the time saving transition count is cleared and the time saving transition count is added and updated, the calculation result with the time saving transition count managed by the peripheral control board 1510 (time saving transition count). -Display the command value (time reduction transition count) as the remaining number of times. If the number of time reduction transitions differs for each model (series), specify the model from the command including the model specifications received when the power is turned on, and select the number of time reduction transitions from the predefined time reduction transition count table. You may do so. On the other hand, when the time saving transition count is set when the time saving transition count is cleared and the time saving transition count is subtracted and updated, the count value of the command indicating the received time saving transition count value is used as it is and displayed as the remaining number. You may.

When the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes "0" and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the time saving state by the special condition time saving function, the value of the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied becomes "0" while the time saving state continues. Be maintained. Further, when the time saving state by the special condition time saving function is changed to the normal gaming state again, the time saving transition count is not cleared, so that the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is maintained at "0". Therefore, as described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even if the time saving state by the special condition time saving function is restored to the normal gaming state, the time saving state by the special condition time saving function is changed again until the time saving transition count is cleared. It is not possible to migrate. That is, even in the same normal gaming state, there are cases where the special condition time reduction occurs and cases where it does not occur.

In addition to the commands illustrated in FIG. 400, the commands whose classification is "state" include commands such as "power-on state command" and "power-on state command" that notify the game state when the power is turned on. It includes a "return destination command when the power is turned on" that is transmitted immediately after and can specify the return destination of the game control.

[25-3. Control at the time of time saving state transition]
The normal time reduction is the same as the conventional control, and the special lottery is won, and after the end of the big hit game state generated by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the time reduction state is entered. The effect during the reduced working hours is the same as that of the conventional game control (effect by the normal reduced working hours), and for example, an effect such as setting a background different from the normal game state is executed.

In the special condition time reduction in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 397, after clearing the time reduction transition count, the special lottery is not continuously won a predetermined number of times (number of time reduction transitions; 300 times in the present embodiment). If it is (when special conditions are met), it shifts to the time saving state. Specifically, it shifts to the time saving state at the timing when the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied changes from 1 to 0. When the time saving transition count is updated by addition, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is a value obtained by subtracting the time saving transition count from the time saving transition count, and is updated after the variation display of the special symbol is completed. When the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction, it may be shared with the time saving transition count. When the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied becomes 0, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the reduced working hours state in the game enable time processing of the timer interrupt process. At this time, the upper limit number of times (100 times) is set for the number of remaining states in the time saving state.

Here, an example of the screen transition (effect mode) at the time of transitioning to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be described. FIG. 401 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition at the time of transition to a time saving state due to a special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 401, (A) shows a state in which the symbol is stopped in the last symbol change in the normal gaming state before shifting to the time saving state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect such as the countdown effect is not executed until the fluctuation immediately before the transition to the time reduction state, but as shown in (B), the time reduction rush effect is executed at the same time as the transition to the time reduction state is confirmed.

In addition, when the transition to the time reduction state is approaching, a countdown effect for displaying the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition to the time reduction state may be executed. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations is less than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, without specifying the remaining number of times, a character may appear or the background color may be changed to suggest that the time is shortened.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the player shifts to the reduced working hours state, the background for the normal gaming state is set to the background for the reduced working hours state, and it can be recognized that the player has entered the reduced working hours state. After executing the time saving rush effect, the time saving state screen shown in (C) is displayed. The background of the screen for the time-saving state is different from the screen for the normal game state. In the example of FIG. 401, the background of the screen for the normal game state is monochromatic (colorless) for convenience, while the time-saving state. The background of the screen is shaded. Actually, the screen for the normal game state and the screen for the time saving state may be different, the mode of the effect pattern may be different in addition to the background color, or different characters may be displayed.

Further, in the time saving state of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the gaming ball is fired in the area on the right side of the gaming area (right-handed), the right-handing instruction is displayed on the time-saving state screen. In addition, the remaining number of times that the time saving state continues is displayed. It is not necessary to display these contents, and other information may be displayed.

When the variable display symbol is stopped when the special condition is satisfied (FIG. 401 (A)), the special symbol stop state end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 together with the special symbol stop command. The peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that the current gaming state (normal gaming state) is terminated by the command to end the state when the special figure is stopped, and further, after the symbol confirmation time elapses, the special condition is not satisfied by the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied. By notifying that the number of times is 0, it is possible to specify the transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. When the transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is specified, the peripheral control board 1510 can execute the time saving state entry effect (FIG. 401 (B)).

At the start of the change of the special symbol (FIG. 401 (C)), the change start command, the special figure change state command, the change pattern command, and the change symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310. By these commands, the variation time and the content of the effect associated with the variation display of the special symbol are specified based on the game state and the result of the special lottery. Specifically, a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern is specified, a variation pattern is selected from the specified variation pattern table, and a corresponding effect is executed. An example of the fluctuation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIG. 403. In addition, along with these commands, a remaining state count command for notifying the remaining status count of the time saving state is transmitted. By the notified remaining state count command, it is possible to execute a countdown effect or the like indicating the number of fluctuations until the time saving state ends. In the example shown in FIG. 401 (C), the remaining number of times (100 times) of the time saving state specified by the remaining state count command is displayed on the screen.

Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. At this time, the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is transmitted, and the transmission of the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is continued until the time saving transition count is cleared. When the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied reaches 0, the transmission of the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied may be prohibited until the time saving transition count is cleared.

[25-4. Control at the end of the time saving state]
Subsequently, the control at the end of the time saving state will be described. As described above, the time saving state ends when the special lottery is not won for a predetermined maximum number of times. Even if the special lottery is won, the ongoing time reduction state will end, but the time reduction transition count will be cleared and the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction will be newly started.

In the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, the update of the time reduction transition count is continued, so after shifting from the time reduction state to the normal gaming state, when the remaining number of times the special state is established reaches 0, the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is performed. .. On the other hand, in the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, the update of the time reduction transition count is stopped at the time of transition to the time reduction state, and the special condition is not satisfied until the time reduction transition count is cleared. Does not migrate.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time saving transition count may or may not be updated even in the time saving state. At this time, the player may be able to recognize whether the time reduction transition counter is in the updated state or the time reduction transition counter is not updated due to the difference in the effect mode during the time reduction state continuation. If the player can recognize that the time saving transition counter is updated, it is possible to expect the player to shift to the time saving state again even if the ongoing time saving state ends, thereby increasing the player's expectation. , The fun of the game can be improved.

Regarding the difference in the effect mode while the time reduction state is continuing, for example, contents such as "time reduction transition counter is being updated" and "time reduction transition counter is stopped" may be displayed in the background portion, or may be displayed in the background portion of the effect symbol. You may. Further, different effect symbols may be displayed depending on whether the time saving transition counter is updated or not. Further, the display of the background of the entire screen may be different, or the character suggesting whether or not the time saving transition counter may be updated may be displayed.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect mode at the end of the time saving state due to the normal time reduction is different from the effect mode at the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction. Specifically, at the end of the time saving state due to the normal time saving, the time saving state ending effect is explicitly executed, directly or indirectly suggesting the transition to the next time saving state, and then the transition to the normal gaming state is performed. On the other hand, when the time saving state ends due to the special condition time saving, the game state shifts to the normal game state as it is without executing the time saving state ending effect. It should be noted that it is possible for the player to recognize the end of the time saving state itself because the effect such as changing the background based on the transition to the normal gaming state is executed regardless of which time saving state ends. ..

Here, a specific production mode at the end of the time saving state will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition at the end of the time saving state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 402 (A) shows a state in which the remaining number of times in the time saving state is one, that is, a state in which the time saving state ends with the next fluctuation.

If the time saving state currently being executed is the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the normal effect in the time saving state is executed even in the final variable display (FIG. 402 (B1)). Then, the final variation display ends, and the stop symbol is displayed (FIG. 402 (C1)). That is, in the case of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, even the 100th variation display is controlled in the same manner as the variation display from the 1st to the 99th times, and is based on the common variation pattern table from the start to the end of the time reduction state. The production content is selected.

When the change display of the symbol ends due to the final change in the time saving state, the game shifts to the normal game state. At the end of the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the end effect etc. is not executed, the display such as the background is switched to the display for the normal game state, and the right-handed display (arrow, character notation etc.) for the time saving state is not Display it. Further, if there is a hold memory, the variable display of the symbol is started (FIG. 402 (D)), and the game is continued as it is.

On the other hand, in the case of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, a special effect indicating the end of the time reduction state is executed at the time of the final fluctuation display (FIG. 402 (B2)), and further, the end of the time reduction state is notified after the symbol is stopped and displayed. The end effect is executed (FIG. 402 (C2)). The special effect and the end effect may be a series of effects or may be individual effects.

It should be noted that the shortened missed fluctuation time other than the reach of the special symbol may be the same for the normal time shortened and the special condition shortened time, or the shortened missed fluctuation time other than some reach may be different. However, regarding the stop period at the time of deviation in the final fluctuation (the period until the next fluctuation starts), the normal time reduction shall be longer than the special condition time reduction. As a result, it is possible to secure the effect time when shifting from the normal time reduction to the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by smoothing the flow of executing the end effect. On the other hand, the suspension period due to the final fluctuation of the special condition reduction of working hours shall be the same as or almost the same as the suspension period other than the final fluctuation.

At the end of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, control is executed in which the last (100th) variation display is different from the variation display from the 1st to 99th times, unlike the case of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction. At this time, the effect content is selected based on a variation pattern table (FIG. 403 (B)) different from the common variation pattern table (FIG. 403 (A)). Thereby, for example, the fluctuation time of the final variation in the normal time reduction state can be made longer than the final fluctuation in the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, and the player's expectation for the subsequent games can be increased. Further, instead of switching the fluctuation pattern table only for the final fluctuation, it may be switched stepwise according to the number of fluctuations. For example, switching may be performed at each stage of the 1st to 50th, 51st to 80th, 81st to 90th, and 91st to 99th. For the 100th variation, the effect period after the end of the variation is set to be longer than the effect period defined in the variation pattern table of each stage.

FIG. 403 is an example of the variation pattern table of the present embodiment. (A) is a table commonly used in the normal time saving state, and may be used in combination with a gaming state other than the time saving state (for example, a normal gaming state). (B) is a special table used in the case of the final change of the time saving state due to the normal time saving. The commonly used table in (A) and the special table used in the final change of the time saving state due to the normal time saving in (B) are the fluctuation time and effect in the case of shortened fluctuation in which the result of the special lottery is lost. The content is different. If the result of the special lottery of the final fluctuation is a big hit, the special effect or the like may not be executed, but the normal big hit effect may be executed.

After that, when the symbol is stopped in the final variation display, the game shifts to the normal game state (FIG. 402 (D)) as in the case of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, and the game is continued as it is. When the game shifts to the normal game state, the game progresses with a common effect regardless of whether the executed time reduction state is due to the special condition time reduction or the normal time reduction. Therefore, if the player does not confirm the special effect or the end effect at the end of the time saving state, it is not possible to determine whether or not the special condition is satisfied in the subsequent games. As a result, the player can pay attention to a series of effects, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

Except for the final fluctuation, the production during the continuous working hours is a common mode regardless of whether it is due to special conditions or normal working hours. By executing a special effect in the final change of the time saving state due to the normal time saving, it can be suggested that the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will occur if the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times thereafter, and the player's expectation. It can enhance the feeling and enhance the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the normal gaming state after the end of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state after the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction. It will be. Specifically, after the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, the transition to the normal gaming state in which the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction does not occur again, whereas after the end of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction occurs. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player in that it shifts to a normal gaming state in which In addition to this, in the normal game state after the end of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal game state after the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, so that the gaming state is advantageous for the player. good. Further, in the normal gaming state after the end of the time saving state due to the normal time saving, the effect suggesting the setting value information of the gaming machine may be easily executed, or various look-ahead effects may be easily executed. ..

The mode of effect at the end of the time saving state has been described above, but the relationship with the command received from the main control board 1310 for performing the above-mentioned effect control will be supplemented. The peripheral control board 1510 can determine the end of the time saving state by the special figure stop state end command, but since it is transmitted when the symbol of the final fluctuation at which the time saving state ends is stopped, an effect based on the end of the time saving state is produced. When it is executed, only a limited effect can be executed, which may cause inconvenience. For example, since the end effect in the time-saving state cannot be executed until after the end of the symbol change, only the short-time effect with many restrictions can be executed, so that there is a possibility that the effect with high interest cannot be executed.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, a special effect different from the normal one is executed in the final symbol change in the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction. In addition, if the end of the time saving state is determined only by the special figure stop state end command, the special effect (end effect) may not be sufficiently interesting, so the time saving state included in the remaining state count command By specifying the end timing of the time-saving state based on the number of remaining states of, it is possible to execute the effect including one or more fluctuations before the end of the time-saving state. For example, by determining the end of the time saving state at the timing when the number of remaining states changes from 1 to 0, it is possible to execute a special effect with the final fluctuation of the time saving state. Since the remaining state count command is transmitted at the start of the symbol change, it can be determined that the final change in the time saving state is when the number of remaining states is 1.

However, although it is possible to specify in advance the end timing of the time saving state by the number of remaining states, it is not possible to determine whether the time saving state during execution is due to the normal time saving or the special condition time saving. Here, in the case of the reduced working hours due to the normal reduced working hours, the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied is continuously updated, and the value is at least larger than 0 (FIG. 397). On the other hand, the execution of the time saving state by the special condition time saving is after the special condition is satisfied, and the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is 0. The remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the symbol confirmation time elapses after the symbol is stopped by the command for the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied. It identifies whether the state is due to the normal time reduction or the special condition time reduction, and determines whether or not to execute the special effect. Then, in the case of the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, a special effect different from the normal is executed by referring to the variation pattern table different from the normal in the final symbol variation, while in the case of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, the common variation is performed. Control not to execute a special effect by referring to the pattern table.

From the above, since other controls can be shared by changing only the reference destination of the fluctuation pattern table, a characteristic effect is executed while minimizing the complexity of the game control (effect control). be able to.

Further, when the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the reduced working hours state, or from the reduced working hours state to the normal gaming state, the execution of the look-ahead effect may be stopped before and after the change of the gaming state. This is because the result of the special lottery may have a high probability in the case of the transition to the reduced working hours state due to the normal shortening of working hours, and there is a possibility that the preliminary judgment result may be inconsistent. Further, since the effect mode changes depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the complicated effect control or the change in the effect mode. If the winning probability is the same in the special lottery even if the game state changes, at least the result of the preliminary determination does not cause a discrepancy, so the look-ahead effect may be continued.

Further, the period for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead effect may be determined by the maximum number of holds (for example, 4) or the like. In the case of normal time reduction, the start judgment of the look-ahead prohibition period is made based on the special symbol type look-ahead command and the variation pattern look-ahead command. The judgment may be made by comparing with the period (maximum number of holdings).

Note that the special condition remaining count command does not always send the command when there is a remaining count, but as a specific condition (for example, when the remaining count is only a few (4 times)), the special condition fulfillment remaining count command is used. May be sent. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the number of times until the special condition time reduction is activated by illegally detecting the remaining number of times command. In addition, if the command for the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied is sent every time, the command for the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied cannot be sent immediately if it overlaps with another transmission command (commands that have not been sent remain in the command transmission buffer). There is a risk that the interest of the game will decline due to a shift in the production start timing based on the command. Therefore, by reducing the frequency of transmitting the command for the remaining number of times that the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the effect start timing from being delayed (delayed) due to the untransmitted command remaining in the command transmission buffer.

[25-5. Modification example]
In the gaming machine described above, the special condition is satisfied when the special lottery based on the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting port 2002 is not won consecutively a predetermined number of times, and the normal gaming state is changed to the time saving state. It was a thing. In this case, when the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, the time saving transition count is not updated, and the game becomes a monotonous game in which the lottery is repeated until the special conditions are satisfied, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game. rice field.

[25-5-1. Counting slot]
Therefore, as a modification of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a gaming machine provided with a counting ball opening unit 2007 capable of updating the time saving transition count in addition to the first starting opening 2002 will be described. FIG. 404 is a diagram showing a modified example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. On the game board 5 of the game machine of this modification, the counting ball opening unit 2007 is arranged on the left side (left-handed area) of the game area and above the 2300 on the side unit. Since the configurations other than the counting ball opening unit 2007 are the same as those of the game board 5 shown in FIG. 10, the description thereof will be omitted.

[25-5-2. Structure of counting slot]
FIG. 405 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of an example of a counting ball opening unit 2007 arranged in a modified example of the gaming board of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The counting ball opening unit 2007 of this modification is provided with a receiving port 2007a opened upward, and can receive a game ball flowing down the left side (left-handed area) of the game area. The game ball received from the receiving port 2007a is guided to the counting ball opening 2007b via the taxiway 2007d formed inside. A sensor (not shown) for detecting the passage of a game ball is arranged inside the counting ball opening 2007b, and the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered based on a signal output from the sensor. Count the number of.

At the bottom of the taxiway 2007d, a slidable movable piece 2007c is arranged on the front / rear side of the game board 5. When the movable piece 2007c is slid to the front side of the game board 5, the game ball can enter the counting ball opening 2007b (ball entry permission state). On the other hand, when the movable piece 2007c slides to the rear side of the game board 5, the game ball falls downward from the taxiway 2007d, and the ball cannot enter (the ball entry is not permitted). Hereinafter, the path through which the game ball moves in the counting ball opening unit 2007 will be described for each state.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing a movement path of a game ball when the counting ball opening unit 2007 of the modified example of the present embodiment is in a ball entry permission state, (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view, and (B) is a cross-sectional view. Is.

In a state where the movable piece 2007c is slid toward the front side of the game board 5 (ball entry permission state), the movable piece 2007c forms the bottom surface of the taxiway 2007d as shown in (A). As a result, the game ball received from the receiving port 2007a is guided from the taxiway 2007d to the counting ball opening 2007b, and can be balled.

FIG. 407 is a diagram showing a movement path of a game ball when the counting ball opening unit 2007 of the modified example of the present embodiment is in a ball entry disallowed state, (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view, and (B) is a cross section. It is a figure.

In the state where the movable piece 2007c is slid to the rear side of the game board 5 (the ball entry is not permitted), the bottom surface of the taxiway 2007d is not formed, and as shown in (A), an opening that opens downward is provided. It is formed. The opening has a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball received from the reception port 2007a falls (flows down) into the game area below the counting ball opening unit 2007. The dropped game ball rolls to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit 2300, and flows down toward the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002.

[25-5-3. Ball entry control at the counting entry port]
As described above, the counting ball opening unit 2007 can switch whether or not to enter the counting ball opening 2007b by controlling the position of the movable piece 2007c. By outputting a control signal to the drive body for operating the movable piece 2007c, the main control board 1310 can control whether or not the ball can enter the counting entry port 2007b according to the game state or the like.

As an example of specific control, a gate portion for shifting the counting entry port unit 2007 to the entry permission state may be arranged, and the ball entry permission state may be set for a predetermined time when passing through the gate. When the transition condition of the ball entry permission state of the counting entry port unit 2007 is to pass through the gate of the game ball, a lottery may be executed when the game ball passes through the gate, or the ball entry permission state may be always set. .. Even in the case of shifting to the ball entry permission state by lottery, it is necessary to make it easy for the special conditions to be established as the purpose of this modification, so that the player will win with a high probability (approximately 100%). At this time, by arranging the gate portion above the counting entry slot unit 2007, the game ball aiming at the gate portion is directed toward the counting entry slot unit 2007, and the game balls are frequently hit. You can play a smooth game without needing it.

Further, when the reserved memory of the first starting port 2002 has reached the maximum number, the counting input port unit 2007 may be set to the ball entry permission state. As a result, it is possible to promote the update of the reduced working hours count, and it is possible to accelerate the transition to the reduced working hours state due to the special conditions of reduced working hours. In particular, since it is possible to aim at the ball entering the first starting port 2002 while aiming at the counting ball opening unit 2007, it is possible to continuously update the time saving transition count even if the number of holdings reaches the upper limit, and the game It is possible to encourage the active continuation of. In addition, when the reserved memory of the first starting port 2002 has not reached the maximum number, the counting entry port unit 2007 is set to the ball entry disallowed state to prevent the time saving transition count from being excessively updated. , It is possible to suppress and adjust the excessive rise of the base value.

Further, the counting entry port unit 2007 may be switched between the entry permission state and the ball entry non-permission state at predetermined time intervals. At this time, if the number of holdings has reached the upper limit, the time saving transition count is not updated due to the winning of the first starting port 2002, so the time for setting the counting ball opening unit 2007 to the ball entry permission state is longer. It may be set to. On the other hand, when the number of reservations has not reached the upper limit, the player counts the ball opening unit to encourage the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the first starting port 2002 in order to maintain the original game playability. The time for allowing the ball to enter may be set to a short time (for example, a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball) so that the game ball is difficult to enter even when aiming at 2007.

The counting input ball opening unit 2007 for counting the time reduction shift count may be arranged not only in the left-handed area but also in the right-handed area or in both the left and right areas. As a result, it is possible to separate the game balls, increase the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game.

[25-5-4. Time-series change of time-saving transition count in this modification]
Here, the time-series change of the time-saving transition count will be described with reference to the figure with respect to the gaming machine in which the time-saving transition count is updated when the gaming ball enters the counting slot unit 2007. FIG. 408 is a timing chart showing changes in the time saving transition count in the modified example of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which the ball entry port unit 2007 is always in the ball entry permission state regardless of the number of holdings, the game state, or the like.

As described above, the time saving transition count is the start timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1, or the timing at which the entry of the game ball into the counting entry port 2007b is detected by the counting entry opening switch (not shown). It will be updated with. Referring to FIG. 408, the variation display of the special symbol 1 is started in the state where the time reduction transition count is “84”, and the time reduction transition count is updated to “85” (time t101). While the variable display of the special symbol 1 continues, the game ball enters the counting slot 2007b, and the time saving transition count is updated to "86" (time t102). After that, similarly, the time saving transition count is updated by the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the entry of the game ball into the counting entry opening 2007b. In the example shown in FIG. 408, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the counting input ball opening switch changes from ON to OFF, but the time saving occurs at the timing when the counting input ball opening switch changes from OFF to ON. The migration count may be updated.

[25-5-5. Lottery based on entering the ball into the counting entrance (starting winning opening)]
In the modification described above, the time saving transition count is updated when the game ball enters the counting entry port 2007b of the counting entry port unit 2007. On the other hand, the winning slot that can execute the lottery related to the addition of the game value independently of the update of the time saving transition count may be made to function as the counting slot 2007b. In this case, if the lottery is not won, the time saving transition count may be updated. Further, the lottery holding function may be provided. In the case of a special lottery, a hold display is performed on the liquid crystal display screen, but it is not necessary to notify the player about the lottery based on the entry into the counting entry slot 2007b.

The counting ball opening 2007b capable of executing the above-mentioned lottery may be used as the second starting port 2004. Specifically, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 2004, a special lottery is executed and the time saving transition count is updated unless the number of holdings is the upper limit, but if the special lottery is not won, the time saving transition count is set. You may try to update. FIG. 409 is a timing chart in the case where the second starting port 2004 functions as the counting ball opening 2007b in the modified example of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 409, even in the normal gaming state, not only the first starting port 2002 but also the second starting port 2004 can be awarded, and the special symbols corresponding to the order in which the starting winning openings are won are arranged. The variable display starts. Then, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the variable display of the special symbol 2 are started.

Referring to FIG. 409, the variation display of the special symbol 1 is started in the state where the time reduction transition count is “71”, and the time reduction transition count is updated to “72” (time t111). After the variable display of the special symbol 1, since the game ball won a prize in the second starting port 2004, the variable display of the special symbol 2 is continuously executed (time t112). At the start of the variable display of the special symbol 2, the time saving transition count is updated to "73". After that, similarly, the time saving transition count is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the winning start winning opening is started. In addition, the common time saving transition count is used regardless of the starting winning opening that won the prize.

In addition, if it is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 even in the normal gaming state and the time saving transition count is updated when the special lottery is not won, the winning in the first starting port 2002 in the normal gaming state. The second starting port 2004 is prioritized to function as a counting ball opening so as not to impair the playability. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002, a winning sound is output, but when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the winning sound is not output. Further, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the player may be able to recognize that the ball has entered by displaying a specific display. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, it may be difficult for the player to recognize that the game ball has entered without displaying the specific display.

As shown above, according to this modification, the second starting port 2004 can be made to function as a counting ball entry port. In the normal game state, by giving priority to the case where the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002, it is possible to easily generate a special condition time reduction without impairing the game performance. In addition, since it is not necessary to newly arrange a counting slot, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game without deteriorating the design cost of the game board.

[25-5-6. others]
In the transition to the reduced working hours state due to the special conditions reduced working hours, the winning probability of the ordinary lottery must always be high because the continuous operating device for the accessory cannot be operated because the special lottery has not been won. This is because if the winning probability of the ordinary lottery is not high, the second starting port 2004 will not be in the winning state even if the time is shortened, and it will be difficult to win the prize. On the other hand, if the winning probability of the normal lottery is set to a high probability, the second starting port 2004 will be in a winning state every time the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, which may impair the game playability.

In order to solve the above problem, the gate unit 2003 may have the same configuration as the counting ball opening unit 2007 described above. Specifically, in the normal game state, the gate portion 2003 is set to the ball entry prohibition state to control so that the normal lottery is not executed, and in the time saving state, the ball entry permission state is set to win the second starting port 2004. It suffices to control it to the possible state.

Further, the second starting port 2004 may have the same configuration as the counting ball opening unit 2007 described above. By setting the ball entry prohibited state in the normal game state and the ball entry permitted state in the time saving state, it is possible to control so that the second starting port 2004 cannot be won unless the time saving state is reached.

[26. Special condition time reduction (time reduction transition count: subtraction update)]
The embodiment in the case where the time saving transition count is updated by addition has been described above. Subsequently, an embodiment in the case where the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction will be described.

[26-1. Control of the reduced working hours by special conditions]
[26-1-1. Control from start to end of time saving state by special condition time saving]
First, control from the start to the end of the special condition time reduction will be described when the time reduction transition count is updated by subtraction. Similar to the case of updating by addition, the start condition of the special condition time saving shifts to the time saving state when the special lottery is not won 300 times in a row (the number of times of shortening of working hours) after the time saving transition count is initialized. The same applies to other points such as the maximum number of continuations of the time saving state.

The reduced working hours count, which controls the transition to the reduced working hours state due to the special condition reduced working hours, is updated by the state transition determination process for determining whether or not the current gaming state shifts to another gaming state. The state transition determination process is called from the special symbol loss stop process executed when the special symbol stops at the missed symbol, and the special symbol loss stop process is executed by the timer interrupt process (FIG. 329). It is called from the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step 01 TKS0080) of FIG. 354).

Hereinafter, specific control regarding the transition of the gaming state including the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be described with reference to the flowchart. FIG. 410 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a state transition determination process for determining whether or not to transition to another gaming state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

When the main control MPU 1311 starts the state transition determination process, it first sets the initial value "0" in the identification information (step 03 TKS0010). The identification information is a variable for storing information for identifying whether or not to shift the gaming state, and the value is set in the register of the CPU in the subsequent processing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the number of time reductions is 0, that is, whether or not the gaming state is the time reduction state (step 03 TKS0020). The number of time reductions corresponds to the number of fluctuations after the start of the time reduction state. In the present embodiment, when the time saving state is started, the number of continuations (for example, 100 times) is set as an initial value, and is subtracted by 1 for each change of the special symbol. At this time, if the time is shortened, a value of 1 or more is set for the number of time reductions. The initial value may be set to 0 and controlled so as to add one by one.

When the number of time reductions is 0, that is, the time reduction state is not obtained (the result of step 03 TKS0020 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the processes after step 03 TKS0060.

On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is not 0, that is, in the time reduction state (the result of step 03 TKS0020 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 subtracts 1 from the number of time reductions (step 03 TKS0030). Further, in order to determine whether or not the current variation is the final variation in the time reduction state, it is determined whether or not the number of time reductions is 0 (step 03 TKS0040). When the number of time reductions is not 0, that is, when the time reduction state continues (the result of step 03 TKS0040 is "no"), the processes after step 03 TKS0060 are executed.

On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is 0, that is, when the current fluctuation is the final fluctuation in the time reduction state (the result of step 03 TKS0040 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 indicates the end of the normal time reduction in the identification information. “1” is set (step 03 TKS0050).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (step 03 TKS0060). When the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of step 03 TKS0060 is "yes"), the processes after step 03 TKS 0130 are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of step 03 TKS0060 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the time reduction transition count is 0 (step 03 TKS0070). When the time saving transition count is 0 (the result of step 03 TKS0070 is "yes"), the processes after step 03 TKS 0130 are executed.

If the time reduction transition count is not 0 (the result of step 03 TKS0070 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 subtracts 1 from the time reduction transition count (step 03 TKS0080). Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving transition count is 0 (step 03 TKS0990). If the time reduction transition count is not 0 (the result of step 03 TKS0090 is "yes"), the processes after step 03 TKS 0130 are executed.

When the time saving transition count is 0 (the result of step 03 TKS0090 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 03 TKS0100). When the current gaming state is the reduced working hours state (the result of step 03 TKS0100 is "yes"), the processes after step 03 TKS 0130 are executed.

When the current gaming state is not the time saving state (the result of step 03 TKS0100 is "no"), the transition condition to the time saving state by the special condition time saving is satisfied, and the main control MPU 1311 has the special condition time saving in the identification information. “2” indicating the start is set (step 03 TKS0110). At this time, the value corresponding to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is set in the next state transition destination information (next state transition destination number area). Further, in order to output a signal (external output signal) from the external terminal, the ON time is set in the external output 3 timer (step 03 TKS0120). By setting the ON time in the external output 3 timer, the signal of the external output 3 is turned ON for the set ON time. The output timing of the external output signal will be described later with reference to FIG. 423.

Step 03 The processing up to TKS0120 completes the setting of the identification information, and thereafter, the gaming state is shifted based on the value of the identification information. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the value of the identification information is “0” (step 03 TKS0130). When the value of the identification information is "0" (the result of step 03 TKS0130 is "yes"), it is not necessary to shift the current gaming state to another gaming state, so the state transition determination process ends.

When the value of the identification information is not "0" (the result of step 03 TKS0130 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a state transition process for shifting the current gaming state to another gaming state (step). 03TKS0140). The state transition process is a process of determining the game state of the transition destination based on the identification information and setting necessary information. Details of the state transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 411. When the state transition process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets a command (a state transition destination command at the end of fluctuation, a state end command at special stop) corresponding to the end of the time reduction state or the arrival of the number of time reduction transitions (step 03 TKS0150). After that, the state transition determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol loss stop process.

Subsequently, a state transition process that is called from the state transition determination process, determines the game state of the transition destination, and sets necessary information will be described. FIG. 411 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the state transition process of the present embodiment.

When the state transition process is started, the main control MPU 1311 is the address of the state transition data of the next state transition destination based on the start address of the state transition data and the next state transition destination information (value in the next state transition destination number area). Is set (step 03 TKS0210). As the state transition data, various data corresponding to the game state of the migration destination are defined. Details of the state transition data will be described later with reference to FIG. 412.

Next, when the main control MPU 1311 specifies the state transition data of the next state transition destination, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the work area in which the state transition data is set (step 03 TKS0220). Further, the number of times to set the state transition data is set (step 03 TKS0230), and the set value for the set number of times is read from the specified state transition data and stored in a predetermined work area (step 03 TKS0240). When the state transition data corresponding to the next transition state is stored in the work area, the status transition process is terminated and the status transition determination process is restored.

In addition to the state transition determination process called from the special symbol loss stop process, the state transition process is executed at the timing when the game state changes. It is executed at the timing when the time saving state starts (transitions).

The state transition determination process and the state transition process can be executed in common at the start of the normal time reduction, the end of the normal time reduction, the start of the special condition time reduction, and the switching of each game state at the end of the special condition time reduction. Since it is not necessary to provide processing for each switching of each gaming state, it is possible to reduce the program capacity. Furthermore, by standardizing the processing, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of debugging as compared with providing individual processing, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

Subsequently, a configuration example of the work area for storing the state transition data and the state transition data will be described. FIG. 412 is a diagram showing an example of the state transition data of the present embodiment. In the state transition data, the number of times the state is maintained, the state flag, the probability change flag, the time saving flag, the next state transition destination number, and the number of times the state is displayed are defined according to the game state after the transition. The migration destination number is given for convenience of explanation. The contents of each item will be described with reference to the work area (FIG. 413) for storing the state transition data.

Further, the state transition data is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 412, and information set at the time of switching the gaming state can be changed / added as needed, and for example, the gaming state of the transition destination can be specified. The status flag and the next status transition destination number may be included at least.

FIG. 413 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a work area for storing the state transition data of the present embodiment. The work area for storing the state transition data is allocated to a predetermined area in the main control RAM 1312, and in addition to the area corresponding to each item of the state transition data, the number of items of the state transition data (number of state setting data, Step 03 An area for storing the "number of times to set the state transition data" set in the process of TKS0230 is included. When transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, the state transition data corresponding to the transition destination gaming state is acquired and stored in the work area.

Next, each item of the work area for storing the state transition data and the state transition data will be described. A description of each item is given in the remarks column of the work area of FIG. 413.

The state maintenance count is the number of times that the corresponding gaming state continues after the transition, and for example, in the case of a time-saving state, it is the time-saving number of times. The state flag is set to "0" in the case of low probability non-time reduction (normal game state), "1" in the case of high probability time reduction (probability variation state), and "2" in the case of low probability time reduction. The probability variation flag is set to "0" when the winning probability of the special lottery is low, and "1" when the winning probability is high. The time reduction flag is set to "0" when the time reduction is not activated and "1" when the time reduction is activated. In addition, in order to distinguish between the time reduction due to the special condition time reduction and the normal time reduction, "2" may be set at the time reduction operation due to the special condition time reduction. The next state transition destination number is a transition destination number for specifying the game state to be transferred next when the special lottery for the number of times the state is maintained is not won. The status display count is used to generate the time saving remaining count command, but is substantially the same as the status maintenance count.

Specifically, for example, if the normal time reduction a is won in the normal game state, the state transition process is called by the big winning opening opening end interval process (at the end of the big hit ending) (not shown) at the end of the big hit game state. .. In the state transition process, the state transition data corresponding to the normal time reduction a (migration destination number 2) is selected, the state maintenance count "100", the state flag "2", the probability change flag "0", the time reduction flag "1", and the next time. The status transition destination number “1” and the status display count “100” are set in each work area. As a result, the low-probability time-saving state is set to continue for 100 fluctuations. When the time saving state by the normal time saving a ends, "1" is set in the next state transition destination number, so that the game returns to the normal gaming state. Further, the probability variation a (transition destination number 4) and the probability variation b (migration destination number 5) have the same set values, but the effect modes are different. Since the game state to be transferred differs depending on the result of the special lottery, the normal game state is set to "0" as the state transition data and is not defined in the next transfer destination number. In addition, in the case of shifting to the probable change state of the probable change a as a result of winning the special lottery in the time shortened state of the normal time shortened a, even if the remaining number of times of the time shortened state remains, the probable change is performed in the state transition process after the jackpot game state ends. The state transition data corresponding to a (migration destination number 4) is selected, and the gaming state is transferred.

The work area that stores the status transition data corresponds to the status transition data item from the beginning of the region, and corresponds to the status maintenance count area, status flag area, probability change flag area, time saving flag area, next status transition destination number area, and status display. The number of times command area is arranged. Following these areas, the number of status setting data is assigned. In addition, a 2-byte area is allocated to the status maintenance count area and the status display count command area, and a 1-byte area is allocated to the status flag area, the probability change flag area, the time saving flag area, and the next state transition destination number area. ..

Since the value to be set and the setting order are predetermined for the state transition data of the present embodiment, the address of each work area is changed by arranging the work areas according to the order in which the data included in the state transition data is set. No need to define in the migration table. Here, to explain the procedure for setting the value set in the state transition data in the work area, first, the number of state setting data is acquired from the work area. Next, the value is acquired byte by byte from the start address of the state transition data to be set, and the value sequentially acquired from the start of the work area (state maintenance count area) is set. Repeat for the number of status setting data while updating the address to acquire the value and the address of the work area to store the value. Since the acquisition of the value and the setting of the work area are repeated byte by byte in this way, the data included in the state transition data is defined in byte units. Therefore, the number of times the state is maintained and the number of times the state is displayed are divided into upper byte and lower byte and are individually defined. Further, the number of state setting data corresponds to the total number of bytes in each area, and the difference between the start address of the work area and the address of the area for storing the number of state setting data is set in the program. As a result, even if the number or size of data included in the status setting data changes, there is no need to redefine the number of status setting data, and the program can be used for general purposes without modification. It is possible to flexibly respond to the above and improve the development efficiency of gaming machines.

Here, the data corresponding to each gaming state included in the state transition data will be described. In the normal gaming state, the gaming state does not shift based only on the number of fluctuations, so 0 is set for the number of times the state is maintained. In addition, after the time reduction transition count is initialized, it may shift to the time reduction state on the condition that the special lottery is not won consecutively a predetermined number of times (special condition time reduction), but when the time reduction transition count is not initialized. Since it is not always possible to shift to the time saving state, the time saving transition number is not set in the state maintenance count.

Further, in the present embodiment, three types of patterns are defined for the low probability that the winning probability of the special lottery is low and the low probability that the time is shortened. Specifically, after winning the special lottery, if the transition is made after the big hit game state (normal time reduction a), or if the transition is based on the result of the special lottery (normal time reduction b), after the time reduction transition count is initialized. It is a case where the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times in a row (special condition time reduction).

The items of the work area for storing the state transition data and the state transition data have been described above. Each data of the state transition data is set to a value according to the game specifications and the like, and the number of records increases or decreases according to the type of the game state. In addition, when the game state to be transferred after the end of a specific game state is determined in advance, the control to transfer the game state is controlled by setting the number corresponding to the next state in the next state transfer destination number. It is possible to perform this based on the information defined in the state transition data, and it is possible to change the transition destination of the gaming state without modifying the program code.

FIG. 414 is a diagram showing a modified example of the state transition data of the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 412, when the gaming state shifts to another gaming state due to the establishment of a predetermined condition (as a result of the special lottery, the time saving transition count), the shifted gaming state continues for the set state maintenance number of times. After that, it was defined to shift to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 414, for example, in the normal time reduction hit, the gaming state changes in the order of the normal time reduction a-1 time reduction state, the normal time reduction a-2 time reduction state, and the normal time reduction a-3 time reduction state. do. This makes it possible to make the effect content different in each game state. For example, by associating the effect content with the game state, it is possible to execute an effect that progresses step by step with the transition of the game state without performing complicated control. Is possible. Further, the table that defines the fluctuation time may be switched at the switching timing of the gaming state.

Further explaining, as a result of the special lottery, if the normal time reduction hit is won, the state transition data of the transfer destination number "2" is set, and the time reduction state of the normal time reduction a-1 is started. After that, when the fluctuation for the number of state maintenance times (50 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "3", so that the normal time reduction a-2 is shifted to the time reduction state, and the corresponding state transition data is displayed. Set. Similarly, when the fluctuation for the number of state maintenance times (30 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "4", so that the normal time reduction a-3 is shifted to the time reduction state, and the corresponding state transition data is obtained. Is set. Finally, when the fluctuation for the number of state maintenance times (20 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so that the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. The case of probabilistic hit is also controlled in the same way.

In the case of the special condition time reduction, the state transition data of the migration destination number "7" is set when the condition is satisfied (when the value of the time reduction transition count changes from 1 to 0), and the time reduction state of the special condition time reduction -1 is set. Start. After that, when the fluctuation for the number of state maintenance times (100 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "8", so that the time shift to the special condition time reduction -2 is performed, and the corresponding state transition data is displayed. Set. Further, when the fluctuation for the number of times the state is maintained (700 times) is completed, the next state transition destination number is set to "1", so that the game shifts to the normal gaming state, and the corresponding state transition data is set. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by enabling the transition of the gaming state only by setting the data, it is not necessary to create the process related to the transition of the gaming state in the program code, and it is necessary to match the specification change. It is possible to easily add or change by simply modifying the data.

It should be noted that each parameter set in the state transition data is not limited to the example shown in the figure as an example, and may be information that switches according to the gaming state. Specifically, it suffices to include information that specifies the switching timing of the gaming state (for example, the number of times the state is maintained) and information that specifies the gaming state of the transition destination (for example, the next state transition destination number), and other information. Information may be set as needed. Specifically, it may be information for specifying a gaming state, and may include, for example, information indicating a winning probability of a special lottery, information indicating a winning probability of a normal lottery, and the like. In this way, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine by sharing the process of shifting the gaming state by including the information for specifying the gaming state after the transition of the state and simplifying the game control.

The information for specifying the switching timing of the game state is, for example, the above-mentioned number of fluctuations (number of times the special lottery is executed, number of times the state is maintained), and when the game is continued for a predetermined number of fluctuations, the game shifts to the next game state. .. In addition, before the game for a predetermined number of fluctuations is completed, for example, when a special lottery is won, the game may shift to another game state depending on the number of fluctuations, regardless of the number of fluctuations. Therefore, it is preferable to be able to define not only the change of the gaming state according to the number of fluctuations but also the transition of the gaming state by satisfying a predetermined condition such as winning a special lottery. For example, an item corresponding to a specific flag may be defined in the state transition data, and the gaming state may be transitioned when the flag is set to ON. Checking this flag may be performed by a process that is executed periodically, such as timer interrupt processing. In this way, the timing to execute the migration process based on the state transition data with the transition of the gaming state is based on the establishment of predetermined conditions such as the timing based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the result of the lottery such as the special lottery. Timing and can be included. As a result, it is possible to flexibly respond to the timing of shifting the game state according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of the progress control of the game.

Further, as the information for specifying the game state of the migration destination, it is not always necessary to use only the value set in the state transition data, and the corresponding value may be directly set in the program process. For example, when the game state is transferred, the game state of the transfer destination is forcibly set in the program, and various parameters set in the state transition data other than the game state of the transfer destination are set. Specifically, in the special condition time reduction, the state transition data is referred to when the number of time reduction transitions becomes 0, but before executing the subroutine that refers to the state transition data in the program processing, it is set as the next state transition destination number. By setting the setting number for the special condition time reduction (“7” in the case of FIG. 414), the parameter corresponding to the migration destination number “7” can be set by the subroutine that refers to the state transition data.

Further, the state transition data may be configured to include information related to the effect, and a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control means) may be transmitted at the time of the game state transition. As a result, it is possible to include a process that triggers the start of the effect in a series of processes associated with the transition of the game state, and it is possible to collectively manage the process related to the transition of the game state including the effect. ..

Next, a time series of control for shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving will be described. FIG. 415 is a timing chart illustrating the control for shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the timing chart shown in FIG. 415, the control from the initialization of the time saving transition count by winning the special lottery to the transition to the time saving state by the special condition time saving will be described. The operation is the same as that of the timing chart shown in FIG. 397, but the method of updating the time saving transition count is different. Further, the command to be transmitted is the same as the content shown in FIG. 400, but the transmission timing of some commands is different.

The time t1 is the timing at which the jackpot ending executed at the end of the jackpot gaming state due to winning the special lottery ends, that is, the timing at which the time is shortened. While the jackpot gaming state continues, the value of the time saving transition count in the symbol change of the special lottery that is to shift to the jackpot gaming state is set. Referring to FIG. 415, the values of the time saving transition count, the number of remaining special condition establishments, and the time saving transition count displayed on the performance display monitor are not updated from the transition to the jackpot gaming state to the end. Therefore, the same value is maintained. As for the number of remaining states, since the number of times the jackpot game state continues is set, "1" may be set, or the number of rounds in the jackpot game may be set.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time saving shift count is initialized at the timing when the jackpot ending ends, that is, at the timing of shifting to the time saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 415, since the time saving transition count is subtracted and updated, the time saving transition count (300 times) is set in the time saving transition count. The details of the initialization of the time saving transition count will be described later.

Further, at the timing of initializing the time saving transition count, the number of remaining times when the special condition is satisfied is set to "300", and the number of remaining states in the time saving state is set to "100". Since the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied can be calculated based on the time saving transition count and the number of time saving transitions, it should be calculated when necessary, for example, when the special condition remaining number of times command described later is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. You may do it. Since the time saving transition count is updated by subtraction, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied and the time saving transition count have the same value, and may be stored in the same variable in the program. As a result, the storage capacity can be reduced.

The time t2 is the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol is first executed after the transition to the time saving state. In the present embodiment, the time saving transition count is updated at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol ends. The display of the performance display monitor may be performed at the same time as the update, or may be reflected at the start of the fluctuation. By updating the time reduction transition count when the fixed time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuation instead of the fluctuation start timing, it is possible to process the update of the time reduction transition count and the transition to the time reduction state within the same timer interrupt. Details of the various commands are as described with reference to FIG. 400.

The time reduction transition count may be updated at the start of the fluctuation, but in this case, it is determined whether or not the time reduction transition count is "0" at the start of the fluctuation, and if it is determined to be "0", the time reduction transition count is calculated. It is necessary to determine whether or not the time saving shift count is "0" at the timing of shifting to the time saving state (when the fixed time has elapsed) without updating. Therefore, it is necessary to determine whether or not the time reduction shift count is “0” twice, at the start of the fluctuation and at the time reduction transition, which may complicate the program code.

If the remaining state count command is transmitted when the time saving transition count is updated, the command is not transmitted at the time of the first fluctuation. Therefore, it is preferable to transmit the remaining state count command at the start of the fluctuation. Also, if the value of the remaining state count command is displayed as it is, the special symbol will start to change at the timing when it is actually displayed. For example, if the number of remaining states is 300, the actual number of remaining fluctuations is 299. Therefore, if the number of remaining fluctuations is displayed as 300, the player may misidentify it. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 that has received the remaining state count command displays a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the notified remaining state count as the remaining state (variation) count.

Time t3 is the timing at which the variation display of the special symbol ends. When the variation display of the special symbol ends, the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is updated. At this time, a command for instructing the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the fluctuation display of the special symbol, a command for notifying the game state when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, and a command for notifying the remaining number of times the updated special condition is satisfied are transmitted. Will be done. The command for notifying the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is transmitted not immediately after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but after the symbol confirmation time has elapsed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Details of these commands are as described in FIG. 400.

After that, when the stop symbol is confirmed, the next variation display is started (time t4). Further, when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times) without winning the special lottery in the time saving state, the time saving state ends (time t5). At this time, the number of remaining states in the time saving state becomes "0" and the update (counting) is stopped. On the other hand, the time saving transition count is continuously counted.

When the time saving state ends, it shifts to the normal game state. At this time, the number of remaining states of the normal game state does not need to be managed (cannot be managed), so it is not updated. In addition, the number of remaining states may be set as the number of remaining times when the special condition is satisfied when the normal gaming state is entered. This is because if the special lottery is not won consecutively for a predetermined number of times (number of times of time saving shift = 300 times) after the time saving transition count is initialized, the normal gaming state is changed to the time saving state and the normal gaming state ends.

When the game progresses in the normal game state, the time reduction transition count reaches 0, and the fluctuation display ends (time t6), the special condition for transitioning to the time reduction state becomes 0 and the special condition is satisfied. Then, it shifts to the time saving state (special condition time saving). When the system shifts to the reduced working hours state due to the special conditions reduced working hours, the update of the reduced working hours count and the remaining number of times the special conditions are satisfied is stopped. Further, the number of remaining states is set to the upper limit of the number of times of continuation of the time saving state (100 times). The value of the time saving transition count is maintained at 0 without being updated.

In this way, the time reduction transition count can be updated by timer interrupt processing, but it is not updated when the predetermined value (“0”) is reached. Therefore, it is normal after the special condition time reduction is completed. It is possible to prevent the special condition time reduction from being activated until the next big hit (initial value is set) without determining whether or not it is in a state.

After that, if the special lottery is not won before the maximum number of times of continuation (100 times) of the reduced working hours is reached after shifting to the reduced working hours state due to the special condition shortening of working hours, the game shifts to the normal gaming state (time t7). .. At this time, since the end of the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is not the initialization condition of the time reduction transition count, the values of the time reduction transition count and the number of remaining times that the special condition is satisfied are maintained, so that the time reduction transition count is initialized. It will not shift to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving.

[26-1-2. Clearing (initializing) the game area including the time saving transition count]
As described above, the conditions (special conditions) for initializing the time reduction transition count are (1) when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM cleared) by a predetermined procedure, and (2) when the special lottery is won (big hit game). After the end). Here, unlike the above-mentioned example, (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently (first operation; RAM clear operation), the time saving transition count is not initialized, and (b) the setting key 971. When operating the RAM clear switch 954 while operating (second operation; setting change operation), the time saving transition count is initialized.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the values required for gaming control such as the time saving transition count are stored in the area allocated to the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1311. As described above, when the RAM clear operation is executed, the time saving transition count is not initialized, and when the setting change operation is executed, the time saving transition count is initialized, while the number of remaining states and the number of remaining special conditions are satisfied. Values such as are cleared (initialized) regardless of which operation is executed, and the area cleared by the RAM clear operation and the area cleared by the setting change operation are different.

As described above, if the time saving transition counter is not initialized by the RAM clear operation and the remaining state count or the remaining number of times the special condition is satisfied is cleared, the time saving transition is performed even though the command indicating the remaining state count indicates 0. Since the counter does not reach 0, there is a possibility that there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, when the information other than the time saving transition counter is cleared by the RAM clear operation, the command regarding the remaining number of times transmitted from the main control board 1310 on the peripheral control board 1510 side is ignored, or the remaining number of times is left from the main control board 1310. By not sending commands related to, there is no discrepancy in the production.

FIG. 416 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of values stored in the storage area provided by the main control RAM 1311 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 416, the time saving transition count is arranged in the area 9901 together with the setting value of the gaming machine and the setting state management area indicating the setting state (for example, setting change, setting confirmation) in the setting mode. In the present embodiment, the area 9901 is arranged at the head portion of the storage area, but the area is not limited to this and may be another area.

Further, in the area 9902 different from the area 9901, information such as the probability change flag, the time saving flag, the number of times the special condition is satisfied, and the number of times of the remaining state are stored. In addition, input / output port-related data including input signals such as switches that detect the entry of game balls into various winning openings, normal symbol-related data related to normal lottery and fluctuation display of normal symbols, special lottery and fluctuations of special symbols. It stores special symbol-related data related to display, external information output-related data for outputting signals to the outside of the game machine, and the like.

Although the time saving transition counter is arranged in the area 9901, when the time saving transition counter is initialized by any operation of RAM clear operation or setting change operation, it is arranged in the area 9902 and the time saving flag or the like is arranged. It may be cleared together with information in other areas. Further, when the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation is executed, the time reduction transition counter is not directly initialized, but the initial value is set again after the value of the time reduction transition counter is cleared.

Area 9902 includes (a) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently (first operation; RAM clear operation), and (b) when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (second operation; The setting change operation), which is an area to be cleared when any operation is executed, and the start address of the area 9902 is defined as a “RAM clear start address” (“0005h” in this embodiment). At the time of initialization, the area after the "RAM clear start address" is cleared.

Area 9901 is not cleared when the RAM clear operation is executed, while area 9902 is cleared when the RAM clear operation is executed. On the other hand, when the setting change operation is executed, the area 9902 is cleared, while the initial value (300) is set in the time saving transition count arranged in the area 9901. When the time saving transition count is added and updated, 0 is set.

As described above, in the RAM clear operation and the setting change operation, the RAM clear area (area 9902) is the same, but the initialization (initial value setting) area is different. Therefore, by standardizing the process of clearing the area 9902, the program code can be simplified and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, although the area 9901 in which the time saving transition count and the like are stored and the area 9902 in which the probability change flag and the like are stored are continuous areas, a free area is arranged between the area 9901 and the area 9902. May be. When the free area is arranged, it is possible to increase the possibility that the other data can be maintained when one of the data in the area 9901 or 9902 is destroyed due to a bug in the program or the like.

Further, in the area after the area 9902, the stack area in the game area, the work area outside the game area, and the stack area outside the game area are arranged. The stack area in the game area is an area for temporarily storing data when the program related to the game control is executed. The work area outside the game area is an area for temporarily storing data when the program for displaying information on the performance display monitor (base display 1317) is executed. The stack area outside the game area is an area for temporarily storing data necessary for executing a process (for example, a process for calculating a base value) executed outside the game area. Although the free area 9904 is arranged between the area 9902 and the stack area in the game area, the area 9902 and the stack area in the game area may be a continuous area without providing the free area 9904. On the other hand, an empty area 9905 is arranged between the stack area in the game area and the work area outside the game area, but this area must be arranged. An empty area 9906 is arranged between the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area, but the work area outside the game area and the stack area outside the game area are continuous areas without providing the area 9906. May be good.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently, or when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971, the time saving transition count may be initialized regardless of the operation. Further, the time saving transition count may be initialized by an operation means other than the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. For example, it may be provided with an operation means for initializing (clearing) only the set value related to the special condition time reduction including the time reduction transition count. As a result, other game-related information can be maintained and the influence on the game can be minimized. For example, the set value related to the special condition time reduction can be initialized (cleared) at the end of business, and the gaming machine can be operated on the next business day without being affected by the gaming situation of the previous day.

Further, in the gaming machine capable of shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving as in the present embodiment, in order to regenerate the time saving state due to the special condition time saving when the time saving state due to the special condition time saving ends, the RAM The clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be operated illegally. Therefore, by providing both the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 on the back surface side of the gaming machine, unauthorized operation can be prevented.

From the above description, each configuration can be specified as follows.

(1) A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a profit to the player based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the special game state is controlled to give the player a game value based on the lottery result, and the type of the special game state. One advantage from a plurality of advantageous gaming states including at least a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (low probability time saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A game control means (main control MPU1311) that is a game machine that can be controlled to a game state and can control the progress of the game including the lottery, stores game information including the lottery result, and powers the game machine. A storage means capable of storing and retaining the game information even when the supply of the game information is cut off, a counting means for counting the number of times the lottery is performed by the lottery means in a situation where a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a player. The storage means includes an area in which the counting value by the counting means can be stored, and the game control means is advantageous to the player based on the counting result by the counting means. It is possible to control to a third advantageous gaming state (special condition time reduction), and at least the first operation state (RAM clear operation / setting change operation) and the second operation state (setting change operation / RAM) are the operation states by the operation means. When the power is turned on in association with the first operation state by the operation means, the area in which the predetermined area of the storage means is initialized, but the count value by the counting means can be stored, including the clear operation). When the power is turned on in accordance with the second operation operation state by the operation means, the predetermined area of the storage means is initialized and the counting value by the counting means is set. The information stored in the storable area can be initialized, and the area in which the counting value by the counting means can be stored is arranged in an area other than the predetermined area of the storage means. Further, the counting value stored in the storage means by the counting means is not updated in the third advantageous gaming state, but also in the normal gaming state during the third advantageous gaming state and after the end of the third advantageous gaming state. May be maintained.

The first advantageous gaming state has a higher degree of advantage to the player than the second advantageous gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state has the same / abbreviated degree of advantage to the player as the third advantageous gaming state. It is the same. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the second advantageous gaming state is assumed to be a time saving state due to a normal time reduction, the third advantageous gaming state is assumed to be a time saving state due to a special condition time reduction, and the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state are assumed. The winning probability of the special lottery is the same. The second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state may be the same in terms of the degree of advantage to the player, and even if they are different, the number of time reductions is different and the degree of advantage is substantially the same. ..

By configuring as in (1), the area cleared by RAM matches in the first operation state and the second operation state, so the program code is simplified by sharing the process of clearing the area. It is possible to improve the development efficiency. In addition, by making it possible to maintain the information stored in the area where the counted value can be stored by the operation, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to decide whether or not to clear the counted value according to the situation of the game. Therefore, flexible operation is possible.

In the above, the initialization of the predetermined storage area when the RAM clear operation or setting change operation is performed has been described, but in addition to this, a RAM abnormality occurs due to a momentary power failure such as noise, and the game continues normally. RAM is cleared even when it is difficult to do so. Hereinafter, the storage area (set value) cleared when the RAM is cleared (when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated) and when a RAM abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 417.

FIG. 417 is a diagram illustrating the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the control of the storage area and various values when a RAM abnormality occurs in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 417 describes the case of the RAM clear operation (first operation), the setting change operation (second operation), and the RAM abnormalities 1 to 5.

When the RAM clear operation (first operation) is executed, the work in the game area (area 9902) is cleared, while the work outside the game area is maintained. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the RAM clear signal has changed to ON by the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, and is before the timer interrupt processing is started. The area 9901 for storing the set value and the time saving transition count is maintained. When the RAM clear operation is executed, the performance display monitor continues to display the value of the time reduction transition count. When the RAM clear operation (first operation) is executed, the notification sound corresponding to the RAM clear is output. Further, the decorative lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to RAM clearing, and a screen indicating that RAM is being cleared is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. The movable body provided in the gaming machine performs a predetermined initial operation.

When the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the work in the game area is cleared. On the other hand, the work outside the game area is maintained when the work outside the game area is normal, and cleared when an abnormality occurs. Also, the set value is maintained. The time saving transition count is initialized as described above. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed, and is before the timer interrupt processing is started. After changing the setting, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor, but you may display that the time saving transition count has been initialized, or after displaying the setting value, display the time saving transition count. You may do it. When the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the notification sound corresponding to the setting change is output. Further, the decorative lamp is turned on in a manner indicating that the setting is being changed, and a screen indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. The movable body provided in the gaming machine performs a predetermined initial operation.

When a set value abnormality (RAM abnormality 1) occurs, the work in the game area is cleared. On the other hand, work outside the game area is maintained. Since there is an error in the set value, set "Setting 1" as the set value. In addition, the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed in the recovery from the power failure after the RAM abnormality is determined. If the setting change operation is not executed even if the RAM abnormality is determined, The RAM error state continues. The RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317. When a set value abnormality (RAM abnormality 1) occurs, a RAM abnormality notification sound is output, and the lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the RAM abnormality notification. Further, a screen indicating that the RAM abnormality is notified is displayed on the liquid crystal display screen. At this time, the demo screen may be switched to after a predetermined time has elapsed. The movable body provided in the gaming machine performs a predetermined initial operation. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable body may be started after the RAM abnormality is resolved by the setting change operation, not when the RAM abnormality occurs.

When the power failure flag abnormality (RAM abnormality 2) of the work in the game area or the checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality 3) of the work in the game area occurs, the work in the game area is cleared. On the other hand, the work outside the game area is maintained if it is not abnormal. In addition, the set value is maintained and the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing when the storage area is actually cleared is not the timing when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, but after it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the power supply is once turned off and then the power is turned on again while performing the setting change operation. This is the timing when it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed. The RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317.

When an abnormality in the power failure flag of the work outside the game area (RAM error 4) or a checksum error in the work outside the game area (RAM error 5) occurs, the game is performed as a result of the setting change operation when recovering from the power failure. The work in the area is cleared. In addition, the work outside the game area is cleared because there is an abnormality. Furthermore, the set value is maintained and the time saving transition count is initialized. The timing at which the storage area is actually cleared is the timing at which it is determined that the setting change operation has been executed. The RAM error code is displayed on the base display 1317.

Further explaining the control for the RAM abnormality of the work outside the game area, the determination of the RAM abnormality of the work outside the game area is executed before determining whether or not the setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, only the information indicating that the RAM is abnormal is stored, and at this timing, the work outside the game area is treated as a RAM abnormality without being initialized, and the game is stopped. After shifting to the game stop state, by performing the setting change operation and then turning off / on the power again, it is determined that the setting is in the change state, and it is stored before the power failure when the processing at the time of setting change is executed. Based on the information indicating that the work on the game area side has been determined to have a RAM abnormality, it is determined that the work outside the game area has a RAM abnormality, and the work outside the game area is cleared. If the information indicating that the work outside the game area is determined to be RAM error is not stored when the process for changing the setting is executed, the work outside the game area is not cleared and is stored as it is. The contents are maintained.

When the power is turned on with the setting change operation performed, if it is determined in the initial setting process that each of the set value / game area / outside work has a RAM error, the setting change process is started as it is. Each storage area is cleared at the timing when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. In the initial setting process executed when the power is turned on, only the determination result is stored after determining whether the set value is abnormal, the work in the game area is abnormal, or the work outside the game area is abnormal, and after each determination is completed. Judge whether it is a setting change operation. That is, even when a RAM abnormality occurs, it is controlled so as to determine whether or not the setting change operation is performed after the determination of the abnormality.

The case where the RAM is cleared has been described above. Next, the control of the gaming machine at the time of executing the first operation (RAM clear operation) and the second operation (operation different from the first operation, for example, setting change operation) will be supplemented.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, it is first determined whether or not the set value is abnormal (value other than 0 to 5). If it is determined to be abnormal, the initial value is set in the set value, the initial value (300 times) is set in the time saving transition count, and the RAM abnormal state is set as the game state. Subsequently, the checksum, the power interruption flag, and the RAM outside the game area are checked, and even if any of them is determined to be abnormal, the RAM is set to the abnormal state. At this time, unless it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the value before the power failure is maintained without initializing the time saving transition count.

The time saving transition count is set to an initial value only when the set value is determined to be abnormal and at the end of the jackpot ending, except when the first operation is executed, and the initial value is not set at other times. Further, it is not determined whether or not the value of the time saving transition count is abnormal. The reason for not judging the abnormality of the time saving transition count is that if the set value is abnormal, there is a high possibility that the time saving transition count is also abnormal, so it is considered sufficient to judge only by the abnormality of the set value. Is.

In addition to the abnormality determination of the set value, the "abnormality determination" of the time saving transition count may be performed. At this time, even if the set value is a normal value, if the time saving transition count is out of the predetermined range, the accuracy of the RAM cannot be guaranteed. It may be initialized.

Further, when a set value abnormality occurs, the RAM abnormality is notified after the set value is initialized, and this state continues. In order to restore the gaming machine, the main work RAM (area 9902) is cleared by turning on the power again while executing the setting change operation. Further, if the work for the performance display monitor (base display 1317) is abnormal, it is cleared, but if it is not abnormal, it is maintained. The setting state becomes the setting change state, the timer interrupt process is started, and after the setting change is completed, the game shifts to the normal game state. At this time, the performance display monitor (base display 1317) is normally displayed.

With the above configuration, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest whether or not the time saving transition count is initialized by the display mode of the performance display monitor (base display 1317) when the power is turned on. It will be possible. Specifically, when the performance display monitor is displayed in the normal mode after the power is turned on, it is suggested that the time saving transition count is not initialized, and when the performance display monitor is displayed in the specific mode, the time saving transition is performed. Suggests that the count has been initialized. As described above, in the present embodiment, the time saving transition count is initialized when the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, but at this time, the performance display monitor indicates that the time saving transition count is initialized. It is displayed by the contents. In the performance display monitor, the time saving transition count is displayed in the normal case (normal mode), but when the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the changed setting value is displayed (specific mode). .. Further, when the RAM clear operation (first operation) is executed, the performance display monitor continues to display the normal mode (time saving transition count), while when the setting change operation (second operation) is executed, the setting is changed. Until the completion of, the performance display monitor does not display the normal mode. That is, by displaying the performance display monitor in a different manner depending on whether or not the time reduction transition count has been initialized, it can be suggested to the employees of the hall or the like that the time reduction transition count has been initialized.

Although the example of notifying whether or not the time saving transition count has been initialized according to the display mode of the performance display monitor (base display 1317) has been described above, the same notification may be performed by another display. Further, the notification may be made by a sound or a lamp. At this time, the lamp is provided in an inconspicuous arrangement outside the gaming area of the gaming machine or even inside the gaming area (for example, a place away from the liquid crystal display device), and it is possible to recognize from the front side whether or not the time saving transition count has been initialized. May be. For example, when the power supply is restarted by the RAM clear operation (first operation) (including when the power is turned on normally (when restored)), the time is shortened by displaying in the first mode (including turning off). It is possible to recognize that the power supply has been restarted without the count being initialized, and when the power supply is restarted by the setting change operation (second operation), the second mode (time saving transition count is initial). It cannot be identified whether it has been converted or not). By configuring in this way, it is highly likely that the special condition time reduction will occur before the value indicating the number of fluctuations of the top lamp (data display) due to the player maintaining the time reduction transition count. It becomes possible for the player to recognize the game, and the player can play while expecting that a special condition reduction of working hours will occur.

[26-1-3. Initialization setting data (setting data table)]
Not limited to the time saving state, when shifting from the current gaming state to another gaming state, it is necessary to set various parameters (initial setting data such as flags) for setting the gaming state. For example, in order to set initial setting data corresponding to the big hit game state at the timing when the big hit game state is started when the special lottery is won, or to shift to the probability change state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Initial setting data (setting data table) corresponding to a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of the big hit game state) is set. Hereinafter, the handling of these initial setting data in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 418 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot initial interval transition setting data set when transitioning to the jackpot gaming state when the special lottery in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is won. The jackpot first interval transition setting data is set (referenced) in the jackpot start setting process executed at the timing when the jackpot gaming state is started when the special lottery is won, and is based on the jackpot first interval transition setting data. , Required values are set for various parameters (data, flags, etc.).

The size of the data to be cleared (initialized) first (the number of bytes) and the size of the data to be initially set (the number of bytes) are defined in the setting data at the time of the jackpot initial interval transition. Subsequently, the parameters to be cleared (initialized) are defined (inside the frame). Finally, the default data is defined.

Further explaining the specific contents of the big hit first interval transition setting data with reference to FIG. 418, the cleared data includes a status flag (JOTAI_FG), a probability change flag (KAKUHEN_FG), a time saving flag (JITAN_FG), and a status display. The number of times (JT_HYO_CNT) and the power-on state buffer (PWON_JOT_BF) are included. The details of each data are as described above.

The initially set data include the condition device operating signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG), the accessory continuous operating device operating signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG), the right-handed flag area (R_HS_FG), and the middle rotating body operation state management flag. (MOT_ACT_FG), motor 1 operation pattern area (MOT1_ACT_PT), motor 1 operation number area (MOT1_ACT_NO), motor 1 photo detection abnormality determination timer area (M1_ERR_JDG_TM) are included.

Specifically, a value (_T_SIG_JKN_OK) for setting the condition device operating signal to ON is set in the condition device operating signal output determination flag (T_JKN_FG). Further, a value (_T_SIG_YAK_OK) for setting the accessory continuous operation device operating signal to ON is set in the accessory continuous operation device operating signal output determination flag (T_YAK_FG). In the right-handed flag area (R_HS_FG), a value (_HASSYA_RIGHT) indicating that right-handedness is permitted is set. In addition, values for defining the initial operation of the medium rotating body (motor 1) are set.

The initial setting data in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is for setting the gaming state after defining the size (number of bytes) of the data to be cleared (initialized) and the size (number of bytes) of the initially set data. The data for clearing and the data for initial setting are defined for the data of. With this configuration, it is possible to handle the data for clearing and the data for initial setting together as one table. The data for clearing is 1 byte because it is only the data (address) to be cleared, and the data for initial setting is 2 bytes because it is a set of the data (address) to be set and the initial setting value.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of large winning openings (first major winning opening 2005, second major winning opening 2006), and the clear data and initial setting data of these large winning openings are combined. Can be treated as a table of.

FIG. 419 is a diagram showing an example of the big winning opening closing setting data set when the big winning opening is closed in the big hit gaming state of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The big winning opening closing setting data is referred to in order to execute the process when each big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning opening opening process.

The large winning opening closing setting data includes the setting data for the first large winning opening 2005 and the setting data for the second large winning opening 2006, and the setting data for the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. A value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second major winning opening 2006 is defined between the setting data and the setting data of. Specifically, it is the difference between the start address of the big winning opening closing setting data and the start address of the setting data of the second big winning opening 2006, and the value of "_NX_CLOSE_OFS" is added to the big winning opening closing setting data. Therefore, the start address of the setting data for the second big winning opening 2006 can be specified.

The setting data for the first big winning opening 2005 includes data for clearing and data for initial setting as well as the setting data at the time of the big hit first interval transition. In the clearing data, the size of each of the clearing data and the initial setting data, and the large winning opening 1 solenoid flag are defined.

The special electric 1 operating signal output timer (T1_SD_TM), the special electric 1 prize ball validity determination timer (T1_SD_PAY_TM), and the special symbol / electric accessory operation number (T_JOB_NO) are defined in the initial setting data. In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal output time value is used for the special electric 1 operating signal output timer, and the special electric 1 prize ball valid extension time value is used for the special electric 1 prize ball validity determination timer (after the large winning opening is closed). Set the time to determine that the ball is valid). A number value (_TNO_CLOSE) for closing the large winning opening is set for the special symbol / electric accessory operation number.

The setting data for the second big winning opening 2006 includes the data for clearing and the data for initial setting as well as the setting data for the first big winning opening 2005. In the clearing data, the size of each of the clearing data and the initial setting data, and the large winning opening 2 solenoid flag are defined.

The data for initial setting includes the special electric 2 operating signal output timer (T2_SD_TM), the special electric 2 prize ball validity determination timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM), the special electric 2 operating signal output timer 2 (T3_SD_TM), and the special electric 2 prize ball validity determination timer 2. (T3_SD_PAY_TM) and a special symbol / electric accessory operation number (T_JOB_NO) are defined. Two types of operating signal output timers and two types of prize ball validity determination timers are defined.

The special electric 2 operating signal output timer (T2_SD_TM) and the special electric 2 operating signal output timer 2 (T3_SD_TM) both have a time value for outputting the special electric accessory 1 operating signal, and the special electric 2 prize ball validity determination timer (T2_SD_PAY_TM). In each case, the special electric 2 prize ball validity extension time value is set in the special electric 2 prize ball validity determination timer 2 (T3_SD_PAY_TM). A number value (_TNO_CLOSE) for closing the large winning opening is set for the special symbol / electric accessory operation number.

Although the means for setting the initial data when the large winning opening is closed in a gaming machine having two types of large winning openings has been described, it may be applied to different timings, for example, setting the initial data when the large winning opening is opened. It is also applicable to winning openings other than the large winning opening, for example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of starting winning openings, the first starting winning opening (Special Figure 1) and the second starting winning slot (Special Figure 1). The initial data of 2) may be defined in the same manner as the initial setting data shown in FIG. 419, and the data initialization process may be executed.

The configuration of the initial setting data has been described above. Next, the procedure for actually performing the initial setting based on the above-mentioned initial setting data will be specifically described using the large winning opening closing setting data as an example. FIG. 420 is a sample module for initial setting based on the large winning opening closing setting data in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The procedure for setting the initial setting data while referring to the module will be described below.

The main control MPU 1311 stores the address of the large winning opening closing setting data (T_CLOSE1_B) in the HL register as the reference address of the area in which the setting data is stored. Next, the identification information for specifying which of the winning openings is controlled is stored in the A register. "OPEN_TD_FG" is an open special electric accessory identification flag, and is set to "00" when controlling the first prize opening 2005 and "01" when controlling the second prize opening 2006. Based on the value of "OPEN_TD_FG", the position to refer to the data included in the large winning opening closing setting data is specified.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second major winning opening 2006 in the W register. Further, by executing the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), the reading position of the large winning opening closing setting data is specified. More specifically, the multiplication value addition address acquisition process multiplies the specified base value (W register = "_NX_CLOSE_OFS") by the multiplication value (A register = "OPEN_TD_FG"), and the specified base address value (HL register). = It is a process to add to the start address of the big winning opening closing setting data). That is, when controlling the first prize opening 2005 (“OPEN_TD_FG” = “00h”), the base address value itself becomes the start address, while controlling the second prize opening 2006 (“OPEN_TD_FG” = “”. For "01h"), the address obtained by adding "_NX_CLOSE_OFS" to the base address value is the starting address.

When the address that refers to the large winning opening closing setting data is specified, the main control MPU 1311 executes the data initialization process (DATA_SET_CLR). The data initialization process is a process of clearing and initializing data based on the setting data referred to by the address set in the HL register. The details of the data initialization process will be described with reference to FIG. 421.

FIG. 421 is a diagram showing a program example of the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the case of clearing and initializing the data relating to the first major winning opening 2005 (“OPEN_TD_FG” = “00h”) will be described with respect to the details of the processing.

When the data initialization process is executed, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the work clear count and the work set count in the BC register. In other words, the number of work clears is set in the C register and the number of work sets is set in the B register. The number of work clears is the number of data to be cleared, and the number of work sets is the number of data to be initialized. Looking at the data (T_CLOSE1_B) corresponding to the first major winning opening 2005 among the large winning opening closing setting data in FIG. 419, the number of data to be cleared is "T_CLOSE1_CLR_END-$ -2" because the first data is "T_CLOSE1_CLR_END- $ -2". Since there is only one, the value is 1, and this value is stored in the C register. The next data is "(T_CLOSE1_B_END-T_CLOSE1_CLR_END) / 2", and the value is 5 because 5 2-byte data are actually defined between the label T_CLOSE1_CLR_END and the label T_CLOSE1_B_END. It is stored in the B register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 initializes the data. Specifically, the data set after the work clear count and the work set count of the clear data, that is, the value after the third byte is set as the address of the data to be cleared, and the work clear count set in the C register is set. Only set "00H" and clear the data.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 performs initial setting of data. Specifically, the value of the first byte from the beginning of the data for initial setting is set as the address, the value of the second byte is set as the initial setting value, and the process is repeated for the number of work sets set in the B register. When the processing for all the initial setting data is completed, the data initialization processing ends.

As described above, the structure of the initial setting data is standard, and it can be used for general purposes such as initial setting of the drive body, not limited to the game state transition process. Therefore, by including the data initialization process (DAT_SET_CLR) in the process address table, it can be called by the INVD instruction, and the process is executed only by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). be able to. As a result, the word length of the instruction can be shortened and the processing speed can be increased.

In the present embodiment, by including the value (_NX_CLOSE_OFS) for specifying the start address of the setting data for the second big winning opening 2006 in the big winning opening closing setting data, the data for a plurality of big winning openings is common data. It is possible to treat as. Therefore, if the conventional method in which _NX_CLOSE_OFS is not defined is to perform the same processing as the sample module shown in FIG. 420, as shown in FIG. 422, a processing of branching with reference to OPEN_TD_FG is required. In this case, a larger capacity is required than the method according to the present embodiment. Specifically, the sample program of the reference example (FIG. 422) is 3 more than the sample program of the present embodiment (FIG. 420). The capacity for bytes increases.

In the sample modules shown in FIGS. 420 and 422, in the process of reading data from the table (LDT instruction), the start address "_OFS_TP" (TP register value) of the data area is used from the address of the table (for example, "T_CLOSE1_B"). , For example, "9000H") The subtracted value is specified. That is, "LDT HL, T_CLOSE1_B-_OFS_TP" sets the value of [TP register value (" 9000H") + relative data of "T_CLOSE1_B" from the data start address] in the HL register. By making it possible to set a value based on the TP register in the HL register by the LDT instruction, an instruction of 3 bytes or more (“LD HL, T_CLOSE1_B”) can be normally executed in 2 bytes.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when transitioning from the current gaming state to another gaming state, the parameters corresponding to the transition destination gaming state are set based on the predefined initialization setting data. Set. At the time of transition to the gaming state, the processing related to the special lottery is switched, for example, the winning probability of the special lottery is changed, or the table that defines the fluctuation time of the special symbol is changed.

In addition, the initialization setting data is not used only at the time of transition of the gaming state such as the probability change state or the time saving state. , Lost time interval processing, hit time interval processing, big hit opening processing, big winning opening opening processing, big winning opening closing processing, big hit ending processing, etc. can be used when switching each state (switching timing of game progress) can. Specifically, when the fluctuation start processing is executed after the end of the variation waiting process, the symbol determination process is executed after the end of the variable process, the outlier interval process is executed after the end of the symbol determination process, and the outlier interval process is executed. It is used at the timing when the execution of the next process is started after the execution of the process is completed, such as when the variable wait process is executed after the end of the process or when the hit interval process is executed after the symbol determination process is completed.

In addition, initialization setting data is used not only for special symbol-related processing but also for normal symbol-related processing. Specifically, when the variable processing is executed after the variable waiting process is completed, after the variable processing is completed. It can be used when executing a symbol determination process or the like.

The switching of each state (progress of the game) is controlled by a job counter corresponding to each control target such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. The job counter corresponds to each process (state). For example, if it is a job counter for a special symbol, the job counter is "0" for the special figure change waiting process, the job counter is "1" for the special figure change process, and the special figure. Job counter "2" for symbol confirmation processing, job counter "3" for special figure off time interval processing, job counter "4" for special figure hit interval processing, job counter "5" for big hit opening processing, big winning opening open The job counter "6" is set to correspond to the processing, the job counter "7" corresponds to the big winning opening closing processing, and the job counter "8" corresponds to the big hit ending processing. The same can be set for ordinary symbols.

The initialization setting data used at the time of transition to the game state is defined in the above-mentioned format (data structure) in FIG. 418. Specifically, after defining the size of the data to be cleared (initialized) (number of bytes) and the size of the data to be initialized (number of bytes), the area for storing the parameters whose set values are cleared at the time of migration (the area to store the parameters. From the lower address of the area (first area), the lower address of the area (second area) that stores the parameters for which the initial value (fixed value) is set at the time of migration, and the beginning of the area where the initial value is stored. They are arranged sequentially. The parameter whose set value is cleared at the time of transition can be set as necessary by the calling program or the like at the time of transition of the game state, and counts the number of executions of the special lottery in the game state after the transition. Parameters that count up from "0", such as cases, are used as they are after clearing. The data capacity can be reduced by defining only the lower address in the initialization setting data, but since the value storage area can be specified, not only the lower address but also the upper address may be included. As a result, the storage area can be directly specified at the cost of increasing the data capacity, and address conversion is not required, so that the program processing can be speeded up.

Further, as described above, by specifying the initialization setting data and executing the data initialization process (FIG. 421), the specified parameters can be cleared or the initial values can be set to the specified parameters. It is possible. Therefore, the process of setting (initializing) the parameters at the time of transition of the game state or the start of the process does not depend on the process of ending and starting the game state or execution of the migration source and the migration destination only by specifying the initialization setting data. It can be executed by common processing. As a result, the program code can be modified or added even when the definition of the game state is changed or newly added due to a change in the game specifications, or when a process for controlling the game is added. It is possible to set (initialize) the parameters required for the transition of the game state and the execution of the process simply by adding / modifying the corresponding initialization setting data while minimizing the above.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by defining the initialization setting data with a common data structure, it is possible to clear / initialize the parameters by a common process (data initialization process). .. This makes it possible to execute with a common procedure when parameters need to be set at the timing of switching the progress of the game, such as when the game state changes, and it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the game specifications. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game with abundant variations, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, by simplifying the program by standardizing the parameter settings, it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine.

From the above description, each configuration can be further specified as follows.

(2) The program processing (data initialization processing) using the setting data table (initialization setting data) is executed according to the progress status of the game state accompanying the progress of the game (at the timing when the progress status is switched). Caller that is called and executed from the process of the caller (process related to the special symbol, etc.) and executed according to the progress of the game state accompanying the progress of the game (at the timing when the progress is switched). Although the processing of is different depending on the progress of the gaming state, the program processing (data initialization processing) using the setting data table can be executed as a common processing, and the setting is described. After the setting values have been set for the addresses of the storage area set in the first area (area 9901) and the storage area set in the second area (area 9902) by the program processing using the data table. It is possible to switch the progress status of the game state by continuously executing the processing of the caller.

By configuring as in (2), the program code can be added even when the definition of the game state is changed or newly added due to a change in the game specifications, or when a process for controlling the game is added. While minimizing corrections and additions, simply add / modify the corresponding setting data table (initialization setting data) to set the parameters required for transition of the game state and execution of processing (initialization). However, it is possible to switch the progress of the game.

[26-1-4. Modification example of initialization setting data selection means]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated independently (RAM clear operation), the time saving transition count is not cleared, and when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated while operating the setting key 971 (setting). Clear the time saving transition count for the change operation). Therefore, it is necessary to individually define the initial setting data or branch the process because the initial setting data to which the time saving transition count is added is always initialized.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the operation at the time of initialization can be confirmed by referring to the value of VALUE_PLAY (setting state management area). Therefore, by defining a table for selecting the initialization setting data and selecting based on the value of VALUE_PLAY, the initialization setting data corresponding to the operation at the time of initialization can be specified.

FIG. 423 is a diagram showing an example of values set in VALUE_PLAY (setting state management area) and VALUE_PLAY in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 423, "00h" is set for normal recovery, "01h" for RAM clear operation, "02h" for setting confirmation operation, "03h" for setting change operation, and "04h" for RAM abnormality.

Further, FIG. 424 is a diagram showing an example of a table for selecting initialization setting data at the time of initialization of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Initialization setting data corresponding to VALUE_PLAY is defined in the initialization setting data selection table, and initialization setting data may be selected based on the value of VALUE_PLAY. When implemented in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not to clear according to the initialization operation.

The time saving transition count is not stored in the area cleared when the gaming machine is initialized, and the time saving transition count is initialized based on the definition of the initialization setting data. That is, it is initialized only when the time saving transition count is defined in the initialization setting data, and when the value of the time saving transition count is maintained, it may be excluded from the initialization setting data. For example, since the time saving transition count is not initialized by the RAM clear operation (normal RAM clear), the corresponding initialization setting data (RAM_CLR_TBL) does not include the data corresponding to the time saving transition count. On the other hand, in the case of the setting change operation, the time saving transition count is initialized, so that the corresponding initialization setting data (SET_CHG_TBL) includes the data corresponding to the time saving transition count. With this configuration, it is possible to maintain or set the initialization of the time saving transition count by defining it in the initialization setting data according to the initialization operation without changing the program, and the program code. The branching of is unnecessary, the program can be simplified, and the program capacity can be compressed. It should be noted that it is possible to switch the maintenance or initialization (clearing) of the value not only for the time saving transition count but also for other parameters by the definition of the data.

Further, the initialization setting data may be further subdivided according to the initialization conditions of the gaming machine. For example, as shown in FIG. 417, initialization setting data may be defined for each factor in which a RAM abnormality occurs. When the pattern of the initialization setting data is smaller than the value defined in VALUE_PLAY, the data capacity may be reduced by allocating common initialization setting data to different VALUE_PLAY.

Since the initial value of the time reduction transition count is 0 when it is updated by addition, it is registered in the clear data, while when it is updated by subtraction, the initial value is the number of time reduction transitions (= 300 times). Since it becomes, it is registered in the data for initial setting. In this way, even if the update method is different, it is possible to manage with the same initial setting data, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the game specifications, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game machine.

[26-2. External output signal related to special conditions time reduction]
Next, the output of the external output signal will be described in chronological order from the time when the power of the gaming machine is turned on (when the setting change operation is executed). FIG. 425 is a time chart showing the output timing of the external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The external output signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 provided in the gaming machine, and is transmitted to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. The hall computer can grasp the state of the gaming machine in real time based on the received external output signal.

First, the power of the gaming machine is turned on (time t200), and the initialization process is executed. The game is ready for the initialization process to be completed. After that, the game is continued, and when the special lottery is not won consecutively after the time saving shift count is initialized (= 300 times), the game shifts to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. At this time, the external output signal (big hit information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms), and the signal is output (time t201). By outputting the external output signal (big hit information) for a predetermined fixed time, it indicates that the time has been shortened due to the special condition time reduction. The external output signal (big hit information) is output during the big hit gaming state, but the time (fixed time) output at the time of transition to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving is the case of the big hit gaming state. The time is sufficiently shorter than the output time. Further, the external output signal (during the time reduction) is set to ON, and the signal output is continued until the end of the time reduction state.

Furthermore, if the special lottery is not continuously won until the maximum number of times (= 100 times) of continuous time reduction is reached after shifting to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is terminated (. Time t202). At the timing when the time saving state ends, the output of the external output signal indicating the time saving is stopped.

After that, when a big hit that shifts to the probable change state occurs after the end of the big hit game state (a special lottery is won with a probable change symbol, a probable change big hit), the accessory continuous operation device is activated after a predetermined symbol confirmation time elapses after the special symbol is stopped. , External output signal (big hit information) and external output signal (during time reduction) are set to ON, and each signal is output (time t203). In the big hit game state, the time reduction control is not executed, but the output of the external output signal (during the time reduction) is continued. Further, the output of the external output signal (big hit information) is continued until the big hit gaming state ends (variable period). This makes it possible to manage prize balls during the special prize (Ren Chan). In the so-called time saving state, as described above, the output of the external output signal (during the time saving) continues, but the output of the external output signal (big hit information) does not continue.

After the big hit game state ends and the big hit end interval time elapses, the game state shifts to the probability change state (high probability time saving state) (time t204). At this time, the output of the external output signal (big hit information) is stopped (set to OFF), while the output of the external output signal (during the time reduction) is continued until the time reduction state ends. In addition, the initial value (= 300 times) is set in the time saving transition count. In the high probability state without the time saving state, the external output signal (during the time saving) is not output. This makes it possible for the hall computer to accurately grasp the gaming state and confirm whether or not the base value is normal.

After that, when the special lottery is won by the non-probability variation symbol in the high probability time saving state (time t205), the time saving game state is terminated, the probability state is set to a low probability, and then the game shifts to the big hit game state (the big hit game state is always). Low probability low base state). At this time, although the time saving state ends, the external output signal (during the time saving) is set to the big hit game state without being set to OFF, and the ON state continues. Further, the external output (big hit information) is set to ON by entering the big hit game state.

When the jackpot game state due to the non-probability variation symbol ends, the time reduction control is started after the jackpot end interval time elapses, and the game state is shifted to the (low probability) time reduction state (normal time reduction) (time t206). The external output signal (big hit information) that was ON during the big hit is set to OFF after the time of the big hit end interval elapses, and when it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is set to ON), the external output signal (time saving) is set. Continue output with middle) ON. At this time, the initial value (= 300 times) is set in the time saving transition count.

After the jackpot game state ends, when the symbol variation (execution of the special lottery) for the number of continuous upper limit times of the time saving state ends (time t207), the time saving state ends by setting the time saving flag to OFF, and the external output signal (external output signal) Set (during working hours) to OFF and stop the output.

If the special lottery is not won continuously (when the time reduction transition count reaches 0) after the jackpot game state ends, the special condition time reduction is the same as the time t201. (Time t208). At this time, the external output signal (big hit information) is set to ON for a predetermined time (128 ms), and the signal is output. After that, when the special lottery is won with the non-probability variation symbol, the special symbol stops and the operation of the accessory continuous operation device starts after the predetermined symbol confirmation time elapses, and the external output signal (big hit information) is set to ON and output. Is started, and the time saving flag is set to OFF, while the external output signal (during the time saving) is continuously output while being ON (time t209).

After that, the jackpot gaming state is terminated, and the gaming state is shifted to the (low probability) time saving state (normal time saving) (time t210). After the time of the jackpot end interval elapses, the external output signal (big hit information) is set to OFF to stop the output, the time saving flag is set to ON, and the external output signal (during the jackpot) is continuously output while being ON. .. After the end of the big hit game state, when the symbol fluctuation (execution of the special lottery) for the number of continuous upper limit times of the time saving state is completed (time t211), the time saving flag is set to OFF and the external output signal (during the time saving) is set to OFF. And stop the output.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the external output signal (big hit information) for notifying the hall controller that the special lottery has been won and the big hit game state (during the special prize) has been reached is not a big hit. Even after the end of the specified number of missed fluctuations (when the special time saving condition is satisfied), by outputting to ON in the same way, one external output signal can be output for both the big hit and the specific missed time. ing. Also, when transmitting an external output signal (big hit information) to a data lamp (a data display installed outside the gaming machine as equipment on the hall side) other than the hall controller, when the big hit and when the special time saving condition is satisfied. It can also be used as one external output signal. By turning on the external output signal (big hit information), it is possible to reset the number of fluctuations in the data lamp, which not only allows the player to identify the number of fluctuations up to the big hit, but is also special. The player can recognize the number of fluctuations until the state shifts to the time saving state due to the condition time saving. Furthermore, when outputting different signals at the time of big hit and when the special time saving condition is satisfied, it is necessary to set so that the number of fluctuations can be reset by two signals on the data lamp side, so one external output signal is also used. By making it possible, even if the data lamp has a specification that the number of fluctuations cannot be reset by either of the two signals, it becomes possible to cope with it.

The period (variable period) in which the external output signal (big hit information) is output is a period determined by switching (shifting) from the big hit gaming state to the reduced working hours state. Further, the period (fixed period) in which the external output signal (big hit information) is output at the time of transition to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is based on the number of times the periodic processing that can be periodically executed by the main control MPU 1311 is executed. It is a timed period. With this configuration, an external information signal is output for a fixed time (for example, a pulse signal of 128 ms) when shifting to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, and when the special lottery is won, the big hit game state is set. Since the external information signal is output only for the continuous period, by monitoring each output time (ON time), it is possible to manage the game hall by hall control etc. whether it is a big hit game state or a special condition time reduction has occurred. The person can be identified.

The fixed time is measured by periodically processing a value (timer value) set in a specific area predetermined in the main control RAM 1312. For example, a fixed time is set in a specific area, the value set in the specific area is periodically and repeatedly subtracted a predetermined number of times, and the measurement is terminated when the value reaches “0”. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a fixed time (128 ms) is set in a specific area at the time of transition to a time saving state due to a special condition time reduction, and while a predetermined value is set in the specific area, a signal during the special gaming state (external). Output signal (big hit information)).

On the other hand, in the special gaming state signal (external output signal (big hit information)) output in the big hit gaming state, a specific value (“0”) is set in the specific area, and the value in the specific area can be referred to. The output of the special gaming state signal (external output signal (big hit information)) is continued by the process (process called from the timer interrupt process and the timer interrupt process) that is executed periodically without any reason. That is, the time (variable time) at which the special gaming state signal (external output signal (big hit information)) is output is a period specified by the process executed periodically.

Therefore, while the fixed time is set in a specific area and the output time is measured by the external output timer at the time of transition to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, in the big hit game state, the value is not set in the specific area (“0” is set). Information that can be determined to be in the jackpot game state in the process that is executed periodically (port output process in the timer interrupt process) without using the external output timer (big hit such as job counter, jackpot number, etc.) A special gaming state signal (external output signal (big hit information)) is output based on the information in which the value is set only in the gaming state). That is, the condition for outputting (setting to ON) the signal during the special game state (external output signal (big hit information)) is information indicating the big hit game state when a predetermined value is set in the external output timer. This is the case when any of the requirements (job counter, jackpot number, etc.) is satisfied. Note that the output signal is not determined individually, but a data table that includes the reference destination address of the specific area corresponding to the external output signal and the set value is defined in advance, and the records set in the data table are defined. It is configured to make a repeat judgment (set a value to the reference address of a specific area). At this time, by standardizing the process of referencing the data table, it is possible to control the output of the external output signal by changing the data table without modifying the program. The set value set in the data table is bit information corresponding to the external output port that outputs the external output signal.

In addition, since the number of ports that output external output signals is limited, multiple external output signals output from one port can be used to output jackpot information for both jackpot information and special condition time reduction. By making it possible to notify the type of information, it becomes possible to notify more information to the outside.

Further, by making it possible to notify a plurality of types of information by an external output signal output from one port, it is possible to notify the game status in detail. For example, in a gaming machine having a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to measure the execution status of a special effect. To explain a specific example, in a gaming machine that always shifts to the special effect mode when the special lottery is not won a predetermined number of times, a special effect different from the special effect mode is obtained when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the special effect mode. Move to mode. The predetermined conditions include a special effect mode transition lottery, a combination of symbols in the special lottery, and the time when the game time determined by a random lottery has elapsed. At this time, after outputting the external output signal for a predetermined time when shifting to the special effect mode, the output is stopped, and the external output signal is output again when shifting to the special effect mode. Further, by making the output time different according to the established predetermined condition or by outputting the output even at the end of the special effect mode, it is possible to grasp a more detailed game situation. By collecting information on the game situation in this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by specifying the execution timing of a more effective effect.

In addition to the time saving state (normal time saving) after the end of the big hit game state due to the winning of the special lottery and the time saving state (special condition time saving) that shifts when the special lottery is won continuously for a predetermined number of times, there are special symbols. There is a gaming machine that can shift to a time-saving state by making a definite stop in a predetermined combination (specific symbol time-saving). At the time of transition to the time reduction state due to the specific symbol time reduction, the external output signal (big hit information) is output for a predetermined time (128ms), and the external output signal (during the time reduction) is continuously output until the end of the time reduction state. That is, the external output signal is output in the same manner as the special condition time reduction. Therefore, it is not necessary to output signals in different modes depending on the type of time saving state, and it is not necessary to increase the number of signal lines related to external output. If the number of signal lines that output external output signals increases, the management cost on the hall side will increase. Furthermore, since the board for outputting the external output signal is generally provided in the frame, it is not easy to increase or decrease the external output signal according to the specifications of the game, so the signal line. There is also an advantage that it is not necessary to deal with the addition of.

As described above, by notifying multiple types of information using the same signal line and outputting signals in the same manner for different types of time saving states, external equipment can be used without modification. It is possible to accurately notify the game status including the game status.

From the above description, each configuration can be specified as follows.
(3) The variable period is a period determined by switching the gaming state, and the fixed period is a period measured based on the number of times that periodic processing that can be periodically executed by the game control means is executed. Therefore, in the configuration shown in (3), an external information signal is output for a fixed time (for example, a pulse signal of 128 ms) when shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, and when the special lottery is won, the big hit game state. Since the external information signal is output only for the period (variable period) in which the game continues, by monitoring each output time (ON time), it is possible to determine whether the game is in a big hit game state or whether a special condition time reduction has occurred. As a result, the manager can be identified and the management of the amusement park can be facilitated.

(4) The fixed time is the above (in periodic processing) when a predetermined value is stored in a value (timer value) set in a predetermined specific area in the main control RAM 1312 (storage means). The period during which the signal during the special gaming state is output, and the variable period is the period (in the periodic processing) when a specific value different from the predetermined value is stored in the specific area of the storage means. This is the period during which the signal is output during the special gaming state. That is, in the configuration shown in (4), the fixed time measurement is performed by setting a fixed time in a specific area and the external output timer is used, while the variable time measurement is performed periodically without using the external output timer. Measurement is performed by processing (timer interrupt processing, etc.) executed in. By controlling the output time of the external output signal by properly using the fixed time and the variable time in this way, it is possible to more accurately notify the progress of the game to the outside of the gaming machine.

<< External output when the game is stopped >>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the gaming is stopped, all signals other than the security signal are set to OFF, and the output is stopped. Therefore, when a RAM abnormality occurs in the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction, the external output signal (during the reduction of working hours) is set to OFF, and then the game state is returned to the initial state by the setting change operation. At this time, since the external output signal (during the time reduction) is still set to OFF, it is assumed that the time reduction state did not occur due to the special condition time reduction when the game was restarted. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time saving transition count is initialized by the setting change operation, and the gaming is restarted from the initial state.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (setting value abnormality / work abnormality other than the set value) when the power is turned on, or if it is determined that the RAM is abnormal (setting value abnormality) in the normal gaming state, the process is executed in the same flow. When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal in the timer interrupt processing, the processing related to the game (input processing, timer update processing, special figure-related processing, normal figure-related processing, etc.) is skipped.

Furthermore, when the game is stopped due to fraud detection, unlike the case of RAM error, various timers (including timers for external output) are not updated, so the external output signal is in the output state. Will be maintained. The output signal that controls the drive body such as a solenoid is forcibly set to OFF in order to prevent failure. Further, the release of the game stop state is, for example, re-turning on the power, and may be subject to a setting change operation or a RAM clear operation. Further, even in the normal power-on or setting confirmation operation, the game stop state may be canceled when the power is turned on while performing a special operation (for example, opening the door).

Therefore, if it is determined that the game is stopped due to the detection of fraud during the output of the external output signal (big hit information) that is output for 128 milliseconds when the time is changed due to the special condition time reduction, the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal By stopping the update, the timer value can be maintained in the state before the game is stopped, and the output of the external output signal can be maintained in the ON state. This eliminates the need to determine whether or not the external output signal was in the output state when it was determined that the game was stopped, so an external process is used regardless of whether it is exception handling (game stop) or normal processing. It is possible to control the output of the output signal.

As described above, the game stop due to RAM abnormality needs to be accompanied by a setting change operation for recovery, and as a result, the game state is also initialized, so the external output is also turned off at the timing when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Set. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to fraud detection, etc., it is possible to recover by turning the power on again or detecting the cancellation of the abnormality, so it is necessary to recover from the state before the game stopped, and it is turned off when the external output is judged to be the game stop. If it is set to, there is a risk that the hall controller will erroneously detect that the signal has been output twice because it will be turned on again after returning, so the external output is maintained when the game is stopped.

Since it is determined by the abnormality determination process in the timer interrupt process whether or not to shift to the game stop state, the next timer interrupt process that is determined to be the game stop (detected to be in the game stop state) in the abnormality determination process. Will skip the processing related to the game. That is, the process related to the actual game stop is executed in the next timer interrupt process that detects the transition to the game stop state. Therefore, since the timer is updated at the timing when it is determined that the game is stopped, the timing when it is determined that the game is stopped and the timing when the external output timer is updated to 0 are at the same time (within the same timer interrupt processing). In this case, since the timer of the external output changes from 1 to 0, the external output is turned off before actually shifting to the game stop state.

A security signal is output for both the game stop due to a RAM abnormality and the game stop due to fraudulent activity, but it is not possible to determine which factor caused the game to stop based on the security signal alone. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming stopped state is shifted to the game stopped state by illegal detection such as a magnetic error, and the control is different from the case where the game is stopped due to the RAM abnormality. As a result, it is possible to control whether the game is stopped due to fraudulent activity or the game is stopped due to an unexpected abnormality such as noise or failure, depending on whether the game is stopped due to fraud detection or RAM abnormality. Can be judged. Further, it is possible to grasp from the outside the timing when the gaming machine does not operate normally due to fraudulent activity, and for example, a surveillance camera installed in the hall can be used to identify the fraudulent person. The factors that shift to the game stop state are not limited to magnetic abnormalities, but when vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor, the radio wave detection sensor may detect radio waves. When the object sensor detects the winning (predetermined number) while the accessory is not operating, the case where the winning by the specific winning opening (V attacker or the like) does not match the matching with the discharging port is included.

From the above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first gaming stop condition (RAM abnormality (set value abnormality)) and the second game stop condition (illegal notification such as magnetic abnormality) for stopping the execution of a specific process related to the game. have. When the progress of the game is stopped based on the first game stop condition, it is fixed whether the special game state signal (external output signal (big hit information)) is output in a variable period immediately before the progress of the game is stopped. Stops the output of the external output signal regardless of whether it is output during the period.

On the other hand, under the second game stop condition, the progress of the game is stopped as in the first game stop condition, but the signal during the special game state (external output signal (big hit information)) is variable immediately before the progress of the game is stopped. The external output signal can be continuously output regardless of whether it is output in a period or a fixed period. For example, if it is determined that the game is stopped due to the detection of fraud during the output of the external output signal (big hit information) that is output for a fixed time (128 milliseconds) when the time is changed due to the special condition time reduction (second game stop condition), By stopping the update of the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal, it is possible to maintain the timer value in the state before the game is stopped, and the output of the external output signal can be maintained in the ON state. This eliminates the need to determine whether or not the external output signal was in the output state when it was determined that the game was stopped, so an external process is used regardless of whether it is exception handling (game stop) or normal processing. It is possible to control the output of the output signal.

Game stop due to the first game stop condition (RAM abnormality (setting value abnormality)) requires a setting change operation to return, and as a result, the game state is also initialized, so the external output is also RAM abnormality. It is set to OFF at the timing when it is determined. On the other hand, in the second game stop condition (illegal notification of magnetic abnormality, etc.), it is possible to recover by turning on the power again or detecting the cancellation of the abnormality, so it is necessary to recover from the state before the game stop, and external output. If is set to OFF when it is determined that the game is stopped, it will be turned ON again after returning, and there is a risk of erroneous detection that the signal has been output twice on the Hallcon side. I try to maintain the output.

A security signal is output for both the game stop due to a RAM abnormality and the game stop due to fraudulent activity, but it is not possible to determine which factor caused the game to stop based on the security signal alone. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the gaming stopped state is shifted to the game stopped state by illegal detection such as a magnetic error, and the control is different from the case where the game is stopped due to the RAM abnormality. As a result, in the case where the game is stopped due to fraud detection (second game stop condition) and the game is stopped due to RAM abnormality (first game stop condition), the game is stopped due to fraudulent activity, noise, failure, etc. Which control can determine whether the game has been stopped due to an unexpected abnormality. Further, it is possible to grasp from the outside the timing when the gaming machine does not operate normally due to fraudulent activity, and for example, a surveillance camera installed in the hall can be used to identify the fraudulent person.

From the above description, each configuration can be specified as follows.

(5) The main control MPU 1311 (game control means) has a first game stop condition and a second game stop condition for stopping the execution of a specific process related to the game, and the progress of the game is based on the first game stop condition. When stopping, regardless of whether the special gaming state signal is output in a variable period or a fixed period (immediately before the progress of the game is stopped), the output of the special gaming state signal is output. Is stopped, and under the second game stop condition, the progress of the game is stopped as in the first game control means, but the signal during the special game state (immediately before the progress of the game is stopped) is sent (in a variable period). Regardless of whether it is output or output (for a fixed period), the signal during the special game state can be continuously output.

In the configuration shown in (5), the game stop due to the first game stop condition needs to be accompanied by a setting change operation in order to return to the game, and as a result, the game state is also initialized, so that the external output is also RAM. Set to OFF at the timing when it is determined to be abnormal. In addition, since the game stop due to the second game stop condition can be restored by turning on the power again or detecting the cancellation of the abnormality, the output is turned on by stopping the update of the timer that measures the output time of the external output signal. By maintaining the state, it is not necessary to judge whether or not the external output signal was in the output state when it is determined that the game is stopped, and by re-outputting the external output signal after returning, the hall controller side twice. Since it is possible to prevent false detection that the signal is output, it is possible to control the output of the external output signal by using common processing regardless of whether it is exception processing (game stop) or normal processing.

<< Stop updating the time saving transition counter >>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by repeating the fluctuations that do not win the special lottery a predetermined number of times, the machine shifts to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving. Therefore, by erroneously detecting the winning of the starting winning opening by radio waves or magnetism, there is a possibility that the number of lottery of the special lottery will be illegally increased and the fraudulent act of shifting to the shortened working hours state due to the special condition shortening will be performed in a short time. .. In order to suppress such fraudulent activity, the gaming machine of the present embodiment stops updating the time saving transition counter for a predetermined suppression period when it detects radio waves or magnetism. This suppression period continues until the suppression period is canceled even after the radio waves and magnetism are no longer detected and the fraud is resolved. The release of the restraint period is, for example, a release operation by a hall employee, a power cycle, a door opening, and the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the time saving state due to the special condition time saving from being illegally generated due to the fraudulent act by radio waves, magnetism, or the like.

"others"
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of production modes are executed according to the result of the special lottery. The plurality of production modes have different production modes according to the interests of the player, such as the game value and the expectation of a big hit. In the special production mode (the production mode in which the player's profit is the highest) among the plurality of production modes, the update of the time saving transition count is suppressed. During this suppression period, an external output signal indicating the suppression period is output so that the hall controller can recognize that the suppression period is in effect. The external output signal may be used for both jackpot information and time saving, or may be a dedicated external output signal. On the Hallcon side, it is possible to recognize that the update of the time saving transition counter is suppressed based on the external information signal output during the suppression period.

The special effect mode may be an effect mode that is executed when a specific condition is satisfied in the look-ahead effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the reserved memory, or a specific big hit. By stopping the symbol, it may be an effect mode indicating that it is a specific big hit (for example, a big hit with the most prize balls). Further, it may be an effect mode corresponding to a gaming state such as a high-probability gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.

In addition, as described above, the hall controller is notified of the initialization of the time saving transition count by outputting an external output signal (big hit information) at the time of shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, but other external output signals The output may notify the initialization of the time saving transition count. For example, when a special lottery is won, a signal for initializing a value such as the number of fluctuations that has been counted is transmitted from the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine, and when this signal is received on the hall controller side, a time saving transition count is performed. The value corresponding to may be initialized. If the types of signals to be output cannot be increased, or if the management cost increases due to the increase in the types of signals, other signals may be used in combination. For example, it may be an external output signal (big hit information), a symbol determination signal, or a combination of a plurality of specific signals (for example, both a time saving medium and a big hit information signal). good.

The external output signal (big hit information) and the external output signal (during the time reduction) may be output at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, but in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the predetermined symbol confirmation period elapses from the symbol stop. It is outputting. When shifting to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving, the fluctuation of the special symbol whose time saving transition count reaches 0 stops, the output of the external output signal is started by the timer interrupt after the lapse of the predetermined fixed period, and the next timer interrupt. (If the hold is not 0), the special symbol change starts. Therefore, each external output signal indicating the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is output from the timing (before that) even if the hold is 0. As a result, it is possible to specify that the reduced working hours due to the special conditions reduced working hours have started even if there is no hold, and it is possible to grasp the accurate gaming situation.

The timing at which the output of the external output signal is started may be the symbol variation following the variation of the special symbol whose time reduction transition count reaches 0. Further, the output of the external output signal may be started after the stop symbol is determined in the first symbol variation after the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction is started. Special conditions The difference between the signal output timing and the start timing of the time reduction state is minimized by outputting the signal after the condition for starting the time reduction state due to the time reduction is satisfied and then the fluctuation of the special symbol actually starts. It becomes possible to collect accurate information. In this case, by setting not to start the next fluctuation when the time reduction transition count is 0, the player will immediately activate the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction from the first fluctuation, so that the hall side It will be possible to use it as a service (morning) of. For example, the data lamp is changed from the end of business on the previous day to the start of business on the next day until the time reduction transition count becomes 0, and then the number of fluctuations of the data lamp is reset (returned to 0). As a result, after the start of business the next day, the first player can activate the reduced working hours state due to the special condition reduced working hours at the same time as the start of the change of the first symbol. By changing the design after the business is closed, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the shift from the result of the previous day to the reduced working hours state.

[26-3. Output of individual external output signals according to the game state]
The output mode of the external output signal is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 425, and other modes can be considered. FIG. 426 is a modification of the time chart showing the output timing of the external output signal related to the time saving state due to the special condition time saving in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 426, individual external output signals (special condition time reduction, during probability fluctuation) according to individual gaming states (for example, time reduction state (special condition time reduction, normal time reduction), jackpot gaming state, probability variation state, etc.) By outputting, it is possible to manage the exit of the ball according to the game state.

Further, in the time chart shown in FIG. 425, an external output signal corresponding to the jackpot information (“special prize in progress” in FIG. 426) was output for 128 ms at the time of transition to the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction or the specific symbol time reduction. In the modification shown in (1), the external output signal (big hit information, during special prize) is not output. In the type 1 and type 2 mixer, if the signal indicating the start of the special condition time reduction and the signal indicating the special prize (big hit information) are used in combination, the time reduction medium signal is used when only the actual big hit round without the small hit is used as the big hit. May rise before the signal during the special prize, and it may be mistakenly recognized as the start of the time saving state due to the specific symbol time saving. Therefore, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 426, the above-mentioned problem is solved by individually outputting the signal indicating the start of the special condition time reduction and the signal indicating the special prize in progress (big hit information) as external information. Can be done.

Further, in the gaming machine of this modification, the same signal (time reduction medium signal) is output in both the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction and the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction. If it is necessary to separate the data from the time reduction state due to the special condition time reduction and the time reduction state due to the normal time reduction, a dedicated external information signal that is output only when the special condition time reduction is satisfied is output. The same applies to the specific symbol time reduction, and if you want to manage the ball launch (base) in each of the normal time reduction, special condition time reduction, and specific symbol time reduction, it is dedicated to each of the special condition time reduction and the specific symbol time reduction. Signal is output (time t201 to t202, time t208 to t209).

Finally, in the gaming machines of the present embodiment and the present modification, a dedicated signal is output when the winning probability of the special lottery is high. This makes it possible to grasp the timing of starting the update of the time saving transition count in the ST machine and the fall lottery machine. Since the update of the time saving transition count is invalid during the high probability (valid only at the low probability), it is possible to manage the time saving transition count from the end of the high probability state. Since the time-saving medium signal is output in both the high-probability medium and the low-probability time-saving medium, it is necessary to determine whether or not the time-saving transition count is in high probability after the end of the big hit game state and update the time-saving transition count. Further, when a fall lottery in which the winning probability of the special lottery changes from a high probability to a low probability by the lottery is executed, the time saving transition count is started to be updated at the timing of shifting to the low probability. Therefore, in the case of a gaming machine that executes a fall lottery, it is necessary to initialize the time saving transition count at the timing when the fall lottery is won.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one mainly applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the pachislot machine, a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. In this case, the same action and effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 931 Power supply board 932 Power switch (setting change mode confirmation means, setting change mode start means)
951 Payout control board (ball information control means)
954 RAM clear switch (setting change mode confirmation means, setting change mode start means)
971 Setting key (setting change mode confirmation means, setting change mode start means)
974 Setting display 1310 Main control board (game control means)
1311 Main control MPU (CPU, arithmetic unit, arithmetic unit, control means, master)
1312 Main control RAM (set value information storage means)
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Accessory ratio indicator (base indicator, performance display monitor)
1400 Function display unit 1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 1st start port 2004 2nd start port 2007 Counting ball port unit 2007b Counting ball port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol fluctuation display device 4301 Reel 4600 Main board (game control device, game control means)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I / O area 4940 Parameter information setting area 6100 1st area 6101 Non-mounting area 6102 Part mounting area 6200 2nd area 6300 Inspection part mounting area 1341 Parallel / serial conversion circuit (slave) )
1342, 1343, 1345, 1346 Serial-parallel conversion circuit (slave)

Claims (1)

It is possible to execute a lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to give a special benefit to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a special gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means. In a gaming machine provided with a gaming control means capable of outputting gaming state information including execution of a special gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine.
The game control means includes a signal output means capable of outputting a signal to the outside of the game machine.
The signal output means is
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special gaming state can be executed, the output is output when the execution of the special gaming state starts, and the output is stopped when the execution of the special gaming state ends. It is possible to output a signal during a special game state during a variable period,
When the lottery result of the lottery means is determined that the special gaming state cannot be executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied, the signal during the special gaming state can be output for the predetermined first output period. ,
The first output period is a period shorter than the variable period in which the signal during the special gaming state is output when the result of the lottery by the lottery means determines that the special gaming state can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by a fixed period set in advance.

Images